The Risāla Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Ptolemaeus Arabus et Latinus
Texts
Volume 3

General Editors
Dag Nikolaus Hasse (University of Würzburg)
David Juste (Bavarian Academy of Sciences and Humanities)
Benno van Dalen (Bavarian Academy of Sciences and Humanities)

Associate Editors
Charles Burnett (The Warburg Institute, University of London)
Jan P. Hogendijk (Utrecht University)

Ptolemaeus Arabus et Latinus (PAL) is a project of the Bavarian Academy

of Sciences and Humanities and the University of Würzburg. As part of the
Academies’ Programme, PAL is jointly funded by the Federal Republic
of Germany and the Free State of Bavaria.

PAL is sponsored by the Union Académique Internationale (UAI).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
The Risāla Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy
A Treatise on the Celestial Globe with Stand

Flora Vafea

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
Cover design by Hilde Verhelst, T’Hi, Lier, Belgium.

Cover illustrations:
Woodcut (detail) from La geografia di Ptolemeo Alessandrino, Venice, 1548. Copy from Munich,
Bayerische Staatsbibliothek. Taurus (detail) from al-Ṣūfī’s Book of Constellations (Arabic), MS Paris,
Bibliothèque nationale de France, arabe 5036, fol. 118v.

This is an open access title distributed under a CC BY-NC 4.0 International License:
https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/4.0/

© 2024, Brepols Publishers n.v./s.a., Turnhout, Belgium.

Some rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, for commercial purposes, without the prior permission of
the publisher, or as expressly permitted by law, by license or under terms agreed with the appropriate
reprographics rights organization.

D/2024/0095/290
ISBN 978-2-503-60222-6

Printed on acid-free paper.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Ptolemy’s authentic works and pseudepigrapha: Research on source
  materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
I. Greek sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
II. Arabic sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 The treatise Dhāt al-kursī . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3 The instrument dhāt al-kursī . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.4 Presentation of the manuscripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.5 Who was Akhawayn? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2. The Arabic text and translation of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed
to Ptolemy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3. Commentary on the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy
  (treatise P) and comparison with the treatise on the celestial globe
  by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā (treatise Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
P Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Chapter P1: To know how to position the globe . . . . . . . 101
Chapter P2: To know the equality of night and day on the (terrestrial)
  equator line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter P3: To know the longest and shortest daytime at the oblique
  horizons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Chapter P4: To know the difference between the (lengths of ) daylight
  of two days in one city . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Chapter P5: To know the daytime arc of the Sun and of the rest of
  the stars, and its division into seasonal and equal hours . . . 106
Chapter P6: To know the difference between the daytime lengths of the
  same day in two cities with different latitudes . . . . . . . 107
Chapter P7: To know the time that has elapsed since sunrise in equal
  and unequal hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Chapter P8: To know the ascendant, if the elapsed time since sunrise
  in equal or unequal hours is known . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter P9: On the method of obtaining the altitude of the Sun on
  the globe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
VI CONTENTS

Chapter P10: To know the four centres . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Chapter P11: To know the rest of the houses . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter P12: To find the degree of any of the stars that are on the
  globe, to know its ‘latitude’, its declination from the equator, its
  deviation from the zenith and its maximum altitude; to know the
  declination of a degree of the zodiac from the equator . . . . 113
Chapter P13: To know the ortive amplitude of every star among
  the drawn stars, or a degree among the degrees of the zodiac; to
  know the distance between the risings of two stars and to know
  the distance between these two stars . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Chapter P14: To know the stars that rise simultaneously, culminate
  simultaneously and set simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Chapter P15: To know the degree of rising of any star, among the
  stars drawn on the globe, the degree of its meridian transit and the
  degree of its setting at the various latitudes . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter P16: To know the ascensions (rising times) of the zodiacal
  signs and the ascension of a degree in the right and oblique spheres
  (right and oblique ascension) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter P17: To know the stars of perpetual apparition, perpetual
  occultation, and those that rise and set, among the stars drawn on
  the globe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter P18: To know the stars that set after the Sun and rise
  before it in one night, and to know the stars that are above the
  horizon during the whole night . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Chapter P19: To know at what time the stars drawn on the globe rise
  and set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Chapter P20: To know the time of rising of the Moon and the
  planets and the time of their setting . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Chapter P21: To know the midday altitude of the Sun on every
  day and the maximum altitude of any of the stars drawn on
  the globe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Chapter P22: To know the difference between the greatest altitude
  of the Sun on the same day in two cities with different latitudes . 131
Chapter P23: To know the place in which the year is one day
  and where no star rises from the horizon and no star ever sets
  with the motion of the celestial sphere . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter P24: To know the place where the daylight is 24 equal
  hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Chapter P25: To know the place where some of the zodiacal signs
  rise in the inverted order and set regularly and some of them the
  other way around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter P26: To know the cities where the Sun reaches the zenith
  once or twice a year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 CONTENTS VII

Chapter P27: To know the cities where the shadows are in one
  direction and those where they are in both directions . . . . 141
Chapter P28: Determination of the meridian line and the qibla . 143
Chapter P29: To know the ‘longitude’ of the Moon and of any
  planet or fixed star you want, at its greatest altitude . . . . . 145
Chapter P30: To know the ‘latitude’ of the Moon, of a planet
  and of a fixed star among those not drawn on the globe,
  in a night during which it is possible to measure its maximum
  altitude, and to know also its declination from the equator and
  its zenithal distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter P31: To know if the lunar eclipse and the solar eclipse
  occur in the current month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Chapter P32: To know the difference of daylight length on the
  same day in two different latitudes, while the Sun is on the
  same degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Chapter P33: To know the latitude of the city from the highest
  altitude of a star, among the stars of the globe, and from its
  longest daytime (‫ )نهار‬. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4. Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.1 Comparison between the treatises P and Q . . . . . . . . 157
4.2 Possible sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.3 Possible date and place of compilation . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.4 The attribution of the treatise to Akhawayn . . . . . . . 164
4.5 Possible relation to Ptolemy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Appendix 1. Treatise on the Use of the Celestial Globe with Stand

by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā: Table of contents in English translation . . . 169
Appendix 2. Correspondence between the chapters of the Arabic
manuscripts of treatise Q, its Latin translation and treatise P . . . 173
Appendix 3. Treatise on the Use of the Celestial Globe with Stand by
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā: Arabic text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Manuscripts studied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Geographical names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Modern persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Historical persons and their works . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Works of historical persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Manuscripts mentioned but not studied . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 List of Figures
Figure 1: The title of the treatise in MS U. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 2: Celestial globe. © History of Science Museum, University of
Oxford, inv.40716. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 3: The elements of a celestial globe indicated on the globe dated
764 H / AD 1362–3. © History of Science Museum, University of
Oxford, inv.44790. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 4: Celestial globe dated 718 H / AD 1318–9. The 17th–22nd lunar
mansions: Iklīl, Qalb al-‘Aqrab, Shaula al-‘Aqrab, al-Na‘āim, al-Balda
and al-Sa‘ d al-Dhābiḥ can be seen on the globe. © History of Science
Museum, University of Oxford, inv.54471. . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 5: The horizon ring of the celestial globe. . . . . . . . . . 100
Figures 6–8: The diurnal motion at various latitudes. Figure 6: φ=0°;
Figure 7: φ=90°; Figure 8: 0°<φ<90°. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 9: A Quadrant Scale, c. AD 1700. © History of Science Museum,
University of Oxford, inv.85161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 10: Measuring the altitude of the Sun with the celestial globe. . 109
Figures 11–12: Domification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figures 13–14: Domification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 15: At the terrestrial equator, stars A and B rise simultaneously
at points EA and EB, culminate simultaneously at points CA and CB,
and set simultaneously at points WA and W B, respectively. . . . . 118
Figure 16: At any latitude φ≠0°, the stars A and B rise at points EA and
EB, culminate at points CA and CB, and set at points WA and W B,
respectively. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 17: Rising and setting of the stars according to P17. . . . . . 122
Figure 18: The method of Q34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 19: The method of Q35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figures 20–21: Blue circle SWNE: horizon, green circle: equator, yellow
circle S1S2: the diurnal circle of the star, red circle DeDw: the diurnal
circle of the degree of the Sun, PP′: the celestial axis. . . . . . . 124
Figure 22: The star A culminates to the south of the zenith Z and the
star B culminates to the north of the zenith. . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 23: For latitude φ=69;30 N, the arc of the ecliptic between the
light grey arrows does not set, that between the black arrows does not
rise, and the two arcs between the dark grey arrows rise and set. . 136

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 LIST OF FIGURES IX

Figure 24: The degrees having ecliptic longitude λ such that 90°<λ<270°
rise in the regular order, while those for which 270°<λ<360° or
0°<λ<90°set in the regular order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 25: The degrees having ecliptic longitude λ such that 90°<λ<270°
set in the inverted order of the signs, while those for which
270°<λ<360° or 0°≤λ<90° rise in the inverted order. (Figures 23–25
have been created using the software Voyager 4.5.) . . . . . . . 137
Figure 26: Rising and setting of the signs in the inverted order. . . . 138
Figure 27: Rising and setting of the signs in the regular order. . . . 138
Figure 28: Determination of the azimuth of the qibla. The background
is an extract from the Risāla dar samt-i qibla (anonymous and
undated), MS Paris, BnF, pers. 169,6, f. 42r. . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 29: Determination of the qibla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 30: Determining the degree of the ecliptic Md that culminates
simultaneously with the Moon or a planet. . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 31: Determining the difference of declination between the Moon
or a planet and the degree of the ecliptic Md that culminates simulta-
neously with it. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figures 32–33: Determination of the latitude of the city from the high-
est altitude of a star, when the star culminates to the south of the
zenith (Figure 32) or to the north of the zenith (Figure 33). . . . 151
Figures 34–35: Determination of the latitude of the city from its longest
daylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figures 36–37: Determination of the latitude of the city from its short-
est daylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 List of Tables
Table 1: Ptolemy’s works as mentioned by al-Masʿūdī. . . . . . 7
Table 2: Ptolemy’s works as mentioned in the Fihrist. . . . . . 8
Table 3: Ptolemy’s works as mentioned by Ḥājjī Khalīfa. . . . . 9–10
Table 4: Consolidated table of works attributed to Ptolemy, as
mentioned in various Greek and Arabic sources. . . . . . . 10–12
Table 5: List of manuscripts of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed
to Ptolemy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33–35
Table 6: List of the works attributed to Akhawayn. . . . . . . 39–40
Table 7: Comparison between the terminology in P18 and the
corresponding Chapters Q36-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Table 8: Perpetual apparition and occultation of the zodiacal signs
depending on the latitude of the locality. . . . . . . . . . 135
Table 9. Possible sources of the treatises P and Q. . . . . . . 162

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Preface
The subject of this book is a 33-chapter Arabic treatise on the description and
use of the celestial globe dhāt al-kursī. The treatise is preserved in at least twen-
ty-three manuscripts, three of which clearly attribute the treatise to Ptolemy in
their titles. In three other manuscripts, the treatise is attributed to Akhawayn
in their title or colophon. The celestial globe dhāt al-kursī is similar to that de-
scribed in the work Introduction to the Phenomena of Geminus (1st c. bc). The
Arabic term dhāt al-kursī – meaning ‘the 〈instrument〉 with stand’ – corre-
sponds to the Greek term καταστηριζομένη (σφαίρα), while the term al-kursī,
meaning chair or stand, corresponds to the Greek term σφαιροθήκη.
In the introduction of the work, there is a reference to the treatise of Qusṭ
or Qusṭā; this is the 65-chapter treatise on the celestial globe by Qusṭā ibn
Lūqā (9th–10th c. ad). There is a close relationship between the two treatises;
the treatise Dhāt al-kursī is based on the treatise of Qusṭā. Its author mentions
that he has omitted the superfluities of Qusṭā’s treatise and added some new
uses. After a description of the instrument, an explanation of how to position
the globe is provided, and then various astronomical problems are discussed. In
some problems the globe is used as a model for clarifying certain phenomena,
and in other problems measurements and calculations are conducted making
use of the globe.
Although the celestial globe and its use were known in Ptolemy’s time, this
treatise also includes non-Ptolemaic elements such as: the determination of the
qibla, the domification (determination of the 12 astrological houses), the divi-
sion of the horizon into 360° that corresponds to the notion of the azimuth,
and the use of the coordinates ʽmediationʼ and ʽdifference of declinationʼ for
the stars. The treatise should be considered as a pseudepigraphon and not as a
genuine work of Ptolemy.
The treatise must have been compiled between the eleventh and the first
half of the sixteenth century ad, and the author remains unknown, since there
is not enough evidence to establish Akhawayn as the author of this treatise,
although his name is mentioned in three manuscripts.
This study was conducted within the project Ptolemaeus Arabus et Latinus
at the Bavarian Academy of Science and Humanities, in the context of deter-
mining whether some of the Arabic treatises attributed to Ptolemy, among
them the treatise Dhāt al-kursī, are genuine Ptolemaic works or pseudepigra-
pha, and providing critical editions of those treatises. Throughout my research
in libraries, the study of the manuscripts and the compilation of the book,
I had the support of the director and the research leaders of the project, who

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
XII PREFACE

advised me and facilitated the acquisition of the necessary manuscript scans.

I would like to express my gratitude to Benno van Dalen, Dag Nikolaus Hasse,
Jan Hogendijk and Alexander Jones, who read multiple versions of my work,
in whole or in part, and made suggestions that improved the final outcome; in
particular, my deepest gratitude to Benno van Dalen, for his decisive contribu-
tion to the typesetting of the Arabic texts. I wish to thank my colleagues José
Bellver, María José Parra Pérez and Dirk Grupe who helped me in discovering
and locating manuscripts, or by discussing subjects related to my research. I ex-
press my thanks to Benjamin Hallum, Johannes Thomann, Ahmed Chaouqui
Binebine, Víctor de Castro León, Ali Fikri Yavuz and Leonard Chiarelli who
helped me to reach some manuscripts important for my study. I am indebted
to Saeed al-Wakeel for helping me in some points of the Arabic text of Dhāt
al-kursī and for correcting the final versions of both Arabic texts in the book,
and to Anna Stevens for the proof reading of the English text. I owe special
thanks to the staff of the library Dār al-kutub in Cairo, who are always very
helpful. Last but not least, I would like to express my gratitude to the late Paul
Kunitzsch for his advice, and a package of his publications corrected by his
hand at some points, in our last meeting.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1. Introduction
Over the centuries that have elapsed since the pinnacle of Hellenistic science,
many of the important scientific, philosophical and literary documents of the
era have been lost entirely or reduced to fragments, whilst others have been
preserved in their original language or in translation. Sometimes, later-com-
piled works were attributed to famous authors and wise men of the past.
The works of Claudius Ptolemy could not escape this destiny. Among his
works some were lost, some were preserved both in the original Greek and in
Arabic and/or Latin translations, some survived only through translation, and
there is a significant number of treatises attributed but not related to him, the
so called pseudepigrapha.
The astronomical treatise Dhāt al-kursī, which deals with the description and
use of a celestial globe with stand, is amongst the works attributed to Claudi-
us Ptolemy. In the section ‘Ptolemaios’, in volume V of Geschichte des arabischen
Schrifttums (GAS),1 Fuat Sezgin mentions that the treatise Dhāt al-kursī is includ-
ed in the manuscript Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Ṭalʿat Mīqāt 189, adding that it is not
yet clear whether this is a translation of a genuine Ptolemaic work. Sezgin presents
the possibilities that the instrument is a version of a planispheric astrolabe or an
armillary sphere (dhāt al-ḥalaq). David King, in an essay review of Sezgin’s GAS,2
mentions that the manuscript Ṭalʿat Mīqāt 189 on the armillary sphere is lost, but
‘there are six other copies of an anonymous treatise in 33 chapters in Cairo’.
My research in the library Dār al-kutub in Cairo has shown that there are sev-
en manuscripts of a 33-chapter Arabic treatise on the description and use of the
celestial globe dhāt al-kursī, two of which clearly attribute the treatise to Ptolemy
in their title. In MS Mīqāt Ṭalʿat 189,1, the manuscript mentioned by Sezgin,
the title ‘Treatise Dhāt al-kursī by Ptolemy’ is written in the same hand as the
rest of the treatise. In MS K 3844,1, the title ‘Treatise of Qusṭ on the use of the
globe dhāt al-kursī by Ptolemy’ seems to be a later addition by another hand. In
MS Mīqāt Ṭalʿat 202,2, the reading of Ptolemy’s name in the title is ambiguous.3
During my research, several more manuscripts of this treatise have been
found in various libraries. MS Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library 1037,1, which
also contains this treatise, has the same title as the first of the above-mentioned
manuscripts. MS Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Bağdatlı Vehbi 2124,6 attributes

1
Sezgin, GAS, vol. V, p. 171.
2
King, ‘Notes on the Sources’, p. 454.
3
See the discussion in the presentation of the manuscripts below; a photograph of the title is
presented in Figure 1 on p. 23.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
2 INTRODUCTION

the treatise to Akhawayn in the title on f. 105v,4 while Ptolemy’s name is men-
tioned below its title in the table of contents (f. 1r). According to the library’s
catalogue, MS Rabat, Bibliothèque Nationale du Royaume du Maroc, D 162,4
attributes this treatise to Ptolemy in its title; however this title does not exist in
the manuscript.5 Ptolemy’s name appears in the title of manuscript Damascus,
Assad Library, 14621,8, according to the electronic catalogue of the library.6
The present study starts with a survey of references to Ptolemaic works
in Greek and Arabic sources (Section 1.1). It aims to collect the titles of the
various works attributed to Ptolemy, and classify them, taking into consider-
ation whether they are preserved in the original Greek text or a translation,
are likely to now be lost, are authentic works or pseudepigrapha, or comprise
unknown or unidentified works. A discussion of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī
(Section 1.2) and the corresponding instrument follows (Section 1.3); then
the manuscripts used for this study are presented (Section 1.4) and the in-
troduction ends with the results of a historical research on Akhawayn and
his works (Section 1.5). Then, I supply a critical edition of the treatise Dhāt
al-kursī, based on eight of the twenty-three studied manuscripts, accompa-
nied with an English translation (Chapter 2). A commentary on the intro-
duction and each chapter of the treatise follows, with a parallel comparison
to the treatise on the celestial globe by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā, which appears to
be the source treatise (Chapter 3). A final discussion is presented in Chap-
ter 4. Since Qusṭā’s treatise is widely discussed in Chapter 3, three appendi-
ces related to this treatise are included. In Appendix 1, the titles of the 65
chapters in English translation are presented. In Appendix 2, there is a corre-
spondence between the chapters of the various Arabic manuscripts of treatise
Q, the edition of its Latin translation by Lorch and Martínez Gázquez, and
treatise P. A transcription of the Arabic text of the Treatise on the Use of the
Celestial Globe with Stand by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā is presented in Appendix 3;
this text had not been previously published.

1.1 Ptolemy’s authentic works and pseudepigrapha: Research on source materials

An essential step in studying the authenticity of works attributed to Ptolemy is
the identification of pertinent references in the works of scientists, historians,
encyclopaedists and bio-bibliographers. I have conducted this research across
both Greek and Arabic source material, and this yielded the following inter-
esting results.

4
Also mentioned in King, ‘Notes on the Sources’, p. 454.
5
See Lévi-Provençal, Fihris al-makhṭūṭāt, 2nd ed., no. 449, pp. 141–44. For further discussion see
the description of the manuscript in Section 1.4 below.
6
See additional information on this manuscript below, p. 32

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.1 PTOLEMY’S AUTHENTIC WORKS AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 3

I. Greek sources7
1. Eutocius Ascalonius, 5th–6th century, in his commentary on Archimedes’
works, refers to two works by Ptolemy:
• Almagest (Μεγάλη Σύνταξις, p. 232, l. 16–17 and Μαθηματικὴ Σύν-
ταξις, p. 260, l. 2–3)8
• On Weights9 (Περὶ ῥοπῶν, p. 264, l. 7–8)10
2. Simplicius, 6th century, in his commentary on Aristotle’s De caelo,11 re-
fers to the following works by Ptolemy:
• On Weights (Περὶ ῥοπῶν, p. 710, l. 14–15)
• On the Elements (Περὶ τῶν στοιχείων, p. 20, l. 10–11)
• Optics (Ὀπτικά, p. 20, l. 11)
• On Dimension (Περὶ διαστάσεως, p. 9, l. 21–22)
• Handy Tables (Κανόνες, p. 33, l. 1)
• Planetary Hypotheses (Ὑποθέσεις, p. 456, l. 23)
• Almagest (Σύνταξις, p. 474, l. 26–27, p. 539, l. 18)
• Geography (Γεωγραφία, p. 549, l. 10)
3. There are also early commentaries on Ptolemy’s works:
• Pappus and Theon (3rd–4th century) wrote commentaries on the
Almagest.12
• Theon wrote two commentaries on the Handy Tables (Ὑπόμνημα
εἰς τοὺς προχείρους Πτολεμαίου κανόνας).13

7
A comprehensive study of Ptolemy’s works and detailed discussion of their authenticity appears
in Alexander Jones, ‘The Ancient Ptolemy’.
8
Eutocius, Commentarius in dimensionem circuli, in Heiberg and Stamatis, Archimedis opera omnia
cum commentariis Eutocii, pp. 228–60.
9
The meaning of the word ῥοπὴ can be ‘weight’, ‘downward momentum’, ‘turn of the scale’ accord-
ing to Liddell and Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon.
10
Eutocius, Commentarius in libros de planorum aequilibriis, in Heiberg and Stamatis, Archimedis
opera omnia cum commentariis Eutocii, pp. 264–318.
11
Simplicius, Simplicii in Aristotelis De caelo commentaria (ed. Heiberg).
12
Pappus, Commentaria in Ptolemaei syntaxin mathematicam v–vi, and Theon, Commentaria in
Ptolemaei syntaxin mathematicam i–iv, in Rome, Commentaires de Pappus et de Théon; see also Ti-
hon, ‘Le Livre V retrouvé’.
13
Tihon, Le Petit Commentaire, and Mogenet and Tihon, Le Grand Commentaire.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
4 INTRODUCTION

• Porphyrius (3rd century) wrote a commentary on the Harmonics

(Εἰς τὰ ἁρμονικὰ Πτολεμαίου ὑπόμνημα).14
• Paulus Alexandrinus (4th century) in Elementa Apotelesmatica15 and
Hephaestion Thebanus (5th century) in Apotelesmatica16 follow Ptole-
my’s Tetrabiblos with many references to their source.
4. According to the Suda Lexicon,17 10th century, in Greek, Claudius Ptole-
my wrote:
• Mechanics (Μηχανικά) – 3 books.
• On the Appearances and Indications of the Fixed Stars (Περὶ φάσεων
καὶ ἐπισημασιῶν ἀστέρων ἀπλανῶν) – 2 books; this corresponds
to the Phaseis.
• Unfolding the Surface of a Sphere (Ἅπλωσις ἐπιφανείας σφαίρας);
this corresponds to the Planisphaerium.
• Handy Tables (Πρόχειρος Κανών).
• The Great Astronomy or Syntaxis (Μέγας ἀστρονόμος ἤτοι Σύντα-
ξις); this corresponds to the Almagest.
• Other works.

II. Arabic sources18

1. Aḥmad ibn Isḥāq al-Yaʿqūbī (d. 897) in his book Taʾrīkh al-Yaʿqūbī19
(or Taʾrīkh ibn Wāḍiḥ) mentions the following works by Ptolemy, giv-
ing details of their structure:

14
Porphyrios, Kommentar zur Harmonielehre des Ptolemaios (ed. Düring).
15
Paulus Alexandrinus, Pauli Alexandrini Elementa apotelesmatica (ed. Boer).
16
Hephaestion Thebanus, Apotelesmatica (ed. Pingree).
17
Suda Lexicon (ed. Adler), vol. IV, p. 254 (no. 3033).
18
The current study cannot be considered a complete study of the Arabic sources, since there are
probably other unstudied or unpublished works. It is also possible that secondary references to
relevant Ptolemaic works exist in works of other medieval Arab scholars. Further research on this
subject should be conducted. I have also searched in the following sources, which, however, do not
contain separate entries for Ptolemy or Ptolemaic works, but only incidentally mention the Almagest
and Tetrabiblos in entries on other authors:
1. Ibn Khallikān (1211–1282), Ibn Khallikan’s Biographical Dictionary (ed. de Slane).
2. Al-Maqqarī (1577–1632), Analectes sur l’histoire et la littérature des Arabes d’Espagne (eds
Dozy et al.).
3. Al-Mubashshir ibn Fātik (11th c. ad), Mukhtār al-ḥikam wa maḥāsin al-kalim (ed. Badawī).
4. Abū-l-Fidāʾ (1273–1331), Abulfedae Annales (ed. Adler and Reiske).
5. Ibn Abī Uṣaybiʿa (1203–1270), ʿUyūn al-anbāʾ fī ṭabaqāt al-aṭibbāʾ (ed. Müller). It is also
available in English translation: Ibn Abī Uṣaybiʿa, History of Physicians (transl. Kopf ).
19
Al-Yaʿqūbī, Taʾrīkh, vol. I, pp. 133–43 and Klamroth, ‘Über die Auszüge’, pp. 17–27.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.1 PTOLEMY’S AUTHENTIC WORKS AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 5

• Almagest (‫)كتــاب المجســطي‬: al-Yaʿqūbī presents the titles of the chap-

ters of books I–IV, mentioning that there are nine more books.
• Book on the Instrument Having Rings (i.e. the armillary sphere)
(‫)كتــاب فــي ذات الحلــق‬: he presents a summary of the description of
this armillary sphere which contains 9 rings; then he mentions the
titles of the 39 chapters on solving various astronomical problems
using this armillary sphere.
• Book on the Instrument Having Plates, which is the Astrolabe
(‫ وهــي ال�أصطــرلاب‬،‫)كتــاب فــي ذات الصفائــح‬: he presents a summary of
the introduction, where the instrument is described, and the titles
of 20 chapters on solving various astronomical problems with the
astrolabe.
• Handy Tables (‫)كتــاب القانــون فــي علــم النجــوم وحســابها‬:20 he gives the titles
of the chapters.
Klamroth, who translated the text of al-Yaʿqūbī into German, claims
that al-Yaʿqūbī had substituted the name of Ptolemy for that of Theon.
Among Klamroth’s arguments is the fact that the same four treatises are
mentioned in the Fihrist and by Bar-Hebraeus as works by Theon and
that a treatise on the armillary sphere is completely unknown from Greek
sources.21 However, Pappus implies that Ptolemy had described the mete-
oroscopeion, that is an armillary sphere with 9 rings, in a distinct work.22
The instrument itself is mentioned as organon meteoroscopikon (ὄργανον
μετεωροσκοπικόν) or meteoroscopion (μετεωροσκόπιον) by Ptolemy in
Chapter I.3 of his Geography.23 The same instrument is mentioned also
by Theon and Pappus24 in their commentaries on Ptolemy’s Almagest.
Proclus explains that the astrolabe described in Almagest V.1 consists of
7 rings, while the meteoroscopeion (μετεωροσκοπεῖον) comprises 9 rings.25
An Arabic treatise on the armillary sphere, ascribed to Theon,
describes an armillary sphere with 9 rings and presents instructions
for solving various astronomical and geographical problems with this
instrument. My study on this treatise shows that the titles of the

20
lit. ‘Book of Tables on the Science of the Stars and Their Calculation’.
21
See Klamroth, ‘Über die Auszüge’, pp. 18–20.
22
See Jones, ‘The Ancient Ptolemy’, p. 24. Pappus’ implication appears in Rome, Commentaires de
Pappus et de Théon, vol. I, p. 4.
23
Ptolemy, Claudii Ptolemaei Geographia (ed. Müller), vol. I.1, Chapter I.3, Sections 3-4.
24
Rome, Commentaires de Pappus et de Théon; Pappus refers to the meteoroscopeion in vol. I, pp. 4,
6, 12, and Theon in vol. II, p. 419.
25
Proclus, Procli Diadochi Hypotyposis (ed. Manitius). Proclus’ commentary on the construction
and use of the astrolabe (Περὶ ἀστρολάβου κατασκευῆς καὶ χρήσεως) is in Chapter 6, pp. 198-211.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
6 INTRODUCTION

chapters are the same as those described by al-Yaʿqūbī. In particular,

two passages from chapters 25 and 26 that al-Yaʿqūbī quotes are almost
identical with the corresponding chapters of the treatise ascribed to
Theon.26
However, six palimpsest leaves from the manuscript Milan, Veneranda
Biblioteca Ambrosiana, L 99 Sup., contain a Greek text recently
identified as belonging to Ptolemy’s Treatise on the Meteoroscopion.27
The treatise is partially preserved. The description of the instrument
is similar to that in the Arabic treatise ascribed to Theon, but some
of the topics that appear in the recovered Greek text are not included
in either al-Yaʿqūbī’s list or the Arabic treatise. Thus, it seems that
indeed al-Yaʿqūbī had preserved the titles of Theon’s treatise, although
he considers them to be Ptolemy’s. The work of decipherment and
interpretation on these palimpsest leaves is ongoing, and promising to
reveal a great part of Ptolemy’s Treatise on the Meteoroscopion, which
had been considered as lost.
2. Abū al-Ḥasan ʿAlī ibn al-Ḥusayn al-Masʿūdī (born before 893, died 956
in Egypt).28 In the last years of his life, he wrote Kitāb al-Tanbīh wa-l-
ishrāf (The Book of Notification and Verification),29 which was based in
part on his earlier historical-geographical works. In this book, he men-
tions the following works by Ptolemy:

26
The treatise is preserved in two manuscripts: Istanbul, Topkapı Saray, Ahmet III 3505,6, ff.
117r–133r, and Bombay, Cama Oriental Institute, Mulla Firuz 86, ff. 58r–72r. The titles preserved
by al-Yaʿqūbī are closer to those of the latter manuscript; in some cases in the former manuscript, two
successive and related chapters are incorporated under the same title.
27
Gysembergh et al., ‘Ptolemy’s treatise on the meteoroscope recovered’. The authors provide a
preliminary discussion on the ongoing research and argue that Ptolemy is the author of the palimp-
sested text that has been recovered using multispectral imaging. The exact title of Ptolemy’s treatise is
unknown.
28
See Pellat, ‘al-Masʿūdī’.
29
Al-Masʿūdī, Kitāb al-Tanbīh wal-ishrāf (ed. de Goeje) and al-Masʿūdī, Al-Tanbīh wa al-ishrāf (ed.
al-Ṣāūī); a translation into French is presented in Maçoudi, Le livre de l’avertissement et de la revision
(transl. Carra de Vaux).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.1 PTOLEMY’S AUTHENTIC WORKS AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 7

Title Identification / Translation Pages (A) Pages (B)

‫كتاب المجسطي‬ Almagest 12 / 129 11 / 112+
‫كتاب المقالات ال�أربع‬ Tetrabiblos 17 / 129 15–16 / 112
‫جغرافيا‬ Geography 129 112
‫القانون‬ Handy Tables 129 112
‫كتاب الموسيقى‬ Book of Music 129 112
‫كتاب ال�أنواء‬ Phaseis 17 / 129 16 / 112
‫كتاب الهيئة‬ Planetary Hypotheses 30
12 11
‫كتاب في المدخل �إلى‬ Book on the introduction to the
spherical art / manufacture / 69–70 61
31
‫الصناعة الكرّيّة‬ sphaeropoiia
Table 1: Ptolemy’s works as mentioned by al-Masʿūdī. (A) refers to the edition by de
Goeje in 1893, (B) to the edition by al-Ṣāūī in 1938.

The Book on the Introduction to the Spherical Art / Manufacture by Pto-

lemy is also mentioned by al-Bīrūnī (c. 973–1048) in The Chronology
of Ancient Nations.32 The Arabic term ‫الصناعــة الكر�يـّة‬, translated above

30
The identification of the treatise ‫( كتــاب فــي الهيئــة‬Book on the Structure 〈of the Universe〉) is based
on the title ‫( كتــاب بطلميــوس فــي الهيئــة المســ ّّمى بالاقتصــاص‬Book by Ptolemy on the Structure 〈of the
Universe〉 called ‘The Exposition’), as presented in the edition of the Arabic text of the Planetary
Hypotheses in Morelon, ‘La version arabe du Livre des Hypothèses’, p. 15. The passage on Mercury
and Venus quoted by al-Masʿūdī seems to correspond to the text of the Planetary Hypotheses on
pp. 64–65 of the edition by Morelon.
31
The fragment of the Book on the Introduction to the Spherical Art given by al-Masʿūdī is as follows:
ّ ‫ـّط الاســتواء تحــت مــدار الجــدي ســودان مثــل الســودان التــي تحــت مــدار ر�أس الســرطان مــن دون خـ‬
‫ـّط‬ ّ ‫مــن وراء خـ‬
‫ و�أن بحــر �أوقيانــس ي�أتــي مــن ناحيــة المشــرق الشــتوي وهــو مطلــع الجــدي ثــم ينعطــف مــن‬،‫الاســتواء ممــا يلــي الشــمال‬
‫ وهــو مغــرب الســرطان (وذكــر �أنــه) �إنمــا‬،‫ـتوّي �إلــى ناحيــة الشــمال �إلــى �أن ينتهــي �إلــى المغــرب الصيفـ ّـّي‬
ّ ‫المشــرق الشـ‬
‫وقــف علــى هــذا مــن الكتــب التــي دونــت فيهــا �أخبــار المســاكن التــي عــن جنــوب بلاد مصــر و �إنهــم وصلـوا �إلــى ذلــك‬
.‫بعنايــة ملــوك مصــر و �إنفاذهــم ثقاتهــم �إلــى تلــك النواحــي ليعــرف مــن هنــاك مــن ال�أمــم‬
The translation into French by Carra de Vaux, in Maçoudi, Le livre de l’avertissement et de la révision,
pp. 102–03, is the following:
‘ … derrière l’Équateur, sous le cercle du Capricorne, habitent des nègres semblables à ceux que l’on
voit sous le cercle du Cancer, en deçà de l’Équateur du côté du Nord, et que la mer Océan vient du
point où le soleil se lève en hiver, c’est-à-dire où se lève le Capricorne, puis qu’elle s’infléchit vers le
Nord pour arriver ensuite au point où le soleil se couche en été, c’est-à-dire où se couche le Cancer.
(Il ajoute qu’) il a tiré ces renseignements des livres dans lesquels furent consignées les informations
sur les peuples au Sud de l’Égypte, livres composés par les soins des rois d’Égypte avec le concours des
explorateurs qu’ils envoyèrent dans ces contrées pour connaître les nations qui y habitaient’.
32
See al-Bīrūnī, The Chronology of Ancient Nations (ed. Sachau), p. 322 (Sachau translates the word
‫ صناعــة‬as ‘art’), and the Arabic text in al-Bīrūnī, Chronologie orientalischer Völker von Albêrûnî (ed.
Sachau), pp. 325–26. In this passage al-Bīrūnī writes: ‘Ptolemy says, in his Introduction to the Spher-
ical Art, that the ancient Greeks fixed their beginnings (of the seasons) on the moments when the
sun enters the equinoctial and solstitial points, whilst the Chaldeans are said to have commenced the
seasons 8 degrees after the equinoxes and solstices’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
8 INTRODUCTION

as spherical art / manufacture, could be a translation of the Greek term

σφαιροποιία. This term is used by Geminus and can indicate a branch
of applied mechanics for constructing models of the heavens, such as
celestial globes, armillary spheres and orreries, or describes the spher-
ical arrangement of the cosmos, probably including deferents and ep-
icycles.33 Proclus also uses this term to describe ‘the construction of
models representing the celestial motion, worked out also by Archime-
des’ (ἡ σφαιροποιία κατὰ μίμησιν τῶν οὐρανίων περιφορῶν, οἵαν καὶ
Ἀρχιμήδης ἐπραγματεύσατο).34 The fragment preserved by al-Bīrūnī,
although containing geographic elements, does not belong to any of
the eight books of Ptolemy’s Geography. Perhaps it is related to his lost
work on Mechanics.
3. Muḥammad bin Isḥāq al-Nadīm (10th century) wrote the Fihrist (The
Index) of the books of all kinds of Arabic literature in 377/987. In this
book, the following works are attributed to Ptolemy:35
Almagest ‫كتاب المجسطي‬
Tetrabiblos ‫كتاب ال�أربع‬
Book of the Nativities ‫كتاب المواليد‬
Book of War and Battle ‫كتاب الحرب والقتال‬
Book for Extracting the Arrows / Lots ‫كتاب استخراج السهام‬
Book of the Revolution of the World Years ‫كتاب تحويل سنى العالم‬
Book of the Revolution of the Years of Nativities ‫كتاب تحويل سنى المواليد‬
Book of Illness and Drinking Medicine ‫كتاب المرض وشرب الدواء‬
Book on the Course of the Seven ‫كتاب في سير السبعة‬
Book on the Captives and Prisoners ‫كتاب في ال�إ سراء والمحبسين‬
Book on Capturing Good Luck and its Synthesis? ‫كتــاب فــي اســر الســعود واصطناعهــا‬
Book of the Opponents, which one will succeed ‫كتاب الخصمين �أيهما يفلح‬
Book on the Comets (lit. those with Comae) ‫كتاب ذوات الذوائب‬
Book known as the ‘Seventh’ ‫كتاب يعرف بالسابع‬
Book of the Lots, tabulated ‫ مجدول‬،‫كتاب القرعة‬
Book of Planetary Hypotheses ‫كتاب اقتصاص �أحوال الكواكب‬
Centiloquium ‫كتاب الثمرة‬
Book on Geography of the Oecumene ‫كتاب جغرافيا في المعمور وصفة ال�أرض‬
and Description of the Earth
Table 2: Ptolemy’s works as mentioned in the Fihrist.

33
Evans and Berggren, Geminos’s Introduction to the Phenomena, pp. 47, 53, 198, 293.
34
Proclus, Procli Diadochi In primum Euclidis Elementorum (ed. Friedlein), p. 41.
35
Al-Nadīm, Kitāb al-Fihrist (eds Flügel et al.), vol. I, Arabic pp. 267–68. The year of the Fihrist is
given by Flügel in the preface of vol. I, p. xi.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.1 PTOLEMY’S AUTHENTIC WORKS AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 9

4. Ṣāʿid al-Andalusī (1029–1070) in his work Exposition of the Generations

of Nations (‫ )التعريــف بطبقــات ال�أمــم‬36 written in 1068 mentions the follow-
ing works by Ptolemy:
• Almagest (‫)كتاب المجسطي‬
• Geography (‫)كتاب الجغرافيا‬
• Optics (‫)كتاب المناظر‬
• Tetrabiblos (‫)كتاب المقالات ال�أربع في �أحكام النجوم‬
• Book of Music (‫)كتاب الموسيقى‬
• Phaseis (‫)كتاب ال�أنواء‬37
• Handy Tables (‫)كتاب القانون‬

5. ʿAlī ibn Yūsuf al-Qifṭī (1172–1248) in his work Taʾrīkh al-ḥukamāʾ

(The History of Learned Men),38 mentions Ptolemy and his works, but
he copies earlier authors, such as al-Nadīm, al-Masʿūdī or Ṣāʿid al-Anda-
lusī. In the list of Ptolemy’s works, he repeats the list presented in the
Fihrist, in the same order, omitting four of the works mentioned by
al-Nadīm39 and changing some words in the titles of four other works
(see Table 4 and the corresponding notes).
6. Kātip Çelebi or Ḥājjī Khalīfa (1609–1657) was an Ottoman scholar;
among his works is the bibliographic encyclopedia Kashf al-ẓunūn
ʿan asāmī al-kutub wa-al-funūn (The Removal of Doubt from the
Names of Books and the Arts), in which he lists thousands of books
arranged in alphabetical order.40 He mentions the following works
by Ptolemy:
Title Identification / Translation Vol. Page (A) Vol. Column (B)
‫كتاب تسطيح الكرة‬ Planisphaerium II.288 / V.61–62 I.403 / II.1404
‫تعبير الرؤيا‬ Interpretation of Dreams II.311 I.417
‫الثمرة في �أحكام‬
‫النجوم‬ Fructus / Centiloquium II.496 I.524
‫جغرافيا‬ Geography II.602 I.590–91
‫رسالة ذات الكرسي‬ Treatise Dhāt al-kursī III.399 I.865

36
Ṣāʿid l’Andalous, Kitāb Tabaqāt al-Umam (ed. Cheikho): the list of Ptolemy’s works is on p. 29,
while the passage on Claudius Ptolemy is on pp. 29–31. A French translation with notes is also avail-
able: Blachère, Ṣâʿid al Andalusî (the passage on Ptolemy is on pp. 72–73, while Ptolemy’s works are
listed on p. 72).
37
For the identification see: Morelon, ‘Fragment arabe du premier livre du Phaseis’.
38
Al-Qifṭī, Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ (eds Müller and Lippert); the section on Ptolemy is on pp. 95–98.
39
The works omitted by al-Qifṭī are: Centiloquium, Book on the Comets, Book Known as the ‘Sev-
enth’ (‫)كتــاب يعــرف بالســابع‬, Book of the Revolution of the Years of Nativities.
40
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel); Kātip Çelebi, Keşf-el-zunun (eds Yaltkaya and Bilge).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
10 INTRODUCTION

Title Identification / Translation Vol. Page (A) Vol. Column (B)

‫المجسطي‬ Almagest V.385–89 II.1594–96
‫كتاب المقالات ال�أربع‬ Tetrabiblos VI.49 II.1781

Table 3: Ptolemy’s works as mentioned by Ḥājjī Khalīfa. (A) refers to the edition by
Flügel in 1835, (B) to the edition by Yaltkaya and Bilge in 1941–1943.

Under the letter Dhal (‫ )ذ‬of the aggregate lemma risāla (treatise), Ḥājjī
Khalīfa mentions Risāla Dhāt al-kursī, giving three authors who wrote on
this instrument:41
• ‘Treatise Dhāt al-kursī by Ptolemy. It consists of an introduction and a
number of chapters. Later scholars transformed it into Arabic. During
its transformation into Arabic it was abbreviated by some of them. It
was improved and revised by others (resulting in) an introduction and
38 chapters. Its beginning is: “Praise be to God, who created the high
heavens” etc.’
• ‘And by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā and it has 65 chapters’
• ‘And by ʿAbd al-Raḥmān ibn ʿUmar al-Ṣūfī a great treatise in 3 books
containing 157 chapters; its beginning is: “Praise be to God, who raised
the heavens by His power” etc.’
The above information is summarized in Table 4.
commentaries

Ḥājjī Khalīfa
al-Masʿūdī
Simplicius

al-Yaʿqūbī

Ṣāʿid, al-
Andalusī
Eutocius

al-Qifṭī
Fihrist
Early

Suda

Title English title

Μαθηματικὴ
1 Σύνταξις Almagest + + + + + + + + + +
‫كتاب المجسطي‬
Γεωγραφικὴ
Book on Geography
Ὑφήγησις of the Oecumene
2 ‫كتاب جغرافيا في المعمور‬ + + + + + +
and Description of
‫ ال�أرض‬42‫وصفة‬ the Earth

41
Kātip Çelebi, Keşf-el-zunun (eds Yaltkaya and Bilge), vol. I, col. 865 and Kātip Çelebi, Kashf
al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. III, p. 399 (with a phrase repeated in an incorrect position). The original
Arabic text of the lemma, as edited by Yaltkaya and Bilge, is as follows:
‫ ولغيره‬.‫ ومن معرباتها مختصر لبعضهم‬.‫ عربها المت�أخرون‬.‫ رتب على مقدمة وعدة �أبواب‬.‫رسالة ذات الكرسي – لبطلميوس‬
.‫ �أولها الحمد لله الذي خلق السموات العلي الخ‬.‫ بابا‬38 ‫ه ّّذبها ونّقّحها في مقدمة و‬
.‫ بابا‬65 ‫ولقسطا ابن لوقا وهي‬
‫ولعبد الرحمن بن عمر الصوفي رسالة كبرى في ثلاث مقالات مشتملة على مائة وسبعة وخمسين بابا �أولها الحمد لله‬
.‫الذي سمك السماء بقدرته الخ‬
42
Al-Qifṭī, Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ (eds Müller and Lippert), p. 98: ‫ المعمورة من‬for ‫المعمور وصفة‬.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.1 PTOLEMY’S AUTHENTIC WORKS AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 11

commentaries

Ḥājjī Khalīfa
al-Masʿūdī
Simplicius

al-Yaʿqūbī

Ṣāʿid, al-
Andalusī
Eutocius

al-Qifṭī
Fihrist
Early

Suda
Title English title

Αποτελεσματικά –
3 Τετράβιβλος Tetrabiblos + + + + + +
‫كتاب المقالات ال�أربع‬
43

Ἅπλωσις ἐπιφανείας Unfolding the

4 σφαίρας Surface of a Sphere + +
‫( كتاب تسطيح الكرة‬Planisphaerium)
Περὶ φάσεων On the Appearances
καὶ ἐπισημασιῶν and Indications
5 ἀστέρων ἀπλανῶν + + +
of the Fixed Stars
‫كتاب ال�أنواء‬ (Phaseis)
Προχείρων κανόνων
διάταξις καὶ
6 ψηφοφορία Handy Tables + + + + + +
‫القانون‬
Ὑποθέσεις τῶν
πλανωμένων Book of Planetary
7 ‫كتاب اقتصاص �أحوال‬ + + + +
Hypotheses
‫الكواكب‬
Μουσικά
8 ‫كتاب الموسيقى‬ Musica + +
9 Ἁρμονικά Harmonics +
Ὀπτικά
10 ‫كتاب المناظر‬ Optics + +
11 Περὶ διαστάσεως On Dimension +
12 Περὶ ῥοπῶν On Weights + +
13 Περὶ τῶν στοιχείων On the Elements +
14 Μηχανικά Mechanics +
Book on the In-
15 ‫كتاب في المدخل �إلى‬ troduction to the +
‫الصناعة الكريّة‬ Spherical Art
16 ‫كتاب الثمرة‬ Centiloquium + +
‫رسالة ذات الكرسي‬ Treatise
17 +
Dhāt al-kursī
18 ‫كتاب المواليد‬ Book of Nativities + +
19 ‫كتاب الحرب والقتال‬ Book of War and
+ +
Battle
Book for Extracting
20 ‫كتاب استخراج السهام‬ the Arrows / Lots
+ +

43
Al-Qifṭī, Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ (eds Müller and Lippert), p. 98: ‫ ;كتــاب‬al-Nadīm, Kitāb al-Fihrist
(eds Flügel et al.), p. 268: ‫كتــاب ال�أربعــة‬.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
12 INTRODUCTION

commentaries

Ḥājjī Khalīfa
al-Masʿūdī
Simplicius

al-Yaʿqūbī

Ṣāʿid, al-
Andalusī
Eutocius

al-Qifṭī
Fihrist
Early

Suda
Title English title

Book of the
21 ‫كتاب تحويل سنى العالم‬ Revolution of the + +
World Years
‫كتاب تحويل سنى‬ Book of the Revolu-
22 ‫المواليد‬ tion of the Years of +
Nativities
‫كتاب المرض وشرب‬ Book of Illness and
23 ‫الدواء‬ + +
Drinking Medicine
‫ السبعة‬44‫كتاب في ََسير‬ Book on the Course
24 + +
of the Seven
25
45
‫كتاب في ال�أسرى‬ Book on the Cap-
+ +
‫والمحبسين‬ tives and Prisoners
‫ السعود‬46‫كتاب في اسر‬ Book on Capturing
26 ‫واصطناعها‬ Good Luck and its + +
Synthesis
‫كتاب الخصمين �أيهما‬ Book of the Oppo-
27 ‫يفلح‬ nents, which one + +
will succeed
28 ‫كتاب ذوات الذوائب‬ Book on the Comets +
‫كتاب يعرف بالسابع‬ Book known as the
29 +
‘Seventh’
‫ مجدول‬،‫كتاب القرعة‬ Book of the Lots,
30 + +
tabulated
‫كتاب في ذات الحلق‬ Book on the Armil-
31 +
lary Sphere
‫كتاب في ذات الصفائح‬ Book on the
32 +
Astrolabe
‫تعبير الرؤيا‬ Interpretation of
33 +
Dreams
Table 4: Consolidated table of works attributed to Ptolemy, as mentioned in various
Greek and Arabic sources.

Taking into consideration the above study and the results of Alexander Jones
presented in ‘The Ancient Ptolemy’, we can classify the multitude of the works
attributed to Ptolemy into the following five categories:

44
Al-Qifṭī, Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ (eds Müller and Lippert), p. 98 : ‫ ََسير‬for ‫في ََسير‬.
45
Al-Qifṭī, Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ (eds Müller and Lippert), p. 98: ‫ ال�أســرى‬and al-Nadīm, Kitāb al-
Fihrist (eds Flügel et al.), p. 268: ‫ فــي الاســراء‬for ‫فــي ال�أســرى‬
46
Al-Qifṭī, Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ (eds Müller and Lippert), p. 98: ‫اشتراء‬.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.1 PTOLEMY’S AUTHENTIC WORKS AND PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 13

1. Authentic works of Ptolemy that are preserved entirely or fragmentarily

in the original Greek language: 1. Almagest,47 2. Geography,48 3. Tetra-
biblos,49 5. Phaseis,50 6. Handy Tables,51 7. Hypotheses,52 9. Harmonics53 and
Meteoroscopion.54 In this category we should add Analemma,55 Inscriptio
Canobi,56 and De judicandi facultate et animi principatu,57 whose
authenticity is confirmed by Jones.
2. Authentic works of Ptolemy that are preserved entirely or fragmentarily
in Arabic translation: 1. Almagest, 2. Geography, 3. Tetrabiblos, 4. Plani-
sphaerium,58 5. Phaseis (fragment),59 7. Hypotheses.60 The work 10. Op-
tics is preserved, although mutilated, in Latin translation.61
3. Authentic works of Ptolemy that are apparently lost: 11. On Dimen-
sion, 12. On Weights, 13. On the Elements, 14. Mechanics, 15. Book on
the Introduction to the Spherical Art.62
47
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg).
48
Ptolemy, Claudii Ptolemaei Geographia (ed. Müller) and Ptolemy, Claudii Ptolemaei Geographia
(ed. Nobbe); also Ptolemy, Klaudios Ptolemaios. Handbuch der Geographie (eds Stückelberger and
Grasshoff ), with German translation.
49
Ptolemy, Apotelesmatica (eds Boll and Boer); Ptolemy, Ἀποτελεσματικά (ed. Hübner).
50
Phaseis, in Ptolemy, Opera astronomica minora (ed. Heiberg), pp. 3–67.
51
Προχείρων κανόνων διάταξις καὶ ψηφοφορία in Ptolemy, Opera astronomica minora (ed. Hei-
berg), pp. 159–85; Tihon, Πτολεμαίου Πρόχειροι κανόνες; Mercier, Πτολεμαίου Πρόχειροι
κανόνες. English translation: Stahlman, The Astronomical Tables.
52
Only the first part of Book 1 (Part 1A) survives in Greek: Hypotheses, in Ptolemy, Opera astro-
nomica minora (ed. Heiberg), pp. 70–106. An English translation of part 1A with commentary on
Book 1 appears in Hamm, Ptolemyʼs Planetary Theory.
53
Harmonica: Düring, Die Harmonielehre des Klaudios Ptolemaios; an English translation and
commentary are presented in Solomon, Ptolemy Harmonics.
54
Gysembergh et al., ‘Ptolemy’s treatise on the meteoroscope recovered’; preliminary discussion on
a recovered palimpsested text. This work is on the same subject as entry 31 of Table 4, the Book on
the Armillary Sphere, but according to the existing up to now evidence the two works present many
differences; see the discussion on pp. 5–6.
55
De analemmate in Ptolemy, Opera astronomica minora (ed. Heiberg), pp. 194–216; also Ed-
wards, Ptolemyʼs Περὶ ἀναλήμματος.
56
Inscriptio Canobi, in Ptolemy, Opera astronomica minora (ed. Heiberg), pp. 149–55.
57
De judicandi facultate et animi principatu (Περὶ κριτηρίου καὶ ἡγεμονικοῦ), in Ptolemy, Περὶ
κριτηρίου (ed. Lammert).
58
Anagnostakis, The Arabic Version; also Sidoli and Berggren, ‘The Arabic Version’.
59
Morelon, ‘Fragment arabe du premier livre du Phaseis’.
60
The whole text of Hypotheses (Books 1A–1B and 2) is preserved in Arabic translation. It has been
published as facsimile with an English translation of Book 1B in Goldstein, ‘The Arabic Version of
Ptolemy’s Planetary Hypotheses’. The Arabic text of Book 1(A–B) has been edited and translated
into French in Morelon, ‘La version arabe du Livre des Hypothèses’. A full edition of the Arabic
text with English translation by Paul Hullmeine will soon appear in the series Ptolemaeus Arabus et
Latinus – Texts.
61
Lejeune, L’Optique de Claude Ptolémée; also Smith, Ptolemyʼs Theory.
62
According to Jones, ‘The Ancient Ptolemy’, pp. 23–25, 28, the following works should also be
considered as authentic but lost works of Ptolemy: i. On Paradoxical Phases of Venus, ii. a treatise on

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
14 INTRODUCTION

4. Pseudepigrapha preserved in either Greek or Arabic: 8. Musica,63

16. Centiloquium (in both Greek and Arabic);64 the treatise 17. Dhāt
al-kursī can be classified in this category, according to the study pre-
sented below.
5. Unknown or unidentified works described in Arabic in nos 18-30 and
32-33 of Table 4, which need further investigation in terms of whether
they actually existed, if so in what form, and regarding their connection
to Ptolemy. For example, no 28, The Book on the Comets may have a
connection with chapters II.10 and II.14 of Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos. This
treatise could be related to the Arabic treatise with the same title, which
is preserved in MS Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt M 204,6 (ff. 75v–76r).

1.2 The treatise Dhāt al-kursī

We focus now on the treatise Dhāt al-kursī. As we have seen above, among
the sources studied, the only reference to this treatise as a work by Ptole-
my is that in Ḥājjī Khalīfa’s Kashf al-ẓunūn, written in the middle of the
seventeenth century. Immediately after it, the treatise with the same title
by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā is mentioned as well. It seems that Ḥājjī Khalīfa had
read at least the preface of the treatise, because he quotes the incipit and
some other information from the preface, concerning the abbreviation, im-
provement and revision of the treatise. He gives a number of 38 chapters,
although there are only 33 chapters in all the preserved manuscripts of the
treatise.65
The preface of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī, written in a form of rhymed prose
(‫)) ََســجع‬, refers to the treatise of Qusṭā, touching upon the superfluities, omis�
sions and defects in the latter. The author declares that he is going to improve
the treatise, omit the superfluities and add some new uses. Thus, he admits
that the source treatise is that of Qusṭā. The name of Ptolemy is not men-
tioned at all in the whole text of both treatises.

theory of stellar visibility, and iii. a work related to Euclid’s Elements.

63
Πτολεμαίου Μουσικὰ in von Jan, Musici scriptores graeci, pp. 411–23.
64
Pseudo-Ptolemy, Καρπός (ed. Boer). The Arabic text with an Italian translation is included in
Martorello and Bezza, Aḥmad ibn Yusūf ibn al-Dāya: Commento al Centiloquio, pp. 45–235.
65
The manuscript Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Ayasofya 2623 is not complete and includes only
20 chapters. The oldest dated manuscript (Princeton, University Library, IMNS 243,13) was pro-
duced almost a century before the compilation of Kashf al-ẓunūn. It is possible that either Ḥājjī
Khalīfa was acquainted with an extended version of this treatise (the last five chapters could corre-
spond to a lost folio at the end of the treatise), or, most probably, the number 33 (‫ ثلاثــة وثلاثيــن‬/ ‫)لجـ‬
was somehow misunderstood and transmitted as 38 (‫ ثمانيــة وثلاثيــن‬/ ‫)لح‬.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.2 THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 15

Because reference to the treatise of Qusṭā is made in this way, I have com-
pared the two treatises in detail in order to establish the relationship between
them, and I present the results below, in the commentary and comparison
(Chapter 3). Henceforward, I refer to the treatise attributed to Ptolemy as
‘treatise P’ and that of Qusṭā as ‘treatise Q’.
The 33 chapters of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy can be
arranged in 6 groups:
1. Positioning the globe, measuring the sun’s altitude and finding orienta-
tion (Chapters 1, 9, 28);
2. Day- and nighttime arc and time calculation (Chapters 2–7, 32);
3. Astrology: ascendant, four centres and domification (Chapters 8, 10–11);
4. Stars, moon, planets and degrees of the ecliptic: position, rising, culmi-
nating and setting (Chapters 12–21, 33);
5. Sun and shadow (Chapters 21–27);
6. ‘Longitude’ and ‘latitude’ of the moon, planets and stars not drawn on
the globe. Lunar and solar eclipses (Chapters 29–31).66
A transcription of the preface, the introduction, the titles of the chapters and
the explicit of MS Cairo, Mīqāt Ṭalʿat 189, has been published by Celentano,
who examined the treatise Dhāt al-kursī in order to check whether it has any
relation to the Book on the Instrument Having Rings that al-Yaʿqūbī attributed
to Ptolemy; al-Yaʿqūbī preserved the chapter titles of this book in his work
Taʾrīkh al-Yaʿqūbī.67
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā (d. c. 912 ad) was a prominent translator and scientist
of Greek origin. He translated many works on mathematics and astronomy
from Greek into Arabic, among them works of Diophantus, Aristarchus,
Theodosius, Autolycus and Hypsicles. He also compiled works on medicine,
mathematics and astronomy in Arabic. Among his works on astronomy is the
Treatise on the Celestial Globe, which is the above-mentioned ‘treatise Q’. It
appears with various titles and is preserved in numerous manuscripts.68 The

66
The terms ‘longitude’ and ‘latitude’ do not correspond to the ecliptic longitude and latitude; for
the meaning of these terms see the commentary on chapters P12 and P29 in Chapter 3.
67
Celentano, L’epistola di al-Kindī sulla sfera armillare; the text is in Appendix I, pp. 54–57, and
the comments on the comparison on p. 6. For Taʾrīkh al-Yaʿqūbī see pp. 4–6 above.
68
See Sezgin, GAS, vol. VI, pp. 180–82. Sezgin mentions 36 manuscripts, but the manuscripts C, F,
L, R, S and T are not included in his list. He presents the following titles for this treatise: 1. Treatise
on the Astronomical Globe (‫)رســالة فــي الكــرة الفلكيــة‬, . Book on Working with the Astronomical Globe
(‫)كتــاب فــي العمــل بالكــرة الفلكيــة‬, . Treatise on Working with the Globe (‫)رســالة فــي العمــل بالكــرة‬, . Book
on Working with the Star Globe (‫)كتــاب فــي العمــل بالكــرة النجوميــة‬, and 5. Treatise on Working with the
Globe with Stand (‫)رســالة فــي العمــل بالكــرة ذات الكرســي‬.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
16 INTRODUCTION

treatise contains 65 chapters in most manuscripts, but there are problems in

their enumeration. An English translation of the chapter titles is included in
Appendix 1, the correspondence between the chapters in the manuscripts is
presented in Appendix 2, and a transcription of the Arabic text is provided
in Appendix 3.
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā used the knowledge included in the astronomical treatises
he had translated to compile his treatise on the celestial globe. This will be
discussed below, in the commentary and comparison between the two treatises
(Chapter 3).
The treatise of Qusṭā on the celestial globe was translated into Latin, He-
brew, Spanish and Italian.69 There is an English translation of the introduction
and first 14 chapters, along with the titles of the rest of the 65 chapters, by
W. H. Worrell.70 A Latin translation (thirteenth century) of this treatise was
edited by R. Lorch and J. Martínez Gázquez.71 Julio Samsó presented a com-
parison between the treatise of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā and the Alfonsine treatise Li-
bro de la fayçon dell espera.72
For the present research, eighteen manuscripts of this treatise have been ex-
amined:
A: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ḥalīm ʿarabī 7, ff. 1r–11r, c. 1250 h /
ad 1834.73

B: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, K ʿarabī 3824,13, ff. 107r–122r, 1170 h / ad 1756–

7 .74
C: London, British Library, Stowe Orient 10,6, ff. 67r–75v, 16th c.75
D: London, British Library, Add. 9598,10, ff. 139r–157v; western Arabic
origin.76

69
See Sezgin, GAS, vol. VI, p. 181.
70
Worrell, ‘Qusta ibn Luqa’. The translation of the titles does not always reflect the correct meaning
of the chapter.
71
Lorch and Martínez Gázquez, ‘Qusta ben Luca. De sphera uolubili’.
72
Samsó, ‘Qustā ibn Lūqā’.
73
King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, Part I, p. 651.
74
King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, Part I, p. 318. The date is according to
GAS, vol. VI, p. 181.
75
Rieu, Supplement to the Catalogue, pp. 511–12, entry 753. I am thankful to Bink Hallum for
providing me with access to the three manuscripts (C, D, E) at the British Library.
76
Cureton and Rieu, Catalogus Codicum Manuscriptorum Orientalium, pp. 192–94, CCCCVII.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.2 THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 17

E: London, British Library, Add. 7490,7, ff. 170v–185v, c. 1058 h / ad 1648.77

F: Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania (Lawrence J. Schoenberg Col-
lection), LJS 412,1, ff. 1v–10v, 950 h / ad 1543. This manuscript orig-
inates from Cairo.
G:

H: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Esad Efendi 2015,1, ff. 1v–27v, 1181 h /

ad 1767–8.

I: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Esad Efendi 2015,3, ff. 33v–58r. The

chapters in this manuscript are not numbered.
J:

K: Damascus, National Library, al-Ẓāhirīya 4494, pp. 20–67.

L: Cairo, Central Library of Islamic Manuscripts, 3071,7 (12 unnumbered
folios, previously: Library al-Dardīrī 417), 11 Shawwāl 1118 h / 16 Jan-
uary ad 1707.
M: Princeton, University Library, Garrett 3168Y,1, ff. 2v–12v, 12th c. h.78
N: Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III 3505,5, ff. 95r–116r, 661 h /
ad 1263.79

O: Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III, 3475,1, (ff. 1v–78v), undated.80

P:

Q:

R: Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France, arabe 7244,1, ff. 1v–18v, 2

Jumādā al-Thānī 1188 h / 10 August ad 1774, in western Arabic hand-
writing.81

77
Cureton and Rieu, Catalogus Codicum Manuscriptorum Orientalium, pp. 197–98, CCCCXV.
78
Mach, Catalogue of Arabic Manuscripts, no. 4901, p. 423. The manuscript is online available at:
https://dpul.princeton.edu/islamicmss/catalog/st74cv08m (accessed on 30.1.2021).
79
The manuscript bears the almond-shaped seal of Sultan Bāyazīt II on ff. 1r and 218v, and
the round seal of Sultan Ahmet III on f. 1r. It was included in the library inventory of Bāyazīt II
(1502/3–1503/4) preserved in MS Budapest, Library of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences, Ori-
ental Collection, Török F. 59; see Necipoğlu et al., Treasures of Knowledge, vol. II, pp. 209, 405. The
table of contents on f. 1r of MS N, except for Qusṭā’s name, is listed on p. 319 (lines 18–19) and
p. 320 (lines 1–3) of the manuscript containing the inventory, which is presented in this volume
both as facsimile and as transliteration. It is remarkable that neither the table of contents on f. 1r nor
the inventory mentions the sixth treatise in the manuscript, Book of Interpretation of the Armillary
Sphere that Theon of Alexandria mentions, which is on ff. 117r–133r.
80
The manuscript bears the almond-shaped seal of Sultan Bāyazīt II (r. 1481–1512) on ff. 1r and 97v,
and the round seal of Sultan Ahmet III (r. 1703–1730) on f. 1r, so the manuscript cannot be dated to
the 10th c. h (ad 1591–1688) as mentioned in GAS, vol. VI, p. 181. For the seals of the above-men-
tioned sultans see Necipoğlu, Appendix III in Treasures of Knowledge, vol. I, in particular pp. 1025–50.
81
In MS R, f. 17, which contains the text of chapter 22 (without its title) followed by chapters 23–
26 and the beginning of chapter 27, is misplaced; its correct position is between f. 8 and f. 9. There
are two successive pairs of folios numbered as 6 and 7; then f. 8 follows and the numbering contin-
ues normally. The manuscript is online available through gallica.bnf.fr/ Bibliothèque nationale de
France: https://gallica.bnf.fr/ark:/12148/btv1b10031259s (accessed on 06.11.2021).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
18 INTRODUCTION

S: Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France, arabe 2544,11, ff. 79v–83v.82

T: Tirana, National Library of Albania, Dr 6/23E,11, ff. 151r–176v,
1082(?) h / ad 1671.83
U: Hydarabad, Salar Jung, kalām 136,2, ff. 94v–117v.84
V:

W:

X:

Y:

Z: Meshhed, Holy Shrine, 5595,1, ff. 1v–8r.

1.3 The instrument dhāt al-kursī

The treatise Dhāt al-kursī describes an astronomical instrument and gives
instructions on how to use it for solving some astronomical and astrological
problems. The meaning of the title Dhāt al-kursī is the following: kursī ‫كرســي‬
in Arabic means ‘chair, throne, stand’ and dhāt ‫ ذات‬is the feminine form of dhū
‫ ذو‬and means ‘endowed with, having’, so the term dhāt al-kursī means ‘having a
stand’. Here dhāt al-kursī refers to al-kura (‫)الكرة‬, the globe; so, al-kura dhāt al-
kursī means ‘the globe with stand’. The constellation of Cassiopeia is also called
in Arabic Dhāt al-kursī, because Cassiopeia is sitting on a throne.
A detailed description of the instrument is presented in the introduction of
treatise P and the first chapter of treatise Q, while a discussion of its design is
included in my commentary on the introduction.
This type of celestial globe is described in the work Introduction to the Phe-
nomena of Geminus (1st c. bc),85 approximately two centuries before Ptolemy.
The Arabic term dhāt al-kursī corresponds to the Greek term καταστηριζομένη
(σφαίρα), while the term al-kursī corresponds to the Greek term σφαιροθήκη.

82
MS S contains only 25 chapters of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā’s treatise; their correspondence to the chapters
of the complete version is presented in Appendix 2. The manuscript is online available through galli-
ca.bnf.fr/ Bibliothèque nationale de France: https://gallica.bnf.fr/ark:/12148/btv1b100375232
(accessed on 20.9.2021).
83
Mentioned as manuscript An VIII/21E in al-Ḥalwajī and ʿAẓīmī, Catalogue of Islamic Manu-
scripts, no. 354, pp. 272–73. The authors of the catalogue consider the third (ff. 25v–30r, On the
Quadrant) and the fourth (ff. 30v–42v, On the Astrolabe) treatises of the manuscript as one. The
folio numbering is not systematic; after f. 39, few folios bear numbers, usually at the beginning or the
end of the treatises. Two folios are not included in the numbering, one between f. 36 and f. 37, and
one between f. 125 and f. 149. The treatise is on ff. 151r–176v, according to the folio numbers ex-
isting in the manuscript. No date is mentioned at the end of Qusṭā’s treatise. The date of the second
treatise is 1082 h on f. 24v, while the sixth and tenth treatises, written in Turkish, mention 182 as
year of copying (1082 or 1182 h?) on ff. 112v and 148v respectively. Since the handwriting in these
three treatises is similar, I think that the year 1082 h is more probable.
84
I am thankful to Leonard Chiarelli, University of Utah, for providing me with this manuscript.
85
Aujac, Géminos. Introduction aux Phénomènes, also Evans and Berggren, Geminos’s Introduction
to the Phenomena and Manitius, Gemini Elementa astronomiae; the description of the celestial globe
is in Chapter 5: ‘The Circles on the Sphere’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.3 THE INSTRUMENT DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 19

Ptolemy describes the construction of a celestial globe with stand in Chap-

ter VIII.3 of his Almagest.86 This globe can be used eternally because the pre-
cession of the equinoxes has been taken into consideration at its conception.
Thus, only two circles are drawn on this globe: the ecliptic (divided into 360°)
and a great circle through the poles of the ecliptic; the location of the Milky
Way is also marked on the globe. There are two rotatable rings around the
globe: one of them represents the solstitial colure and is mounted through the
poles of the ecliptic; the other ring represents the meridian and is mounted to
the ring of the solstitial colure at the positions of the two poles of the equator.
Sirius is positioned on the great circle through the poles of the ecliptic, accord-
ing to its latitude; the point of intersection of the ecliptic with the semicircle
through the poles of the ecliptic and Sirius is considered as the beginning of
the graduation on the ecliptic. The system that comprises the globe with the
two attached rings is placed on a stand (βάσις), the upper horizontal ring of
which represents the horizon. The globe can be adjusted to the desired lati-
tude by elevating the north celestial pole above the horizon according to the
latitude.
The precession globe described by Ptolemy differs significantly from the
globe dhāt al-kursī described in treatises P and Q. Thus, the mention of Ptole-
my in the title ‘The treatise Dhāt al-kursī by Ptolemy’ must be understood as
referring to the treatise, rather than the instrument. This is also confirmed by
Ḥājjī Khalīfa, who clearly refers to three authors who wrote on the instrument
dhāt al-kursī: Ptolemy, Qusṭā ibn Lūqā and al-Ṣūfī.
Leontius (7th c.), in his partially preserved treatise On the Construction of
the Aratean Sphere (Περὶ κατασκευῆς Ἀρατείας σφαίρας),87 describes the con-
struction of a globe with stand similar to that described by Geminus. Both
Geminus and Leontius put the arctic and antarctic circles on the globe.88 The
presence of these circles on the globe shows that the celestial poles were not
adjustable to the latitude of the locality; Geminus’ globe corresponds to the
latitude of Rhodes (φ=36°), whilst Leontius’ corresponds to that of Constan-
tinople (φ=41°). This is the most significant difference between these globes

86
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part II, pp. 179–85, and Toomer, Ptolemyʼs Al-
magest, pp. 404–07.
87
Leontius, ‘De sphaerae Arateae constructione’, in Maass, Commentariorum in Aratum reliquiae,
pp. 559–67.
88
According to Geminus, ‘the arctic circle is the largest of the always-visible circles touching the
horizon at one point and situated wholly above the Earth. The stars lying within it neither rise nor
set, but are seen through the whole night turning around the pole’, while ‘the antarctic circle is equal
[in size], and parallel to, the arctic circle, being tangent to the horizon at one point and situated
wholly beneath the Earth. The stars lying within it are always invisible to us’ (see Evans and Berg-
gren, Geminos’s Introduction to the Phenomena, pp. 149, 151). These definitions denote that for a
given terrestrial latitude φ, the arctic circle is the circle of north latitude 90°−φ, and the antarctic
circle is the circle of south latitude 90°−φ.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
20 INTRODUCTION

and the globe described in treatises P and Q, where the celestial poles are ad-
justable to the local latitude.
The above descriptions of a celestial globe with stand are preserved in the
original Greek texts.89 There are also descriptions coming from Arabic sources,90
such as that in the Book on the Sphere and its Use, written by Ḥabash al-Ḥāsib
in the ninth century, with a description of the celestial globe and 14 chapters
on its use,91 and in the treatise On the Use of the Celestial Globe by al-Ṣūfī,92
written between ad 983 and 986. The latter contains 157 chapters arranged
in three books; the description of the globe with stand is included in Chap-
ters 1–2 of the first book. The celestial globe described by al-Ṣūfī is similar to
that of treatises P and Q.

1.4 Presentation of the manuscripts

For the edition of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy, seven man-
uscripts coming from the Egyptian National Library (Dār al-kutub) in Cairo
and one from the Süleymaniye Library in Istanbul have been used. The manu-
scripts are the following:
1. Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ṭalʿat ʿarabī 189,1 (MS A / ‫)ا‬.
Mentioned in Sezgin, GAS, vol. V.93 The manuscript consists of 7 fo-
lios and is paginated. The title of the treatise ‫رســالة ذات الكرســي لبطلميــوس‬
(Treatise on the 〈Globe〉 with Stand by Ptolemy) appears on p. 1, and
the text of the treatise is on pp. 2–11 (27 lines per page). In the mar-
gins of pp. 2, 3 and 5 there are some glosses in Arabic and Ottoman
Turkish. On pp. 12–14 there is the first part of a treatise on the astro-
labe in Turkish. There is no date written in the manuscript.
2. Cairo, Dār al-kutub, K ʿarabī 3844.
Mentioned in King’s catalogue.94 This manuscript consists of 96 foli-
os and is foliated. It contains two copies of the treatise: on ff. 1r–14r

89
For a more detailed discussion on the globes described in Greek sources see Vafea, ‘From the
Celestial Globe’.
90
An excellent presentation of celestial globes of Arabic origin, with or without stand, can be found
in Savage-Smith, Islamicate Celestial Globes.
91
Lorch and Kunitzsch, ‘Ḥabash al-Ḥāsib’s Book on the Sphere’. The stand is not mentioned in
this treatise.
92
MS Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III 3505,1 ff. 1–62, also Kennedy, ‘Al-Ṣūfī on the Celestial
Globe’. In the appendix of this article, Kennedy presents the titles of the 157 chapters in English
translation and a short summary of the content of most of the chapters.
93
Sezgin, GAS, vol. V, p. 171.
94
King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, Part I, pp. 320–21.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 21

(MS B / ‫ )ب‬and on ff. 59v–69v (MS J / ‫)ج‬, both of them copied from
the same exemplar.95
1. MS B / ‫ب‬: f. 1r contains only the title of the treatise:
‫( رســالة القســط فــي العمــل بالكــرة ذات الكرســي لبطليمــوس‬Treatise of Qusṭ
on the Use of the Globe with Stand by Ptolemy). The MS is dat-
ed 1149 h (ad 1736–7) on f. 14r. There are no glosses at all. The
numbers of the chapters and the abjad numbers within the text are
written in red colour; red is also used to separate the paragraphs in
the introduction. There are 17 lines per page (16 on f. 12v). On
f. 15r there is a table presenting the geographical longitudes and
latitudes of 43 cities.
2. MS J / ‫ج‬: On f. 59v, above the text of the treatise, the title
‫( رســالة القســط‬Treatise of Qusṭ) appears. The MS is dated 1144 h
(ad 1731–2) on f. 69v. There are numerous interlinear and margin-
al glosses, some of them in Ottoman Turkish. Only a few import-
ant glosses are mentioned in the apparatus of the critical edition
below. The numbers of the chapters and the abjad numbers within
the text are written in red colour; red is also used to separate the
paragraphs in the introduction. There are 19 lines per page.

The titles of both treatises are written in the same hand, different from
that of the treatises, and seem to be later additions. The title Treatise of
Qusṭ is probably taken from the introduction of the treatise, where the
reference to the treatise of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā appears.
3. Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt M ʿarabī 101 (MS D / ‫)د‬.
Mentioned in the Khedive catalogue of the Dār al-kutub,96 and in King’s
catalogue.97 The manuscript consists of 12 numbered folios. There is no
prominent title in the treatise, while the phrase ‫‘( رســائل ارتفــاع‬Treatises
altitude’) written on f. 1r is misleading; the name of the author is not
mentioned. The treatise is written on ff. 1v–12r, with 19 lines per page.
The manuscript is dated 1159 h (ad 1746)98 on f. 12r. There are several
marginal glosses, most of them making comparisons with the treatise of
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā. Red is used as in the manuscripts B and J. On f. 12v

95
Manuscripts B, J and H were copied within a period of seven years (1142–1149 h) and have
several variants in common; there are also some differences, which exclude the possibility that one
of them was copied from one of the other two.
96
Vollers et al., Fihrist al-kutub, vol. V, p. 249.
97
King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, Part I, p. 385.
98
The month Dhū al-Qaʿdah 1159, mentioned in the colophon, corresponds to 15 November–14
December ad 1746 (Gregorian).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
22 INTRODUCTION

there is a table presenting the geographical longitudes and latitudes of

36 cities, but for two of them the coordinates were omitted.
4. Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Riyāḍiyāt Taymūr ʿarabī 106,11 (MS H / ‫)هـ‬.
Mentioned in King’s catalogue.99 The whole manuscript consists
of 132 folios and is paginated (pp. 1–264). The treatise appears
on pp. 232–52, with 19 lines per page. There is neither title nor
author name. The manuscript is dated 1142 h (ad 1729–30) on
p. 252.100 There are only two marginal notes. On p. 253 there is a
table presenting the geographical longitudes and latitudes of 118
cities.101 This manuscript was copied from the same exemplar as
manuscripts B and J.
5. Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ṭalʿat ʿarabī 202,2 (MS U / ‫)و‬.
Mentioned in King’s catalogue.102 This manuscript consists of 81 foli-
os, 80 of which are numbered; one additional unnumbered folio fol-
lows f. 65 and contains the title of the second treatise on its recto.
After the title there are two empty opposite pages and the treatise on
the celestial globe appears on ff. 66v–74v (21 lines per page). The title
is written in four lines (Figure 1). In the first two lines we read ‫رســالة‬
‫ المســماة‬103‫‘( مقبولــة لكــرة‬An acceptable treatise on the globe called…’),
while the next two lines seem to have no connection to the previous:
‫‘( بــارك اللــه لمــن لــه �أطــ ّّل لعلمــه‬God bless the one who has approached to
His knowledge’). Probably the copyist misunderstood the handwrit-
ing in the exemplar; it could be ‫ ذات الكرســي لبطليمــوس‬as in the title
of MS B, or‫ ;بــذات الكرســي لبطليمــوس‬both of them mean ‘having a stand
by Ptolemy’. The phrase ‫ الكــرة المســماة بــذات الكرســي‬appears in the first
lines of the treatise, and in the title of manuscript O / ‫( ع‬see below).
The manuscript is dated 1160 h (ad 1747) on f. 74v. There are some
glosses on ff. 66v–69v.

99
The manuscript is described in King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, Part I,
pp. 581–83; the treatise Dhāt al-kursī appears on p. 582.
100
The date is erroneously given as 1150 h in King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts,
Part I, p. 582.
101
The geographical tables that appear in manuscripts B, D and H include different groups of cities;
only a few of these, such as Mecca, Medina and Baghdad, appear in all three manuscripts. Taking
into consideration that such tables are included after the treatise in only 3 out of the 23 manuscripts
and that the problems discussed in this treatise do not require the knowledge of the coordinates of
distant cities, it can be concluded that these tables do not belong to the treatise Dhāt al-kursī itself.
102
King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, Part I, p. 490.
103
‫ لكرة‬should be written as ‫للكرة‬.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 23

Figure 1: The title of the treatise in MS U.

6. Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt M ʿarabī 106,2 (MS Z / ‫)ز‬.

Mentioned in the Khedive catalogue of the Dār al-kutub, in King’s cata-
logue, in Osmanlı Astronomi, and in MAOSIC.104 The whole manu-
script consists of 12 numbered folios. On ff. 1v–7r there is a treatise of
Muhammad ibn ʿAlī al-Ḥamīdī (or al-Ḥumaīdī) on the celestial globe.105
The treatise of interest here is the second one, on ff. 7v–12r (21 lines per
page). The title ‫( الكرة‬The Globe) is written in red in the upper margin of
f. 7v, above the text of the treatise. The manuscript is dated on f. 12r, but
only 3 digits of the year are written: ١١٨ (118), which could be read as
1118 h (ad 1706–7).106 Folio 8 was cut vertically after it had been writ-
104
Vollers et al., Fihrist al-kutub, vol. V, pp. 297–98; King, A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Man-
uscripts, Part I, p. 386; İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no 31, p. 65; and Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu,
MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303.
105
A comparison of al-Ḥamīdī’s treatise with that attributed to Ptolemy shows that they have
different structure and wording, and thus al-Ḥamīdī cannot be the author of the latter. The fact that
al-Ḥamīdī’s name is mentioned in a note near the colophon of treatise P in manuscript U (see the
Arabic text and corresponding translation) could raise suspicion that he is the author of this treatise.
106
Both treatises in the manuscript are written in the same hand. There are at least four more
manuscripts containing the treatise of al-Ḥamīdī in the Dār al-kutub in Cairo, two of which are
dated: Mīqāt Ṭalʿat ʿarabī 164, in 1250 h (ad 1790–1), and Mujāmīʿa Ṭalʿat ʿarabī 925, in 1172 h
(ad 1758–9). The manuscript 306 TE 28 of the Bašagić collection of Islamic manuscripts in the
University Library in Bratislava, contains the same treatise of Muḥammad ibn ʿAlī al-Ḥamīdī on
the celestial globe and is dated 1118 h / ad 1706, see Bašagić, Popis orijentalnih rukopisa, p. 332 and
http://retrobib.ulib.sk/Basagic/EN/306.htm. This shows that this work existed in manuscript form
in 1118 h, and supports the reading of 118 as 1118 h. The reading of this date as 1018 h (ad 1609–
10) in Vollers et al., Fihrist al-kutub, vol. V, p. 297 cannot be correct, since al-Ḥamīdī died on 26
Jumādā I 1179 h (10 November 1765), as mentioned on pp. 279 and 299 in the same volume, thus
he was not yet born in 1018 h. The date of the manuscript is given as 1118 h in King, A Catalogue
of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts, p. 386.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
24 INTRODUCTION

ten, and then reconnected; thus one or two letters were lost in every line
on both sides of the cut. The scribe of this manuscript was not careful;
there are many spelling errors and omissions of single words.
7. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Laleli 2135,4 (MS K / ‫)كـ‬.107
The whole manuscript consists of 166 numbered folios. The treatise is
on ff. 133v–138r and is dated 4 Shawwāl 1158 h (30 October ad 1745
Gregorian) in the colophon on f. 138r. There are several notes in the
margins or between the lines, in particular on ff. 133v–134v, that correct,
complete or explain the main text, many of them written in the hand of
the copyist. The treatise, either in its main text or the notes, includes some
elements that are not included in the manuscripts from the Dār al-kutub
in Cairo. The handwriting in these marginal notes seems to be that of the
copyist and not of a later reader. It is possible that he had either copied the
notes from the exemplar, or attempted to correct or update the text using
information from other sources.108 The manuscript bears the round waqf
seal of Sultan Mustafa III (r. 1757–1774) on f. 1r.109 Manuscripts D from
the Dār al-kutub and K have a common antecedent manuscript.110
Fifteen more manuscripts were examined but not included in the critical edi-
tion. The details of these manuscripts are as follows:
1. Riyadh, University Library, MS 1007, Falak 520 RB (MS Ḥ / ‫)ح‬.111
The title, later added on the first page of the manuscript, is ‫رسالة في علم‬
‫( الفلــك‬Treatise on Astronomy), while on the information sheet of the
manuscript the following information is given: ‘Treatise of Qusṭ on using
the globe having a stand, authorship Ptolemy?’ (‫رســالة القســط بالعمــل بالكــرة‬
‫ ت�أليف بطليموس؟‬،‫)ذات الكرسي‬, estimated date: thirteenth century h,112 ‘edi�
tion of the Egyptian Dār al-kutub 1: 428’ (٤٢٨:‫ ا‬،‫)نشــرة دار الكتــب المصريــة‬.

107
Mentioned in İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no 31, p. 65, and Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAO-
SIC, no. 893, p. 303, as a work of Akhawayn, although the manuscript is anonymous.
108
For example, the addition of the number 47 (‫ )ســبعة و�أربعيــن‬in Chapter 31 could have been made
after comparison with the corresponding Chapter 61 from the treatise of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā, while the
addition of the number 66;25 (‫ )ســو كــه‬in Chapters 24 and 25 may have been to ‘update’ the crude
approximation of (the complementary of ) the obliquity of the ecliptic.
109
For the identification of the seal of Sultan Mustafa III, see Necipoğlu, Appendix III in Treasures
of Knowledge, vol. I, p. 1056.
110
At the beginning of Chapter 30 in both manuscripts D and K, there is a redundant addition of
the same passage of 3–4 lines coming from the beginning of Chapter 33. This fact attests that man-
uscripts D and K stem from the same manuscript that contained this additional text. Manuscript D
was copied approximately 13 months after manuscript K.
111
The manuscript is online available at
https://al-mostafa.info/data/arabic/depot/gap.php?file=m010551.pdf (accessed on 31.1.2021).
112
The thirteenth century h corresponds to ad 1785–1882.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 25

It consists of 9 folios (19 lines per page). The text of the manuscript is
very similar to that of manuscript U from the Dār al-kutub.
2. Tirana, National Library of Albania, MS 523.11 Dr 6/23D (MS Ṭ / ‫)ط‬.113
The manuscript consists of 9 folios. The title of the treatise ‫( رسالة كرة‬TTrea�
tise 〈on the〉 Globe) appears on p. 1 in a statement of ownership by Sharīfī
Muṣṭafā Pasha, governor of Shkodra in ‘the year 240’ (probably 1240 h, i.e.
ad 1824–5), and the text of the treatise is on pp. 2–18 (19 lines per page).
The manuscript is stamped with a mark of Muṣṭafā Pasha that bears the
date 1251 h (1835–1836). Probably, the owner was Mustafa Pasha Bushat-
lliu (1797–1860), the last ruler of the Bushatlliu dynasty, who reigned over
the Pashalik of Scutari (Shkodra) from 1815 to 1831.114 The text of the
manuscript follows the pattern of manuscript U from the Dār al-kutub.
3. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Haci Mahmud Efendi 5688,6 (MS I / ‫)ي‬.
Mentioned in Osmanlı Astronomi and MAOSIC as a work of Akha-
wayn, although it is anonymous.115 The whole manuscript consists of
124 numbered folios. The treatise appears on ff. 74r–82r. The title
‫( رســالة ذات الكرســي‬Treatise on the 〈Globe〉 with Stand) is written on the
upper left corner of f. 74r by another hand, and it is not included in
the table of contents listed on the inside front cover. There is no date
written at the end of the treatise, but on f. 91v there is a date (March
1682) expressed in five calendars, while on the opposite f. 92r the cor-
responding date 1093 h is mentioned.116 This evidence suggests an ap-
proximate date 1093 h / ad 1682 for the manuscript.117
4. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Pertevniyal 971–980,1 (MS L / ‫)ل‬.
This is a collection of separate treatises ‘‫ ’’هــدا مجموعــة رســائل مــن الجزئيــات‬ac�
cording to the title on f. 1r; each treatise has its own number, thus the

113
Mentioned as manuscript An VIII/31F in al-Ḥalwajī and ʿAẓīmī, Catalogue of Islamic Manu-
scripts, no. 347, p. 267.
114
Some details about his life can be found in Elsie, A Biographical Dictionary of Albanian History,
pp. 63–64.
115
İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no 31, p. 65, and Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303.
116
The treatise ‫( فــي ال�إ ختيــارات‬On the Selections) starts on f. 91v. The dates in various calendars
mentioned on this folio are the following: Yazdegerd Shahrīvar 1051, Roman March 1993, Coptic
Paremhat 1398, Jalali Farvardīn 604, Christian March 1682. All of them correspond to the period
between 10 and 25 March 1682 ( Julian). On f. 100v of the same treatise, there is a note where ‘Tūt,
the beginning of the Coptic year 1399’ (1 Tūt 1399 corresponds to 8 September ad 1682 Gregori-
an) is written above ‘Farvardīn mah of the qadīm (i.e. the old Persian calendar) 1052’; the beginning
of this month corresponds to 7 October ad 1682 Gregorian).
117
This manuscript has some variants in common with manuscripts B, J, H, U and Z used in the
critical edition; there are also some omissions and copying errors that appear only here.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
26 INTRODUCTION

manuscript is denoted by the numbers of these ten treatises, Pertevniyal

971–980. The whole manuscript consists of 163 numbered folios plus
a blank folio after the first treatise, and two folios at the beginning and
end of the manuscript. The treatise Dhāt al-kursī is on ff. 1v–11v, cor-
responding to Pertevniyal 971, and is untitled. The last six lines of the
treatise are scribbled slanting in the lower margin without a date. The
manuscript may be dated between approximately ad 1735 and 1739, ac-
cording to the date 1151 h (ad 1738–9) written on ff. 40v and 64r, at
the end of the treatises in Pertevniyal 973 and 975 respectively, and the
date 1148 h (ad 1735–6) written on f. 128v, at the end of the treatise
in Pertevniyal 978.118 The stamp of Pertevniyal on ff. 1r and 164r bears
the date 1279 h (ad 1862–3). The text of the treatise follows the pat-
tern of manuscripts B, J and H, and the manuscript is contemporary
with these. There are many glosses written in the margins and even
between the lines on ff. 1v–7r, 10v and 11v.
5. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Süleymaniye 1037,1 (MS M / ‫)م‬.
The whole manuscript consists of 318 numbered folios plus two
folios at the beginning and end, and an unnumbered blank folio
within the volume. The treatise is on ff. 1v–12r and the title ‫رســالة‬
‫( ذات الكرســي لبطلميــوس‬Treatise on the 〈Globe〉 with Stand by Ptolemy)
appears twice, on f. 1r and on the first unnumbered folio, which
contains the table of contents. Although there is no date at the end
of the treatise, the dates 1182 h (ad 1768–9) and 1178 h (ad 1764–
5) that appear on ff. 75r and 93r, at the end of the fourth and fifth
treatises respectively, give an approximate date for the manuscript.
The text of the treatise closely follows the pattern of manuscript
A; even the colophon and several of the glosses that appear in the
margins of ff. 2v, 3r, 5r, 9v and 11r are the same. The second trea-
tise of the manuscript is the same as the unfinished treatise on the
astrolabe in manuscript A, but here it is complete. The differences
between the two manuscripts show that they were copied from the
same exemplar, not one from the other.
6. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Ayasofya 2623,1 (MS N / ‫)ن‬.
This manuscript consists of 92 numbered folios plus an unnumbered
one at the beginning of the volume; the recto of this folio contains
the table of contents. The manuscript contains five treatises, written by
various hands on different qualities of paper. The almond-shaped seal

118
The handwriting is similar in manuscripts Pertevniyal 971, 978, 979 and 980.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 27

of Sultan Bāyazīt II (r. 1481–1512) appears at the beginning of the 2nd,

3rd and 4th treatises (ff. 14r, 34r and 85r respectively) and at the end
of the 2nd, 3rd and 5th treatises (ff. 33v, 84v and 92v respectively); the
round seal of Sultan Mahmud I (r. 1730–1754) appears only on f. 1r.119
The 2nd treatise is dated Dhū al-Qaʿdah 834 h (between 11 July and 9
August ad 1431 Julian) on f. 33v, and the 3rd treatise 863 h (ad 1458–
9) on f. 84v. The rest of the treatises are undated. The treatise of our
interest appears on ff. 1v–13v, while its title ‫( رســالة الكــرة‬Treatise on the
Globe) is written only in the table of contents. The treatise contains
only 20 chapters; Chapters 11, 13–20, 29–31 and 33 of treatise P have
been omitted, while Chapter 9 has been placed as Chapter 2. Most of
the preface has been omitted and the introduction has been completely
modified. There are also minor modifications in the chapters included
in the treatise. There are some glosses on ff. 3v–6v, 8v, 10v, 11r and
13v. On f. 1r, there is a statement mentioning that the treatise had been
abbreviated and corrected according to the sharʿiya for Sultan Mah-
mud by Aḥmad Sheikh Zade.120 The handwriting of this statement is
similar to that of the treatise in question and the oval seal on f. 1r that
contains the name Aḥmad; thus the part of the manuscript containing
this treatise was most probably written for Sultan Mahmud I, as his seal
attests, and can be dated within his reign.
7. Princeton, University Library, Garrett 3168Y,2 (MS O / ‫)ع‬.
The manuscript consists of 17 numbered folios, and contains the treatise
of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā on the celestial globe (ff. 2v–12v), the anonymous
treatise ‫ رســالة فــي الكــرة المســماة بــذات الكرســي‬Treatise on the Globe which is
called ‘with Stand’ (ff. 12v–16v) and another short passage on f. 17r.
The titles of both treatises written on f. 2r seem to be a later addition
by a different hand. There is no date on the manuscript; according
to the library’s online catalogue, the manuscript is ‘between 17–? and
18–?’,121 while in the printed catalogue it is approximately dated 11th–

119
For the seals of the above-mentioned sultans see Necipoğlu, Appendix III in Treasures of Knowledge,
vol. I; for Sultan Bāyazīt II see pp. 1025–75; for Sultan Mahmud I see pp. 1060, 1062 and 1074. On
ff. 84v and 85r, the seals of Sultan Bāyazīt II are on a folded corner of the manuscript. This fact shows that
the original size of the folios of some treatises was probably larger; later the margins of these folios were cut
– leaving only the seals with the original margin –, so that the five treatises could be bound in one volume.
120
The chapters dealing with stars have been removed, as well the chapter on the domification.
121
https://dpul.princeton.edu/islamicmss/catalog/st74cv08m, accessed on 30.1.2021. The
manuscript is online available at the Princeton Digital Library of Islamic Manuscripts through the
above link.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
28 INTRODUCTION

12th c. h (ad 1592–1786).122 The text has many variants in common

with manuscripts B, J and H used in the critical edition.
8. Princeton, University Library, Garrett 1066Y,3 (MS F / ‫)ف‬.123
The manuscript consists of 111 numbered folios. The title of the treatise
is ‫( رســالة كــرة ذات الكرســي‬Treatise 〈on the〉 Globe with Stand)) and ap�
pears on f. 20r, and the text of the treatise is on ff. 20v–28v. Although
there is neither colophon, nor date at the end of this treatise, the manu-
script can be dated 1131 h (ad 1718–9) according to the date men-
tioned in three other treatises on ff. 13r, 57v and 69v. There is an error
in chapter enumeration after Chapter 8: There is no Chapter 9, and
Chapters P9–P33 are numbered from 10 to 34. At the beginning of
Chapter 31, which corresponds to P30, the same redundant addition
from Chapter P33 appears as in manuscripts D and K. However, MS F
has more variants in common with MS K. These three manuscripts be-
long to the same family.
9. Berlin, Staatsbibliothek Preußischer Kulturbesitz, Landberg 131,2
(MS Ṣ / ‫)ص‬.124
The manuscript consists of 167 numbered folios, and the treatise appears
on ff. 16v–25v. A title ‫( رسالة الكرة‬Treatise on the Globe) is only found in
the table of contents on f. 2r, written by a different hand. The colophon
is undated. However, three other treatises in the same manuscript are
dated 1136 h (f. 39v), 1141 h (f. 76r) and 1140 h (f. 79v); also according
to the library’s data, the manuscript is dated 1136 h / ad 1723–4.125 It
has several variants in common with manuscripts B, J and H used in the
critical edition, and does not present any significant differences. There
are some glosses on ff. 18r, 18v and 20r.
10. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Bağdatlı Vehbi 2063,3 (MS Sh / ‫)ش‬.126

122
See Mach, Catalogue of Arabic Manuscripts, no. 4967, p. 428. For the first treatise of the manu-
script, only the 12th c. h (ad 1689–1786) is mentioned (no. 4901, p. 423); however, both treatises
are written in the same hand. The reference to a manuscript from al-Azhar Library in Cairo allegedly
containing the same treatise, mentioned in entry no. 4967, corresponds to the manuscript Ḥalīm,
Falak wa mīqāt 328, which only contains the anonymous Treatise on the Globe with Stand with 13
chapters. The two treatises only have the first five words of the incipit in common.
123
Mach, Catalogue of Arabic Manuscripts, no. 4967, p. 428. The manuscript is in the Princeton
Digital Library of Islamic Manuscripts, and online available at https://dpul.princeton.edu/islam-
icmss/catalog/rv042x35s (accessed on 30.1.2021).
124
Ahlwardt, Verzeichnis der arabischen Handschriften, vol. V, no. 5869, p. 269.
125
http://resolver.staatsbibliothek-berlin.de/SBB000306D800000000, accessed 10.3.2024, gives
the date as 1136 h / ad 1723–24.
126
Mentioned as a work of Akhawayn, although the treatise is anonymous, in İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı
Astronomi, no. 31, p. 65, and Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303; however, in both

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 29

The manuscript consists of 39 numbered folios. The treatise on the

celestial globe dhāt al-kursī appears on ff. 30v–39r without a title. In a
short colophon on f. 39r, the manuscript is dated 1158 h (ad 1745–6).
There are various interlinear or marginal glosses on almost every folio.
It has several variants in common with manuscripts B, J and H used in
the critical edition.
11. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Yazma Bağişlar 1353,4 (MS Th / ‫)ث‬.
Mentioned in Osmanlı Astronomi and MAOSIC as a work of Akha-
wayn, although the treatise is anonymous.127 The manuscript consists
of 85 numbered folios. The treatise on the celestial globe appears on
ff. 40r–48r; on f. 40r there are only the title Treatise 〈on〉 the Globe
‫ رســالة كــرة‬and a stamp with the manuscript’s data. The title on f. 40v
is Treatise on the Knowledge of the Globe ‫رســالة فــي علــم الكــرة‬.. In the col�
ophon (f. 48r), it is mentioned that the treatise was completed on 29
Ramaḍān 1155 h (27.11.1742) at Constantinople / Istanbul ‫قســطنطنية‬
by the copyist ʿAbd-Allāh ibn Muḥammad. The treatise consists of 32
chapters, instead of 33; chapter 22 has been omitted. There are vari-
ants in common with all of the manuscripts used in the critical edition,
mostly with B, J, H, Z. The 8 glosses in the introduction, in the mar-
gins of ff. 36v–37v, are not in common with those in the other manu-
scripts.
12. Rabat, Bibliothèque Nationale du Royaume du Maroc,128 D 162,4
(MS Kh / ‫)خ‬.
The manuscript consists of 248 folios, both foliated and paginated, and
was copied at the beginning of Jumādā al-Thānīa 1273 h (this month
began on 27 January ad 1857); the style of the script is western Ara-
bic (Maghrebi). It is mentioned in the second edition of the catalogue
by Lévi-Provençal, where the treatise in question appears with the title
Treatise on the Globe which is called ‘with Stand’ by the Wise Astron-
omer Ptolemy the Roman / Greek ‫رســالة فــي الكــرة المســماة بــذات الكرســي‬
‫لبطلميــوس الرومــي الحكيــم الفلكــي‬, 129 although there is no such title in the
sources the manuscript number is erroneously written as 2023 instead of 2063.
127
İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no. 31, p. 65, and Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893,
p. 303.
128
This library was previously called al-Khizāna al-ʿĀmma.
129
See Lévi-Provençal, Fihris al-makhṭūṭāt, 2nd ed., no. 449, pp. 141–44; the fourth treatise is de-
scribed on p. 142. In Lévi-Provençal, Les manuscrits arabes de Rabat, 1st ed., no. 449, pp. 172–75,
the treatise is not mentioned. It seems that the title was added by Ṣālaḥ al-Tādlī and Saīd al-Mrābṭī,
who made the revision of the 1st edition. I am grateful to Ahmed Chaouqui Binebine and Víctor
de Castro León for providing me with the manuscript scans, and to José Bellver who also helped in
acquiring the scans and noted the omission of the treatise in the first edition of the catalogue.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
30 INTRODUCTION

manuscript. There are two treatises on the celestial globe in the manu-
script; on pp. 1–21 the Treatise of al-Ḥamīdī on the Globe, and on
pp. 147–70 the Treatise on the Globe; these titles are quoted only in
the table of contents (f. 1r). The treatise stems from the same exemplar
as MS D from the Dār al-kutub used in the critical edition, and be-
longs to the family of manuscripts D, F, K.130 However, manuscript Kh
includes several additional variants.
There are also three manuscripts that attribute the treatise to Muḥyī al-Dīn
Muḥammad ibn Qāsim, known as Akhawayn (15th c. ad).131 These manuscripts
are the following:
1. Princeton, University Library, Islamic Manuscripts New Series 243,13
(MS R /‫)ر‬.132
The manuscript consists of 136 numbered folios, and includes astro-
nomical treatises in Arabic, Ottoman Turkish and Persian copied in
different times between the sixteenth and seventeenth century ad. The
treatise in question appears on ff. 132r–136r. There is no title at the
beginning of the treatise, but in the table of contents on f. 1r, two
‫( رسالة كرة‬Treatise 〈on the〉 Globe)) are mentioned. The first one is a dis�
torted version of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā’s treatise on the globe, and appears on
ff. 100v–131v; the second one corresponds to treatise P. The text of the
treatise has several variants in common with manuscripts B, J and H
used in the critical edition. In Chapters 11–28, empty spaces had been
left for the enumeration of the chapters and the abjad numbers within
the chapters, probably to be filled later with red colour. The colophon,

130
The part of the redundant addition at the beginning of Chapter 30 that appears in manuscripts
K and F, and was crossed out in MS D, has been omitted in MS Kh, leaving only the word ‫ البلــد‬that
was not crossed out in D. However, MS Kh does not stem from D, because MS Kh contains some
variants that had been omitted or altered in MS D, e.g. ‫ ذلــك الكوكــب فــي‬in Kh omitted in D (P5),
‫ وفــي معرفــة البعــد بيــن مشــارق الكوكبيــن‬in Kh omitted in D (P13), ‫ ســو‬in Kh instead of ‫ هــو‬in D (P24), and
others. For similar reasons, none of the manuscripts K, D, Kh stems from F, which is the oldest of
the family; e.g. manuscripts K, D, Kh contain the correct variants ‫ ) ( كد‬and ‫معكوًســا‬ ً instead of the
erroneous ‫ ) ( يــب‬and ‫منكوًســا‬ ً in F (P24 and P25 respectively), they also contain the term ‫ طلــوع‬in
the title of P20 omitted in F, and others. Also, manuscripts D, Kh do not stem from K, because some
variants omitted in K, such as ‫ مــن �أج ـزاء ال�أفــق‬in P13, ‫ وجهــة عرضــه‬in P20, and ‫ الثابتــة‬in P23, appear in
D and Kh.
131
I am grateful to my colleague José Bellver (at the time: Ptolemaeus Arabus et Latinus), who
noticed the attribution to Akhawayn in these manuscripts.
132
Mentioned as a work of Akhawayn in Mach and Ormsby, Handlist of Arabic Manuscripts (New
Series), no. 1227, p. 287; in İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no. 31, p. 65; and in Rosenfeld and İh-
sanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303. The manuscript is in the Princeton Digital Library of Islamic
Manuscripts, and online available at https://dpul.princeton.edu/islamicmss/catalog/j9602390r
(accessed on 30.1.2021).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 31

in red colour, includes elements of the colophons of manuscripts A, K

and M, and an attribution of the last three treatises to Muḥammad,
known as Akhawayn.133 The date is mentioned as ‘the beginnings of the
month Rajab of the year 965 H’ and corresponds to April 1558. Thus,
this is the oldest copy of the treatise found so far. Since the preceding
treatise in the manuscript was copied in 1018 h (ad 1609–10), we may
conclude that the initial volume containing the three treatises had been
dismantled, and this volume had been bound later. Only the anony-
mous and undated third treatise of the manuscript (ff. 32v–40r), which
deals with the sine quadrant, seems to have the same handwriting as
the treatise attributed to Akhawayn. This treatise consists of 10 num-
bered chapters and the beginning is missing, although f. 32r is empty.
2. Istanbul, Beyazit State Library, Veliyüddin Efendi 3194,9 (MS S / ‫)س‬.134
The title of the treatise ‫( رســالة مولانــا اخويــن لــذات الكرســي‬Treatise of our
master Akhawayn for the 〈Globe〉 with Stand), on f. 88r, attributes the
treatise to Akhawayn. The text of the treatise is on ff. 88v–94v and has
no significant differences from that of the rest of the manuscripts ex-
amined; there are several variants in common with manuscripts B, J,
H, U and Z used in the critical edition. In the margins, the enumera-
tion of the chapters with the beginning of each title is repeated. There
are also some glosses on ff. 88–90. In the lower margin of f. 90v, there
are three astrological diagrams. At the end of the treatise is mentioned
١١٥٤ ‫ ســنة‬،‫ حســن بــن محمــد‬،‫‘( ت ّّمــت الرســالة‬The treatise has been complet�
ed, Ḥasan ibn Muḥammad, year 1154’); thus the treatise was copied in
1154 h (ad 1741–2).
3. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Bağdatlı Vehbi 2124,6 (MS T / ‫)ت‬.135
The manuscript consists of 134 partially numbered folios plus an un-
numbered folio with the table of contents at the beginning. The trea-
tise appears on ff. 105v–114v; however, only f. 110 is numbered. There
are 19 lines per page on ff. 105v–113v, while f. 114 is more densely
written, presumably in the same hand, containing 30–31 lines per page.
The title in the table of contents is ‫( رســالة الكــرة ذات الكرســي‬Treatise on
the Globe with Stand) and below it the name of Ptolemy (‫ )بطلمــوس‬is

133
For the Arabic text of the colophon and an English translation, see the critical edition below,
pp. 94–95.
134
Mentioned as a work of Akhawayn in İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no. 31, p. 65; and in Ros-
enfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303.
135
Mentioned as a work of Akhawayn in İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no. 31, p. 65, and Rosen-
feld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303; however, in both sources the manuscript number is
erroneously written as 2123 instead of 2124.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
32 INTRODUCTION

written in another hand, while on the top of f. 105v it is stated in red

colour that ‘this is the Treatise of our master Akhawayn for the 〈Globe〉
with Stand’ ‫هــذه رســالة مولانــا اخويــن لــذات الكرســي‬. The manuscript is dated
1191 h (ad 1777–8) on f. 114v. Various glosses appear on f. 106r be-
tween the lines, and on ff. 107r–108r, 109r and 113r in the margins.
In the right margin of f. 109r, three astrological diagrams are drawn,
almost identical to those on ff. 63v and 90v of manuscripts J and S,
respectively. There are many variants in common with manuscript S,
and additional ones that appear only in this manuscript.
Lastly, Ptolemy’s name appears in the title of a manuscript that probably con-
tains treatise P, but has not been examined. According to the electronic cata-
logue of the Assad Library in Damascus, the manuscript 14621,8 of the library
contains the Explanation of the Treatise on the 〈Globe〉 with Stand by Ptolemy
(‫ ))شــرح رســالة ذات الكرســي لبطليمــوس‬on ff. 80–90. The treatise comprises 33 chap�
ters and the extended incipit and explicit provided are in accordance with the
corresponding passages of treatise P. The date of the manuscript is not men-
tioned. The manuscript previously belonged to the Library of the Madrasa al-
Aḥmadīya in Aleppo.136
As for the various glosses that appear in the manuscripts, there are groups of
manuscripts that include the same or slightly modified glosses:
1. Manuscripts J, L, Ṣ, Sh, S and T, e.g. in Chapters P1, P2, P3, P4, P9.
Some of these glosses appear in the modified manuscript N, in the
chapters corresponding to P2, P3 and P9. The same three astrological
diagrams appear in manuscripts J, S and T in Chapters P10 and P11.137
2. Manuscripts U and Ṭ, e.g. in Chapters P3, P4, P6 and P9. The glosses
in P4 and P9 are the same as in the first group.
3. Manuscripts A and M: there are four glosses in common in the intro-
duction and Chapters P1 and P9.
The manuscripts from Istanbul can be approximately dated between 1682 and
1778, while the dates of the six dated manuscripts from the Dār al-kutub in
Cairo are between 1706 and 1747. At that time Egypt was part of the Otto-
man Empire; this fact explains the glosses in Ottoman Turkish on manuscripts
A, J, D and U. Two of the manuscripts from Cairo, J and H, were copied
during the government of Egypt by Köprülü Abdullah Pasha, of Albanian ori-

136
In 1988 the waqf Libraries of Aleppo merged with the Assad Library in Damascus; see as-
Sawwas, ‘Syria’, in Roger, World Survey of Islamic Manuscripts, p. 192.
137
One of the diagrams is slightly modified in T. Manuscript D also contains an astrological
diagram in these chapters, but it is a different one.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.4 PRESENTATION OF THE MANUSCRIPTS 33

gin (provincial governor of Egypt from July 1729 to July 1731).138 Köprülü was
appointed by Sultan Ahmet III (r. 1703–1730), who had established a library
in Istanbul in 1719. The manuscripts Z, F and Ṣ were also copied during the
reign of Sultan Ahmet III. Four other manuscripts (D, U, Sh and K) were cop-
ied while Koca Rāgib Pasha was provincial governor of Egypt (1744–1748);139
he was a scholar, poet and manuscript collector, and had established the Rāgib
Pasha Library in Istanbul when he was Grand Vizier (1757–1763). There is
a possibility that he had brought the carefully written manuscript Laleli 2135
(MS K) from Cairo to Istanbul. On f. 1r of MS K appears the seal of Sultan
Mustafa III (r. 1757–1774), whose sister Sāliha Sultan married Koca Rāgib Pa-
sha after he became Grand Vizier.140
These Ottoman authorities may have had a special interest in copying cer-
tain Arabic manuscripts, perhaps reflecting broader societal engagement at this
time with scientific writings. We must take in consideration that the eigh-
teenth century follows the era of Galileo and Kepler, which brought new de-
velopments to astronomy, and thus an increased interest in this field. In that
century, many celestial globes were constructed, as the exhibits in various mu-
seums attest. A manual for their use was necessary, and the treatise Dhāt al-
kursī could have played this role. Reflecting the global trend towards engage-
ment with science, new libraries were established in Istanbul and this caused
an increased demand for scientific manuscripts.141 Some manuscripts may have
been ordered and brought from various parts of the Ottoman Empire, among
them Cairo.
Table 5 summarises the principal information on the manuscripts of the
treatise Dhāt al-kursī presented above.
siglum manuscript pag./fol. date h date ad title
Cairo, ‫رسالة ذات الكرسي لبطليموس‬
A Mīqāt Ṭalʿat pp. 1–11 – – Treatise on the 〈Globe〉
189,1 with Stand by Ptolemy

138
Öztuna, Büyük Osmanlı Tarihi, pp. 412–16; Mehmed Süreyya, Sicill-i Osmanî (eds Akbayar
and Kahraman), vol. I, p. 81; and al-Jabartī, Merveilles biographiques et historiques (ed. Mansour
et al.), vol. II, pp. 5–9.
139
Öztuna, Büyük Osmanlı Tarihi, pp. 412–16; Mehmed Süreyya, Sicill-i Osmanî (eds Akbayar
and Kahraman), vol. IV, pp. 1340–41; also al-Jabartī, ʿAbd al-Raḥmān al-Jabartī’s History of Egypt
(eds Philipp and Perlmann), pp. 248–51 and al-Jabartī, Merveilles biographiques et historiques (ed.
Mansour et al.), vol. II, pp. 26–29.
140
Mehmed Süreyya, Sicill-i Osmanî (eds Akbayar and Kahraman), vol. IV, p. 1340.
141
An epigraph on the main gate of the Enderûn building, constructed by Sultan Ahmet III for his
library, explains that ‘this dwelling, destined to collect books, was built at his own expense as a good
deed to serve the lofty ideal of encouraging the learning of science’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
34 INTRODUCTION

siglum manuscript pag./fol. date h date ad title

‫رسالة القسط في العمل بالكرة‬
Cairo,
‫ذات الكرسي لبطليموس‬
B ff. 1r–14r 1149 1736–7 Treatise of Qusṭ on the
K 3844,1
Use of the Globe with
Stand by Ptolemy

J
Cairo,
ff. 59v–69v 1144 1731–2
‫رسالة القسط‬
K 3844,8 Treatise of Qusṭ
Cairo, ‫رسائل ارتفاع‬
D Mīqāt M ff. 1r–12r 1159 1746 Treatises Altitude
101
Cairo,
Riyāḍiyāt
H pp. 232–52 1142 1729–30 –
Taymūr
106,11
‫رسالة مقبولة لكرة المسماة‬
〉‫〈بذات الكرسي لبطليموس‬
Cairo, Mīqāt An Acceptable Treatise
U ff. 66v–74v 1160 1747
Ṭalʿat 202,2 on the Globe called
〈Dhāt al-kursī by
Ptolemy〉
Cairo,
Z Mīqāt M ff. 7v–12r 1118 1706–7 ‫الكرة‬
106,2 The Globe
University of
Ḥ
Riyadh 1007,
ff. 1–9 13th c. 1785–1882
‫رسالة في علم الفلك‬
Falak 520 Treatise on Astronomy
RB
National
Library of
Ṭ Albania, ff. 1–9 1240 1824–5 ‫رسالة كرة‬
523.11 Treatise 〈on the〉 Globe
Dr 6/23D
Istanbul,
Haci ‫رسالة ذات الكرسي‬
I Mahmud ff. 74r–82r c. 1093 c. 1682 Treatise on the 〈Globe〉
Efendi with Stand
5688,6
Istanbul,
K ff. 133v–138r 1158 1745 –
Laleli 2135,4
Istanbul,
c. 1148– c.
L Pertevniyal ff. 1v–11v –
1151 1735–1739
971
Istanbul, ‫رسالة ذات الكرسي لبطلميوس‬
c. 1178– c. Treatise on the 〈Globe〉
M Süleymaniye ff. 1v–12r
1182 1764–1769
1037,1 with Stand by Ptolemy

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.5 WHO WAS AKHAWAYN? 35

siglum manuscript pag./fol. date h date ad title

Istanbul,
N Ayasofya ff. 1v–13v 1143–1168 1730–1754 ‫رسالة الكرة‬
2623,1 Treatise on the Globe
‫رسالة مولانا اخوين لذات‬
Istanbul, ‫الكرسي‬
S Veliyüddin ff. 88r–94v 1154 1741–2 Treatise of our mas-
3194,9 ter Akhawayn for the
〈Globe〉 with Stand
Istanbul,
Bağdatlı
Sh ff. 30v–39r 1158 1745–6 –
Vehbi
2063,3
Istanbul, ‫رسالة مولانا اخوين لذات‬
Bağdatlı ‫الكرسي‬
T ff. 105v–114v 1191 1777–8 Treatise of our mas-
Vehbi
2124,6 ter Akhawayn for the
〈Globe〉 with Stand
Istanbul, ‫رسالة في علم الكرة‬
29
Yazma
Th ff. 40r–48r Ramaḍān 27.11.1742 Treatise on the Knowl-
Bağişlar
1155 edge of the Globe
1353,4
‫رسالة في الكرة المسماة بذات‬
Princeton, ‫الكرسي‬
O Garrett ff. 12v–16v – – Treatise on the Globe
3168Y,2 which is called ‘with
Stand’
Princeton, ‫رسالة كرة ذات الكرسي‬
F Garrett ff. 20r–28v 1131 1718–9 Treatise 〈on the〉 Globe
1066Y,3 with Stand
Princeton,
end of
R IMNS ff. 132r–136r Rajab 965 –
April 1558
243,13
Berlin,
Ṣ Landberg ff. 16v–25v (1136) (1723-4) ‫رسالة الكرة‬
131,2 Treatise on the Globe
Rabat, end of
Kh BNRM, pp. 147–70
Jumādā II
January ‫رسالة في الكرة‬
1273 Treatise on the Globe
D 162,4 1857
Table 5: List of manuscripts of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy.

1.5 Who was Akhawayn?

Muḥammad, known as Akhawayn, is mentioned as the author in the colo-
phon of the oldest preserved manuscript of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī (MS R);
Mūlānā Akhawayn is stated as the author in the titles of manuscripts S and T.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
36 INTRODUCTION

Who was Akhawayn? Is there any early bio-bibliographical reference to Akha-

wayn as author of Dhāt al-kursī?
Taşköprüzade (901–968 h / ad 1495–1561), in his biographic encyclopedia
al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya fī ʿUlamāʾ al-Dawla al-ʿUthmāniyya (Anemones,
on the Scholars of the Ottoman Era), mentions that Akhawayn studied with
some scholars of Rūm (i.e. the area of the Byzantine Empire) and he learned
many things from science. He became professor in some madrasas and later on
he was transferred to one of the Eight Colleges (probably one of the Ṣaḥn-i
Thamān madrasas founded by Sultan Meḥmet II at the great Fātiḥ mosque).142
He died at the end of the ninth century h. Taşköprüzade preserves the titles
of three works by Akhawayn:
i. Notes on the note of the ‘Sharḥ al-tajrīd’ ‫حواش على حاشية شرح تجريد‬
ii. Epistle on the Judgment of the Heretic ‫رسالة في �أحكام الزنديق‬
iii. Treatise explaining the Sine Quadrant ‫رسالة في شرح الربع المجيب‬.143

Muḥyī al-Dīn Muḥammad ibn Qāsim, known as Akhawayn, is mentioned

repeatedly by Ḥājjī Khalīfa in his book Kashf al-ẓunūn, where Akhawayn’s
death is placed in 904 h (ad 1498–9) or at the end of 900 h (ad 1495).144 Fur-
thermore, Akhawayn is mentioned as the author of
i. A comment on the interpretation of the Quran by al-Bīḍāwī under the
title ‫ تعليقــة علــى �أنـوار التنزيــل و�أسـرار الت�أويل‬145
ii. A note on Islamic Theology ‫ حاشية على تجريد الكلام‬146
iii. An Epistle on the Judgment of the Heretic ‫رســالة فــي �أحــكام الزنديــق‬, which
is also presented under the short title The Famous Sword ‫الســيف المشــهور‬

142
In Uzunçarşılı, Osmanlı Devletinin İlmiye Teşkilatı, p. 14, we read the following information:
‘The director of the sixth madrasa (the sixth of the Ṣaḥn Madrasas) was Sinân Kirmâstî, and for the
first time, while his daily wages were fifty silver coins, Mevlâ Ahaveyn (i.e. Akhawayn) became a
müderris / professor with eighty silver coins in 894/1489’.
143
Taşköprüzade, al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya, p. 116.
144
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel); 904 h is stated in vol. II, p. 197 and vol. III, p. 645,
while the end of 900 h is mentioned in vol. III p. 363.
145
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. I, p. 478. It is a note –concerning the suras II
and III (‫ )الزهراويــن‬of the Quran– on the work of al-Bīḍāwī, The Lights of Quran and the Secrets of the
Meaning, mentioned as no. 1402 in vol. I, p. 469.
146
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. II, pp. 196–97. According to Ḥājjī Khalīfa, al-
Sayyid al-Sharīf ʿAlī ibn Muḥammad al-Jurjānī (d. 816) wrote a commentary on the work of Naṣīr
al-Dīn Abū Jaʿfar al-Tūṣī (d. 672 H) Tajrīd al-kalām, mentioned as no. 2448 in vol. II, pp. 193–95.
Then, among other authors, Akhawayn wrote a note on that commentary.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.5 WHO WAS AKHAWAYN? 37

and the extended one The Famous Sword on the Heretic and Curser of
the Prophet ‫ الســيف المشــهور علــى الزنديــق وشــاتم الرســول‬147
iv. A Treatise on the Sine Quadrant, which is a commentary on the treatise
of ʿAṭāʾ Allāh al-ʿAjamī (15th c. ad).148
Also, Ḥājjī Khalīfa, in his work The Ladder of Elevation to the Lives of the
Great and Famous by Generation ‫سلم الوصول �إلى طبقات الفحول‬, written in 1651–2,
a biographical dictionary of 8561 scholars, includes Akhawayn in the entry
no. 4486, presenting the following information: Akhawayn died in Constan-
tinople / Istanbul (‫ )قســطنطينية‬in the month Rabīʿ al-ʾAwwal of the year 904 h
(17 October–15 November 1498 Julian). He studied the scientists of his era,
then he became a professor in several madrasas and later on at the Ṣaḥn ma-
drasa. His works are notes on the Sharḥ al-tajrīd and the principles (‫ )�أوائــل‬of
interpretation (tafsīr /‫ )تفســير‬of al-Bīḍāwī, an Epistle on the Judgment of the
Heretic that he wrote for the heresy of Mūllā Luṭfī, and a Treatise on the Sine
Quadrant. The author of al-Shaqāʾīq mentions him.149
Ibn al-ʿImād (1032–1089 h / ad 1622/3–1678/9), in his work Nuggets
of Gold in the Chronicles of Those Who Have Passed Away ‫شــذرات الذهــب فــي‬
‫�أخبــار ََمــن ذهــب‬, 150 classifies Akhawayn among the prominent scholars, and re�
peats that he was teaching in one of the Thamān madrasas, adding that he
was a ḥanafī (i.e. follower of the Islamic Ḥanafī juridical school), gives 899 h
(ad 1493–4) as the year of his death, and cites three works by Muḥyī al-Dīn,
known as Akhawayn: Note on the ‘Sharḥ al-tajrīd’ of al-Sharīf al-Jurjānī, Epis-
tle on the Judgment of the Heretic and Treatise explaining the Sine Quadrant.
The information preserved by the historians of the sixteenth and seven-
teenth centuries is recurring in the works of several authors of the nineteenth
and twentieth centuries, sometimes with certain modifications.151 None of the

147
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. IIΙ, pp. 363, 408 and 644–45. Akhawayn wrote
this treatise to show why Mūllā Luṭfī was deserving of death.
148
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. IIΙ, p. 402.
149
Kātip Çelebi, Sullam al-wūṣūl īlā ṭabaqāt (ed. İhsanoğlu et al.), vol. III, no. 4486, p. 223.
150
Ibn al-ʿImād, Shadharāt al-dhahab fī akhbār man dhahaba (ed. al-Arnāūʾūṭ and al-Arnāūʾūṭ)
vol. IX, p. 549.
151
Mehmed Süreyya (1845–1909), in Sicill-i Osmanî (ed. Akbayar and Kahraman), vol. IV,
p. 1105, presents the information that Akhawayn was professor at the Ṣaḥn madrasas and died in
Bursa (Ḥājjī Khalīfa in Sullam al-wūṣūl states that he died in Istanbul) in 900 h / ad 1494–5; he is
buried in the Zeyniye cemetery. He only presents two titles of his work, the notes on the Sharḥ al-taj-
rīd and the Epistle on the Judgment of the Heretic. Al-Baghdādī (d. 1920), in Hadiyya al-ʿārifīn,
mentions the three works of Akhawayn from vols II and III of Kashf al-ẓunūn and states that he died
in 904 h (pp. 831–32). Kaḥḥāla (1905–1987) in his 15-volume work Muʿjam al-muʾallifīn pres-
ents the information given by Taşköprüzade (al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya) in vol. IX, p. 31, by Ḥājjī
Khalīfa (Kashf al-ẓunūn) in vol. XI, p. 136, by Ibn al-ʿImād (Shadharāt) in vol. XII, p. 206, and by
the more recent al-Baghdādī in vol. VIII, p. 118. Al-Ziriklī (1893–1976), in al-Aʿlām . Qāmūs tarā-

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
38 INTRODUCTION

aforementioned authors cites the treatises Dhāt al-kursī and Problems in the Sci-
ence of Astronomy. However, Suter (1848–1922) refers to two works of Akha-
wayn: Treatise on the Sine Quadrant according to Taşköprüzade, and Problems
in the Science of Astronomy written for Sinān Pasha and preserved in the Vienna
manuscript 1422.152 The latter is attributed to ‘Muḥammad famous as Akha-
wayn’ on f. 3v of the manuscript of the Österreichische Nationalbibliothek in
Vienna (now Cod. A. F. 418),153 within the text of the treatise. This work is dis-
cussed by Saliba in Islamic Science and in Arabic Planetary Theories.154 The same
treatise is mentioned by Brockelmann (1868–1956) together with the notes on
the interpretation of the Quran by Akhawayn and The Famous Sword.155
Only in contemporary studies the Treatise Dhāt al-kursī is presented as a
work of Akhawayn, probably due to the attribution in three manuscripts. İhsa-
noğlu, studying the history of astronomy literature during the Ottoman peri-
od, presents the following works of Akhawayn:156
i. A note on the Sharḥ al-tajrīd of al-Sayyid al-Sharīf;
ii. Epistle on the Judgment of the Heretic;
iii. Problems (Ishkalāt) in the Science of Astronomy;
iv. A treatise on the quadrant. The title first appears as ‫رســالة الجيــب الجامــع‬,
which could be translated as Treatise of the Universal Sine; then it is
written as Treatise explaining the Sine Quadrant;
v. Treatise on the Globe called Dhāt al-kursī;
vi. Notes on the Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ by Qāḍī Zāde.
The last four works are also mentioned by Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu in MAO-
SIC,157 where the treatise on the quadrant is described as ‘Commentary on
Treatise of ʿAtaallah al-ʿAjāmi on the Sine Quadrant’ (sic), with a reference to
Kashf al-ẓunūn and al-ʿAjamī, but without providing any further information.
However, in Osmanlı Astronomi, which is an earlier work of İhsanoğlu, the

jim, vol. VII, p. 5, claims that Akhawayn was a Damascene noble, and only lists the comment on the
interpretation of the Quran as a work of Akhawayn (from vol. I of Kashf al-ẓunūn).
152
Suter, Die Mathematiker und Astronomen, p. 185; section 448 deals with Akhawayn. Sinān Pa-
sha (d. 891 h / ad 1486), mentioned on f. 4v (line 7) in the Vienna manuscript, was a scholar and
vezir of Sultan Meḥmet II; Suter presents him in section 443, p. 180.
153
Flügel, Die arabischen, persischen und turkischen Handschriften, no. 1422, pp. 488–89. The
same treatise exists in two other manuscripts: Manisa, Provincial Public Library 1698/5, ff. 78–92
(79v–93a in the library’s database), and Kütahya, Vahit Pasha Library 793, according to İhsanoğlu,
Osmanlı Astronomi, p. 64, and Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303.
154
Saliba, Islamic Science, pp. 111–12, 274, 289; and Saliba, ʽArabic Planetary Theoriesʼ, pp. 59–61.
155
Brockelmann, Geschichte der Arabischen Litteratur, p. 230; and Brockelmann, Geschichte der
Arabischen Litteratur. Zweiter Supplement Band, p. 322.
156
İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no. 31, pp. 64–66. In Turkish bibliography the name Akhawayn
appears as Ahaveyn, Ahavayn, or al-Akhwīn.
157
Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 893, p. 303.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.5 WHO WAS AKHAWAYN? 39

treatise is described as consisting of an introduction and 16 chapters, the incip-

it is quoted and a list of seven manuscripts containing the treatise is given. The
incipit is very similar to that of the treatise of Mīrim Chelebī (1475–1525),
having the same title and the same number of chapters, and quoted on p. 93
of the same book. The treatise of Mīrim Chelebī was written in 1494 and
dedicated to Sultan Bāyazīt II (r. 1481–1512).158 At the first look, it is unclear
whether these are two different treatises, and who the real author is in case
they are identical, Akhawayn or Mīrim Chelebī. For example, the colophon of
Risālat al-jayb al-jāmiʻ in manuscript Princeton, University Library, Garrett
317Y,4, ff. 48v–55v, attributes the treatise to Akhawayn, while, as Mach states,
the same text in manuscripts Berlin, SBPK, Or. oct. 34 (Ahlwardt 5855) and
Garrett 2006,20 is ascribed to Mīrim Chelebī; however, this name is not men-
tioned in the Berlin manuscript.159 Probably, the information stated in Osmanlı
Astronomi was not included in MAOSIC because of the above contradiction.
Table 6 summarises the information on the works attributed to Akhawayn,
as presented above.
Taşköprüzade

Ḥājjī Khalīfa

Ibn al-ʿImād

Brockelman
al-Baghdādī

İhsanoğlu
al-Ziriklī
Kaḥḥāla
Süreyya

Suter
Title Subject

Comment on
‫�أنوار التنزيل و�أسرار‬ the interpre-
1 ‫الت�أويل‬ + + + +
tation of the
Quran
‫حاشية على شرح‬ Note on
2 ‫تجريد الكلام‬ Islamic + + + + + + +
theology
‫السيف المشهور‬ Epistle on the
3 ‫على الزنديق وشاتم‬ Judgment of + + + + + + + +
‫الرسول‬ the Heretic
‫رسالة في شرح الربع‬ Treatise on
4 ‫المجيب‬ the Sine + + + + + + +
Quadrant
‫ِالاشكلات في علم‬ Problems in
5 ‫الهيئة‬ the Science of + + +
Astronomy

158
Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC, no. 940, A4, p. 317; İhsanoğlu, Osmanlı Astronomi, no. 47
(2), p. 93; Ahlwardt, Verzeichnis der arabischen Handschriften, vol. V, no. 5855, p. 262.
159
Mach, Catalogue of Arabic Manuscripts, no. 4939, p. 426; Hitti et al., Descriptive Catalog of the
Garrett Collection, no. 2006,20, pp. 599–600; Ahlwardt, Verzeichnis der arabischen Handschriften,
vol. V, no. 5855, p. 262.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
40 INTRODUCTION

6 ‫ذات الكرسي‬ Dhāt al-kursī +

Notes on the
‫حواش على شرح‬ commentary
7 ‫قاضي زاده على‬ on Mulakh- +
‫الملخص‬ khaṣ by Qāḍī
Zāde
Table 6: List of the works attributed to Akhawayn.
We will examine the astronomical works no. 4, 5 and 7 of the above table,
which appear in Ihsanoglu’s works, trying to shed light on the complicated
problem of their authorship. It is necessary to take into consideration some
information about Mīrim Chelebī. Taşköprüzade attests that Mīrim Chelebī
was a prominent scholar with wide knowledge on science, history and both
Arabic and Persian poetry. Sultan Bāyazīt II had appointed him as his instruc-
tor and studied with him mathematical sciences.160 Ḥājjī Khalīfa, in his book
Kashf al-ẓunūn, mentions several works of Mīrim Chelebī, among them the
following works on the quadrant; all of the quadrant treatises were ordered by
Sultan Bāyazīt II:161
i. A Treatise on the Universal Quadrant (Risālat al-rubʿ al-jāmiʿa) consist-
ing of an introduction and 21 chapters;
ii. A Treatise on the (Universal) Quadrant al-Shakkāziya finished by 913 h /
ad 1507–8 and consisting of an introduction and 21 chapters;
iii. A Treatise on the Work with the (Universal) Quadrant al-Shakkāziya consisting
of an introduction and 29 chapters;
iv. A Treatise on the Almucantar Quadrant written in Persian and contain-
ing 20 chapters;
v. A Treatise on the Sine Quadrant written in Persian.
The first of the above treatises is the closest to the Risālat al-jayb al-jāmiʿ(a)
that appears in the above-mentioned manuscripts. It is written in Arabic, but
it consists of 21 instead of 16 chapters in the existing manuscripts and the title
slightly diverges.
Considering the above information we may conclude that Mīrim Chelebī
should have mentioned Sultan Bāyazīt II in his treatise, while Akhawayn
should have written that this work is a commentary on the treatise of ʿAṭāʾ
Allāh al-ʿAjamī. I compared the incipit, the explicit and the titles of the 16
chapters of the anonymous manuscript Berlin, Or. oct. 34 as they are presented
by Ahlwardt,162 who attributes this work to Mīrim Chelebī, with three other
manuscripts:

160
Taşköprüzade, al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya, p. 198.
161
Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. IIΙ, nos 6142–43, p. 401, and no. 6147, p. 402.
162
Ahlwardt, Verzeichnis der arabischen Handschriften, vol. V, no. 5855, p. 262.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 1.5 WHO WAS AKHAWAYN? 41

i. Manisa, Provincial Public Library 6591,6, ff. 87v–96r, anonymous, attri-

buted to Mīrim Chelebī by Rosenfeld and İhsanoğlu;
ii. Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Aşir Efendi 470,9, ff. 109v–120v/80v–
91v (there is a double foliation), (c. 989 h), attributed to Akhawayn in
its title;163
iii. Istanbul, Millet Library, Feyzullah Efendi 2178,2, ff. 7v–23v, attributed
to Akhawayn in its title.
The three manuscripts examined contain the same text that is in agreement
with the description of the manuscript Berlin, Or. oct. 34 in the catalogue.
Thus, it is confirmed that this is a unique treatise that appears in some manu-
scripts attributed to Akhawayn (e.g. Aşir Efendi 470,9; Feyzullah Efendi
2178,2; Garrett 317Y,4) and in some others it is anonymous (e.g. Manisa
6591,6; Berlin, Or. oct. 34).164 It is not clear whether there are manuscripts
where the name of Mīrim Chelebī is stated.
In the text of the treatise, almost half of the preface is dedicated to Sultan
Bāyazīt, son of Sultan Muḥammad (i.e. Meḥmet II the Conqueror), where the
author clarifies that this work was written for him. There is no reference to
ʿAṭāʾ Allāh al-ʿAjamī and his treatise on the sine quadrant. Hence, the attribu-
tion of the treatise to Mīrim Chelebī by Ahlwardt stands to reason, inasmuch as
he was teaching Bāyazīt, and Ḥājjī Khalīfa mentions a similar treatise by him
in Arabic. However, we cannot absolutely exclude the possibility that Akha-
wayn dedicated a treatise on the sine quadrant to the Sultan, and this treatise
was different from his commentary on the work of al-ʿAjamī mentioned by
Ḥājjī Khalīfa.
The doubts on the authenticity of the titles and colophons that attribute
the Risālat al-rubʿ al-jāmiʿ(a) to Akhawayn can also be extended to those of
the Treatise Dhāt al-kursī.
The Notes on the Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ by Qāḍī Zāde, according
to Osmanlı Astronomi and MAOSIC, appear in the manuscript Manisa, Pro-
vincial Public Library 1697. The examination of the manuscript shows that
the attribution is according to a dedication, or a statement of ownership, on
f. 2r: ‘these are the notes of our master Akhawayn on the commentary of Qāḍī
Zāde on the astronomy of al-Jaghminī’. At the end of the note we read that

163
In the same manuscript another work by Mīrim Chelebī is included: the Treatise on the (Uni-
versal) Quadrant al-Shakkāziya in 21 chapters (ff. 93v–107r / 64v–78r), written in Persian and ded-
icated to the Sultan Bāyazīt.
164
Manuscript Zürich, Zentralbibliothek, Or. 4,5 (ff. 122v–142v) contains the same anonymous
treatise, which is attributed to Mīrim Chelebī after comparison with MS Berlin, Or. oct. 34 (Ahl-
wardt 5855); see Nünlist et al., Katalog der Handschriften der Zentralbibliothek Zürich, pp. 19–20.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
42 INTRODUCTION

the authors are ‘Yūsuf and Muḥammad both famous as Akhawayn / the two
brothers’.165 This work is dedicated to the vizier Maḥmūd Pasha.166
As for the preserved manuscripts of the treatise Problems (Ishkalāt) in the
Science of Astronomy, a comparison of its first part between the manuscripts
Vienna, Cod. A. F. 418 (shortly MS V), which is ascribed to Akhawayn, and
the anonymous manuscript Kütahya, Vahidpaşa Library 793 (shortly MS K)
gives interesting results. The text of the first part in MS K (f. 1v) is only a
fragment of that in MS V (ff. 3v–5v); f. 1v of MS K contains half of the text
of f. 3v, some fragments from f. 5r and few words from the colophon on f. 5v
of MS V. Among the omissions are the name of Akhawayn with the phrases
before and after it, and the name of Sinān Pasha. The whole text on f. 4 of
MS V has been omitted. These omissions seem to be deliberate. On the other
hand, the beginning of the second part on f. 6v of MS V appears to be almost
complete on f. 2 of MS K.
A question difficult to answer is raised: Who and for what reason added (or
removed) the name of Akhawayn to (or from) these treatises? It is known that
Akhawayn was one of the judges in the trial of Mūllā Luṭfī (or Molla Lütfî),
prominent scholar, mathematician and theologian, who was accused of being
heretic, sentenced to death and beheaded. Akhawayn wrote an epistle about
this (The Famous Sword on the Heretic and Curser of the Prophet). Mūllā Luṭfī’s
execution was being discussed for many years afterwards and the historians ex-
press doubts whether the accusation was well grounded.167 Perhaps the defend-
ers of Mūllā Luṭfī and opponents of Akhawayn tried to remove his name from
some of his works in that polarised period. It is also possible that Akhawayn’s
students at the Ṣaḥn madrasa added his name on the manuscripts they were
using during their study with him, even if he was not the real author.

165
Ḥājjī Khalīfa in Kashf al-ẓunūn (ed. Flügel, vol. VΙ, pp. 113–14) cites four persons who wrote
notes on the Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ by Qāḍī Zāde in the total of 14 commentaries on the
Mulakhkhaṣ. However, none of them was called Akhawayn. According to the library’s data base the
author of those notes is Yūsuf ibn Muḥammad Akhawayn.
166
Perhaps this person was Maḥmūd Pasha (1420–1474), a vizier during the reign of Meḥmet
II the Conqueror, who had established a mosque and a madrasa in Istanbul. He was a patron of
scholars and poets and had a rich personal library; see Stavrides, The Sultan of Vezirs. Akhawayn and
Maḥmūd Pasha could have met in Istanbul during their lifespan.
167
Molla Luṭfi, in Jones, Censorship, vol. III, p. 1471; Ocak, Osmanlı Toplumunda Zındıklar,
pp. 205–27; Maraş, ‘Tokatlı Molla Lütfi’, in DÎVÂN İlmî Araştırmalar.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 2. The Arabic text and translation of the treatise
Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy

List of abbreviations in the critical edition

Meaning Symbol
addition +
addition of the word ‫ هذا‬above the line ‫↑هذا‬+
addition of the word ‫ هذا‬below the line ‫↓ هذا‬+
the word ‫ في‬is written above the word ‫هذا‬ ‫هذا ↑في‬
the word ‫ في‬is written below the word ‫هذا‬ ‫هذا ↓في‬
omitted –
written twice ٢×
the word ‫ هذا‬is struck through ―
one word or phrase, now unidentifiable, has been struck through or deleted …
change of page / folio in MS ‫د‬ /‫ د‬/
f. 9r ‫ا‬
٩
f. 9v ‫ب‬
٩
In the edition of the Arabic text and the translation I use various types of brackets:
〈…〉 to complete an omission in the Arabic text and the corresponding
translation;
(…) to complete the text of the translation with a word or phrase not existing
in the Arabic text, but necessary for correct rendering;
[…] to denote the translation of an Arabic word or phrase that is superfluous in
the English text and could be omitted.
In the figures included in the commentary, the following notation is used:
φ terrestrial latitude
δ declination
h altitude
Z zenith
P and P′ north and south celestial poles
Π and Π′ north and south poles of the ecliptic
σ and σ′ points of summer and winter solstices
γ and γ′ points of vernal and autumnal equinoxes
circle γσγ′σ′ ecliptic (in red colour in the colour figures)
circle γEγ′W equator (in green colour in the colour figures)
circle ENWS horizon (in blue colour in the colour figures)

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION‬‬

‫رسالة ذات الكرسي لبطلميوس‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/١‬‬

‫بسم اللّٰه الرحمن الرحيم‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٢‬‬

‫‪/‬ب ‪١‬ب‪/‬‬
‫العلى‪ ،‬وزيّنها بمصابيح الدجى‪ ،‬والصالة على رسوله‬‫الحمد لله الذي خلق السموات ُ‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٥٩‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬د ‪١‬ب‪/‬‬
‫الذي هو قطب دائرة أهل ال ُتقى‪ ،‬وعلى آله وأصحابه الذين هم نُجوم ُ‬
‫الهدى‪ ،‬وبعد‪:‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٢‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ف ٕا ّن الكرة المسماة بذات الكرسي كرة عجيبة وآلة غريبة‪ ،‬وأعمالها كثيرة وحصولها‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٦٦‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ز ‪٧‬ب‪/‬‬
‫يسيرة‪ .‬و ا ّٕن سائر االٓالت العمليّة تستعين من العلوم الرياضيّة‪ ،‬و ا ّٕن ذات الكرسي‪،‬‬
‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳۳‬ب‪/‬‬
‫و ا ٕ ّن كانت شريكة في االستعانة‪ ،‬لكنّها منفردة عن غيرها في االٕ عانة‪ .‬ول ّما كانت‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫طي الزوائد‪ ،‬خالية عن بعض الفوائد‪،‬‬‫رسالة القُ ْسطا خارجة عن القسط‪ ،‬محتاجة إلى ّ‬
‫مملوة بالمسامحة‪ ،‬أردت أن أطرح الزوائد وألحق بعض‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫مشوبة بالمساهلة‪ ،‬بل‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫الفوائد‪ ،‬وأترك ما وقع فيها من مسامحة المتقدمين‪ ،‬وأذكر ما تقرر عليه رأي‬
‫والمرجو ممن نظر فيه أن يالحظ أوقاتي فيعفو هفواتي واللّٰه المستعان‬
‫ّ‬ ‫المتأخرين‪.‬‬
‫وعليه التكالن‪.‬‬
‫والرسالة ‪/‬ب‪ /‬مرتبة على مقدمة وع ّدة أبواب‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٢‬ا‪/‬‬

‫والصالة[ ا ب ج د و‪ :‬والصلوة‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬الدجى[ ب ز‪ :‬الدحى‬ ‫‪ 2‬الرحيم[ ک‪ + :‬وبه ثقتي‬

‫‪ 5‬المسماة[‬ ‫وبعد[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الذين[ و‪ :‬اللذين‬ ‫‪ 4‬ال ُتقى[ هـ‪ :‬النقى‬ ‫هـ‪ :‬والصلوة والسالم‬
‫ب ج هـ‪ :‬وهو لها‪ ،‬و‪ :‬وحولها ‪ ↓+‬حصولها‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬في الهامش‬ ‫وحصولها[‬ ‫ب‪ :‬السماة‬
‫تستعين[ ا‪ :‬نستعين‪،‬‬ ‫العمليّة[ ب‪ :‬العلمية‬ ‫‪ 6‬يسيرة[ ب‪ :‬مسيرة‬ ‫االٔيمن‪ + :‬واحوالها‬
‫‪ 7‬منفردة[‬ ‫و ا ّٕن ذات[ ز‪ :‬و ا ٕن اذات‬ ‫الرياضيّة[ ب‪ :‬الرياضة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬الرضية‬ ‫ب ز‪ :‬تسعين‬
‫ِ‬
‫القُسطا[ ج د و‪ :‬القُسط‪ ،‬ب هـ ز‪ :‬القسط‪ ،‬و‪ :‬في‬ ‫‪ 8‬رسالة[ و‪ :‬رسائل ‪ ↓+‬رسالة‬ ‫ز‪ :‬منفرد‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٔ‬
‫الهامش االيسر‪ + :‬وهو اسم يوناني أصله القسطا رحم ببقاء فيه‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬القُ ْسط؛ ‪ ↓+‬اسم حكيم من‬
‫‪ 9‬الزوائد[ ز‪ :‬الن روائد‬ ‫خالية[ ز‪ :‬حالية‬ ‫الزوائد[ ز‪ :‬الد وائر‬ ‫طي[ هـ‪ :‬لحى‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫الحكماء‬
‫والمرجو[‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫رأي[ و‪ :‬آرآء ‪ ↓+‬رأي‬ ‫مسامحة[ و‪ :‬مسامحات‬ ‫‪ 10‬الفوائد[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬الفرائد‬
‫أوقاتي[ ب ج ل‪ :‬اوتأن ّي‪ ،‬ا د‪ :‬اويأتي‪ ،‬هـ‪ :‬اوتاني‪ ،‬و‪ :‬أوقاتي‬ ‫نظر[ ز‪ :‬ىنظر‬ ‫ب ز‪ :‬والمرحو‬
‫فيعفو[ ب‪ :‬فيعمو‪،‬‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫‪ ↓+‬اوتاتي‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬اوتاتي‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬اوتاتي‪ ،‬وفي الهامش االيمن‪ٔ :‬اوقاتي‪ ،‬خ‪َ :‬عوائقي‬
‫هفواتي[ ج هـ‪ :‬صفواتي‬ ‫هـ ز‪ :‬فيعفوا‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 45

Treatise on ‘the 〈globe〉 with stand’ by Ptolemy 1

In the name of God the Merciful the Compassionate.

Praise be to God, who created the high heavens and embellished them with
lanterns shining in the darkness, and prayers upon His Messenger, who is the
pole of the circle of the pious people, and upon his family and his companions,
who are the stars of the right guidance; [and then:]
The globe called dhāt al-kursī (with stand) is an astonishing globe and an
unusual instrument having many functions and easy outcomes. All practical
instruments rely on the mathematical sciences, but ‘the 〈globe〉 with stand’,
although similar in use, is distinct from the others in the assistance (that it
offers). Since the treatise of Qusṭā is imbalanced,2 requires reduction3 of super-
fluities, omits certain uses (of the globe), is flawed by carelessness, and in fact
is full of laxity, I wished to remove the superfluities, include further uses, leave
aside the laxity introduced by previous (scholars) and mention the conclusions
of the later (scholars).4 I hope that whoever studies it will perceive my time5
and excuse my blunders, and God is the Helper and all reliance is upon Him.
The treatise consists of an introduction and a number of chapters.

1
The variants of the title, both in Arabic and English, are presented in Table 5 in the Introduction.
2
The author puns on Qusṭā’s name here.
3
lit. ‘folding’.
4
lit. ‘what the views of later (scholars) settled on’.
5
The meaning is somewhat unclear here. It is possible that the corresponding Arabic term has
not been correctly transmitted, since there are several variants in the manuscripts that do not give
sense to the sentence. I have chosen the term ‫�أوقاتــي‬, i.e. ‘my times’, as the best solution among the
offered possibilities. This term appears in manuscripts U, Ḥ, Ṭ and K. The variant ‫ ََعوائقــي‬, i.e. ‘my
difficulties’, that appears only in manuscript Kh could also be acceptable. Another solution is to read
the term as ‫ويت�أني‬, i.e. ‘to be patient’, which has several common characters with some variants; in this
case the translation would be ‘pay attention and be patient’ instead of ‘perceive my time’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪55‬‬
‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫فالمقدمة‪ :‬في بيان الرسوم التي ‪/‬ج‪ /‬على الكرة وبيان أسمائها‪:‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪ ٦٠‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫الكرة ويقال لها ذات الكرسي أ ً‬

‫يضا‪ ،‬آلة مؤلفة من نفس الكرة والحلقة الثابتة‬
‫‪/‬هـ‪ /‬عليها‪ ،‬وهي حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬والكرسي الحامل لها‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٣‬‬

‫وأ ّما الرسوم‪:‬‬

‫‪/‬د‪ /‬فمنها فلك البروج‪ ،‬وهي الدائرة المرسومة على نفس الكرة المقسومة شس‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٢‬ا‪/‬‬

‫وموقّع على ك ّ‬
‫ل برج منها عدد‬ ‫قسما متساوية؛ المكتوب عليها أسماء البروج يب ُ‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫درجاته‪.‬‬
‫ومنها الدوائر المارة بأوائل البروج‪ :‬وهي الدوائر الستة المتقاطعة في قطبي فلك‬
‫يضا‪ ،‬مسماة بالمارة باالٔقطاب االٔربعة‪ .‬وتُك َتب‬ ‫البروج‪ ،‬و إحداها مارة بقطبي المع ّدل أ ً‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬هذه الدوائر وفلك البروج في بعض االٓلة بالحمرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٦٧‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ومنها مع ّدل النهار‪ :‬وهو دائرة مقاطعة لدائرة فلك البروج في أ ّول الحمل وأ ّول‬
‫يضا مقسومة شس جزءا متساوية‪ ،‬مكتوب عليها أعداد تبدأ من ‪ ١‬ا ٕلى ‪25‬‬ ‫الميزان؛ وهي أ ً‬
‫شس‪.‬‬

‫‪ 16‬حلقة[ ب ج هـ‪– :‬‬ ‫الثابتة[ هـ‪ + :‬عليها‬ ‫والحلقة[ د ز‪ :‬والخلقة‬ ‫‪ 15‬الكرة‪ [1‬ب ج‪٢× :‬‬
‫الدائرة المرسومة[ ک‪ :‬دائرة مرسومة‬ ‫‪ 18‬الدائرة[ ز‪ :‬الدوائر‬ ‫والكرسي[ ز‪ + :‬وهو‬ ‫د ز‪ :‬خلقة‬
‫عليها[ ز‪ :‬عيها‬ ‫‪ 19‬متساوية[ د‪ :‬متساو ًيا‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬متساويتا‬ ‫شس[ ا‪ ،٣٦٠ ↓+ :‬د و ز ک‪ :‬‬
‫الدوائر‪[2‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪ 20‬درجاته[ ز‪ :‬درجة‬ ‫برج[ ب ز‪ :‬بروج‬ ‫وموقّع[ ا‪ :‬والموقع‬
‫ُ‬ ‫يب[ ز‪ :‬‬
‫قطبي[ ز‪ :‬قطب‬ ‫المتقاطعة[ ب‪ :‬التقاطعة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬المقاطعة‬ ‫الست‬
‫الستة[ ک‪ّ :‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الداوائر‬
‫ٔ‬
‫يضا[ و‪ + :‬هي مسماة[ هـ‪ :‬مسمات باالقطاب[‬ ‫‪ 22‬و ا ٕحداها[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬وأحديها أ ً‬
‫ٓ‬
‫في…االلة[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 23‬وفلك[ و‪ ،– :‬ز‪ :‬فلك‬ ‫وتُك َتب[ ا ب ج د ز‪ :‬ويكتب‬ ‫ز‪ :‬باالٔقطار‬
‫مقاطعة[‬ ‫‪ 24‬وهو[ ز‪ :‬وهي‬ ‫بالحمرة[ ز‪ + :‬في الغالب‬ ‫بعض[ هـ‪ ،– :‬ج‪ ↓ :‬االٓلة‬
‫شس[‬ ‫‪ 25‬وهي[ ا د‪ :‬وهو‬ ‫أ ّول…وأ ّول[ ز‪ :‬أقل‬ ‫لدائرة[ ب ز‪ :‬الدائرة‬ ‫ز‪ :‬متقاطىعة‬
‫جزءا[ ا د‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ب ج هـ و‪ :‬أجزاء‪،‬‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫شس…‪ [١‬ک‪ :‬في الهامش االيمن‬ ‫د و ز ک‪ :‬‬
‫تبدأ[ ا و‪ :‬يبتدأ‪،‬‬ ‫أعداد[ ا د ز ک‪ :‬أعدادها‬ ‫مكتوب[ ز‪ :‬مكتون‬ ‫ز‪ :‬غير واضح‬
‫‪ [١‬ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ب ج د هـ ک‪ :‬يبتدئ‬

‫‪ 25‬شس[ ‪٣٦٠‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬يب[ ‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬شس[ ‪٣٦٠‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 47

Introduction
On the presentation of the drawings which are on the globe and presentation
of their names:
The globe, also called ‘the 〈globe〉 with stand’, is an instrument consisting of
the globe itself, the fixed ring on it, which is the meridian ring, and the stand
that supports it.
As for the drawings:
[Among them is] the ecliptic: This is the circle which is drawn on the globe
itself, divided into 360 equal parts. Written on it are the names of the 12
zodiacal signs; on each of the signs, the number corresponding to its degrees
is inscribed.
[Among them are] the circles passing through the first points of the signs:
These are the six circles that intersect (each other) at the two poles of the
ecliptic. One of them also passes through the two poles of the equator, and
so is called the one which passes through the four poles. These circles and the
ecliptic are drawn in red on the instrument.
[Among them is] the equator: This is the circle that intersects the circle of
the ecliptic at the first point of Aries and the first point of Libra. It is also
divided into 360 equal parts; the numbers are written on it starting from 1 up
to 360.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪56‬‬
‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫ومنها دائرة نصف النهار‪ :‬فهي الحلقة الثابتة على الكرة‪ ،‬والكرة ‪/‬ب‪ /‬تتحرك في‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٢‬ب‪/‬‬

‫يضا تتحرك على الكرة‪ .‬وهي أ ً‬

‫يضا مقسومة شس جزءا متساوية‪.‬‬ ‫داخلها‪ ،‬وهي أ ً‬
‫ومنها دائرة االٔفق‪ :‬وهي حلقة الكرسي التي تنصب عليها الكرة‪ ،‬وهي أ ً‬
‫يضا‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫مقسومة شس جزءا متساوية‪ ،‬وقّع عليها أعداد مشارق الصيف‪ ،‬ومشارق الشتاء‪،‬‬
‫ومغارب الشتاء‪ ،‬ومغارب الصيف‪.‬‬
‫الخط الذي ك ُِتب في طرفيه ‪/‬ا‪ /‬لفظا‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط المشرق والمغرب‪ :‬وهو‬ ‫‪/‬ج‪ /‬ومنها‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٠‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ا ‪/٣‬‬
‫المشرق والمغرب‪/ ،‬د‪ /‬المقطوع بدائرة االٔفق‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬د ‪٢‬ب‪/‬‬
‫الخط الذي ك ُِتب في طرفيه لفظا الشمال والجنوب‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ :‬وهو‬ ‫ومنها‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫المقطوع باالٔفق‪.‬‬
‫ومنها قطبا فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ :‬وهما الثقبان اللذان فيهما ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬المسماران اللذان‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٤‬‬

‫بهما تُ� َث َّ�بت الحلقة على الكرة‪ ،‬وبهما تدور الحلقة على الكرة والكرة في الحلقة‪.‬‬
‫وهما ثابتان‪ ،‬وبعدهما عن أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار كلّها متساو‪.‬‬
‫ومنها قطبا فلك البروج‪ :‬وهما النقطتان اللتان ‪/‬ز‪ /‬تتقاطع عليهما الدوائر الست‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪٨‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪40‬‬ ‫المذكورة؛ وبعدهما عن أجزاء دائرة فلك البروج كلّها متساو‪.‬‬

‫‪ 28‬تتحرك[ ب ج ز يتحرك‬ ‫تتحرك…‪ 28‬داخلها[ ز‪ :‬يتحرك في داحلها‬ ‫‪ 27‬الحلقة[ د‪ :‬الخلقة‬

‫جزءا[ ا ب ج د‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬هـ‪ :‬جزأ‪ ،‬و‪ :‬أجزاء‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬جزاًء‬ ‫د و ز ک‪ :‬‬ ‫شس[‬ ‫وهي‪ [2‬ا‪ :‬فهي‬
‫جزءا[ ا د‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ب‪ :‬جزاء‪،‬‬ ‫د و ز ک‪ :‬‬ ‫‪ 30‬شس[‬ ‫‪ 29‬تنصب[ ا د و ک‪ :‬ينصب‬
‫‪ 31‬ومغارب‪… 1‬الصيف[ ا و‪ :‬ومغارب الصيف‪ ،‬ومغارب‬ ‫الشتاء[ ب ج د هـ ز‪ :‬الشتا‬ ‫و‪ :‬أجزاء‬
‫ّ‬
‫الخط[‬ ‫‪ 34‬وهو‬ ‫‪ 33‬المقطوع[ ج و‪ ↓ :‬بدائرة‬ ‫‪ 32‬لفظا[ ز‪ :‬لفظ‬ ‫الشتاء‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ومغاربهما‬
‫‪ 35‬باالٔفق[‬ ‫الشمال والجنوب[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬الجنوب والشمال‬ ‫لفظا[ ز‪ :‬لفظ‬ ‫ز‪ :‬هو الحط‬
‫الثقبان اللذان[ هـ‪ :‬الثقبتان التان‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬الثقبتان اللذان‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬الثقبتان‬ ‫‪ 36‬النهار[ ز‪ :‬النها‬ ‫ز‪ + :‬أيضا‬
‫تُ� َث َّ�بت[‬ ‫‪ 37‬بهما[ ب ج‪– :‬‬ ‫اللذان‪ [2‬هـ‪ :‬الذان‬ ‫اللذان‪… 1‬المسماران[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫اللتان‬
‫والكرة…‬ ‫تدور[ ا ب ج هـ ز ک‪ :‬يدور‬ ‫وبهما[ ا‪ :‬وبها‬ ‫ا ب ج هـ‪ :‬ثبت‪ ،‬د‪ :‬يثبتت‪ ،‬و‪ :‬يثبتان‬
‫عن[‬ ‫ثابتان[ ز‪ :‬ثابتا‬ ‫‪ 38‬وهما[ ب ج هـ و‪ :‬فهما‬ ‫الحلقة‪ [3‬ب ج هـ‪ ،– :‬و ز‪ :‬وبالعكس‬
‫متساو[ ا‪ :‬متساوية‪ ،‬د‪ُ :‬مساوٍة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬مساوية‬ ‫مع ّدل[ ب ج‪ ،– :‬هـ‪ :‬معدل ↑ فلك النهار‬ ‫د‪ :‬من‬
‫اللتان[‬ ‫النقطتان[ هـ‪ :‬الثقبتان‪ ،‬و‪ :‬النقطتا‬ ‫‪ 39‬فلك[ ا ب ج هـ‪ ،– :‬ک‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيمن‬
‫الست[ ب ج د هـ ز‪ :‬الستة‬ ‫عليهما[ ک‪ :‬عليها‬ ‫تتقاطع[ ا ب ج و‪ :‬تقاطع‬ ‫هـ‪ :‬التان‬
‫متساو[‬ ‫فلك البروج[ ب ج‪ ،– :‬و‪ ↓ :‬كلّها متساوية‬ ‫‪ 40‬وبعدهما[ و‪ ،٢× :‬ز‪ :‬وبعدها‬
‫ا ب ج د و‪ :‬متساوية‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬متسوية‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 49

[Among them is] the meridian circle: This is the fixed ring on the globe.
The globe moves inside it, and it moves on the globe as well. It is also divided
into 360 equal parts.
[Among them is] the horizon circle: This is the ring of the stand on which
the globe is installed and it is likewise divided into 360 equal parts. The num-
bers corresponding to the (sun) risings in summer, the (sun) risings in winter,
the (sun) settings in winter and the (sun) settings in summer are marked on it.
[Among them is] the East-West line: This is the line with the terms ‘East’
and ‘West’ written at its two extremities, and which divides the horizon circle.
[Among them is] the meridian line: This is the line with the terms ‘North’
and ‘South’ written at its two extremities, and which divides the horizon.
[Among them are] the two poles of the equator: These are the two holes with
pegs inside them, by which the ring is fixed on the globe, and on which the
ring rotates on the globe and the globe in the ring. These two (poles) are fixed
and their distances from all degrees of the equator circle are equal.
[Among them are] the two poles of the ecliptic: These are the two points on
which the six aforementioned circles intersect each other. They are of equal
distance from all degrees of the ecliptic.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪57‬‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫ومنها منازل القمر‪/ :‬ب‪ /‬وهي الدارات الصغار ⟩في⟨ البروج‪ ،‬المختلفة في العظم‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٣‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الموقّع عليها أسماء ‪/‬ک‪ /‬الكواكب الثمانية والعشرين الواقعة على فلك‬
‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٤‬ا‪ /‬والصغر؛ ُ‬
‫البروج وعلى جنبيه‪.‬‬
‫الموقّع عليها أسماء الكواكب التي في‬
‫ومنها بعض الثوابت‪ :‬وهي الدوائر الصغار ُ‬
‫‪45‬‬ ‫شبكة االٔسطرالب‪.‬‬
‫ومنها دوائر الميل‪ :‬وهي الدوائر التي ‪/‬و‪ /‬تتقاطع على قطبي المع ّدل‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٦٧‬ب‪/‬‬

‫واعلم أن بعض هذه الرسوم ال ُيرسم في بعض ذات الكرسي‪ ،‬وقد يزاد على ما‬
‫ذكر في بعضها‪ ،‬واالٔكثر االقتصار على ما ذكر‪.‬‬

‫الباب اال ٔ ّول‪ :‬في معرفة وضع الكرة‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂1‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫وهو أن تضع الكرسي ق َّدامك مواجها لِما بين مشرقي ‪/‬ج‪ /‬الجدي والسرطان‪ ،‬وأن‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦١‬ا‪/‬‬

‫تضع الكرة في الكرسي بحيث ‪/‬د‪ /‬يدخل بعض دائرة نصف النهار جوف الخشبة‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٣‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشمالي من االٔفق بقدر عرض‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الموضوعة على جهة أسفل الكرسي‪ ،‬وأن ترفع القطب‬
‫البلد الذي تريد أحكامه‪ .‬وأنت خبير بأن االٔفالك مستديرة‪ ،‬وأن الحركة الذاتيّة لبعضها‬
‫من المشرق ا ٕلى المغرب ولبعضها بالعكس؛ وأن الحركة الظاهرة المحسوسة لك ّ‬
‫ل‬
‫شرقية بواسطة حركة فلك االٔفالك‪ ،‬وأن أوضاع هذه ‪55‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫واحد منها حركة عرضيّة ‪/‬ب‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٣‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الحركة تختلف ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬باختالف المواضع؛ ف ٕان الموضع الذي يكون المع ّدل في سمت‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٥‬‬

‫‪ 41‬الدارات…البروج[ ا‪ :‬الدارات البرج الصغار‪ ،‬ب ج هـ‪ :‬المدارات البروج الصغار‪ ،‬د‪ :‬مدارات البروج‬
‫↓ البروج‬ ‫الصغار‬ ‫ک‪ :‬مدارات‬ ‫الصغاو‪،‬‬ ‫البروج‬ ‫ز‪ :‬مدارت‬ ‫الصغار‪،‬‬ ‫و‪ :‬المدارات‬ ‫الصغار‪،‬‬
‫‪ 43‬جنبيه[ ز‪ :‬جنبه‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬جنبيها‬ ‫‪ 42‬الثمانية…‪ 44‬الكواكب[ ک‪ :‬في الهامش العلوي‬
‫‪ 45‬االٔسطرالب[‬ ‫الصغار[ أو الصفار؟‬ ‫الدوائر[ ا ب ج هـ و‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 44‬الثوابت وهي[ ک‪– :‬‬
‫تتقاطع[‬ ‫التي[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 46‬دوائر[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬دائرة‬ ‫ب ج ک‪ :‬االٔصطرالب‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬االٔسطرال‬
‫هذه الرسوم[ ز‪ :‬هذا المرسوم‬ ‫‪ 47‬بعض‪ [1‬ک‪ ↑ :‬هذه‬ ‫المع ّدل[ و‪ :‬مع ّدل‬ ‫ب ج هـ‪ :‬تقاطع‬
‫مشرقي[‬ ‫‪ 50‬مواجها[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬موجها‬ ‫‪ 48‬بعضها[ ز‪ :‬بعض‬ ‫ُيرسم[ هـ ز‪ :‬ترسم‬
‫جوف[ هـ‪ :‬خرق‬ ‫يدخل[ ز‪ :‬تدخل‬ ‫‪ 51‬الكرة في[ ک‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيسر‬ ‫ز‪ :‬مشرق‬
‫‪ 54‬ولبعضها[‬ ‫‪ 53‬لبعضها[ ز‪ :‬بعضها‬ ‫عرض[ ب ج ز‪ :‬العرض‬ ‫‪ 52‬ترفع[ ز‪ :‬يرفع‬
‫شرقية[ ب ج د هـ و ک‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫الظاهرة[ ز‪ :‬الطاهرة‬ ‫ب ج د هـ و ک‪ :‬وبعضها‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬بعضها‬
‫‪ 56‬تختلف[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬يختلف‪،‬‬ ‫فلك[ هـ‪ ↑ :‬حركة االٔفالك‬ ‫شرقية…‪ 56‬الحركة[ ز‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫في[ ک‪ ↑+ :‬فيه‬ ‫الموضع[ ب‪ :‬الوضع‬ ‫ف ٕان الموضع[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫باختالف[ هـ‪٢× :‬‬ ‫و‪ :‬مختلف‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 51

[Among them are] the lunar mansions: These are the small houses on the
zodiacal signs, of varying size;6 they bear inscriptions of the names of the 28
stars located on the ecliptic or on its two sides.
[Among them are] some of the fixed (stars): These are the small circles on
which the names of the stars are inscribed, which are placed on the astrolabe’s
grid.
[Among them are] the circles of declination: These are the circles that inter-
sect each other at the two poles of the equator.
You must know that some of these drawings are not drawn on some dhāt
al-kursī, on some others there is more than what has been mentioned, and
most (instruments) are restricted to what has been mentioned.

Chapter one: To know how to position the globe.

(To do) this, you place the stand in front of you facing to what is between
the risings of Capricorn and Cancer and place the globe on the stand, so that
a part of the meridian circle enters the aperture of the wood situated at the
lower part of the stand, and elevate the north pole from the horizon as many
degrees as the latitude of the city that you want to review.7 You should be
aware that the orbs are circular and that the proper motion for some of them
is from the East to the West, and for some others the opposite; and that the
perceived apparent motion for each one of them is a transverse motion from
the East through the motion of the celestial sphere;8 and that the modes of this
motion differ as location varies; in the place where the equator is on the zenith,

6
lit. ‘various in greatness and smallness’.
7
lit. ‘its judgment’.
8
lit. ‘the sphere of the spheres’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪58‬‬
‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫دوالبية؛ والموضع الذي يكون المع ّدل مائال عن‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الرأس تكون الحركة فيه مستقيمة‬
‫حمائلية؛ والموضع الذي يكون القطب مسامتا‬
‫ّ‬ ‫سمت الرأس تكون الحركة منحرفة‬
‫للرأس‪ ،‬تكون الحركة فيه رحويّ�ة‪ .‬ف ٕان أردت أن تشاهد ذلك‪ ،‬فضع قطبي الكرة على‬
‫ثم ارفع القطب شمالي ‪60‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫دائرة االٔفق وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك ترى دورانها مستقيما دوالبيا‪ّ ،‬‬
‫بمقدار ما عن االٔفق وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك ترى دورانها مائال؛ ّ‬
‫ثم ارفع القطب ا ٕلى أن‬
‫يقع على سمت الرأس وينطبق المع ّدل على االٔفق‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك ترى دورانها رحويّا‪ ،‬واللّٰه‬
‫أعلم‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪.‬‬ ‫الباب الثاني‪ :‬في معرفة استواء الليل والنهار في‬ ‫˃‪˂2‬‬
‫‪65‬‬ ‫ي جزء شئت من أجزاء البروج‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فضع القطب على االٔفق‪ ،‬وضع أ ّ‬
‫‪/‬ج‪ /‬على االٔفق‪ ،‬وضع عالمة ‪/‬د‪ /‬على جزء ‪/‬و‪ /‬من المع ّدل الذي وقع في أفق‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦١‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬د ‪٣‬ب‪/‬‬
‫المشرق وعلى جزء منه وقع في أفق المغرب‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة ا ٕلى أن يصير ‪/‬ب‪ /‬ذلك‬
‫‪/‬و ‪٦٨‬ا‪/‬‬
‫الجزء من فلك البروج على االٔفق من جهة أخرى‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد الجزء المعلّم عليه‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٤‬ا‪/‬‬

‫على االٔفق من جهة أخرى‪ .‬وبذلك ُيعلم أن قوسي الليل والنهار متساويان‪.‬‬
‫وطريق آخر‪ :‬أن تضع الجزء المفروض من البروج على االٔفق الشرقي‪ ،‬وأن تعلّم ‪70‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫على الجزء من المع ّدل ‪/‬ا‪ /‬الواقع معه في ذلك االٔفق‪ ،‬وأن تدير الكرة ا ٕلى أن يقع‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٤‬‬

‫‪ 58‬تكون[‬ ‫مائال[ ک‪ ↑+ :‬فيه‬ ‫دوالبية[ ک‪ :‬ودوالبية‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 57‬تكون[ ا ب ج هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يكون‬
‫مسامتا[‬ ‫القطب[ ک‪ ↑+ :‬فيه‬ ‫الحركة[ و‪ ،– :‬ک‪ + :‬فيه‬ ‫ا ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ب‪ :‬ىكون‬
‫‪ 60‬ف ٕانّك[‬ ‫ف ٕان[ ز‪ :‬ف ان‬ ‫‪ 59‬تكون[ ا ب ج هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫ب ج هـ‪ :‬سابقا‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬مساتتا‬
‫دوالبيا[‬ ‫دورانها[ هـ‪ :‬دوراتها‬ ‫ف ٕان ّك…‪ 61‬الكرة[ ج‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيمن السفلي‬ ‫ب‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 62‬يقع[ و‪ :‬تقع‬ ‫‪ 61‬دورانها[ ب هـ‪ :‬دوراتها‬ ‫شمالي[ ز‪ :‬الشمالية‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط[‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫واللّٰه…‪ 63‬أعلم[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬ ‫دورانها[ ب هـ‪ :‬دوراتها‬ ‫على‪ [2‬و‪ :‬عن‬
‫‪ 67‬وقع[‬ ‫‪ 66‬االٔفق[ ج‪ ↓+ :‬الشرقي الذي[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ – :‬وقع[ د‪ :‬وقع‬ ‫ز‪ :‬حط‬
‫‪ 69‬أخرى[ ج‪ ↑+ :‬أ ّ‬
‫ي من جهة‬ ‫عليه[ ز‪ :‬عليها‬ ‫‪ 68‬تجد[ ز‪ :‬ترى‬ ‫أ ِد ْر[ و‪ :‬تدير‬ ‫د‪ :‬موقع‬
‫‪ 70‬الجزء[‬ ‫متساويان[ و ک‪ :‬متساويتان‬ ‫والنهار[ ز‪ :‬والنها‬ ‫قوسي[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬قوس‬ ‫المغرب‬
‫يقع[‬ ‫وأن[ ز‪ :‬أن‬ ‫‪ 71‬معه[ ز‪ :‬مه‬ ‫الشرقي[ ز‪ :‬المشرق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫البروج[ و‪ :‬البرج‬ ‫ز‪ :‬جزء‬
‫ا‪ :‬تقع‪ ،‬ب‪ :‬ىقع‬

‫‪ 58‬حمائليّة[ تشبه حمائل السيوف‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 53

the motion will be upright rotational, like a wheel; in the place where the
equator is inclined to the zenith, the motion will be oblique diagonal, like
a baldric;9 in the place where the pole is on the zenith, the motion will be
rotational like a millstone. If you want to see this, put the two poles of the
globe on the horizon circle and rotate the globe and you will see its right
rolling rotation; then raise the north pole by any distance from the horizon
and rotate the globe and you will see its oblique rotation; then raise the pole
so that it falls on the zenith and the equator coincides with the horizon and
you will see its rotary like a millstone motion, and God knows best.

Chapter two: To know the equality of night and day on the (terrestrial)
equator line.
If you want this, place the pole on the horizon and place any degree you
want, among the degrees of the zodiacal signs, on the horizon. Put a mark
on the degree of the equator that falls on the east horizon and on the degree
thereof that falls on the west horizon. Then rotate the globe until this degree
of the ecliptic arrives at the horizon from the other direction, so you find the
degree that has been marked on the horizon on the other side. In this way, it
is understood that the two arcs, of the night and of the day, are equal.
Another way is that you place the given degree of the zodiacal signs on
the east horizon and mark the degree of the equator that falls on this hori-
zon with it. You rotate the globe until

9
baldric: a diagonal belt for carrying a sword.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪54‬‬
‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الغربي‪ ،‬وأن تع ّد من ذلك الجزء من المع ّدل راجعا ا ٕلى‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬هـ‪ /‬الجزءان معا على االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٦‬‬

‫المشرق‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد قف جزءا‪ ،‬وهي التي طلعت في ذلك النهار‪ ،‬وال شك أن ّه‬
‫غربت أجزاءٌ ‪/‬ز‪ /‬بمقدار تلك االٔجزاء في النهار؛ ُ‬
‫فيعلم تساوي الليل والنهار بالضرورة‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪٨‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪75‬‬ ‫الباب الثالث‪ :‬في معرفة أطول النهار وأقصره في االٓفاق المائلة‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂3‬‬
‫ي عدد شئت‪ ،‬وتضع أ ّول السرطان‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بأ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن ترفع القطب‬
‫الشرقي وتعلّم على جزء المع ّدل الذي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫والجدي‪ ،‬وغيرهما في االٔوقات‪ ،‬على االٔفق‬
‫وافى االٔفق مع الجزء الموضوع‪ .‬ث ّم تدير الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك ‪/‬ب‪ /‬الجزء على دائرة‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٤‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلم على جزء المع ّدل الواقع في‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫نصف النهار أو على ‪/‬ج‪ /‬دائرة االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٢‬ا‪/‬‬

‫د ما بين العالمتين‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك ‪/‬د‪ /‬تجد أكثر ال ُن ُهر ‪80‬‬

‫الشرقي في هذا الوقت‪ ،‬وأن تع ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٤‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٤‬ب‪ /‬زمانا نهار أ ّول السرطان‪ ،‬وأقلّها زمانا نهار أ ّول الجدي‪ ،‬وتجد ‪/‬ک‪ /‬نهار أ ّول الحمل‬
‫الجنوبية بالعكس‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالية أكثر زمانا من لياليها‪ ،‬والبروج‬
‫ّ‬ ‫متساويا لليلته‪ ،‬ونُ ُهر البروج‬

‫الجزء[ هـ‪ ↑ :‬من‬ ‫الغربي[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز‪– :‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 72‬الجزءان[ ا د‪ :‬الجزآن‪ ،‬ب ج‪ :‬الجزأن‬
‫بمقدار[‬ ‫‪ 74‬أجزاءٌ …النهار[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 73‬قف جزءا[ ا‪ :‬أجزاء‪ ،‬ب ج د و‪ :‬قف جزء‪ ،‬د‪١٨٠ ↓+ :‬‬
‫بالضرورة[‬ ‫تساوي[ ز‪ :‬يساوي‬ ‫فيعلم[ هـ‪ :‬فتعلم‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ويعلّم‬‫ُ‬ ‫في[ ز‪ :‬و‬ ‫ب ج‪ :‬لمقدار‬
‫‪ 77‬والجدي[ و‪ :‬أو الجدي‬ ‫‪ 76‬أ ّول[ ج‪ :‬أقل‬ ‫‪ 75‬الثالث[ ز‪ :‬الثالب‬ ‫ز‪ :‬بالضرةورة‬
‫‪ 78‬وافى[ ا‪ :‬وقع‬ ‫الشرقي[ ز‪ :‬المشرق جزء[ ز‪ :‬الجزء‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫وغيرهما[ ب‪ :‬وغير‪ ،‬و ک‪ :‬أو غيرهما‬
‫على…‪ 79‬أو[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الموضوع[ ز‪ :‬الموضع‬ ‫االٔفق…الجزء‪ [1‬و‪ ↓+ :‬من فلك البروج‬ ‫في‬
‫‪ 82‬متساويا[‬ ‫‪ 81‬زمانا نهار‪ [2‬ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 80‬ال ُن ُهر[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬النهار‬ ‫‪ 79‬الواقع[ ز‪ :‬المواقع‬
‫ون ُُهر البروج[ ب‪ :‬والنهر‪ ،‬ج‪ :‬نهر ↑ والبروج‬ ‫لليلته[ ب ج و هـ‪ :‬لليله‪ ،‬د ز‪ :‬لليلة‬ ‫د‪ :‬مساويا‬
‫والبروج[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫لياليها[ ب‪ :‬ليالها‬

‫‪ 73‬قف[ ‪١٨٠‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 55

the two degrees come together on the west horizon, and count from that de-
gree on the equator back to the East, so you find 180 degrees. These are the
degrees that have risen during daytime and, without any doubt, the same quan-
tity of degrees has set during daytime. Thus, the equality of night and day can
certainly be understood.

Chapter three: To know the longest and shortest daytime at the oblique
horizons.
The way to do this is to raise the north pole from the horizon by any number
you want. You put the first point of Cancer, Capricorn and any other degree10
on the east horizon and put a mark on the degree of the equator that arrives at
the horizon with the degree that has been placed (on it). Then you rotate the
globe until this degree arrives at the meridian circle or at the circle of the west
horizon and put a mark on the degree of the equator that simultaneously falls
on the east horizon. You count (the degrees) between the two marks, so you
find that the longest daylight (corresponds to) the duration of the daytime at
the first point of Cancer and the shortest one to the duration of the daytime at
the first point of Capricorn. You find the daytime at the first point of Aries to
be equal to its nighttime. The days of the northern signs are longer in duration
than their nights; the opposite (happens) with the southern signs.

10
lit. ‘any other of the points in time’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪56‬‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الباب الرابع‪ :‬في معرفة االختالف بين نهاري يومين في بلد واحد‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂4‬‬
‫الشرقي وأن تعلّم جزئي المع ّدل اللذين‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن تضع الجزئين على االٔفق‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬معهما في االٔفق‪ ،‬وأن تدير الكرة ا ٕلى أن يقع الجزءان في االٔفق الغربي‪ ،‬وأن تعلّم ‪85‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٦٨‬ب‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ل‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫الجزء الواقع في أفق المشرق من المع ّدل‪ ،‬وأن تع ّد ما بين العالمتين‪ ،‬وتسقط االق ّ‬
‫فيما بين العالمتين من االٔكثر؛ فما بقي فهو زيادة أحد اليومين على االٓخر‪ ،‬واللّٰه‬
‫أعلم‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬هـ‪ /‬الباب الخامس‪ :‬في معرفة قوس النهار للشمس وسائر الكواكب وتقسيمه إلى‬ ‫˃‪˂5‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٧‬‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫الساعات الزمانيّة والمستوية‪.‬‬

‫الشمالي بقدر العرض‪ ،‬وتضع الكوكب على االٔفق‬

‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن ترفع ‪/‬ب‪ /‬القطب‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٥‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم جزء المع ّدل الذي معه في هذا االٔفق‪ ،‬وتدير الكرة إلى أن يصل‬
‫ّ‬
‫الشرقي؛ فما‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ثم تعلّم جزء المع ّدل الذي وقع في االٔفق‬
‫الغربي‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الكوكب إلى االٔفق‬
‫بين العالمتين ‪/‬ج‪ /‬هي قوس نهار ذلك الكوكب في ذلك اليوم في ذلك البلد‪ ،‬وما‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٢‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪95‬‬ ‫بقي من ثالثمائة وستين جزءا فهو قوس الليل‪ .‬ف ٕاذا ‪/‬د‪ /‬حصل قوس النهار‪ ،‬فخذ‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٤‬ب‪/‬‬

‫ل خمسة عشر جزءا ساعة مستوية‪ ،‬وما لم يبلغ من االٔجزاء ساعة‪ ،‬فجزء من‬ ‫لك ّ‬
‫ساعة‪ .‬و إذا قسمت أجزاء قوس النهار إلى اثنى عشر‪ ،‬حصل لك عدد أجزاء الساعة‬
‫الزمانيّة‪.‬‬

‫الجزئين[ ک‪ :‬جزءى الشمس في‬ ‫وطريقه…الشرقي[ ا‪– :‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 84‬وطريقه[ ک‪ :‬في الهامش العلوي‬
‫‪ 85‬تدير[‬ ‫اللذين[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬الذين‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬الذي‬ ‫جزئي[ ب هـ ز‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ج و‪ :‬جزئ‬ ‫اليومين‬
‫‪ 86‬أفق[‬ ‫تعلّم[ و ج ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الجزءان[ ا و‪ :‬الجزآن‪ ،‬ب ج‪ :‬الجزان‪ ،‬د‪ :‬الجزأن‬ ‫د‪ُ :‬يدير‬
‫‪ 87‬فيما[ د‪ :‬في‬ ‫تع ّد[ هـ‪ :‬بعد‪ ،‬و‪ :‬تع ّد بعد‪ ،‬ک‪ ↑+ :‬بعد‬ ‫وأن[ ب ج هـ ز‪ + :‬تعلّم‬ ‫و‪ :‬االٔفق‬
‫وتقسيمه[‬ ‫‪ 89‬الكواكب[ ج و‪ :‬الكوكب‬ ‫واللّٰه…‪ 88‬أعلم[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬ ‫ما‪ ،‬و‪ :‬فما‬
‫الكوكب[‬ ‫‪ 91‬بقدر[ ز‪ :‬بقد‬ ‫الزمانية[ ز‪ :‬الزمانيته‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ج‪ :‬وبقسمته‪ ،‬و‪ :‬وتقسيمها‬
‫وقع[‬ ‫‪ 93‬الكوكب[ د‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫يصل[ ز‪ :‬تصل‬ ‫‪ 92‬وتدير[ ز‪ :‬تدير‬ ‫د‪ :‬الكواكب‬
‫متين‬ ‫و‪٦٢‬ب‪:‬‬ ‫العالمتين وفي بداية‬ ‫و‪٦٢‬ا‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 94‬العالمتين[ ج‪ :‬في نهاية‬ ‫فما[ ب‪ :‬فيما‬ ‫ک‪ ↑ :‬في‬
‫فهو[‬ ‫جزء‬
‫ً‬ ‫‪ 95‬جزءا[ ا د هـ ز ک‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ب‪ :‬جزأ‪ ،‬و‪:‬‬ ‫ز‪– :‬‬ ‫في‪… 1‬اليوم[‬ ‫د‪– :‬‬ ‫ذلك‪… 1‬في‪[1‬‬
‫النهار[ و‪ + :‬فقسم قوس النهار وقوس الّيل ا ٕلى خمسة عشر‬ ‫الليل[ و‪ :‬الّيل‬ ‫و‪ + :‬جزء‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬فهي‬
‫فجزء…‪ 97‬ساعة[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫لم[ ز‪ :‬ال‬ ‫جزء‬
‫ً‬ ‫‪ 96‬جزءا[ ا د ز ک‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬و‪:‬‬ ‫حصل ساعة مستوية‬
‫‪ 97‬الساعة[ د‪ :‬الساعات‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 57

Chapter four: To know the difference between the (lengths of ) daylight

of two days in one city.
The way to do this is that you place the two degrees on the east horizon and
mark the two degrees of the equator that are with them simultaneously on the
horizon. You rotate the globe so that the two degrees fall on the west horizon
and mark the degree11 of the equator that falls on the east horizon. You count
(the degrees) between the two marks and subtract the lesser of what is between
the two marks from the greater one; the result will be the excess of one day
over the other, and God knows best.
Chapter five: To know the daytime arc of the sun and of the rest of the
stars and its division into seasonal and equal hours.12
The way to do this is to raise the north pole as many degrees as the latitude,
and place the star on the east horizon, then to mark the degree of the
equator that (falls) on this horizon with it. You rotate the globe until the
star arrives at the west horizon. Then you mark the degree of the equator
that falls on the east horizon; what is between the two marks is the daytime
arc of that star on that day at that city. The remainder, (taken) from 360
degrees, will be the nighttime arc. When you obtain the daytime arc, take
for every 15 degrees an equal hour; any excess degrees that do not complete
an hour will be part of an hour. If you divide the degrees of the daytime
arc into 12, you will obtain the number of degrees of the seasonal hour.

11
It is necessary to mark the positions of two degrees of the equator corresponding to the two de-
grees of the ecliptic that have reached the west horizon.
12
In manuscript K, there are some marginal notes explaining the meaning of the seasonal and equal
hours and their difference. They are written by the copyist’s hand with the indication ‫ ملخــص‬and
were taken from al-Jaghmīnī’s al-Mulakhkhaṣ fī al-hayʾa al-basīṭa.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪61‬‬
‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الباب السادس‪ :‬في معرفة االختالف بين نهاري يوم واحد في بلدين مختلفين في‬ ‫˃‪˂6‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫العرض‪.‬‬

‫الشمالي بقدر عرض أحد البلدين‪ ،‬وتعلّم الجزء الذي مع‬

‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن ترفع القطب‬
‫جزء الشمس في أفق الشرق من فلك المع ّدل‪ ،‬وتدير الكرة‪ ،‬وتعلّم جزء المع ّدل‬
‫الذي وافى المشرق عند كون جزء الشمس في أفق المغرب‪ ،‬وتحفظ ما بين‬
‫ثم تضع القطب على عرض البلد االٓخر‪ ،‬وتكمل العمل المذكور‪،‬‬ ‫العالمتين‪/ .‬ب‪ّ /‬‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٥‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪105‬‬ ‫ل من االٔكثر‪ ،‬فما بقي فهو االختالف المطلوب‪.‬‬

‫وتنقص االٔق ّ‬

‫الباب السابع‪ :‬في معرفة ما مضى من النهار ‪/‬و‪ /‬من ساعة مستوية ومعوجة‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂7‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪٦٩‬ا‪/‬‬
‫وطريقه أن تضع جزء الشمس في االرتفاع الذي تطلب ساعته الماضية‪ ،‬وتعلّم جزء‬
‫الشرقي‪ .‬وتدير الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس إلى هذا‬‫ّ‬ ‫المع ّدل الواقع في االٔفق ‪/‬هـ‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٨‬‬

‫االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم جزء المع ّدل الواقع معه في االٔفق؛ فما بين العالمتين ‪/‬ا‪ /‬من االٔجزاء هو‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٥‬‬

‫‪110‬‬ ‫الماضي من النهار‪/ .‬ج‪ /‬فاقسمه ‪/‬ز‪ /‬على الساعة المستوية والمعوجة‪ ،‬بعد أن تعرف‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٣‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ز ‪٩‬ا‪/‬‬
‫أجزاءها بالطريق المذكور‪.‬‬

‫في‪ [1‬ز‪ + :‬معوجة في معوجة‬ ‫حح‬

‫ص ّ‬
‫السادس[ ب‪' :‬السابع' ُ‬ ‫‪ 99‬الباب السادس[ ز‪– :‬‬
‫مرة ثانية في‬
‫البلدين…‪ 106‬السابع[ ز‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬ ‫أحد[ د‪– :‬‬ ‫الشمالي[ ا ب ج هـ ز‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪101‬‬
‫‪ 102‬أفق[ ز‪،– :‬‬ ‫مع[ ب‪– :‬‬ ‫الجزء[ ب ج ز‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬د‪ :‬جزء المعدل‬ ‫الهامش االٔيمن‬
‫من…المع ّدل‪ [1‬ا ب ج د هـ ز ک‪– :‬‬ ‫الشرق[ د هـ و‪ :‬المشرق‪ ،‬ز ک‪ :‬الشرقي‬ ‫ک‪ :‬االٔفق‬
‫وتحفظ[‬ ‫‪ 103‬الذي[ ز‪ – :‬وافى[ ا‪ :‬وقع في المشرق[ ا ب ز‪ :‬الشرق المغرب[ ا‪ :‬الغرب‬
‫المطلوب[‬ ‫االٔكثر[ ک‪ :‬كثر ↑ اال ٔق ّ‬
‫ل‬ ‫ل[ و‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيسر‬
‫‪ 105‬وتنقص االٔق ّ‬ ‫ز‪ :‬ويحفظ‬
‫من النهار[‬ ‫‪ 106‬السابع[ ز‪ :‬في النص‪ :‬السادس‪ ،‬وفي الهامش االٔيمن‪ :‬السابع‬ ‫ج د هـ و‪ :‬المط‬
‫تطلب[‬ ‫‪ 107‬جزء‪ [1‬د‪ – :‬الشمس[ و‪ + :‬على االٔفق الشرقي في[ ب‪٢× :‬‬ ‫ب ج هـ ز‪– :‬‬
‫الواقع[ د هـ ز‪ + :‬معه‬ ‫‪ 108‬المع ّدل[ ج‪ + :‬الّذى‬ ‫الماضية[ ب‪ :‬لماضية‬ ‫ا د ز ک‪ :‬يطلب‬
‫‪ 109‬االٔفق‪[1‬‬ ‫إلى…‪ 109‬االٔفق‪ [1‬و‪ :‬الغربي‬ ‫حتّى…الشمس[ ا ب ج د هـ ز ک‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 110‬على[‬ ‫هو[ د‪ :‬فهو‪ ،‬ب‪ + :‬االجزاء‬ ‫ب‪ ↓+ :‬الشرقي‪ ،‬ک‪+ :‬حتّى يوافيه جزء الشمس‬
‫بالطريق[‬ ‫‪ 111‬أجزاءها[ ا ب ج و‪ :‬أجزائها‪ ،‬د‪ :‬أجزائهما‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬أجزاءىهما‬ ‫ک‪ + :‬أجزاء‬
‫المذكور[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ا ب ج‪ :‬بطريقه‪ ،‬هـ و ز‪ :‬بطريق‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 59

Chapter six: To know the difference between the daytime (lengths) of

the same day in two cities with different latitudes.
The way to do this is to raise the north pole as many degrees as the latitude
of one of the two cities and mark the degree of the equator that is on the east
horizon, together with the degree of the sun. You rotate the globe and mark
the degree of the equator that arrives at the east (horizon) when the degree
of the sun is at the west horizon, and note the distance between the two
marks. Then you place the pole at the latitude of the other city, complete the
aforementioned process, and subtract the lesser from the greater; the remainder
will be the required difference.

Chapter seven: To know the time that has elapsed since sunrise13 in equal
and unequal hours.
The way to do this is to place the degree of the sun at the altitude of the
required hour14 and mark the degree of the equator that falls on the east
horizon. You rotate the globe, so that the degree of the sun comes to this
horizon, and you mark the degree of the equator that falls simultaneously
on the horizon; the number of degrees between the two marks will be
the daytime that has elapsed. Divide it by (the degrees of ) the equal and
unequal hour after you determine its degrees15 in the aforementioned way.

13
lit. ‘what has passed from the daytime’.
14
lit. ‘which its passed hour requires’.
15
The degrees of the unequal hour are meant here; the way to calculate them is explained in
Chapter 5. The degrees of the equal hour are always 15.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪62‬‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الباب الثامن‪ :‬في معرفة الطالع‪ٕ ،‬اذا كان ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬ ‫˃‪˂8‬‬
‫المستوية أو المعوجة معلوما‪.‬‬

‫الشرقي‪ ،‬فتدير الكرة‪ ،‬فتع ّد من أجزاء‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬د‪ /‬وطريقه أن تضع جزء الشمس على االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٥‬ا‪/‬‬

‫يتم أجزاء الساعة المعلومة؛ فما وقع حينئذ في ‪115‬‬ ‫المع ّدل ما يطلع من االٔفق‪ ،‬ا ٕلى أن ّ‬
‫هذا االٔفق من أجزاء البروج فهو الطالع‪.‬‬

‫الباب التاسع‪ :‬في كيفيّة أخذ ارتفاع الشمس في الكرة‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂9‬‬

‫وتقسمها بتسعين جزءا‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن تأخذ ربع دائرة مساوية لربع الحلقة‪،‬‬
‫‪/‬ب‪ /‬متساوية‪ ،‬وتكتب عليها االٔعداد كما في الحلقة‪ .‬وتنصب الكرة على أرض‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٦‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪120‬‬ ‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٥‬ا‪ /‬مستوية باالٓلة المعروفة‪ ،‬حتّى تكون ‪/‬ک‪ /‬الشمس ظاهرة عليها‪ ،‬نصبا مستويا‬
‫بالشاقول المعلّق من طرفي الكرسي‪ّ .‬‬
‫ثم تنصب على جزء الشمس مقياسا‪ ،‬إبرة أو‬
‫جسما آخر‪ ،‬ملزقا بشمع‪ .‬وترفع القطب بقدر عرض البلد‪ ،‬وتدير الكرة تارة والكرسي‬
‫ل أصال‪ .‬ث ّم تقطع المقياس‪ ،‬وتعلّم‬
‫أخرى‪ ،‬حتّى يظلل المقياس نفسه وال يقع له ظ ّ‬
‫موضعه‪ ،‬وتضع الربع المأخوذ على الكرة‪ ،‬بحيث يقع طرفه الذي ابتدأ منه العدد‬

‫الشرقي[ و‪ + :‬وتكمل العمل‪،‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪114‬‬ ‫‪ 113‬أو[ ک‪ :‬و‬ ‫ما مضى[ ز‪ :‬ماضى‬ ‫‪ 112‬ما[ ب‪– :‬‬
‫حينئذ[ ب ج د هـ ز‪ ،– :‬و ک‪ :‬ح‬ ‫الساعة[ ک‪ :‬الساعات‬ ‫‪ 115‬ا ٕلى أن[ ب‪– :‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الشرق‬
‫وتقسمها[ ا د‪ :‬وتقسيمها‪ ،‬و‪ :‬واقسمها‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫مساوية[ ز‪ :‬مستاوية‬ ‫‪ 118‬وطريقه[ و‪ :‬فطريقه‬ ‫‪8/‬‬
‫‪ 119‬متساوية[ ز‪ :‬مستاوية‪،‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬وتقسيمه بتسعين[ هـ‪ :‬تسعين جزءا[ ا و ز ک‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬د‪ :‬جزأ‬
‫وتنصب[‬ ‫وتكتب[ ز‪ :‬ويكتب‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬تكتب‬ ‫ب‪ :‬مكتوب عموديا في الهامش العلوي االٔيسر‬
‫مستويا[‬ ‫تكون[ ا ب ج و ز‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫‪ 120‬باالٓلة[ ب‪ :‬باالٔدلة‬ ‫أرض[ و‪ ↑ :‬على‬ ‫و‪ :‬وينصب‬
‫أو[‬ ‫الشمس[ و‪ + :‬من الفلك البروج‬ ‫‪ 121‬تنصب[ د‪ :‬ىتنصب‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬انصب‬ ‫ز‪ :‬مستوية‬
‫ملزقا[ ا ک‪ :‬ملزق‪ ،‬ب‪ :‬لمتزق‪ ،‬ج د هـ و ز‪ :‬ملتزق‬ ‫‪ 122‬جسما[ ا ب ج ز‪ :‬جسم‬ ‫ز‪ :‬و‬
‫‪ 123‬يظلل[ د‪ :‬يضلّل‪ ،‬هـ و ز‪ :‬تظل‬ ‫وترفع[ هـ ز‪ :‬ويرفع‬ ‫بشمع[ ب‪ :‬سمع‪ ،‬ج‪ :‬ڛمع‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬شمع‬
‫أصال[ د‪ ،– :‬و‪ + :‬على الكرسي ‪ ↓+‬والكرة‬ ‫وال…المقياس‪ [2‬ب ج هـ‪– :‬‬ ‫نفسه[ ب ج‪– :‬‬
‫ابتدأ[ ج هـ‪ :‬ابتدء‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬ابتداء‬ ‫‪ 124‬وتضع[ د‪ :‬ويتضع‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬وينضع‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 61

Chapter eight: To know the ascendant, if the elapsed time since sunrise16
in equal or unequal hours is known.
The way to do this is that you place the degree of the sun at the east horizon
and rotate the globe, counting the degrees of the equator that rise from the
horizon, until (the number of ) degrees corresponding to the known hour is
reached; the degree of the zodiac that falls on this horizon at this moment will
be the ascendant.

Chapter nine: On the method of obtaining the altitude of the sun on the
globe.
The way to do this is that you take a quadrant of a circle, equal to a quarter of
the ring, divide it into 90 equal parts and write the numbers on it, as on the ring.
You install the globe on flat ground with the well-known instrument,17 installed
upright with a plumb hanging from the two edges of the stand, so that the sun is
visible on it. Then you install, on the degree of the sun, a measuring gnomon, a
needle or another object, attached with wax. You raise the pole as many degrees
as the latitude of the city, and rotate the globe and the stand in turn, until the
gnomon casts its shadow upon itself and there is absolutely no shadow from it.
Then you cut the gnomon and mark its position, and place the aforementioned
quadrant on the globe in such a way that its end, where the numbering begins,

16
lit. ‘what has passed of the daytime’.
17
This should be a leveling instrument used to make sure the ground is flat.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪62‬‬
‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪TEXTAND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪125‬‬ ‫ويمر بجزء الشمس‪ ،‬وينتهي ا ٕلى نقطة سمت الرأس‪/ ،‬ج‪ /‬وتنظر أ ّ‬
‫ي‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٣‬ب‪/‬‬

‫عدد يقع على جزء الشمس‪ ،‬فذلك العدد هو قدر ‪/‬و‪ /‬ارتفاع ⟩في ذلك⟨ الوقت‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٦٩‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الغربي من ربع آخر‪ ،‬أو من تبديل القطبين ونصب‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ظن أن ّه البد في االرتفاع‬
‫وأ ّ‬
‫المقياس على ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬نظير الجزء‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٣٩‬‬

‫الباب العاشر‪ :‬في معرفة االٔوتاد االٔربعة‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂10‬‬

‫‪130‬‬ ‫ثم تنظر ما وقع على أفق المشرق من أجزاء‬
‫وطريقه ‪/‬د‪ /‬أن تستخرج ارتفاع الشمس‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٥‬ب‪/‬‬

‫البروج فهو الطالع‪ ،‬وما وقع تحت حلقة نصف النهار فوق االٔرض فهو وسط السماء‪،‬‬
‫الغربي فهو الغارب‪ ،‬وما وقع تحت ]كذا[ نصف النهار تحت‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫وما وقع في االٔفق‬
‫االٔرض فهو وتد االٔرض‪ .‬وأنت خبير بأن ّه إذا عرف ‪/‬ب‪ /‬أحد االٔوتاد االٔربعة‪ ،‬عرف‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٦‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الباقي منه بأن تضع المعلوم في موضعه وتنظر ما وقع في مواضع الباقي‪.‬‬

‫‪135‬‬ ‫الباب الحادي عشر‪ :‬في معرفة باقي البيوت‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂11‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تدير الكرة على التوالي بقدر أجزاء ساعتين زمانيتين‪ ،‬فما وقع من أجزاء‬
‫البروج في نصف النهار فوق االٔفق فهو ⟩أ ّول⟨ التاسع ونظيره ⟩أ ّول⟨ الثالث‪ّ .‬‬
‫ثم أن تدير‬

‫وينتهي[ ب ج د و‪ :‬وتنتهي‬ ‫بجزء[ ز‪ :‬جزء‬ ‫وتمر‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬ويمسه‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ويمر[ ب ج هـ و ز‪:‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪125‬‬
‫الرأس[ ج‪ + :‬فذلك العدد هو قدر ارتفاع عدد يقع على جزء الشمس وينتهي ا ٕلى‬ ‫سمت[ ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 126‬الشمس[ ج‪ + :‬وينتهي‬ ‫وتنظر[ هـ‪ :‬وينظر‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫نقطة‪ :‬محاط بنقاط‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬في الهامش االيسر‬
‫من‪ … 1‬أو[ د‪ :‬من ربع آخر و ↑ من‬ ‫‪ 127‬من‪ [1‬و‪ :‬في‬ ‫هو[ ک‪ :‬وهو‬ ‫إلى نقطة سمت الرأس‬
‫القطبين[‬ ‫تبديل[ ز‪ :‬وتبد‬ ‫ب ج هـ‪ ،– :‬ز‪ :‬ربع آخر‬ ‫ربع…من‪[2‬‬ ‫تبديل‬
‫‪ 128‬على[ ا ک‪ :‬في‪ ،‬هـ‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬
‫مرة ثانية في بداية‬ ‫ونصب[ ز‪ :‬ونصبا‬ ‫ب ج د هـ و ز‪ :‬القطب‬
‫‪ 129‬الباب…‪ 130‬وطريقه[ د‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬
‫و‪٥‬ب‬ ‫مرة ثانية في بداية‬ ‫نظير[ ز‪ :‬نطر‬ ‫ص‪٢٣٩‬‬
‫ٔ‬
‫‪ 130‬وطريقه[ و‪ :‬فطريقه ارتفاع الشمس[ ا ب ج د هـ ز ک‪ :‬االرتفاع من أجزاء[ ز‪ :‬منه االجزاء‬
‫وسط‬ ‫النهار[ و‪ + :‬من البروج من طرف الجنوب‬ ‫‪ 131‬وما وقع[ ز‪ :‬وصاقع‬ ‫أجزاء[ و‪ + :‬الفلك‬
‫الغربي[‬ ‫ب‪ :‬قع‬ ‫‪132‬‬
‫وقع‪[1‬‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫السماء[ ک‪ :‬وسط ↑ وتد السمالء؛ في الهامش االيسر‪ :‬وتد السمأ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ٔ‬
‫‪ 133‬االرض [‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫د‪ :‬القربي وما وقع‪ [2‬ز‪ :‬وصاقع تحت‪ 133… 2‬االٔرض‪ [1‬و‪ ↓+ :‬من فلك البروج‬
‫مواضع[ د ز‪ :‬موضعه‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 134‬المعلوم[ و‪ + :‬مثال‬ ‫ا ٕذا[ ب‪ :‬اذ‬ ‫خبير[ ز‪ :‬اخبير‬ ‫و‪– :‬‬
‫و‪ ↓+ :‬من المشرق ا ٕلى الغرب‬ ‫على… أجزاء‪[1‬‬ ‫‪136‬‬ ‫ا‪ :‬الباقية‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬البواقي‬ ‫الباقي‪[2‬‬ ‫ک‪ :‬مواضعه‬
‫‪ّ 137‬‬
‫ثم أن[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫زمانيتين[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬زمانين‬ ‫بقدر[ و‪ :‬مقدار‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 63

falls on the horizon, that it passes through the degree of the sun and that it
ends at the point of the zenith. Observe which number is on the degree of
the sun; this number will be the measurement of the altitude 〈at that〉 time.
I suppose it is necessary for the west altitude (to use) another quadrant, or
for the two poles to be exchanged and the gnomon installed at the diametri-
cally opposite degree.

Chapter ten: To know the four centres.

The way to do this is that you find the altitude of the sun. Then observe
which, amongst the degrees of the zodiac, falls on the east horizon; this will
be the ascendant. What falls below the ring of the meridian above the earth
will be the midheaven; what falls on the west horizon will be the descendant;
and what falls below the meridian,18 below the earth, will be the centre of the
earth. And you are well-acquainted with this: if you know one of the four
centres, you (can) determine the rest of them by placing the known one at its
position and observing (the degrees) that fall at the positions of the remaining
(centres).
Chapter eleven: To know the rest of the houses.
The way to do this is that you rotate the globe following the order of the
zodiacal signs as many degrees as those of two seasonal (unequal) hours; the
degree, among the degrees of the ecliptic, that falls on the meridian above the
horizon will be the 〈cusp of the〉 ninth (house) and its diametrically opposite
(degree) the 〈cusp of the〉 third one. Then you rotate

18
It is actually above the meridian ring, since the meridian ring is below the globe at the part of the
globe that sits under the horizon.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪64‬‬
‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الكرة على التوالي بذلك القدر‪ ،‬فما وقع في نصف النهار فهو ⟩أ ّول⟨ الثامن ونظيره‬
‫ثم أن تضع الطالع المذكور في موضعه اال ٔ ّول وأن تدير الكرة على‬
‫⟩أ ّول⟨ الثاني‪ّ .‬‬
‫خالف التوالي بالقدر المذكور‪ ،‬فما وقع في نصف النهار فهو ⟩أ ّول⟨ الحادي عشر ‪140‬‬

‫ثم أن ‪/‬ج‪ /‬تدير الكرة ⟩على خالف التوالي⟨ بالقدر المذكور‪،‬‬ ‫ونظيره ⟩أ ّول⟨ الخامس‪ّ .‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٤‬ا‪/‬‬

‫فما وقع في نصف النهار فهو ⟩أ ّول⟨ الثاني عشر ونظيره ⟩أ ّول⟨ السادس‪.‬‬

‫ل واحد من الكواكب التي في الكرة‪،‬‬

‫الباب الثاني عشر‪ :‬في استخراج جزء ك ّ‬ ‫˃‪˂12‬‬
‫وفي معرفة عرضه‪ ،‬وفي معرفة ميله عن المع ّدل وسمت الرأس‪ ،‬وفي معرفة غاية‬
‫‪145‬‬ ‫‪/‬د‪ /‬ارتفاعه‪/ ،‬هـ‪ /‬وفي معرفة ميل جزء ‪/‬ز‪ /‬البروج عن المع ّدل‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٦‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٠‬‬
‫وطريقه أن تدير الكرة حتّى يبلغ الكوكب وجزء فلك البروج إلى وجه حلقة نصف‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪٩‬ب‪/‬‬
‫النهار من جهة المشرق‪/ ،‬ب‪ /‬فالجزء الذي وافى معه ‪/‬و‪ /‬ذلك الوجه هو جزء ذلك‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٧‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪٧٠‬ا‪/‬‬
‫الكوكب وال يتغير في االٔقاليم‪.‬‬
‫وأجزاء الحلقة التي بين الكوكب وبين الجزء المذكور هو عرض ذلك الكوكب وال‬
‫‪150‬‬ ‫يتغير في االٔقاليم‪/ .‬ا‪ /‬وهذا غير صحيح‪ ،‬ال ٔ ّن العرض إن ّما يؤخذ من دائرة العرض‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٦‬‬

‫وأجزاء الحلقة التي بين الكوكب وبين المع ّدل‪ ،‬هو ميل ذلك الكوكب عن‬
‫المع ّدل‪ ،‬وهذا الميل ال يتغير أبدا‪.‬‬
‫واالٔجزاء التي بينه وبين سمت الرأس‪ ،‬أعني تسعين جزءا من االٔفق‪ ،‬هو ميله عن‬
‫سمت الرأس‪ ،‬وباقي االٔجزاء هو غاية ارتفاعه‪ .‬وهذا الميل والغاية يتغيران باختالف‬

‫‪ 140‬بالقدر[‬ ‫وأن[ و‪ :‬بان‬ ‫‪ 139‬أن[ د‪– :‬‬ ‫النهار[ و‪ + :‬ايضا‬ ‫‪ 138‬التوالي[ ز‪ :‬توالي‬
‫‪ 144‬وفي‪… 1‬الرأس[‬ ‫‪ 142‬فهو[ ا ک‪ :‬هو‬ ‫‪ 141‬أن[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫فهو[ د‪..... :‬‬ ‫هـ و‪ :‬بقدر‬
‫وجزء[‬ ‫الكوكب[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫‪ 146‬يبلغ[ ا‪ :‬يدخل‬ ‫عن[ ز‪ :‬من‬ ‫ا‪– :‬‬
‫حلقة[ ب‪ :‬خلقة‬ ‫وجه[ ا‪ :‬درجة‪ ،‬د ز‪ + :‬درجة‬ ‫ا ب ج هـ ک‪ :‬أو جزء‪ ،‬د ز‪ :‬أو جزء من‬
‫‪ 149‬وأجزاء[ و‪ :‬أجزاء وأجزاء…‪ 150‬االٔقاليم[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫ذلك‪ [2‬ا‪ :‬فلك‬ ‫‪ 147‬وافى[ ک‪ + :‬معرفه‬
‫الكوكب‪ [2‬ز‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫الكوكب‪ [1‬ب ج د هـ ز ک‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫الحلقة[ ب ج‪ :‬الخلقة‬
‫وهذا الميل[‬ ‫‪ 152‬وهذا[ ز‪ :‬هذا‬ ‫‪ 151‬الكوكب‪ [1‬ز‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫‪ 150‬العرض‪ [1‬ب‪ :‬الغرض‬
‫جزءا[‬ ‫أعني[ د‪ :‬عن‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬يعنى‬ ‫الرأس[ ز‪ :‬الدائرة‬ ‫‪ 153‬وبين[ ب‪٢× :‬‬ ‫ب‪ :‬وهو الليل‬
‫‪ 154‬وهذا[‬ ‫ميله[ ب‪ :‬ميل‬ ‫من[ و‪ + :‬أجزاء من‬ ‫جزء‬
‫ً‬ ‫جزاء‪ ،‬د و‪:‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ا هـ ز ک‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ب‪:‬‬
‫يتغيران[ ز‪ :‬بتغير‬ ‫مصحح‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ب‪ :‬وهو‪ ،‬ج هـ‪' :‬وهذا'‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 65

the globe following the order of the zodiacal signs the same amount of degrees;
what falls on the meridian will be the 〈cusp of the〉 eighth (house) and its
diametrically opposite (degree) the 〈cusp of the〉 second one. Then you place
the specified ascendant at its initial position and rotate the globe following
the opposite order of the zodiacal signs by the aforementioned number of
degrees; what falls on the meridian will be the 〈cusp of the〉 eleventh (house)
and its diametrically opposite (degree) the 〈cusp of the〉 fifth. Then you
rotate the globe 〈following the opposite order of the zodiacal signs〉 by the
aforementioned number of degrees; what falls on the meridian will be the
〈cusp of the〉 twelfth (house) and its diametrically opposite (degree) the 〈cusp
of the〉 sixth one.

Chapter twelve: To find the degree of any of the stars that are on the
globe, to know its ‘latitude’, to know its declination from the equator and
its deviation from the zenith, to know its maximum altitude and to know
the declination of a degree of the zodiac from the equator.
The way to do this is that you rotate the globe so that the star and a degree of
the ecliptic reach the face of the meridian ring from the easterly direction; the
degree (of the ecliptic) that reaches that face with it will be the degree of that
star and this does not change with the latitude.
The degrees of the ring that are between the star and the aforementioned
degree will be the ‘latitude’ of that star, and this does not change with the
terrestrial latitude. This (however) is not correct, because the latitude is solely
taken on the circle of the latitude.
The degrees of the ring that are between the star and the equator will be the
declination of that star from the equator, and this declination never changes.
The degrees between it and the zenith, namely 90 degrees from the horizon,
will be its deviation from the zenith; the remaining degrees correspond to its
maximum altitude. This deviation and the maximum (altitude) change accord-
ing to variations

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪65‬‬
‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪155‬‬ ‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٥‬ب‪ /‬عروض المساكن‪ ،‬فالبد من وضع القطب في العرض الذي ‪/‬ک‪ /‬يراد معرفة ذلك‬
‫فيه‪.‬‬
‫واالٔجزاء التي بين جزء البروج والمع ّدل‪ ،‬هو ميله عنه‪ ،‬وهذا ال يتغير أصال‪.‬‬

‫ل كوكب من الكواكب‬
‫الباب الثالث عشر‪ :‬في معرفة سعة مشرق ‪/‬ج‪ /‬ك ّ‬ ‫˃‪˂13‬‬
‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٤‬ب‪/‬‬
‫المرسومة‪ ،‬أو جزء من أجزاء البروج‪ ،‬وفي معرفة البعد بين مشارق الكوكبين‪ ،‬وفي‬
‫‪160‬‬ ‫معرفة البعد بين الكوكبين‪.‬‬

‫الشرقي‪/ ،‬ب‪ /‬فما بين‬

‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن تدير الكرة حتّى يصل الكوكب أو الجزء ا ٕلى االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٧‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الكوكب أو الجزء وبين نقطة المشرق من أجزاء االٔفق‪ ،‬فهو سعة ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬المشرق‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤١‬‬

‫‪/‬د‪ /‬التي تساوى سعة المغرب لذلك الكوكب أو لذلك الجزء من أجزاء البروج؛‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٦‬ب‪/‬‬

‫وذلك يختلف باختالف العروض‪.‬‬

‫‪165‬‬ ‫ممري‬
‫ّ‬ ‫فلذلك يحتاج ا ٕلى وضع القطب في عرض البلد وأن تضع العالمة في‬
‫الكوكبين من أجزاء االٔفق‪ ،‬فما بين العالمتين من أجزاء االٔفق‪ ،‬هو بعد ما بين مشرقي‬
‫ذينك الكوكبين‪ ،‬وهذا يختلف‪.‬‬
‫ممري الكوكبين من أجزاء دائرة نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما بين‬
‫ّ‬ ‫و ا ٕن تضع العالمة في‬
‫العالمتين من تلك االٔجزاء هو البعد بين الكوكبين‪ ،‬وهذا ال يختلف أصال‪.‬‬

‫يراد[‬ ‫العرض[ د ز‪ :‬االٔرض‪ ،‬هـ‪ ↓+ :‬االٔرض‬ ‫وضع[ ب‪ :‬موضع‬ ‫‪ 155‬فالبد[ ب ج‪ :‬والبد‬

‫‪ 158‬الثالث[ ب‪ :‬الثاني‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬البالب‬ ‫أصال[ ز‪ :‬الصال‬ ‫‪ 157‬جزء[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ب ج‪ :‬تراد‬
‫مشارق الكوكبين[ ک‪ :‬المشارق لكوكبين‬ ‫البعد[ و‪ :‬بعد ما‬ ‫‪ 159‬وفي‪… 1‬الكوكبين[ ا د ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 162‬أو الجزء[‬ ‫الشرقي[ ب ج‪ + :‬للكوكب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 161‬يصل[ د ز‪ :‬تصل‬ ‫‪ 160‬البعد[ و‪ :‬بعد ما‬
‫‪ 163‬تساوى[‬ ‫مرة ثانية في بداية ص‪٢٤١‬‬
‫سعة[ هـ‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬ ‫ز‪ :‬والجزء من الجزاء البروج‬
‫الجزء[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫لذلك‪ [2‬ا‪ :‬ذلك‬ ‫لذلك‪ [1‬ب‪ :‬بذلك‬ ‫سعة[ ا‪ :‬عة‬ ‫ک‪ :‬يتساوى‬
‫‪ 166‬الكوكبين[ ا‪ :‬الكوكبية‬ ‫ممر‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ممري[ ک‪:‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕلى[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 165‬يحتاج[ ب ج‪ :‬تحتاج‬
‫مشرقي[ ز‪ :‬مشرق‬ ‫أجزاء …‪ 169‬من[ و‪– :‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ک‪– :‬‬ ‫من‪… 2‬االٔفق‪[2‬‬ ‫فما[ ک‪ :‬فبعد ما‬
‫ممري[ ک‪– :‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫‪168‬‬ ‫يختلف[ ز‪ :‬يحتلف‬ ‫‪ 167‬الكوكبين[ ز‪ + :‬من أجزاء دائرة النهار‬
‫الكوكبين[‬ ‫‪ 169‬البعد[ و‪ :‬بعد ما‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬بعد‬ ‫نصف[ ‪ :‬ا ب ج د ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الكوكبين[ ا‪ :‬الكوكبية‬
‫أصال[ و ک‪– :‬‬ ‫ال[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الكوكب‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 67

in the latitudes of the regions.19 The pole must be placed at the latitude for
which the certain knowledge is required.
The degrees that are between the degree of the zodiac and the equator cor-
respond to its declination from it (the equator), and this does not change at all.

Chapter thirteen: To know the ortive amplitude of every star among the
stars drawn (on the globe), or a degree among the degrees of the zodiac.
To know the distance between the risings of two stars and to know the
distance between these two stars.
The way to do this is that you rotate the globe so that the star or the degree
arrives at the east horizon; the number of degrees of the horizon between the
star or degree and the East point will be the ortive / eastern amplitude, which
is equal to the occiduous / western amplitude for that star or that degree of the
zodiac. This changes as latitude varies.
For this (reason) it is necessary to place the pole at the latitude of the city
and put a mark at (each of ) the two points of transit of the two stars on the
degrees of the horizon. The number of degrees of the horizon between the
two marks will be the distance between the risings of these two stars. This is
something that varies.
If you put the mark at (each of ) the two points of transit of the two stars
among the degrees of the meridian circle, the number of degrees between the
two marks will be the distance between the two stars, and this never changes.

19
lit. ‘places of residence’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪66‬‬
‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪170‬‬ ‫الباب الرابع عشر‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تطلع معا‪ ،‬وتتوسط معا‪ ،‬وتغرب معا‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂14‬‬
‫واعلم أن الكواكب التي تطلع معا‪ ،‬ال تتوسط ‪/‬و‪ /‬معا‪ ،‬وال تغرب معا؛ والتي تتوسط‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧٠‬ب‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪ .‬ف ٕان أردت اليقين‪ ،‬فضع القطب على االٔفق‬ ‫معا ال تغرب معا‪ ،‬ا ّٕال في‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر حتّى يقعا على وسط السماء معا وعلى‬
‫وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يطلع الكوكبان معا‪ّ .‬‬
‫أفق المغرب معا‪.‬‬
‫ثم ارفع القطب ‪/‬ب‪ /‬بقدر ما‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يقع أحدهما ‪/‬ج‪ /‬في وسط ‪175‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٨‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬ا‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد الكوكب االٓخر متجاوزا عنه أو غير واصل ا ٕليه‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫السماء أو االٔفق‬
‫الشرقي؛ ف ٕان كان فيه كوكبان فهما يطلعان معا‪ .‬وكذا انظر ا ٕلى‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ث ّم انظر ا ٕلى االٔفق‬
‫وسط السماء؛ ف ٕان كان فيه كوكبان‪/ ،‬د‪ /‬فهما يتوسطان معا؛ وكذا الحال في االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٧‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الغربي‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬

‫‪180‬‬ ‫ل كوكب من الكواكب المرسومة‪،‬‬

‫الباب الخامس عشر‪ :‬في معرفة جزء طلوع ك ّ‬ ‫˃‪˂15‬‬
‫وجزء توسطه‪/ ،‬هـ‪ /‬وجزء غروبه في االٔقاليم‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٢‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب في عرض البلد ‪/‬ز‪ /‬وأن تدير الكرة‪ ،‬فالجزء الذي وقع مع‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪١٠‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشرقي هو جزء طلوعه‪ ،‬والذي وقع معه في نصف النهار هو‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ذلك الكوكب في االٔفق‬

‫الكواكب…‪171‬‬ ‫‪ 170‬الكواكب…تطلع[ ب د هـ و‪ :‬الكوكب الذي يطلع‪ ،‬ج‪ :‬الكواكب الذي يطلع‬

‫ل‬
‫و‪ :‬في ك ّ‬ ‫معا‪[3‬‬ ‫وتغرب[ ب ج د هـ و‪ :‬ويغرب‬ ‫وتتوسط[ ب ج د هـ و‪ :‬ويتوسط‬ ‫أن[ ک‪– :‬‬
‫تطلع[‬ ‫الكواكب[ د‪ :‬الكوكب‬ ‫أن[ هـ‪٢× :‬‬ ‫‪ 171‬واعلم[ د‪ :‬اعلم‬ ‫واحد من االٔقاليم‬
‫تتوسط‪[2‬‬ ‫تغرب[ ب ج د هـ‪ :‬يغرب‪ ،‬ب‪ ↑+ :‬وال تغرب‬ ‫د هـ ک‪ :‬يتوسط‬ ‫تتوسط‪[1‬‬ ‫د‪ :‬يطلع‬
‫معا‪[2‬‬ ‫تغرب[ ب ج د هـ و‪ :‬يغرب‬ ‫ال[ ز‪ :‬وال‬ ‫ک‪– :‬‬ ‫معا‪[1‬‬ ‫‪172‬‬ ‫ب ج د هـ و‪ :‬يتوسط‬
‫التع ُين‪ ،‬و‪ :‬اليقىن‬
‫اليقين[ ب ز‪ :‬التعيين‪ ،‬ج د هـ‪َ :‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط[ ز‪ :‬حط‬
‫ب ج هـ‪ ،– :‬د‪ ↑ :‬يغرب‬
‫‪ 174‬أفق[‬ ‫يقعا[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يقعان‬ ‫‪ 173‬يطلع[ ا ک‪ :‬تطلع‬ ‫فضع[ ب ج‪ :‬وضع‬
‫‪ 176‬الكوكب[‬ ‫يقع[ ب ج‪ :‬تقع‬ ‫‪ 175‬القطب[ ز‪ :‬الشمالي‬ ‫معا[ ب‪ :‬معها‬ ‫د‪ :‬االٔفق‬
‫غير[ د‪ ↑ :‬عنه‬ ‫أو‪ [2‬د‪– :‬‬ ‫متجاوزا[ ب‪ :‬متجا وزا‪ ،‬وزا في الهامش‬ ‫ب ج‪ :‬الكواكب‬
‫‪ 178‬معا[‬ ‫ز‪ :‬انظرا‬ ‫انظر‪[2‬‬ ‫معا[ و ز‪ ،– :‬ج‪ ↑ :‬يطلعان‬ ‫‪ 177‬كوكبان[ ز‪ :‬كوكيان‬
‫د‪ :‬في‬ ‫وجزء‪[2‬‬ ‫‪ 181‬توسطه[ ز‪ :‬توسط‬ ‫‪ 180‬الكواكب[ ز‪ :‬الكوكب‬ ‫ب ج د هـ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 183‬الكوكب[‬ ‫وقع[ د‪ :‬معه في ‪......‬‬ ‫‪ 182‬وأن تدير[ د هـ ز‪ :‬وتدير‬ ‫الهامش االٔيسر‬
‫هو‪ [1‬د‪ :‬وهو‪ ،‬ج‪ :‬وهو‬ ‫ب ج‪ :‬الكواكب‬

‫في…‪ 176‬السماء[ الصحيح‪ :‬في االٔفق الشرقي‬ ‫‪ 175‬ما[ ‪ ،٤١‬أو‪ :‬ما ⟩شئت من أجزاء⟨‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 69

Chapter fourteen: To know the stars that rise simultaneously, culminate

simultaneously, and set simultaneously.
Be aware that the stars that rise simultaneously do not culminate simultaneously
and do not set simultaneously, and those that culminate simultaneously do not
set simultaneously unless (we are) on the line of the (terrestrial) equator. If you
wish to be certain of this, place the pole on the horizon and rotate the globe until
the two stars rise simultaneously. Then rotate (the globe) until they are located
simultaneously at the middle of the sky and simultaneously on the west horizon.
Then elevate the pole any number (of degrees you want)20 and rotate the
globe until one of them falls at the middle of the sky21 or the west horizon,
and you will find the other star passing beyond it, or not (yet) arriving at it.
Then look at the east horizon; if there are two stars on it, then they rise si-
multaneously. Similarly look at the middle of the sky; if there are two stars on
it, these two culminate simultaneously. The same situation occurs at the west
horizon.

Chapter fifteen: To know the degree of rising of any star, among the stars
drawn (on the globe), the degree of its meridian transit and the degree of
its setting at the (various) latitudes.
The way to do this is to place the pole at the latitude of the city and
rotate the globe. The degree that falls on the east horizon with this star
is the degree of its rising; (the degree) that falls on the meridian with it is

20
In all manuscripts, what I have translated as ‘any number’ is written ‫ ;;مــا‬this could mean 41 (de�
grees), but in that case ‫ ما‬should be overlined. In the margin of MS D there is a note by a reader: ‫�أو �أكثر‬
‫‘( �أو �أقــل منــه بقــدر العــرض سـواء كان‬or more or less than it, equal to the measure of the latitude’) that im�
plies that ‫ ما‬was understood as 41. In the corresponding chapter Q28 of the treatise of Qusṭā we read
‫ ما شئت من �أجزاء‬/ ‫‘( كم‬as many degrees as you want’).
21
If two stars culminate simultaneously for an observer on the terrestrial equator, as presented
above, then they culminate simultaneously in every latitude. The phrase ‘the middle of the sky’ has
to be changed to ‘the east horizon’ in order to be astronomically correct. See the discussion in the
Commentary.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪67‬‬
‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الغربي هو جزء غروبه‪ .‬واعلم أن جزء الطلوع‬

‫ّ‬ ‫جزء توسطه‪ ،‬والذي وقع معه في االٔفق‬
‫‪185‬‬ ‫وجزء الغروب يختلفان باختالف العروض‪ ،‬وأ ّما جزء التوسط فال يختلف أصال‪.‬‬

‫الباب السادس عشر‪ :‬في معرفة مطالع البروج‪ ،‬وفي معرفة مطالع الجزء في الفلك‬ ‫˃‪˂16‬‬
‫المستقيم وغيره‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب على االٔفق وتدير الكرة ا ٕلى أن يصل أ ّول البرج المطلوب‬
‫الشرقي؛ وتعلّم الجزء الذي وافى معه ذلك االٔفق من المع ّدل‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ب‪ /‬مطالعه ا ٕلى االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٨‬ب‪/‬‬

‫م تدير الكرة ا ٕلى أن يطلع ذلك البرج كلّه وتعلّم الجزء الذي وافى معه ذلك االٔفق ‪190‬‬ ‫ث ّ‬
‫من المع ّدل‪ ،‬فما بين العالمتين فهو مطالع ذلك البرج‪.‬‬
‫ي عرض شئت‪،‬‬ ‫و إن أردت المطالع ‪/‬ا‪ /‬في االٓفاق المائلة‪ ،‬فضع القطب في أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٧‬‬

‫ي عرض كان‬‫‪/‬و‪ /‬ث ّم اعمل هذا العمل بعينه‪ .‬واعلم أنك ا ٕذا أخذت مطالع برج في أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧١‬ا‪/‬‬

‫خط نصف النهار‪/ ،‬ج‪ /‬حصل لك مطالع ذلك البرج في الفلك‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫من ‪/‬د‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٧‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬ب‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج‬
‫‪195‬‬ ‫‪/‬ک‪ /‬المستقيم‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٦‬ا‪/‬‬
‫وطريق معرفة مطالع جزء فلك البروج‪ ،‬أن تضع الجزء الذي تريد مطالعه على أفق‬
‫المشرق‪ ،‬فأجزاء المع ّدل الواقعة بين أ ّول الحمل وبين الجزء الذي وافى مع ذلك‬
‫الجزء من المع ّدل هو مطالع ذلك الجزء‪.‬‬

‫‪ 186‬معرفة‪ [2‬ا ب ج د هـ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫جزء‪ [3‬ز‪– :‬‬ ‫االٔفق[ ک‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 184‬توسطه[ د‪ :‬توسط‬
‫البرج[‬ ‫أ ّول[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 188‬االٔفق[ ج‪ ↓+ :‬الشمالي‪ ،‬ز‪ + :‬الشمالي‬ ‫في‪ [2‬ز‪ :‬فا‬
‫يطلع[‬ ‫ثم …‪ 191‬المع ّدل[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ّ 190‬‬ ‫المطلوب[ ج هـ و‪ :‬المط‬ ‫ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬البروج‬
‫وافى…‪ 191‬المع ّدل[ ب ز‪ ،– :‬ج‪ ↑ :‬وفي الهامش االٔيسر‪ :‬وافى‬ ‫البرج[ ب ز‪ :‬البروج‬ ‫د‪ :‬تطلع‬
‫‪ 193‬ث ّم[‬ ‫‪ 191‬البرج[ ا ب ج د ز‪ :‬البروج‬ ‫معه أفق المشرق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‬
‫‪ 196‬وطريق[‬ ‫‪ 194‬لك[ ب‪ – :‬البرج[ ا د‪ :‬البروج‪ ،‬ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ب‪ + :‬اعمل اعمل[ د‪ + :‬عمل‬
‫‪ 197‬الواقعة[‬ ‫أفق[ و‪ :‬االٔفق‬ ‫فلك[ ز‪ :‬ذلك‬ ‫مطالع[ هـ‪– :‬‬ ‫ا‪ :‬وطريقه أ ّ‬
‫ي‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬وطريقه‬
‫‪ 198‬من…هو[ ک‪ :‬هي أجزاء‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الوافعة الجزء[ ز‪ :‬جزء مع[ و‪ :‬معه‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 71

the degree of its meridian transit; and (the degree) that falls on the west
horizon with it is the degree of its setting. Be aware that the degree of rising
and the degree of setting change as the latitude varies; as for the degree of
meridian transit, this never changes.

Chapter sixteen: To know the ascension (rising times) of the zodiacal signs
and to know the ascension of a degree in the right sphere and elsewhere.22
The way to do this is that you place the pole on the horizon and rotate the
globe until the first point of the sign, for which the ascension is required,
arrives at the east horizon. You mark the degree of the equator that has reached
that horizon with it; then you rotate the globe until this sign rises entirely
and mark the degree of the equator that has reached that horizon with it. The
number of degrees between the two marks will be the ascension of this sign.
If you want the ascension in the oblique horizons, place the pole at any
latitude you want, then do the same operation. Be aware that if you take the
ascension of a sign at any latitude on (i.e. using) the meridian line, you obtain
the ascension of that sign in the right sphere.
The way to know the ascension of a degree of the ecliptic is that you place
the degree for which the ascension is wanted on the east horizon; the degrees
of the equator between the first point of Aries and the degree of the equator
that has reached (the east horizon) simultaneously with that degree will be the
ascension of that degree.

22
This means that also the ascension in the oblique sphere is examined.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪68‬‬
‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪/‬هـ‪ /‬الباب السابع عشر‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب االٔبديّ�ة الظهور واالٔبديّ�ة الخفاء‪،‬‬ ‫˃‪˂17‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٣‬‬
‫‪200‬‬ ‫والتي تطلع وتغرب من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب في االٔفق‪ ،‬وتدير الكرة ا ٕلى أن يصل الكوكب ا ٕلى نصف‬
‫النهار‪ ،‬وتع ّد ُبعده عن القطب بأجزاء حلقة نصف النهار؛ فما كان بعده ‪/‬ب‪ /‬عن‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪٩‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ل‪ ،‬فهو أ ّ‬
‫بدي الظهور؛ وما كان بعده عن‬ ‫الشمالي مساويا لعرض البلد أو أق ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫الجنوبي مساويا لعرض البلد‪ ،‬فهو يصل إلى االٔفق فيغيب في الحال‪ ،‬وما كان‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫‪205‬‬ ‫بدي الخفاء‪ ،‬وما كان أكثر منه فهو يطلع ويغرب‪ .‬وما كان أقرب من‬ ‫ل منه فهو أ ّ‬ ‫أق ّ‬
‫الجنوبي فزمانه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي فزمانه فوق االٔرض أكثر‪ ،‬وما كان أقرب من القطب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫ل في المساكن الشماليّة‪ ،‬واللّٰه أعلم‪.‬‬ ‫فوق االٔرض أق ّ‬

‫الباب الثامن عشر‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تغيب بعد الشمس وتطلع قبله في‬ ‫˃‪˂18‬‬
‫الليلة الواحدة‪ ،‬وفي معرفة الكواكب التي الليل كلّه فوق االٔرض‪.‬‬

‫‪210‬‬ ‫وطريقه أن تدير الكرة حتّى تعرف ‪/‬د‪ /‬أبعاد الكواكب وجزء الشمس عن القطب‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٨‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشمالي؛ فالتي أبعادها قليلة من بعد جزء الشمس قلّة معت ّدا بها ⟩فوق االٔفق⟨ وقريبة‬
‫ّ‬
‫الغربي عند غروب الشمس‪ ،‬فهي تغرب بعد الشمس وتطلع قبله؛ والتي‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫من االٔفق‬
‫أبعادها ‪/‬ج‪ /‬قليلة من بعد الجزء وقريبة من أفق المشرق عند غروب الشمس‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٦‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪ 201‬وتدير[‬ ‫‪ 200‬تطلع وتغرب[ ب ج‪ :‬يطلع ويغرب‪ ،‬هـ‪ :‬تعلع وتغرب‪ ،‬و‪ :‬لها تغرب وتطلع‬
‫بأجزاء[ ز‪ :‬أجزاء‬‫‪ُ 202‬بعده[ هـ‪ :‬بقدره‬ ‫الكوكب[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫هـ‪ :‬وتىدىر‬
‫‪ 204‬لعرض[ ب‪ :‬لغرض البلد[ د ز‪ – :‬فيغيب[ ب ج هـ ز‪ :‬فتغيب‬ ‫‪ 203‬لعرض[ ب‪ :‬لغرض‬
‫‪ 206‬فوق[ ز‪ :‬افق االٔرض[ ب‪ :‬العرض‬ ‫‪ 205‬وما‪ [1‬ز‪ ٢× :‬يطلع ويغرب[ د ک‪ :‬تطلع وتغرب‬
‫‪ 208‬وتطلع[‬ ‫واللّٰه أعلم[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬ ‫الشمالية[ ز‪ :‬الشماليته‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 207‬فوق[ ز‪ :‬افق‬
‫كلّه[‬ ‫الليل[ ا‪ ،– :‬و‪ :‬في الليل‪ ،‬ک‪ ↑+ :‬في‬ ‫‪ 209‬الليلة[ د‪ :‬الليل‬ ‫ب‪ :‬وىطلع‪ ،‬ج و‪ :‬ويطلع‬
‫معت ّدا[‬ ‫قلّة[ و ز ک‪ :‬فله‬ ‫‪ 211‬بعد[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 210‬تعرف[ و‪ :‬يقرب‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬تغرق‬ ‫ز‪ :‬كلّها‬
‫بعد الشمس[ د‪ + :‬بعد‬ ‫تغرب[ ب ج‪ :‬يغرب‬ ‫‪ 212‬عند[ ز‪ :‬عندا‬ ‫ا ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬معت ّد‬
‫المشرق[ ج‪ ↓+ :‬عند غروب‬ ‫‪ 213‬الجزء[ هـ‪... + :‬‬ ‫وتطلع[ ب ج و‪ :‬ويطلع‬ ‫الشمس‬
‫عند…الشمس[ ج‪ ↓ :‬فهي في الليل كلّه‪ ،‬ا ب د هـ و ز‪ ،– :‬ک‪ :‬في الهامش اليسار‪ :‬عند‬ ‫الشمس‬
‫غروبها‪ ،‬ل‪ :‬أدرج في النص‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 73

Chapter seventeen: To know the stars of perpetual apparition,23 perpetual

occultation,24 and those that rise and set, among the stars drawn on the
globe.
The way to do this is that you place the pole on the horizon and rotate the
globe so that the star arrives at the meridian. You count its distance from the
pole in degrees of the meridian ring. (The star) that is in a distance from the
north pole equal to or less than the latitude of the city will be in perpetual
apparition. (The star) that is in a distance from the south pole equal to the
latitude of the city arrives at the horizon and vanishes immediately; (when
the distance) is less than that, (the star) will be in perpetual occultation; and
(when the distance) is greater than that, (the star) rises and sets. (The star
that) is closer to the north pole, spends a longer time above the earth; for (the
star that) is closer to the south pole, the time spent above the earth is shorter
in the northern regions, and God knows best.

Chapter eighteen: To know the stars that set after the sun and rise before
it in one night, and to know the stars that are above the earth during the
whole night.
The way to do this is to rotate the globe until you find the distances
of the stars and the degree of the sun from the north pole. Those stars
that are significantly closer to the north pole than the degree of the sun
is,25 and lie close to 〈but above〉 the west horizon at sunset, will set after
the sun and rise before it. The stars that are closer to the north pole than
the degree of the sun is,26 and are close to the east horizon at sunset,

23
i.e. stars that are always visible.
24
i.e. stars that are always invisible.
25
lit. ‘Those whose distance is less than the distance of the degree of the sun by a significant
reduction’.
26
lit. ‘Those whose distances are less than the distance of the degree’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪69‬‬
‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪/‬و‪ /‬فهي في الليل كلّه فوق االٔرض؛ وكلّما كان ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬العرض أكثر‪ ،‬كان التفاوت في‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧١‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٤‬‬
‫‪215‬‬ ‫التقدم والتأخر في الطلوع والغروب أكثر؛ واللّٰه أعلم‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ب‪ /‬الباب التاسع عشر‪ :‬في معرفة الساعات التي تطلع فيها الكواكب المرسومة‬ ‫˃‪˂19‬‬
‫‪/‬ب ‪٩‬ب‪/‬‬
‫على الكرة وتغرب فيها‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب ‪/‬ز‪ /‬في عرض البلد‪ ،‬وتدير الكرة ا ٕلى أن يصل جزء الشمس‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪١٠‬ب‪/‬‬

‫ثم‬
‫الشرقي من المع ّدل‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم الجزء الذي وافى معه في االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕلى االٔفق‬
‫تديرها ا ٕلى أن يصل الكوكب الذي تريد ساعة طلوعه ا ٕلى االٔفق الشرقي‪ ،‬والكوكب ‪220‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتضع العالمة على الجزء الذي وافى معه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الذي تريد ساعة غروبه إلى االٔفق‬
‫الشرقي من المع ّدل؛ فما بين العالمتين من أجزاء المع ّدل فاقسمها على أجزاء‬
‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬
‫الساعة المستوية أو الزمانيّة‪ُ ،‬يحصل ساعة الطلوع أو الغروب‪.‬‬

‫الباب العشرون‪ :‬في معرفة ساعات طلوع القمر والمتحيرة وساعات غروبها‪.‬‬ ‫˃‪˂20‬‬
‫‪225‬‬ ‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب في عرض البلد‪ ،‬ث ّم تعرف جزء القمر والكواكب المذكورة‬
‫من دائرة البروج بالزيج أو بغيره‪ ،‬وعرضه‪ ،‬وجهة عرضه‪ .‬وتدير ‪/‬د‪ /‬الكرة إلى أن يصل‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٨‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الجزء إلى دائرة نصف النهار‪ ،‬وتع ّد من أجزاء نصف النهار من موضع الجزء‬
‫‪/‬ب‪ /‬بعدد عرض القمر أو الكوكب في جهة عرضه‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الكرة في الموضع‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪١٠‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الذي ينتهي ا ٕليه العدد‪/ ،‬ج‪ /‬فتلك العالمة هي موضع القمر أو الكوكب‪ .‬ث ّم تدير‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٦‬ب‪/‬‬

‫أكثر[ ک‪ ↑ :‬والغروب واللّٰه‬ ‫‪ 215‬التقدم والتأخر[ ک‪ :‬التقديم والتأخير‬ ‫‪ 214‬كان‪ [1‬ز‪ :‬كانت‬
‫‪ 217‬وتغرب[ ا ک‪ :‬أو تغرب‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 216‬تطلع[ ب ج‪ :‬يطلع‬ ‫أعلم[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬
‫يصل[ ز‪ :‬تصل‬ ‫الكرة[ ب‪ :‬الكورة‬ ‫‪ 218‬تضع[ ز‪ :‬تطلع‬ ‫ب ج هـ‪ :‬ويغرب‪ ،‬د‪ :‬او تغرب‬
‫الكوكب[ ب ک‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫يصل[ ز‪ :‬تصل‬ ‫‪ 220‬تديرها[ ز‪ :‬تدير الكرة‬ ‫‪ 219‬ث ّم[ و‪– :‬‬
‫والكوكب[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫ا ٕلى‪ [2‬ک‪ ↑ :‬طلوعه‬ ‫الذي…والكوكب[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫الذي[ ب‪ :‬الذ‬
‫الزمانية[‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪223‬‬ ‫‪ 222‬من‪ [1‬ب‪– :‬‬ ‫معه[ د ز‪ + :‬في‬ ‫تريد[ ب‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 221‬الذي‪ [1‬هـ‪ :‬التي‬
‫طلوع[‬ ‫‪ 224‬ساعات[ ز‪ :‬ساعة‬ ‫أو الغروب[ ا‪ :‬والغروب‬ ‫ُيحصل[ ز‪ :‬ليحصل‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الزمانيته‬
‫غروبها[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬غروبه‬ ‫وساعات[ ب ج هـ و‪ :‬ساعة‬ ‫ج‪ + :‬الفجر‪ ،‬هـ‪ + :‬الفجر‬
‫وجهة عرضه[‬ ‫بالزيج…بغيره[ د‪ ↑+ :‬مثال بالتقويم‬ ‫بالزيج[ ا ب‪ :‬بالريح‬ ‫‪ 226‬من[ ز‪ :‬عن‬
‫الكوكب[ ب ج و‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫‪ 228‬أو[ ز‪ :‬و‬ ‫‪ 227‬الجزء‪ [2‬و‪– :‬‬ ‫و‪ :‬وجهته‪ ،‬ک‪– :‬‬
‫هي[ ب ج هـ‪– :‬‬ ‫العالمة[ ز‪ :‬العامة‬ ‫إليه[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 229‬ينتهي[ ا‪ :‬انتهي‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 75

will be above the earth during the entire night. The greater the latitude, the
greater the difference in the advance and delay of the rising and setting, and
God knows best.

Chapter nineteen: To know at what time the stars drawn on the globe rise
and set.
The way to do this is that you place the pole at the latitude of the city, rotate
the globe until the degree of the sun arrives at the west horizon, and mark
the degree of the equator that has reached the east horizon with it. Then you
rotate (the globe) until the star, for which the time of its rising is required,
arrives at the east horizon and the star, for which the time of its setting is
required, (arrives) at the west horizon, and place a mark on the degree of the
equator that has reached the east horizon with it. Divide the degrees of the
equator between the two marks by the degrees of an equal or a seasonal hour
and the time of rising or setting is obtained.

Chapter twenty: To know the time27 of rising of the moon and the planets
and the time28 of their setting.
The way to do this is that you place the pole at the latitude of the city; then
you find the degree of the moon and (that of ) the specified planets on the
zodiac circle (i.e. the ecliptic) by the zīj or in another way, its ‘latitude’ and
the direction of this ‘latitude’. You rotate the globe until the degree arrives at
the meridian circle, count from this position along the degrees of the meridian
as many degrees as the ‘latitude’ of the moon or the planet in the direction of
its ‘latitude’, and mark the position where the number finishes on the globe;
that mark will be the position of the moon or the planet. Then you rotate

27
lit. ‘hours’.
28
lit. ‘hours’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪70‬‬
‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪230‬‬ ‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتضع ‪/‬ک‪ /‬العالمة ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬على‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ا‪ /‬الكرة ا ٕلى أن يصل جزء الشمس ا ٕلى االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٨‬‬
‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٦‬ب‬
‫⟩ثم تدير الكرة إلى أن يصل عالمة‬ ‫الشرقي من المع ّدل‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٥‬‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتضع العالمة على الجزء الذي وافى‬ ‫و‬ ‫القمر أو الكوكب ا ٕلى االٔفق الغربي أ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ثم تقسم ما بين العالمتين من أجزاء المع ّدل ا ٕلى‬ ‫الشرقي من المعدل‪ّ ⟨.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫معه االٔفق‬
‫الزمانية‪ ،‬فما حصل فهي ساعات الطلوع‪ ،‬ا ٕن كانت العالمة في‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫الساعة المستوية أو‬
‫‪235‬‬ ‫الغربي‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬أو ساعات الغروب ‪/‬و‪ /‬ا ٕن كانت في االٔفق‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧٢‬ا‪/‬‬

‫وهذا الحكم ليس بمطابق للواقع‪ ،‬ومنشؤه عدم الفرق بين جزء الكوكب وبين‬
‫ممره‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫درجة‬

‫ل‬
‫الباب الحادي والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة ارتفاع ⟩⟩الشمس في⟨ نصف النهار في ك ّ‬ ‫˃‪˂21‬‬
‫ل واحد من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬
‫يوم وفي ⟩⟩معرفة⟨ أعظم ارتفاع ك ّ‬
‫‪240‬‬ ‫الشمالي على مقدار العرض‪ ،‬وتضع العالمة على جزء‬‫ّ‬ ‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب‬
‫الشمس في ذلك اليوم‪ .‬وتدير الكرة حتّى تصل العالمة أو الكوكب إلى نصف النهار‪،‬‬
‫الجنوبي‪ .‬فاالٔجزاء التي بين‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي أو‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ي جهة هو أقرب من االٔفق‬
‫وتنظر إلى أ ّ‬
‫‪/‬ب ‪١٠‬ب‪ /‬العالمة أو الكوكب ‪/‬ب‪ /‬وبين االٔفق من أجزاء نصف النهار في الجهة االٔقرب‪ ،‬هي‬
‫ارتفاع ⟩الشمس في⟨ نصف النهار أو غاية ارتفاع الكوكب‪/ ،‬د‪ /‬وذلك يختلف‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٩‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪245‬‬ ‫باختالف المساكن‪.‬‬

‫الطلوع[‬ ‫‪ 234‬أو[ هـ‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 230‬العالمة[ هـ‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬

‫مرة ثانية في بداية ص‪ ،٢٤٥‬ز‪ + :‬أو الساعات‬
‫‪ 236‬ومنشؤه[ ا ب‪ :‬ومنشأه‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 235‬ساعات[ ز‪ :‬الساعات‬ ‫كانت[ ب ج‪ :‬كان‬ ‫هـ‪ :‬الطلوع‬
‫الكوكب[‬ ‫الفرق[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬التفرقة د‪ :‬الفرقة‬ ‫ج د هـ و ز‪ :‬ومنشاؤه‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬ومنشأوه‬
‫‪ 238‬نصف[ ک‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيمن‪ + :‬يعني في معرفة غاية ارتفاع الشمس‬ ‫ب ج هـ و‪ :‬الكواكب‬
‫‪ 240‬تضع[ ب‪ :‬يقع‪،‬‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫الكرة[ ا ب ج د هـ ز ک‪ :‬االفق‬ ‫‪ 239‬ك ّ‬
‫ل[ و‪ + :‬يوم‬ ‫في ذلك اليوم‬
‫أو[ ز‪ :‬و‬ ‫‪ 241‬تصل[ ا هـ ز ک‪ :‬يصل‬ ‫القطب…‪ 242‬من[ ا‪٢× :‬‬ ‫ج‪ :‬يقع ‪ ↓+‬تضع‬
‫االٔفق[‬ ‫هو[ ک‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيسر‬ ‫‪ 242‬وتنظر[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الكوكب[ ب‪ :‬الكواكب‬
‫في…‬ ‫الكوكب[ د ک‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫‪ 243‬العالمة[ ا‪ :‬العالمتين‬ ‫ا ب ج د هـ ز ک‪ :‬القطب‬
‫ک‪ :‬ارتفاعه‬ ‫ارتفاع‪… 1‬النهار[‬ ‫‪244‬‬ ‫االٔقرب[ ک‪ :‬من الجانب االقرب ↑ االفق من أجزاء نصف‬
‫ٔ‬ ‫ٔ‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 77

the globe so that the degree of the sun arrives at the west horizon, and put a
mark on the degree of the equator that has reached the east horizon with it.
〈Then you rotate the globe so that the mark of the moon or planet arrives at
the west or east horizon, and put a mark on the degree of the equator that has
reached the east horizon with it.〉29 Then you divide (the number of ) degrees
of the equator between the two marks by the (degrees of the) equal or seasonal
hour; the result will be the time30 of rising, if the mark was on the east horizon,
or the time of setting, if it was at the west horizon.
This rule is not in accordance with reality and its origin does not take into
consideration the difference between the degree of the planet and the degree
of its transit (mediation).

Chapter twenty-one: To know the midday altitude 〈of the sun〉 on every
day and to 〈know〉 the maximum altitude of any of the stars drawn on the
globe.
The way to do this is that you place the north pole according to the degree
of the latitude and put a mark on the degree of the sun on that day. You
rotate the globe until the mark or the star arrives at the meridian, and observe
which direction it is closer to: the north or south horizon. The degrees of the
meridian that are between the mark or the star and the closest side of the
horizon will be the midday altitude 〈of the sun〉 or the highest altitude of the
star; this changes as the region varies.

29
This addition is necessary in order that the procedure described be correct. A similar proposition
exists in each of the corresponding chapters Q40 (for rising) and Q41 (for setting) in the treatise
of Qusṭā.
30
lit. ‘hours’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪78‬‬
‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الباب الثاني والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة االختالف بين أعظم ارتفاع الشمس في اليوم‬ ‫˃‪˂22‬‬
‫الواحد من بلدين مختلفي العرضين‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب على قدر عرض أحد البلدين‪ ،‬وتأخذ أعظم ارتفاع جزء‬
‫ثم تضع على عرض البلد االٓخر‪ ،‬وتأخذ أعظم‬
‫الشمس بالطريق المذكور ‪/‬ج‪ /‬آنفا‪ّ .‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٧‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ارتفاع ذلك الجزء‪ ،‬فما وجدت من اختالف العددين‪ ،‬هو االختالف فيما بين أعظم ‪250‬‬

‫ارتفاع الشمس في ذينك البلدين‪.‬‬

‫الباب ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬الثالث والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يكون فيه السنة يوما واحدا‪،‬‬ ‫˃‪˂23‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٦‬‬
‫وال يطلع فيه كوكب من االٔفق‪ ،‬وال يغرب أصال بحركة فلك االٔفالك‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب على سمت الرأس‪ ،‬فيكون ‪/‬ز‪ /‬عند ذلك البروج الشماليّة أو‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪١١‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الجنوبيّة فوق االٔفق‪ ،‬وباقيها تحت االٔفق‪ .‬فيكون ستة أشهر نهارا وستة أشهر ليال‪255 ،‬‬

‫بدي ‪/‬و‪ /‬الظهور‪/ ،‬ب‪ /‬وبعض الكواكب الثابتة أ ّ‬

‫بدي الخفاء‪.‬‬ ‫وبعض الكواكب الثابتة أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧٢‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ب ‪١١‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الباب الرابع والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يكون النهار فيه كد ساعة‬ ‫˃‪˂24‬‬
‫مستوية‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب على عرض سو جزءا‪ ،‬وأن تدير الكرة دورة تا ّمة‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد‬
‫‪260‬‬ ‫أ ّول السرطان ال يغيب أصال‪ ،‬وأ ّول الجدي ال يطلع‪ .‬ف ٕا ّن الشمس‪ ،‬ا ٕذا كانت في أ ّول‬

‫‪ 248‬عرض أحد[ ک‪ :‬العرض‬ ‫‪ 247‬مختلفي[ ب ج هـ‪ :‬مختلفين‬ ‫‪ 246‬بين[ ب ج هـ و‪ :‬من‬

‫‪ 250‬الجزء[‬ ‫‪ 249‬أعظم[ د‪ + :‬ارتفا‬ ‫جزء[ د ز ک‪– :‬‬ ‫ارتفاع[ هـ‪ :‬الشمس‬ ‫الٔحد‬
‫‪ 251‬الشمس[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫فيما[ هـ‪ :‬فما‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬فيهما‬ ‫العددين…فيما[ ز‪ :‬العدد‬ ‫ز‪ + :‬الشمس‬
‫يوما واحدا[‬ ‫الموضع[ ب ج هـ ز‪ :‬موضع‬ ‫‪ 252‬الثالث[ هـ‪ :‬الث‬ ‫ذينك[ ک‪ :‬ذلك‬
‫ز‪ :‬اشهل‬ ‫أشهر‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 255‬ستة[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الشمالية[ ز‪ :‬الشمالي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪254‬‬ ‫ب ج د هـ ز‪ :‬يوم واحد‬
‫وبعض‪[2‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الثابة‬ ‫الثابتة‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 256‬الكواكب [ هـ‪ :‬الكوكب‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫نهارا… أشهر‪ [2‬و‪– :‬‬
‫الخفاء[‬ ‫وبعض‪… 2‬الثابتة‪ [2‬ز‪ :‬وبعهها‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬وبعض الكواكب‬ ‫ّ‬
‫محاط بالنقاط‬ ‫ب‪' + :‬الظهور'‬
‫‪ 259‬سو[‬ ‫كد[ ج‪٢٤ ↓+ :‬‬ ‫‪ 257‬يكون[ ک‪ ↑+ :‬أطول فيه[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬فيها‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الخفا‬
‫ا‪ :‬فو‪ ،‬د‪ :‬هو‪ ،‬ز‪ ،– :‬ک‪ :‬هو؛ وفي الهامش االٔيمن‪ :‬سو كه‪ ،‬ست وستون درجة وخمس وعشرون دقيقة‬
‫يطلع[‬ ‫‪ 260‬يغيب[ هـ ز‪ :‬تغيب‬ ‫تامى�ة‬
‫تا ّمة[ ز‪ّ :‬‬ ‫جزءا[ ا د و ز‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬أجزاء‬
‫ب‪ + :‬أصال‪ ،‬ج‪ ↓+ :‬أصال كانت[ ب ج هـ و ز‪ :‬كان‬

‫‪ 259‬سو[ ‪٦٦‬‬ ‫‪ 257‬كد[ ‪٢٤‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 79

Chapter twenty-two: To know the difference between the greatest altitude

of the sun on the same day in two cities with different latitudes.
The way to do this is that you place the pole according to [the amount of]
the latitude of one of the two cities and you obtain the greatest altitude of the
degree of the sun by the aforementioned method. Then you place (the pole)
on the latitude of the other city and obtain the greatest altitude of that degree.
The resulting difference between the two numbers will be the difference
between the greatest altitude of the sun in these two cities.

Chapter twenty-three: To know the place in which the year is one day and
where no star rises from the horizon and no (star) ever sets with the mo-
tion of the celestial sphere.31
The way to do this is that you place the pole at the zenith; in that (position),
the northern or southern zodiacal signs will be above the horizon and the rest
of them below the horizon. Thus, there are six months of daytime and six
months of nighttime, with some of the fixed stars in perpetual apparition and
some of the fixed stars in perpetual occultation.
Chapter twenty-four: To know the place where the daylight is 24 equal
hours.
The way to do this is to place the pole at the latitude of 66 degrees32 and
rotate the globe a complete rotation. You will then find that the first point of
Cancer never sets and the first point of Capricorn does not rise. Thus, when
the sun is at the first point

31
lit. ‘the sphere of the spheres’.
32
In the right margin of manuscript K, this is corrected as 66;25, both in abjad numbers and in
words.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪80‬‬
‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫السرطان‪ ،‬تكون الدورة الواحدة التي هي كد ساعة نهارا‪/ ،‬د‪ /‬و ا ٕذا كانت في أ ّول‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪٩‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الجدي‪ ،‬تكون الدورة كلّها ليال‪.‬‬

‫الباب الخامس والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يطلع ⟩⟩فيه⟨ بعض البروج‬ ‫˃‪˂25‬‬
‫معكوسا ويغيب مستويا‪ ،‬وبعضها بالعكس‪.‬‬

‫‪265‬‬ ‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب على العرض الزائد على سو‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد القوس‪ ،‬التي‬
‫أوسطها الحمل‪ ،‬الواقعة بين القوس االٔبديّ�ة الظهور وبين القوس االٔبديّ�ة الخفاء تطلع‬
‫‪/‬ا‪ /‬معكوسة وتغرب مستوية‪ ،‬والقوس المقابلة لها تطلع ‪/‬ج‪ /‬مستوية وتغرب معكوسة‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/٩‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬ب‪/‬‬‫‪/‬ج‬
‫الباب السادس والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة البلدان التي تصل الشمس فيها على سمت‬ ‫˃‪˂26‬‬
‫مرتين‪.‬‬
‫مرة واحدة في السنة أو ّ‬
‫الرأس ‪/‬هـ‪ّ /‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٧‬‬

‫‪270‬‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪١١‬ب‪ /‬وطريقه أن تضع القطب على عرض كد‪/ ،‬ب‪ /‬ف ٕان الشمس في أ ّول السرطان‪،‬‬
‫تسامت رءوس أهلها‪ ،‬وال تسامت في غير هذا الوقت أصال‪ .‬وال يكون لشيء ظ ّ‬
‫ل‬
‫عند وصول الشمس ا ٕلى سمت الرأس‪.‬‬
‫و إن وضعت القطب على مقدار عرض أق ّ‬
‫ل من كد‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن الشمس تسامت رءوس‬
‫مرتين‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء ّ‬ ‫مرتين‪ ،‬كما تسامت رءوس أهل‬‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٧‬ا‪ /‬أهلها في السنة الواحدة ‪/‬ک‪ّ /‬‬

‫نهارا[ و‪ :‬نهار‪،‬‬ ‫الدورة الواحدة[ ب ج‪ :‬دورة الواحد‬ ‫‪ 261‬تكون[ ا ب ج هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يكون‬

‫معكوس ا‬
‫ً‬ ‫‪ 264‬معكوسا[ ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 262‬تكون[ ا ب ج هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫و ا ٕذا[ و‪ :‬إذا‬ ‫ک‪ :‬النهارا‬
‫سو[ ا‪ :‬نو‪ ،‬ب ج‪ ،٦٦ ↓+ :‬ک‪ :‬ما هو؛ وفي‬ ‫ا‪– :‬‬ ‫على‪[2‬‬ ‫‪265‬‬ ‫ويغيب مستويا[ ب ج هـ‪– :‬‬
‫تطلع[‬ ‫‪ 266‬بين[ ج‪ ↓ :‬القوس‬ ‫التي[ ز‪ :‬الذي‪ ،‬ب‪ + :‬او‬ ‫الهامش االٔيمن‪ :‬سو كه‬
‫المقابلة[‬ ‫وتغرب مستوية[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 267‬وتغرب‪ [1‬د‪ :‬ويغرب‬ ‫ب ج هـ ز‪ :‬يطلع‬
‫ا‪ :‬مستويا‬ ‫مستوية‪[2‬‬ ‫تطلع[ ا ب ج هـ ز‪ :‬يطلع‪ ،‬د‪ :‬ىطلع‬ ‫ا ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬المقابل‬
‫‪ 268‬والعشرون[ ج‪ :‬والعشرين‬ ‫ا ب ج د هـ و ز‪ :‬معكوسا‬ ‫معكوسة‪[2‬‬ ‫وتغرب‪ [2‬ا هـ ز‪ :‬ويغرب‬
‫‪ 269‬الرأس[ هـ‪ :‬مكتوب‬ ‫فيها[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫تصل[ ا ک‪ :‬يصير‪ ،‬ب ج‪ :‬ىصل‬ ‫البلدان[ ج‪ + :‬ان‬
‫‪ 271‬رءوس[ ک‪ :‬روس‬ ‫‪ 270‬كد[ ب ج‪٢٤ ↓+ :‬‬ ‫مرة ثانية في بداية ص‪ ،٢٣٧‬و‪ + :‬فيها‬
‫ّ‬
‫تسامت[ هـ و ز‪ :‬قامت‬ ‫‪ 273‬أق ّ‬
‫ل[ و‪ :‬أول‬ ‫شيء‬
‫ً‬ ‫ز‪:‬‬ ‫لشيء[‬ ‫–‬ ‫ز‪:‬‬ ‫[‬‫رءوس…تسامت‪2‬‬

‫مرة تين‬
‫ز‪ّ :‬‬ ‫مرتين‪[2‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫حط‬ ‫خط[ ز‪:‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫كما[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫مره تين‬
‫مرتين [ ز‪ّ :‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 274‬أهلها[ ز‪ :‬اهها‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 81

of Cancer, there is a unique rotation that produces 24 hours of daylight, and

when it is at the first point of Capricorn, the whole rotation will produce night.

Chapter twenty-five: To know the place where some of the zodiacal signs
rise in inverted order and set in regular order and some of them the other
way around.33
The way to do this is that you place the pole at a latitude exceeding 66 degrees.34
Then you find that the arc which has Aries at the middle, and is located
between the arc of perpetual apparition and the arc of perpetual occultation,
rises inverted and sets regularly, and the arc that is opposite to it rises regularly
and sets inverted.

Chapter twenty-six: To know the cities where the sun reaches the zenith
once or twice a year.
The way to do this is that you place the pole at the latitude of 24 (degrees).
When the sun is at the first point of Cancer, it rises high over the heads of
the inhabitants and it only reaches the zenith at this time. There is no shadow
when the sun arrives at the zenith.
If you place the pole at a magnitude of latitude less than 24 (degrees), then
the sun rises high over the heads of the inhabitants twice in a year, in the way
that it rises high over the heads of the inhabitants of the terrestrial equator twice.

33
i.e. some of the zodiacal signs rise in regular order and set in inverted order.
34
Corrected as 66;25 in the right margin of manuscript K.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪73‬‬
‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪275‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار ص جزءا‪ ،‬وتضع عالمة على‬ ‫وتوضيحه أن تع ّد من االٔفق على‬
‫الجزء الذي انتهى إليه العدد‪ ،‬فتلك العالمة هي ‪/‬و‪ /‬سمت الرأس‪ّ .‬‬
‫ثم تدير الكرة‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧٣‬ا‪/‬‬

‫بعد وضع القطب في المواضع المذكورة‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد جزءا من أجزاء البروج يجوز‬
‫تحت العالمة؛ ‪/‬د‪ /‬ف ٕاذا كانت الشمس في ذلك الجزء‪ ،‬تسامت رءوس أهلها عند‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪١٠‬ا‪/‬‬

‫خط نصف النهار‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫الوصول ا ٕلى‬

‫‪280‬‬ ‫الباب السابع والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة البلدان التي تكون االٔظالل فيها في جهة‬ ‫˃‪˂27‬‬
‫واحدة والتي تكون فيها في الجهتين‪.‬‬

‫ل من كد‪ ،‬فظلّه في الجهتين‪ ،‬و ا ٕ ّال فظلّه في جهة‬

‫واعلم أن عرض البلد إن كان أق ّ‬
‫ل من كد‪ ،‬وتدير الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك ترى‬ ‫واحدة‪ .‬وتوضيحه أن تضع القطب في عرض أق ّ‬
‫بعض أجزاء البروج يجوز في الجنوب عن سمت ‪/‬ب‪ /‬الرأس‪ ،‬وبعضها يجوز في‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪١٢‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشمال عنه‪ .‬واالٔجزاء التي في الجنوب ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬عن سمت الرأس‪ ،‬ا ٕذا ‪/‬ج‪ /‬حلّت ‪285‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٨‬‬
‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٨‬ا‪/‬‬
‫ل في الشمال‪ .‬واالٔجزاء التي في الشمال عن سمت الرأس‪،‬‬
‫الشمس فيها‪ ،‬يكون الظ ّ‬
‫إذا حلّت الشمس فيها‪ ،‬يكون ظلّها في الجنوب‪.‬‬
‫و ا ٕذا وضعت القطب على عرض كد أو أكثر‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك ال تجد جزءا من أجزاء البروج‬
‫ل في هذه المساكن ا ّٕال في الشمال؛ واللّٰه أعلم‪.‬‬
‫في الشمال‪ ،‬فال يكون الظ ّ‬

‫‪ 277‬جزءا[‬ ‫جزءا[ ا ب ج و ز‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬د‪ :‬جزأ‬ ‫ّ‬

‫حط‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط[ ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 275‬وتوضيحه[ و‪ :‬ويوضيحه‬
‫‪ 278‬كانت[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬كان‬ ‫يجوز[ ا‪ :‬يحوز‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬يجور‬ ‫ا ب ج و‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 279‬نصف[ ج‪ ↑ :‬النهار‬ ‫ّ‬
‫حط‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط[ ز‪ :‬أهها عند وصول‬ ‫أهلها…‪279‬‬ ‫رءوس[ ک‪ :‬روس‬
‫ا ب ج د هـ ز ک‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫تكون[‬ ‫ک‪– :‬‬ ‫معرفة[‬ ‫ج‪ :‬والعشرين‬ ‫‪ 280‬والعشرون[‬
‫فظلّه‪ [1‬ز‪ :‬فظىلة‬ ‫البلد[ ک‪ :‬البلدان‬ ‫‪ 282‬واعلم[ ز‪ :‬فاعلم‬ ‫‪ 281‬الجهتين[ ا‪ :‬جهتين‬
‫‪ 283‬وتوضيحه[ و‪ :‬وتوجيهه‬ ‫فظلّه‪ [2‬ز‪ :‬فظلة‬ ‫الجهتين[ ج‪ ↑+ :‬اعنى في الشمال والجنوب‬
‫يجوز‪ [2‬ا‪ :‬يحوز‬ ‫وبعضها…‪ 285‬الرأس[ ز ک‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 284‬يجوز‪ [1‬ا‪ :‬يحوز‬ ‫وتدير[ ک‪ :‬ويدير‬
‫‪ 287‬حلّت[ و‪ :‬دخلت‬ ‫الرأس[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ل في[ ز‪ :‬ظلّها‬
‫‪ 286‬الظ ّ‬ ‫‪ 285‬حلّت[ و‪ :‬دخلت‬
‫جزءا[ ا ب ج و ز‪ :‬جزء‬ ‫أو[ ز‪ :‬و‬ ‫‪ 288‬كد[ ب ج‪٢٤ ↓+ :‬‬ ‫ظلّها[ ز‪ :‬ظّها‬
‫واللّٰه أعلم[‬ ‫هذه[ ب‪ :‬هذ‪ ،‬ج هـ ز‪ :‬هذا‬ ‫ل[ د‪– :‬‬
‫الظ ّ‬ ‫‪ 289‬الشمال‪ [1‬ز‪ :‬الشمالي‬
‫ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬

‫‪ 275‬ص[ ‪٩٠‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 83

For a demonstration, you count from the horizon on the meridian line 90
degrees and put a mark at the degree where the numbering ends; that mark
will be the zenith. Then you rotate the globe, after placing the pole at the
aforementioned positions, and you will find that one of the degrees of the
zodiac traverses under the mark. If the sun is at that degree, it rises high over
the heads of the inhabitants when arriving at the meridian line.

Chapter twenty-seven: To know the cities where the shadows are in one
direction and those where they are in both directions.
Be aware that if the latitude of the city is less than 24 (degrees), the shadow
there35 will be in both directions; if not, the shadow there will be in one
direction. For a demonstration, you place the pole at a latitude less than 24
(degrees) and rotate the globe, then you will see that some degrees of the zodiac
traverse to the south of the zenith and some of them to the north of it. When
the sun is located amongst the degrees that (traverse) south of the zenith, the
shadow will be to the north. When the sun is located amongst the degrees that
(traverse) north of the zenith, the shadow there will be to the south.
If you place the pole at a latitude of 24 or more (degrees), then you will not
find any degree of the zodiac north (of the zenith); thus the shadow in these
places of residence can only be to the north, and God knows best.

35
‘the shadow there’: lit. ‘its shadow’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪74‬‬
‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫‪290‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪.‬‬ ‫الباب الثامن والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة‬ ‫˃‪˂28‬‬
‫وطريقه أن تأخذ االرتفاع على الوجه المذكور‪ ،‬وترسم في االٔرض خطّا على استقامة‬
‫خط نصف النهار في ذلك ‪/‬ز‪ /‬الموضع؛‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط هو‬ ‫قطر حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬فذلك‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪١١‬ب‪/‬‬

‫ال ٔ ّن وضع الكرة حينئذ كوضع الفلك بعينه‪.‬‬

‫ف ٕان أردت معرفة القبلة‪ ،‬فاعرف قدر االختالف بين المدينة ومكة في الطول‪،‬‬
‫خط نصف النهار في تلك الجهة بقدر ‪/‬د‪ /‬تلك ‪295‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ي جهة هو؛ فع ّد من‬ ‫فانظر في أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪١٠‬ب‪/‬‬

‫االٔجزاء من أجزاء حلقة االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم ‪/‬و‪ /‬على الموضع الذي انتهى ا ٕليه العدد‪ .‬وأخرِج‬
‫‪/‬و ‪٧٣‬ب‪/‬‬
‫في االٔرض من مركز حلقة الكرسي السفالنية خطّا مسامتا لتلك العالمة‪ ،‬فذلك‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط القبلة‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط هو‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪١٢‬ب‪/ /‬ب‪/‬‬
‫وال شك في تكلّف هذه الطريقة وعدم شمولها لجميع المساكن‪ِ ،‬س َّيما‬
‫االستخراج باالٓلة التي وجدت في هذه الديار‪ .‬فاالٔولى االستخراج بالطرق التي ‪300‬‬

‫‪/‬هـ‪ /‬تُذكَر‪ ،‬ا ٕن شاء اللّٰه تعالى‪ ،‬في رسالة الربع‪ ،‬واللّٰه أعلم‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٤٩‬‬

‫خطّا[ ز‪ :‬حطّا‬ ‫‪ 291‬تأخذ[ ج‪ :‬يأخذ‬ ‫النهار[ ز‪ + :‬ص‬ ‫‪ 290‬والعشرون[ ج‪ :‬والعشرين‬

‫ّ‬
‫خط‪،‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط‪ ،‬ب ج و‪:‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫…خط[ ا‪:‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط‬ ‫النهار‪ [1‬ب‪ :‬النها‬ ‫‪ 292‬حلقة[ د‪ :‬خلقة‬
‫‪ 293‬حينئذ[ ب ج د هـ و ز‪ :‬ح‪ ،‬ک‪– :‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط نصف‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط ↑‬ ‫خط[ ک‪:‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫هو‬ ‫ز‪ :‬الحيط الحط‬
‫المدينة[ ج‪ ↓+ :‬التي أنت‬ ‫‪ 294‬قدر[ ب ج‪ :‬قد مر‬ ‫الفلك[ ب‪ :‬للفلك‪ ،‬ج‪ :‬للفلك ‪ ↓+‬للفلك‬
‫منورة بل المدينة التي كنت تريد معرفة‬
‫فيها‪ ،‬د‪ :‬في الهامش السفلي‪ :‬والمراء من المدينة ليس بمدينة ّ‬
‫خط[ ز‪ :‬حط‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 295‬من[ ا‪ :‬عن‬ ‫ومكة[ ا‪ :‬والمكة‪ ،‬ک‪ + :‬شرفهما اللّٰه تعالى‬ ‫قبلتها‬
‫ّ‬
‫الخط[ ز‪ :‬الحط‪،‬‬ ‫‪298‬‬ ‫خطّا[ ز‪ :‬حطا‬ ‫‪ 297‬حلقة[ ز‪ :‬خلقة‬ ‫‪ 296‬وتعلّم[ د ز‪ :‬وعلّم‬
‫لجميع[ ک‪ :‬يجمع‬ ‫‪ 299‬الطريقة[ ز‪ :‬الطريق‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬حط‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط[ ب ج‪:‬‬ ‫ک‪– :‬‬
‫التي‪[2‬‬ ‫بالطرق[ ز‪ :‬بالطرقه‬ ‫‪ 300‬االستخراج‪ [2‬ا ک‪ :‬أن يستخرج‪ ،‬ب ج و‪ ،– :‬د‪ :‬أن تستخرج‬
‫واللّٰه أعلم[‬ ‫‪ 301‬تُذكَر[ ج د هـ‪ :‬نذكر‬ ‫مرة ثانية في بداية ص‪٢٣٩‬‬
‫هـ‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬
‫ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪– :‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 85

Chapter twenty-eight: To know the meridian.

The way to do this is that you take the altitude in the aforementioned way,36
and you draw on the earth a line that follows the alignment of the diameter of
the meridian ring; this line will be the meridian line in that location, because
the position of the globe at that time is like the position of the celestial sphere
itself.
If you want to know the qibla, find out the difference in longitude between
the city and Mecca and observe in which direction it is. Count the amount of
these degrees (starting) from the meridian line in that direction, in degrees of
the ring of the horizon, and put a mark at the position where the numbering
ends. Draw a line on the earth from the centre of the inferior ring of the stand
in the same direction as this mark; that line will be the line of the qibla.
This method is undoubtedly fake and it fails to provide coverage for all of
the regions, in particular when the determining (is conducted) using the in-
strument which is found in these territories. It is better to get results by the
methods that will be mentioned in the treatise on the quadrant, God Highest
willing, and God knows best.

36
As mentioned in Chapter 9.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪86‬‬
‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب‬

‫الباب التاسع والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة موضع القمر‪ ،‬وا ّ‬ ‫˃‪˂29‬‬
‫السيارة أو الثابتة في أعظم ارتفاعه‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫وطريقه أن ترصد القمر أو الكوكب في أعظم ارتفاعه باالٔسطرالب‪ ،‬أو الربع‪ ،‬أو‬
‫‪305‬‬ ‫ثم ‪/‬ج‪ /‬تأخذ في هذا الحين ارتفاع ‪/‬ا‪ /‬بعض الكواكب المرسومة على‬ ‫غيرهما‪ّ .‬‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٨‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ا ‪/١٠‬‬
‫الكرة‪ ،‬وتعلّم على عدد ارتفاعه من أجزاء حلقة الربع‪ .‬وتضع طرف الربع ُ‬
‫الموقّع عليه‬
‫ص على نقطة سمت الرأس وطرفه االٓخر على حلقة االٔفق‪ .‬وتدير الكرة وطرف الربع‬
‫االٔسفل‪ ،‬حتّى يقع الكوكب المرسوم المذكور تحت عالمة الربع‪ ،‬وتنظر أ ّ‬
‫ي جزء وقع‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬وهو موضع القمر أو الكوكب‪.‬‬ ‫تحت‬

‫‪310‬‬ ‫السيارة والثابتة ‪/‬ک‪ /‬التي ال‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الباب الثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة عرض ‪/‬د‪ /‬القمر وكوكب من‬ ‫˃‪˂30‬‬
‫‪/‬د ‪١١‬ا‪/‬‬
‫تُ َ‬
‫رسم في الكرة في الليلة الممكنة أخذ أت ّم ارتفاعه‪ ،‬وفي معرفة بعده عن المع ّدل‪،‬‬
‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٧‬ب‪/‬‬
‫وبعده عن سمت الرأس‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تعرف جزءه بالطريق المذكور آنفا‪ ،‬وتعلّم عليه‪ .‬وتعرف أعظم ارتفاعه‬
‫وجهته‪ ،‬وتع ّد من أجزاء ‪/‬ب‪ /‬حلقة نصف النهار بقدر أجزاء ارتفاعه في تلك الجهة‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪١٣‬ا‪/‬‬

‫م تدير الكرة حتّى يصل جزء القمر أو الكوكب ‪315‬‬ ‫وتعلّم حيث انتهى ا ٕليه العدد‪ .‬ث ّ‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬إلى نصف النهار‪ .‬ف ٕان وقع ذلك الجزء ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬تحت الجزء الذي علّمت من دائرة‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧٤‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٥٠‬‬

‫‪ 304‬وطريقه…‬ ‫‪ 303‬أو[ ب ج هـ و‪ :‬و‬ ‫موضع[ د و‪ :‬مواضع‬ ‫‪ 302‬والعشرون[ ج‪ :‬والعشرين‬

‫‪ 305‬تأخذ[‬ ‫ب‪ :‬و‬ ‫أو‪[2‬‬ ‫أو الكوكب[ ا ب ج هـ و‪ :‬والكوكب‬ ‫ارتفاعه[ ب ج هـ ک‪– :‬‬
‫عليه[ ک‪– :‬‬ ‫و‪– :‬‬ ‫الربع‪[2‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫الكواكب[ ز‪ :‬الكوكب‬ ‫هذا[ ک‪ :‬هذه‬ ‫ب ج‪ :‬يأخذ‬
‫المرسوم[ ز‪ :‬المرسومة‬ ‫‪ 308‬الكوكب[ هـ‪ :‬كوكب‬ ‫وتدير[ ک‪ :‬ويدير‬ ‫‪ 307‬وطرفه[ ا‪ :‬وطريقه‬
‫‪ 310‬الثالثون[‬ ‫وهو[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط[ ب ز‪ :‬حط‬ ‫‪309‬‬ ‫أ ّ‬
‫ي[ ا‪ :‬إلى‬ ‫المذكور[ ز‪ :‬المذكورة‬
‫عرض[ د ک‪ + :‬البلد )من غاية ارتفاع كوكب من كواكب الكرة ومن نهاره االٔطول‬ ‫ب ج‪ :‬الثالثون‬
‫وطريقه أن تضع الكوكب المذكور في غاية ارتفاعه من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار فيحصل العرض وأن تضع‬
‫القطب على االٔفق ورأس ‪/‬د‪ /‬السرطان على االٔفق الشرقي د‪ :‬وىىسعٮ ‪ /‬ک‪ :‬ونسقت نهار اال(‬
‫والنص مستم ّد من بداية الباب الثالث والثالثون‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ک‪ + :‬ستواء ا ٕلى‪ .‬العبارة بين القوسين مشطوبة في د‪،‬‬
‫ارتفاعه[‬ ‫أت ّم[ و‪ :‬اثم‪ ،‬ک‪ ↑ :‬أخذ‬ ‫الليلة[ ک‪ :‬ليلة‬ ‫ُرسم[ ب ج هـ و ز ک‪ :‬يرسم‬ ‫‪ 311‬ت َ‬
‫جزءه[ ا هـ ز د‪ :‬جزئه‪ ،‬ب‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ز‪ + :‬بالطريق‬ ‫‪ 313‬وطريقه[ ب‪ :‬وطريق‬ ‫ز‪ :‬ارتفاع‬
‫‪ 315‬انتهى[‬ ‫ارتفاعه[ ز‪ :‬وارتفاعه‬ ‫أجزاء‪ [2‬ز‪ :‬آخر‬ ‫حلقة[ د‪ :‬خلقة‬ ‫‪ 314‬وجهته[ ز‪ :‬وجهة‬
‫أو[ و‪ :‬و‬ ‫العدد[ ا ب ج هـ و ک‪– :‬‬ ‫ک‪ + :‬بيان‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 87

Chapter twenty-nine: To know the ‘longitude’ of the moon and any

planet or fixed star you want, at its greatest altitude.
The way to do this is that you observe the moon or the planet / star at its
greatest altitude with the astrolabe, with the quadrant, or in a different way.
Then you immediately take the altitude of any one of the stars drawn on the
globe, and put a mark on the number of its altitude among the degrees of the
ring of the quadrant. You place the endpoint of the quadrant, where 90 has
been inscribed, at the point of the zenith, and the other endpoint on the ring
of the horizon. You rotate the globe and the lower endpoint of the quadrant,
until the aforementioned star drawn (on the globe) falls under the mark on
the quadrant and observe which degree of the zodiac circle (i.e. the ecliptic)
falls under the meridian line. This will be the ‘longitude’ of the moon or the
planet / star.

Chapter thirty: To know the ‘latitude’ of the moon and a star, among the
planets and the fixed stars which are not drawn on the globe, during a
night when it is possible to take its complete (i.e. highest) altitude, and to
know its distance from the equator and its distance from the zenith.
The way to do this is that you find its degree in the aforementioned way, and
you put a mark on it. You find out its maximum altitude and its direction
(to the south or to the north of the zenith). You count as many degrees as
its altitude in that direction, in degrees of the meridian ring, and put a mark37
where the numbering finishes. Then you rotate the globe, until the degree of
the moon or star arrives at the meridian. If this degree falls under the degree
you marked on the

37
This mark is put on the meridian ring and corresponds to the maximum altitude of the moon
or the star.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪76‬‬
‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫نصف النهار‪ ،‬فال عرض حينئذ‪ .‬و ا ٕن وقع في ناحية عنه‪ ،‬فالبد أن تع ّد االٔجزاء الواقعة‬
‫من دائرة نصف النهار بين الجزء وبين العالمة؛ فهذه االٔجزاء هي عرض القمر أو‬
‫ممر الكوكب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الكوكب المذكور‪ .‬وال يخفي عليك ورود المناقشة بعدم الفرق بين‬
‫دل هو بعده عنه‪ ،‬واالٔجزاء التي بين ‪320‬‬
‫وبين جزئه‪ .‬واالٔجزاء التي بين العالمة وبين المع ّ‬
‫العالمة وبين سمت الرأس هو بعده عنه‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ج‪ /‬الباب الحادي والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة خسوف القمر وكسوف الشمس ٕان كان‬ ‫˃‪˂31‬‬
‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٩‬ا‪/‬‬
‫يقع في الشهر الذي أنت فيه‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تعرف ⟩عرض⟨ القمر في ليلة يجـ‪ .‬ف ٕان كان عرض القمر في أعظم ارتفاعه‬
‫‪325‬‬ ‫ل منه أو ال عرض‬
‫أكثر من جزء واحد وأربع دقائق‪ ،‬فال ينخسف القمر؛ و إن كان أق ّ‬
‫له‪ ،‬فينخسف‪.‬‬
‫الشمالي في يوم سبع وعشرين في أعظم ارتفاعه أكثر من‬
‫ّ‬ ‫و ا ٕن كان عرض القمر‬
‫الجنوبي أكثر من ⟩سبع وأربعين⟨ دقيقة‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬د‪ /‬جزء وسبع وثالثين دقيقة أو عرضه ‪/‬ز‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬د ‪١١‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ز ‪١٢‬ا‪/‬‬
‫فالشمس ال تنكسف‪ ،‬و ا ٕ ّال تنكسف‪/ .‬ب‪ /‬وهذا إن ّما يتصور لو أمكن أخذ أ ّ‬
‫تم‬
‫‪/‬ب ‪١٣‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪330‬‬ ‫ارتفاعه في اليوم المذكور‪.‬‬

‫فهذه االٔجزاء[‬ ‫‪ 318‬النهار[ ز‪ :‬النها‬ ‫الواقعة[ ز‪ :‬الوافقة‬ ‫‪ 317‬حينئذ[ ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬ح‬

‫ورود[ ز‪ :‬وروء‬ ‫‪ 319‬المذكور[ ز‪ :‬المذكورة‬ ‫أو…‪ 319‬الكوكب‪ [1‬ز‪٢× :‬‬ ‫ک‪ :‬فهذا الجزء‬
‫هو…‪ 321‬العالمة[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 320‬جزئه[ د ک‪ :‬جزءه‬ ‫ممر[ هـ‪ :‬قمر‬
‫ّ‬ ‫بعدم الفرق[ ا‪– :‬‬
‫خسوف…الشمس[ ا‪ :‬كسوف القمر وكسوف‬ ‫‪ 322‬الحادي[ ج‪ + :‬و‬ ‫‪ 321‬الرأس[ ز‪– :‬‬
‫الشمس‪ ،‬ب ج هـ‪ :‬كسوف الشمس وخسوف‪ ،‬و‪ :‬كسوف الشمس وخسوفها‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬كسوف الشمس‬
‫يجـ[ ا‪ :‬لح‪ ،‬ب ج‪ ،ࠦ :‬د ک‪ :‬يج‪،‬‬ ‫ي‬‫‪ 324‬في‪ [1‬ا‪ + :‬أ ّ‬ ‫‪ 323‬يقع[ ا‪– :‬‬ ‫وخسوف القمر‬
‫كان[ ز‪ + :‬عرض‬ ‫القمر[ ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 325‬ينخسف[ ا‪ :‬ينكسف‬ ‫و‪ ،ǿࠧ :‬ز‪– :‬‬
‫مرة ثانية في بداية‬
‫من[ د‪ :‬مكتوب ّ‬ ‫‪ 327‬سبع وعشرين[ د ک‪ :‬كز‬ ‫‪ 326‬فينخسف[ ا‪ :‬فينكسف‬
‫سبع وأربعين[ ا ب ج د هـ و ز‪،– :‬‬ ‫‪ 328‬وسبع[ ا د ز‪ :‬وسبعة‪ ،‬ب ج هـ و‪ :‬سبعة‬ ‫و‪١١‬ب‬

‫و ا ّٕال تنكسف[‬ ‫‪ 329‬تنكسف‪ [1‬ب ج د هـ و ز ک‪ :‬ينكسف‬ ‫ک‪ :‬في الهامش االٔيمن‬

‫ب ج د هـ و ک‪ :‬و ا ّٕال ينكسف‪ ،‬ز‪ – :‬أ ّ‬
‫تم[ و‪ :‬أثم‬

‫‪ 328‬سبع وأربعين[ من رسالة قسطا ابن لوقا )الباب ‪(٤۷‬‬ ‫‪ 324‬يجـ[ ‪١٣‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 89

meridian, there is no latitude at that time. If it falls in a position beyond it38

you must count the degrees of the meridian circle that fall in between the
degree and the mark; these degrees will be the ‘latitude’ of the moon or the
specified star. You know well that there is a dispute over (the claim that) there
is no difference between the degree of transit (i.e. mediation) of the star and
its degree (i.e. longitude). The degrees that are between the mark (on the
meridian) and the equator will be its distance (i.e. declination) from it (the
equator). The degrees that are between the mark and the zenith will be its
distance from it (i.e. its minimum zenithal distance).

Chapter thirty-one: To know if the lunar eclipse and the solar eclipse
occur in the current month.
The way to do this is that you find out 〈the latitude of〉 the moon in night
13 (of the lunar month). If the latitude of the moon in its maximum altitude
is greater than one degree and four minutes, the moon will not be eclipsed; if
it is less than this or it has no latitude, then it will be eclipsed.
If the north latitude of the moon on the 27th day at its maximum altitude
is greater than one degree and 37 minutes, or its south latitude is greater than
〈forty-seven〉39 minutes, then the sun will not be eclipsed; otherwise it will be
eclipsed. And so it is, but consider whether you can take its highest altitude on
the specified day.

38
‘in a position beyond it’ lit. ‘on any side of it’.
39
‘Forty-seven’ minutes exists only in manuscript K as a marginal note. It is also present in the
corresponding chapter Q61 of the treatise of Qusṭā on the celestial globe.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪77‬‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الباب الثاني والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة فضل نهار واحد في عرضين مختلفين والشمس‬ ‫˃‪˂32‬‬
‫في درجة واحدة‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع القطب في أحد العرضين‪ ،‬والدرجة المفروضة ‪/‬هـ‪ /‬في أفق المشرق‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪/٢٥١‬‬

‫ثم تضع القطب في‬ ‫وتعلّم الجزء الذي وافى معه ذلك االٔفق من أجزاء المع ّدل‪ّ .‬‬
‫‪335‬‬ ‫العرض االٓخر‪ ،‬والدرجة في ذلك االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم جزء المع ّدل الذي معه في ذلك‬
‫االٔفق‪ .‬فاالٔجزاء التي بين ‪/‬و‪ /‬العالمتين هي فضل نهار أحدهما على االٓخر‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪٧٤‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الباب الثالث والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة عرض البلد من غاية ارتفاع كوكب من كواكب‬ ‫˃‪˂33‬‬
‫الكرة ومن نهاره االٔطول‪.‬‬

‫وطريقه أن تضع الكوكب المذكور في غاية ارتفاعه من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار‪،‬‬
‫‪340‬‬ ‫فيحصل العرض‪.‬‬
‫الشرقي وتسقط‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وأن تضع القطب ‪/‬ج‪ /‬على االٔفق‪ ،‬ورأس السرطان على االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ج ‪٦٩‬ب‪/‬‬

‫⟩قوس⟨ نهار االستواء‪ ،‬أعني تسعين جزءا‪ ،‬من ⟩قوس⟨ النهار المفروض‪/ ،‬ا‪ /‬وما بقي‬ ‫‪/‬ا ‪/١١‬‬

‫فهو فضل قوس النهار على نهار االستواء‪ .‬وتأخذ نصفه وتع ّد بعدده من أجزاء المع ّدل‬
‫مرة‬
‫الشمالي ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫مبتدئا من االٔفق‪ ،‬وتضع عالمة على الجزء المنتهي‪ .‬ث ّم ترفع القطب‬
‫ي عدد يوافق فيه طلوع رأس السرطان لطلوع العالمة‪ ،‬فهو ‪345‬‬ ‫‪/‬ب‪ /‬وتحطّه ‪/‬د‪ /‬أخرى‪ ،‬فأ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ب ‪١٤‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬د ‪١٢‬ا‪/‬‬
‫عرض ذلك البلد‪.‬‬
‫ويمكن ا ٕجراء هذه الطريقة في رأس الجدي وغيره‪ ،‬بأن تضع القطب على االٔفق‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتضع العالمة على الجزء الذي وافى معه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ورأس الجدي مثال على االٔفق‬

‫االٓخر[ و‪ + :‬من النهار‬ ‫نهار[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 336‬فضل[ ا ب ج هـ‪ :‬فضلة‬ ‫‪ 335‬جزء[ و‪ :‬الجزء‬
‫حلقة[ د‪ :‬خلقة‬ ‫‪ 339‬المذكور[ ز‪ :‬المذكورة‬ ‫هـ‪ + :‬الكوا‬ ‫من‪[2‬‬ ‫‪ 337‬البلد[ و‪ ↑ :‬من‬
‫وتسقط[ ج‪ :‬وتعسط‬ ‫ورأس[ ب‪ :‬رأس‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ورٴس‬ ‫ک‪ :‬على‬ ‫االٔفق‪[1‬‬ ‫على‬ ‫‪ 341‬تضع[ ب‪– :‬‬
‫وتأخذ[‬ ‫‪ 343‬فهو[ د‪ + :‬ما‬ ‫جزء‬
‫ً‬ ‫‪ 342‬جزءا[ ا ج و ز‪ :‬جزء‪ ،‬ب د‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ↓+‬ثم سقط سٴ النهار‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ 345‬وتحطه[‬ ‫‪ 344‬مبتدئا[ ا‪ :‬مبتدأ‪ ،‬ب د هـ ک‪ :‬مبتداء‬ ‫بعدده[ ز‪ :‬بعده‬ ‫ز‪ :‬وتأخذه‬
‫‪ 346‬ذلك[ د‪– :‬‬ ‫طلوع[ د‪ :‬طىلوع‬ ‫فيه[ ب ج د هـ و‪– :‬‬ ‫ج‪ ↓+ :‬ويحفظه‪ ،‬د‪ + :‬ا‬
‫‪ 348‬العالمة[ ک‪– :‬‬ ‫هذه الطريقة[ و‪ :‬هذا الطريق‬ ‫‪ 347‬ويمكن[ ز‪ :‬يمكن‪ ،‬ک‪ :‬فيمكن‬

‫‪ 342‬تسعين[ الصحيح‪ :‬مائة وثمانين‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 91

Chapter thirty-two: To know the difference of daylight (length) on the

same day in two different latitudes, while the sun is at the same degree.
The way to do this is to place the pole in one of the two latitudes and the
given degree on the east horizon, and mark the degree of the equator that has
reached that horizon with it. Then you place the pole in the other latitude and
the degree on the same horizon and you mark the degree of the equator that
is in that horizon with it. The degrees which are in between the two marks
correspond to the difference in daylight of one of them over the other.

Chapter thirty-three: To know the latitude of the city from the highest al-
titude of a star, among the stars of the globe, and from its longest daytime.
The way to do this is to place the specified star at its highest altitude (counting)
in degrees of the meridian ring and then the latitude is obtained.
You place the pole on the horizon and the first point of Cancer on the east
horizon and subtract the daytime 〈arc〉 on the (terrestrial) equator – that is
90 degrees40 – from the given daytime; the remainder will be the excess of the
daytime arc over the daytime of the (terrestrial) equator. You take half of this
and count this number of degrees along the equator, starting from the horizon,
and put a mark on the final degree. Then you raise the north pole once and
you lower it again.41 The latitude of that city will be the number (of degrees of
elevation of the pole) at which the rising of the first point of Cancer coincides
with the rising of the mark.
It is possible (to use) the first point of Capricorn, and other (points of
the ecliptic), while performing this method, by placing the pole on the hori-
zon and the first point of Capricorn, for example, on the east horizon; you
put a mark on the degree of the equator that arrived simultaneously with it

40
The correct number is 180.
41
This is a trial and error method for finding the proper position of the globe.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪92‬‬
‫‪78‬‬ ‫‪ARABIC‬‬
‫‪ARABIC TEXT‬‬
‫‪TEXT AND‬‬
‫‪AND TRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫الشرقي⟨ من المع ّدل‪ .‬وتسقط النهار المفروض عن نهار االستواء‪ ،‬وتنصف ما‬
‫ّ‬ ‫⟩االٔفق‬
‫ثم ترفع القطب وتحطه حتّى يقع رأس الجدي ‪/‬ک‪ /‬في االٔفق وترتفع ‪350‬‬ ‫‪/‬هـ ‪ /٢٥٢‬بقي‪/ .‬هـ‪ّ /‬‬
‫‪/‬ک ‪۱۳٨‬ا‪/‬‬
‫العالمة عن االٔفق بقدر ذلك النصف وعلى هذا القياس‪.‬‬

‫ا‬
‫الحمد للّٰه على التمام‪ ،‬والصالة على محمد أفضل االٔنبياء عليه السالم وعلى آله‬
‫وأصحابه الكرام‪.‬‬

‫‪355‬‬ ‫ب‬
‫ت ّم الكتاب بعون اللّٰه الملك الوهاب سنة ‪.١١٤٩‬‬
‫من يد العبد الضعيف أحمد بن علي المل ّقب بقبوجي‪ ،‬زاد عفو اللّٰه له ولوالديه‬
‫وأحسن إليهما و إليه‪.‬‬
‫ري )؟(‪.‬‬
‫ح ّ‬‫َمن شغل كثيرا بهذا العلم قسا قلبه‪ ،‬بل يجب عليه من االٔوقات يت ّم َ‬
‫‪360‬‬ ‫ج‬
‫ت ّم الكتاب بعون اللّٰه الملك الوهاب سنة أربع وأربعين ومائة وألف‪.‬‬

‫د‬
‫ت ّمت الرسالة بتوفيق اللّٰه تعالى في سنة تسع وخمسين ومائة وألف في ذي القعدة‬
‫المباركة‪.‬‬

‫‪365‬‬ ‫هـ‬
‫ت ّم في اثنين وأربعين بعد مائة وألف‪.‬‬
‫تمام أولدى كتبك انتهاسى كركدر كاتبه شركة بهاسى‪.‬‬

‫وتنصف[ ز ک‪ + :‬على‬ ‫عن[ هـ‪ :‬على‬ ‫النهار[ هـ‪ :‬نهار‬ ‫‪ 349‬وتسقط[ ک‪ :‬ونسقت‬
‫‪ 351‬عن[ د‪ :‬من‬ ‫وترتفع[ ا د هـ‪ :‬ويرتفع‪ ،‬و‪ :‬وترفع‬ ‫يقع[ ز‪ :‬تعصى‬ ‫‪ 350‬ترفع[ هـ‪ :‬يرفع‬
‫‪ 361‬ت ّم[ ج‪ :‬ت ّمت‬ ‫‪ 357‬العبد[ ب‪ :‬عبد‬ ‫‪ 356‬ت ّم[ ب‪ :‬ت ّمت‬ ‫‪ 353‬والصالة[ ا‪ :‬والصلوة‬
‫وأربعين[ ج‪ :‬وأربعون ومائة[ ج‪ :‬مئا‬

‫ري ‪/‬‬
‫ح ّ‬‫يمر و َ‬ ‫ري[ الكلمتان االٔخيرتان غير واضحتين في المخطوطة‪ ،‬يمكن أن تكونا‪ّ :‬‬
‫يتم ‪ّ /‬‬ ‫ح ّ‬ ‫‪ّ 359‬‬
‫يتم َ‬
‫ح ّدي ‪ /‬صدى‪.‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 93

〈at the east horizon〉. You subtract the given daytime from the daytime of the
(terrestrial) equator and take half of the remainder. Then you raise the pole
and lower it, so that the first point of the Capricorn is placed on the horizon
and the mark is elevated from the horizon by the amount of this half and ac-
cording to this analogy.

Colophons and notes after the text of the treatise

1. (A) Praise be to God for the completion, and blessings upon Muḥam-
mad, the most superior of the prophets, peace upon him and upon his
family and his noble companions.
2. (B) The book was completed with the help of God the King the Be-
stower. Year 1149.
By the hand of the poor slave Aḥmad ibn ῾Alī, called Qabūjī, may God
increase the forgiveness for him and his parents and be charitable to
them and to him.
If someone works so hard on this science, his heart becomes cruel, but
by the time passing he must be unsurpassed (?).
3. ( J) The book was completed with the help of God the King the Be-
stower, year 1144.
4. (D) The treatise was completed with the guidance of God the Highest,
in the year nine and fifty and hundred and thousand (1159 h) in the
blessed (month) Dhū al-Qaʿdah.42
5. (H) Completed in forty-two after thousand and hundred (1142 h).
The books have been completed and the company charge to the copy-
ist is required.43

42
i.e. between 14 November and 13 December ad 1746 (Gregorian).
43
The last sentence is written in Ottoman Turkish. The transliteration in modern Turkish is
‘Temām oldu kütübün intihāsı, gerekdir kātibe şirket behāsı’. I am thankful to Ali Fikri Yavuz for
translating this sentence.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪79‬‬
‫‪94‬‬ ‫‪ARABICTEXT‬‬
‫‪ARABIC‬‬ ‫‪TEXTAND‬‬
‫‪ANDTRANSLATION‬‬
‫‪TRANSLATION‬‬

‫و‬
‫سنة ‪.١١٦٠‬‬
‫‪370‬‬ ‫شرح االٔسطرالب للحميدي أفندي رحمة اللّٰه عليه رحمة واسعة‪.‬‬

‫ز‬
‫محرم يوم ‪ .۲۹‬مصطفى أفندي‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫تمت سنة ‪١١٨‬‬

‫ک‬
‫شوال المبارك من سنة‬
‫قد وقع الفراغ من تنميق هذه الرسالة‪ ،‬وقت الضحوة في رابع ّ‬
‫‪375‬‬ ‫ثمان وخمسين ومائة وألف‪ ،‬على يد الفقير‪ ،‬ا ٕليه سبحان وتعالى‪ ،‬عمر بن حسين‬
‫االٓمدى‪ ،‬غفر اللّٰه لهما ولجميع المؤمنين والمؤمنات؛ آمين‪.‬‬

‫ر‬
‫الحمد للّٰه على التمام‪ ،‬والصالة على محمد أفضل االٔنبياء الكرام‪ ،‬وعلى آله وأصحابه‬
‫العظام‪.‬‬
‫‪380‬‬ ‫وقد وقع الفراغ من تنميق هذه الرسائل الثالثة المنسوبة بمحمد الشهير باخوين في‬
‫أوائل شهر رجب المرجب لسنة ‪.۹٦٥‬‬

‫‪ 378‬والصالة[ ر‪ :‬والصلوة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ARABIC TEXT AND TRANSLATION 95

6. (U) Year 1160.

Explanation of the astrolabe by Ḥumaīdī / Ḥamīdī Effendi, God’s mer-
cy upon him, great mercy.

7. (Z) Completed in year 118 on 29 Muḥarram. Muṣṭafā Effendi.

8. (K) The writing of this treatise has been finished in the morning of the
fourth of the blessed (month) Shawwāl of the year 1158, by the hand
of ʿUmar ibn Ḥusayn al-Amda, who is in need of Him, the Glorified
and Exalted, may God pardon both of them44 and all believers, men
and women; amen.

9. (R) Praise be to God for the completion, and blessings upon Muḥam-
mad, the most superior of the noble prophets, and upon his family and
his venerable companions.
The writing of these three treatises attributed to Muḥammad, famous
as Akhawayn, was completed at the beginning of the month Rajab, the
respected, of the year 965.45

44
i.e. ʿUmar and his father Ḥusayn.
45
i.e. the second half of April 1558.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 3. Commentary on the treatise Dhāt al-kursī
attributed to Ptolemy (treatise P) and comparison
with the treatise on the celestial globe
by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā (treatise Q)
In this chapter, a commentary on the introduction and each chapter of the treatise
Dhāt al-kursī (in short, treatise P) is presented with additional figures to facilitate
the understanding of the text, to illustrate the method applied, to discuss possible
influences and to shed light on some omissions and erroneous statements in the
text. In parallel, there is a comparison to the treatise on the celestial globe by Qusṭā
ibn Lūqā (in short, treatise Q), to show the close dependence of treatise P on trea-
tise Q, and to prove that the latter is the source treatise of the former.1

P Introduction
In the introduction of treatise P, there is a detailed description of the instru-
ment called dhāt al-kursī. It is a celestial globe with stand, similar to the instru-
ment depicted in Figure 2.
The instrument includes a horizontal ring
resting on the stand which represents the
horizon, and another ring perpendicular to
the horizon ring and bisecting it, which rep-
resents the meridian. Both of the rings have
the same internal diameter.
A globe is situated within the internal
space of the two rings and it can rotate
round the axis that connects the globe with
the meridian ring. On the globe, the fol-
lowing elements are depicted (Figures 2–3):
• The ecliptic, divided into 360° and
12 zodiacal signs.
• The six great circles through the
first points of the signs and per-
pendicular to the ecliptic; these cir-
cles intersect each other at the two
poles of the ecliptic. One of them
(through the first points of Cancer Figure 2: Celestial globe. © History
and Capricorn) also passes through of Science Museum, University of
Oxford, inv.40716.

1
For an introductory presentation of these two treatises see Section 1.2 of this book. For the full
Arabic text of treatise Q, see Appendix 3.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
98 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

the two celestial poles; this is the solstitial colure. It is mentioned that
these circles are drawn in red.
• The equator, also divided into 360°, intersects the ecliptic at the two
equinoctial points, i.e. the first point of Aries and the first point of Libra.
• The two poles of the equator are marked by holes with pegs inside.
They connect the globe to the meridian ring and permit the rotation
of the globe.
• Some of the fixed stars are also depicted on the globe. It is mentioned
that the names of the stars usually represented on the spider of the as-
trolabes are also inscribed on the globe.2

Figure 3: The elements of a celestial globe indicated on the globe dated 764 H / AD
1362–3. © History of Science Museum, University of Oxford, inv.44790.

The above elements had already been described by Geminus (1st c. bc), while
describing the circles on the sphere in his treatise Introduction to Phaenomena,3
but Geminus describes only two of the circles through the poles of the ecliptic:

2
For a complete presentation of the stars depicted on the astrolabes according to the Arabic
tradition see Kunitzsch, Arabische Sternnamen, pp. 58–96.
3
Aujac, Géminos. Introduction aux Phénomènes, also Evans and Berggren, Geminosʼs Introduction
to the Phenomena, and Manitius, Gemini Elementa astronomiae; the ‘circles on the sphere’ are de-
scribed in Chapter 5.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 99

the solstitial and equinoctial colures. In treatise P, some additional elements are
described:
• the 28 lunar mansions,4 which are stars or groups of stars situated on
the ecliptic, or on its two sides, i.e. to the north or to the south of it
(depicted in Figure 4), and
• the circles of declination, which are great circles perpendicular to the
equator and intersect each other at the two poles of the equator.

Figure 4: Celestial globe dated 718 H / AD 1318–9.

The 17th–22nd lunar mansions: Iklīl, Qalb al-‘Aqrab, Shaula al-‘Aqrab,
al-Na‘āim, al-Balda and al-Sa‘d al-Dhābiḥ can be seen on the globe.
© History of Science Museum, University of Oxford, inv.54471.

As for the two rings that surround the globe, treatise P states that the horizon
circle is the ring of the stand, divided into 360 equal degrees, and that the me-
ridian ring is fixed and also divided into 360 degrees.
On the horizon ring (Figure 5), the meridian line and the East-West line are
drawn; at the extremities of the meridian line the terms ‘North’ and ‘South’
are written, while at the extremities of the East-West line, the terms ‘East’ and

4
For a presentation of the lunar mansions see Kunitzsch, Arabische Sternnamen, pp. 53–57, and
al-Bīrūnī, The Chronology of Ancient Nations, pp. 335–65.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
100 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

‘West’ are written. Each of these lines bisects the horizon circle. The positions
of summer and winter risings and settings of the Sun are also indicated on the
horizon. Their amplitude depends on the latitude of the locality.
The division of the horizon into 360° is used for measuring the azimuths.
Geminus and Leontius5 do not mention this division, since the azimuth was
invented later by the Arabs.

Figure 5: The horizon ring of the celestial globe.

Comparison with treatise Q

The introduction of treatise P corresponds to Chapter Q1. In general, the word-
ing of the two treatises is similar, although there are some remarkable differences:
1. In the description of the celestial globe in the treatise attributed to
Ptolemy (treatise P), there are three additional elements in compari-
son with the treatise of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā (treatise Q): the east-west line
(‫خــط المشــرق والمغــرب‬ّ ) and the meridian (north-south) line
ّ
(‫ )خــط نصــف النهــار‬on the horizon ring of the stand, and the circles of
declination (‫ )دوائــر الميــل‬through the two celestial poles on the globe.
2. In Chapter Q1, 12 circles through the poles of the ecliptic are men-
tioned, which separate the zodiacal signs on the ecliptic, while in the
introduction of P, six such circles are mentioned and described in a
more elaborate way.6 The correct number of circles is six, since each
one of the circles through the poles of the ecliptic intersects the ecliptic

5
Leontius, De sphaerae Arateae constructione, in Maass, Commentariorum, pp. 561–67.
6
Q: ‫‘( اثنــى عشــر فلــكا تفصــل بيــن اثنــى عشــر برجــا‬twelve circles separating twelve zodiacal signs’),
P: ‫‘( الدوائر المارة ب�أوائل البروج‬the circles passing through the beginnings of the zodiacal signs’).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 101

at two points. There are thus 12 points of intersection that define the
division of the zodiacal signs on the ecliptic. The red colour of these
circles is mentioned only in treatise P.
3. The ecliptic is mentioned in Q1 as the ‘circle through the middle of
the zodiacal signs’ (‫)فلــك وســط البــروج‬, a translation of the Ptolemaic ὁ διὰ
μέσων τῶν ζῳδίων κύκλος, while in P the more common designation
‘circle of the zodiacal signs’ (‫ )فلــك البــروج‬is used.

Chapter P1: To know how to position the globe

The celestial globe must be positioned correctly in order to give results accord-
ing to the chosen locality. The user must face the eastern horizon and place
the meridian ring in its position into the aperture of the stand.7 The globe
should be surrounded by the meridian ring and attached to it through its axis,
so that the north pole is elevated from the horizon as many degrees as the lati-
tude of the chosen locality. At this position, the rotation of the globe simulates
the diurnal motion at that locality.
The diurnal motion, as simulated through the celestial globe, is compared
to the motion or shape of everyday-life objects. In the place where the equa-
tor is on the zenith (φ=0°), the rotation will be upright, like the motion of
a wheel (‫)دولاب‬, as in Figure 6. In the place where the pole is on the zenith
(φ=90°), the rotation will be horizontal (μυλοειδής), like the motion of a
millstone (‫)رحــى‬, as in Figure 7. In the place where the equator is oblique
(0°<φ<90°), as in Figure 8, the rotation will be oblique diagonal (‫)حمائل�يـّة‬,
like a baldric (‫ حمائــل‬:‫ جمــع‬/ ‫)حمالة‬, a diagonal belt for carrying a sword.

Figure 6: φ=0° Figure 7: φ=90° Figure 8: 0°<φ<90°.

Figures 6–8: The diurnal motion at various latitudes.

7
Depending on the type of the globe, it can be adjusted to the local latitude either by sliding the
meridian ring through the two small apertures on the horizon ring, or by fixing the poles of the globe
on the appropriate holes of the meridian ring. This is not discussed in the treatises P and Q.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
102 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P1 includes the most important points of Chapters Q2–4, adding
some new similes. The description of the diurnal motion as viewed from
the poles of the Earth is described in both treatises as similar to the rotation
of a millstone: in the introduction of Q in some manuscripts (e.g. B, N)
‫كمــا تــدور الرحــى‬, in Q4 ‫ كــدوران الرحــى‬and in P2 ‫حركــة رحو�يـّة‬.. For the diur�
nal motion as viewed from the terrestrial equator the term ‫دوران مســتقيم‬
(straight-up rotation) is used in Q4, while in P2 the term ‫حركة مستقيمة دولابّيّة‬
(straight-up motion, like a wheel) is used. For places between the terrestrial
equator and the poles the term ‫( دوران مائــل‬inclined / oblique rotation) is
used in Q4, while the term ‫( حركــة منحرفــة حمائل�يـّة‬oblique motion like a bal�
dric) is used in P1.

Chapter P2: To know the equality of night and day on the (terrestrial)
equator line
This chapter has the didactic purpose to show that the durations of day- and
nighttime are equal on the terrestrial equator, for any day of the year. The
poles of the globe are placed on the horizon, thus the globe models the celes-
tial sphere as seen from the terrestrial equator. Two methods are presented in
Chapter P2:
1. Any desired degree of the ecliptic is placed on the horizon (east or
west) and the two degrees of the equator that intersect the horizon are
marked; these two degrees of the equator correspond to the right as-
cension and descension of the chosen degree of the ecliptic. Then the
globe is rotated and both degrees of the equator arrive simultaneously
at the opposite point of the horizon.
2. Any degree of the ecliptic is placed on the east horizon and the degree
of the equator that rises simultaneously is marked; this is the right as-
cension of the chosen degree of the ecliptic. The globe is rotated and
the two degrees come simultaneously onto the west horizon. This cor-
responds to a rotation of 180° of the globe. During this rotation, 180°
of the equator have risen and 180° of the equator have set.
According to the results of both methods, the durations of the day- and night-
time are equal for any degree of the ecliptic, thus for any day of the year. The
equality of day- and nighttime at the terrestrial equator is discussed by Gemi-
nus8 and Ptolemy.9
8
Evans and Berggren, Geminosʼs Introduction to the Phenomena, Section 6.23, p. 165.
9
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, Section II.6.1, p. 101, and Toomer, Ptolemyʼs
Almagest, p. 82.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 103

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P2 contains the same two procedures as Q5, put in the opposite order
and presented in a different wording.

Chapter P3: To know the longest and shortest daytime at the oblique
horizons
This chapter has the didactic purpose to show that, for any place outside the
terrestrial equator, the longest daytime occurs when the Sun is at the first point
of Cancer and the shortest one when the Sun is at the first point of Capricorn.
The north pole of the globe is raised by an arbitrary number φ of degrees
above the horizon (0°<φ<90°), thus the globe models the celestial sphere as
seen from any place on earth having latitude φ to the north of the terrestrial
equator.
The first points of Cancer, Capricorn and any other degree of the eclip-
tic are placed on the east horizon and the rising degree of the equator is
marked; this degree corresponds to the oblique ascension of the respective
degree of the ecliptic for the latitude φ. Then the globe is rotated so that
the degree of the ecliptic arrives at the meridian, or the west horizon, and
the number of the degrees of the equator that have risen is counted; in the
former case this number corresponds to the half daytime arc, whereas in the
latter case to the daytime arc of the degree of the ecliptic. Always, the day-
time arc of the first point of Cancer will be greater than the daytime arc of
any other degree, while the daytime arc of the first point of Capricorn will
be less than the daytime arc of any other degree of the ecliptic. Thus the
longest daytime corresponds to the day when the Sun is at the first point of
Cancer, and the shortest one to the day when the Sun is at the first point
of Capricorn.
According to Chapter P3, by the same procedure it can be verified that:
1. when the Sun is at the equinoctial points, the daytime length is equal
to that of nighttime;
2. when the Sun is among the northern zodiacal signs, the daytime is lon-
ger than the nighttime, and
3. when the Sun is among the southern zodiacal signs, the daytime is
shorter than the nighttime.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P3 contains the procedure described in Q8, but in a concise and more
general form. The author of treatise P presents two possibilities for compar-
ing daytime lengths, measuring the half daytime arc or the entire daytime arc,
while in Q8 only the whole daytime arc is used.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
104 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Chapter P3 also presents the results of Q7 and partially those of Q6.

Chapter Q6 deals with the difference between day- and nighttime lengths
for northern and southern zodiacal signs and examines how this difference
changes according to terrestrial latitude: the north pole of the globe is raised
above the horizon. Any degree of the ecliptic is then placed on the east hori-
zon and the degree of the equator rising on the east horizon is marked (this
degree of the equator corresponds to the oblique ascension of the degree of
the ecliptic in that latitude). The globe is rotated, so that the degree of the
ecliptic comes onto the west horizon. If the degree of the ecliptic belongs
to a northern zodiacal sign, then it will set after the corresponding degree
of the equator, meaning that the daytime arc will be greater than 180°; this
implies that the daytime will be longer than 12 hours, which is the daytime
at the terrestrial equator. If the degree of the ecliptic belongs to a southern
zodiacal sign, then this degree will set before the corresponding degree of
the equator, thus the daytime arc is less than 180°; this means that the day-
time will be shorter than the daytime on the terrestrial equator. In a similar
procedure, the duration of the nighttime can be studied. The difference be-
tween the day- and nighttime on the same day varies with latitude; when the
elevation of the north pole is greater, the difference between the day- and
nighttime will also be greater.
The results of Chapter Q6 concerning the duration of daytime when the Sun
is at the southern and northern zodiacal signs are included in Chapter P3 (in
the above-mentioned points 2 and 3). This subject is discussed in Proposition
I.4 of the treatise On Days and Nights by Theodosius;10 the translation of this
treatise into Arabic is attributed to Qusṭā ibn Lūqā.
Chapter Q7 describes a procedure to verify the equality of day- and night-
time lengths when the Sun is at the equinoctial points. The north pole of the
globe is first elevated above the horizon. The first point of Aries (vernal equi-
nox) is then placed on the east horizon and a mark is put on the degree of
the equator that simultaneously reaches the (east) horizon. Then the globe is
rotated so that the first point of Aries arrives at the west horizon. At this posi-
tion, the marked degree of the equator has also reached the west horizon, after
a 180° rotation of the globe. Likewise, if the globe is rotated so that the first
point of Aries arrives at the east horizon, the marked degree of the equator
will simultaneously arrive at the east horizon. As the first point of Aries and
the marked degree of the equator come together onto the west or east horizon,
the equality of day- and nighttime lengths is thus demonstrated. The equality
10
Kunitzsch and Lorch, ʽTheodosius, De diebus et noctibus’. Proposition I.4 is on pp. 19–20 and
34 and the attribution of the translation to Qusṭā ibn Lūqā appears on pp. 9, 13, 15, 30. The Greek
text of the same treatise is included in Fecht, Theodosii de habitationibus liber. De diebus et noctibus
libri duo.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 105

is preserved for any elevation of the north pole. The same result is obtained
for the first point of Libra (autumnal equinox).
In the text of Chapter Q7, the degree of the equator that reaches the
horizon simultaneously with the first point of Aries or Libra seems to be a
point that does not belong to the ecliptic.11 This is not correct, because the
equinoctial points are the two points of intersection of the ecliptic with
the equator. Thus, when the first point of Aries reaches the east horizon,
the same point will be the degree of the equator that reaches the east hori-
zon, and the mark should be put on the first point of Aries; the situation
is the same on the west horizon. Exactly the same happens with the first
point of Libra.
The author of treatise P eliminated the description of the procedure pre-
sented in Q7, including only the conclusion that the day- and nighttime are
equal when the Sun is at the equinoctial points; this conclusion could be taken
as a result of the procedure explained in Chapter P3.

Chapter P4: To know the difference between the (lengths of ) daylight of

two days in one city
The north pole of the equator should have been placed according to the lati-
tude of the city, but this is not mentioned. The two degrees x, y of the eclip-
tic, which correspond to the positions of the Sun on each of the two days, are
successively placed on both the east and the west horizon. Thus, the daytime
arc d(x) of the degree x of the Sun is estimated as

where r1(x), r2(x) are the rising degrees of the equator at the moment of sunrise
and sunset respectively; the daytime arc d(y) of the degree y is estimated
similarly. The difference between the daylight length of these two days will be
|d(y)−d(x)|.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P4 corresponds to Q9, but there are some differences:
1. In Q9 it is mentioned that the north pole must be placed according to
the latitude of the locality, but in P4 this phrase is omitted.
2. At the end of Q9, the result found in degrees is converted into (equal)
hours, by dividing it by 15; this is not mentioned in P4, but in the next

11
Since the text notes: ‫‘ فيتوافيــان جميعــا علــى الاأفــق الغربــي والاأفــق الشــرقي‬these two reach the east horizon
and the west horizon together’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
106 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Chapter P5 the author explains how to convert degrees of the equator

into equal hours and a fraction of an equal hour.

Chapter P5: To know the daytime arc of the Sun and of the rest of the
stars, and its division into seasonal and equal hours
The title refers to ʽthe Sun and the rest of the starsʼ, although in the instruc-
tions that follow only the term ‘star’ (‫ )كوكــب‬is mentioned, probably used col-
lectively for the Sun, planets and fixed stars. For the Sun, the same procedure
must be followed, using the degree of the Sun instead of the star.
By the term ‘daytime arc of a star’, the duration of the motion of the star
above the horizon is meant, and by the term ‘nighttime arc of a star’, the dura-
tion of the motion of the star below the horizon. The day- and nighttime arcs
can be measured either in degrees of the equator or in equal hours.
The procedure in Chapter P5 is the following: The north pole of the globe
is first raised according to the latitude of the locality. The oblique ascension
r1(x) of the star, and the degree r2(x) of the equator that is rising at this lo-
cality when the star is setting are determined using the globe. The difference

gives the daytime arc of the star, while the difference n(x)=360°−d(x) gives
the nighttime arc of the star; both arcs are measured in degrees of the equator.
The integer quotient of the division d(x)/15 gives the number of equal
hours that correspond to the motion of the star above the horizon, while the
remainder u of this division gives the fraction of the hour (u/15); thus 4u will
be the result in minutes.
The quotient of the division d(x)/12 gives the number of degrees of one
seasonal daytime hour. This refers only to the Sun, however, and not to the
stars, because the seasonal hours are defined by means of the Sun; in the text
of Chapter P5, this is not clarified.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P5 unifies Chapters Q10, Q12 and Q19. In Chapter Q10, the day-
time arc of the Sun in equal hours is estimated, in Chapter Q19 the day- and
nighttime arc of a star in degrees of the equator and in Chapter Q12 the de-
grees corresponding to one seasonal daytime hour of a given day at a given
locality are estimated. The procedure described for Chapter P5 is repeated in
each of these three chapters, whereas the author of treatise P avoided this rep-
etition by unifying these chapters.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 107

Chapter P6: To know the difference between the daytime lengths of the
same day in two cities with different latitudes
The north pole of the globe is first raised according to the latitude of city A. The
oblique ascension r1(x) of the degree x of the Sun at sunrise, and the degree r2(x) of
the equator that rises at that locality at sunset are found for city A. The difference

provides the daytime arc of the Sun for city A.

The same procedure is repeated for city B, giving the daytime arc of the Sun
dB(x) at this city. The difference between the daytime lengths of the same day
in the two cities will thus be |dA(x)−dB(x)|.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P6 describes exactly the same procedure as Q11, but in a concise way.

Chapter P7: To know the time that has elapsed since sunrise in equal and
unequal hours
The north pole of the globe should be raised according to the latitude of the
locality, although again the description of this step is omitted in treatise P. The
degree x of the Sun is placed at the equivalent of its current altitude on the globe12
and the degree r2(x) of the equator that rises at that locality at this moment is
found. Then the degree of the Sun is placed on the east horizon and the degree
r1(x) of the equator that rises at that locality at the moment of sunrise is deter-
mined (this is the oblique ascension r1(x) of the degree of the Sun). The difference

gives the arc of revolution since sunrise. Dividing it by the degrees of one equal
hour (always 15°) or by those of one unequal hour (explained above in Chap-
ter P5), the elapsed time since sunrise in equal or unequal hours, respectively,
is determined.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P7 corresponds to Q13 (equal hours) and Q14 (unequal hours), but in
Q13–14 the ascendant is known, while in P7 the altitude of the Sun is known.
In treatise P the degree of the Sun is placed on the given altitude, while in trea-
tise Q the ascendant is placed on the east horizon. Both methods are equivalent.
12
The quadrant scale (Figure 9) should be used for this purpose, but this is not mentioned in the
text. For the use of this scale see the commentary on Chapter P9.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
108 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

The rest of the procedure is the same in both treatises. The author of treatise P
avoids the repetition of the same method presented in Q13 and Q14. In P7 the
term used for the unequal hour is ‫ الســاعة المعوجــة‬while in Q14 the corresponding
term is ‫الســاعة الزمانيــة‬, which can be translated as ‘seasonal hour’.

Chapter P8: To know the ascendant, if the elapsed time since sunrise in
equal or unequal hours is known
Here, the opposite procedure of Chapter P7 is followed: the equal or unequal
hours are converted into degrees of the equator, the degree of the Sun is placed
on the east horizon, and the globe is rotated so that the same number of degrees
of the equator rises from the horizon. These degrees correspond to the arc of
revolution of the celestial sphere since sunrise. At this position of the globe, the
ascendant is obtained as the degree of the ecliptic that rises at that moment.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P8 contains both Q15 (in which the time in equal hours is known)
and Q16 (in which the time in unequal hours is known), so that the proce-
dure is again not repeated, as in treatise Q. In treatise Q, it is explained how
to convert the equal and seasonal hours into degrees of the equator, but in
treatise P this is not explained explicitly, since the correspondence between the
degrees of the equator and the time in equal and seasonal hours has been de-
scribed previously, in Chapters P5 and P7. The description of the procedure in
treatise Q is very detailed and clear, while in treatise P it is brief.

Chapter P9: On the method of obtaining the altitude of the Sun on the globe
The globe should be exposed to the Sun, and placed on flat ground, so that its
stand is vertical and the horizon ring exactly horizontal. The installation of the
globe must be checked using a plumb line. Then the north pole of the globe
is placed according to the latitude of the locality, where the Sun’s altitude is to
be measured. A gnomon in the form of a needle is attached at the degree of
the Sun, as a prolongation of the radius of the globe at that point (Figure 10).
Then the user must turn the stand and rotate the globe to reach the position
at which the needle casts no shadow; this means that the needle is parallel to
the sunrays. By measuring the angle that the direction of the needle, subse-
quently the direction of the sunrays, forms with the horizon, the altitude of
the Sun is measured. This angle is measured using a quadrant scale, graduated
from 0° to 90° (Figure 9). This quadrant scale must be placed in contact with
the globe, so that the graduation of 0° is on the horizon ring, the graduation
of 90° is on the zenith and the concave part of the scale passes through the
degree of the Sun.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 109

Figure 9: A Quadrant Scale, c. AD 1700.

© History of Science Museum, University of Oxford, inv.85161.

Figure 10: Measuring the altitude of the Sun with the celestial globe.

The position of the celestial globe where the gnomon casts no shadow on
the globe can be achieved when the meridian ring is aligned to the local me-
ridian, but this is not mentioned in this chapter.
The last part of the text, concerning the west altitude of the Sun, is not
clear and it seems to be erroneous. The altitude can be measured in exactly the
same way when the Sun is to the east or the west of the meridian, and there is
no need to alter the poles and put the gnomon on the diametrically opposite
degree of the Sun as the text suggests. This last part is not included in the
respective Chapter Q53 in the treatise of Qusṭā.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
110 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

In his treatise on the use of the celestial globe,13 al-Ṣūfī uses similar methods
to find the altitude of the Sun, presented in Chapters I.4 and I.8 of his trea-
tise. At the end of Chapter I.8 he mentions that the altitude can be measured
with this method on both the east and the west side. In Chapters I.48–49 he
develops methods to determine whether the altitude of the Sun is east or west.
In I.48 the gnomon is installed on the degree of the Sun perpendicularly to the
surface of the globe and the system is aligned in such a way that the gnomon
casts no shadow, as in this treatise; if the degree of the Sun is then to the east
of the meridian, the altitude is east, and if it is to the west, the altitude is west.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P9 corresponds to Q53. The procedure in both versions is the same,
although with some differences in wording. The author of treatise P has placed
this chapter near the beginning of the treatise, because the procedure for mea-
suring the altitude of the Sun is necessary for solving various other astronomi-
cal problems, such as those presented in Chapters P7 and P10.

Chapter P10: To know the four centres

The four centres in question are the ascending, upper culminating, descend-
ing and lower culminating degrees of the ecliptic.14 To determine them, the
altitude of the Sun is first measured in order for the globe to be positioned
according to the current time. Then, the rising degree of the ecliptic is the
ascendant (‫)الطالــع‬, the setting degree is the descendant (‫)الغــارب‬, the upper
culminating degree, reaching the meridian above the globe, is the midheaven
(‫ )وســط الســماء‬and the lower culminating degree, reaching the meridian below
the globe, is the centre of the earth (‫)وتــد ال�أرض‬, also known as imum coeli.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P10 includes the methods of Q54, Q17 and Q18. The first part of
P10 is almost identical to Q54, with only a few differences in wording. In
both P10 and Q54, the four centres are determined using the current altitude
of the Sun. In Chapter Q17 the midheaven is determined when the ascendant

13
Al-Ṣūfī wrote a treatise On the Use of the Celestial Globe (between 983 and ad 986), which con-
tains 157 chapters arranged in three books. The treatise is preserved in MS Istanbul, Topkapi Saray,
Ahmet III 3505,1 (ff. 1–62). A summary of this treatise is presented in Kennedy, ‘Al-Ṣūfī on the
Celestial Globe’. In the appendix of this article, Kennedy presents the titles of the 157 chapters in
English translation and a short summary of the contents of most.
14
The term κέντρα meaning ‘centres’ is used for those four points by Ptolemy in Ἀποτελεσματικά
(ed. Hübner), pp. 123, 179, 183, 189 and elsewhere, and by Joannes Philoponus, ‘Joannis Alex-
andrini, cognomine Philoponi, de usu astrolabii eiusque constructione libellus’ (ed. Hase), p. 141,
l. 19–22; the same text appears in Jean Philopon, Traité de l’astrolabe (ed. Jarry), pp. 2, 21.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 111

is known (Q15 and Q16 describe how to find the ascendant), while in Q18
the descendant and imum coeli are determined when the ascendant or the mid-
heaven is known. The results of Q17 and Q18 are presented in the second
part of P10 in a more general way: if one of the four centres is known, then it
is placed on its position and the rest of the centres can be determined.
Chapters P10 and P11 are useful for astrology.

Chapter P11: To know the rest of the houses

This chapter deals with domification. At the beginning, the ascendant must
be placed at its position on the east horizon, although this is not mentioned.
Then the globe is rotated as many degrees as those of two unequal hours,
so that the degree of the ascendant reaches the position where it was two
unequal hours ago (Figure 11). At this position the upper culminating de-
gree of the ecliptic will be the cusp of the ninth house and the lower cul-
minating degree the cusp of the third house. Then the globe is rotated the
same number of degrees in the same direction as before (Figure 12), and at
this position the upper culminating degree of the ecliptic will be the cusp of
the eighth house and the lower culminating degree that of the second house.
Since the ascendant is the cusp of the first house and the descendant the
cusp of the seventh house, the first to third and seventh to eleventh houses
have been determined.

Figures 11–12: Domification.

After that, the ascendant is placed at its initial position on the east horizon
and the globe is rotated in the opposite direction as many degrees as those of
two unequal hours, so that the degree of the ascendant comes to the position
it will reach after two unequal hours (Figure 13). At this position the upper
culminating degree of the ecliptic will be the cusp of the eleventh house and
the lower culminating degree that of the fifth house. At the end, the globe is

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
112 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

rotated the same number of degrees in the same direction (Figure 14) and at
this position the upper culminating degree of the ecliptic will be the cusp of
the twelfth house, and the lower culminating degree that of the sixth house.
The last two rotations of the globe therefore determine the fifth to sixth and
eleventh to twelfth houses. They are not mentioned in the text, but the steps
necessary to determine the rest of the houses are then obvious. Throughout
the text, the ‘cusp’ of the house is not mentioned directly, only the ordinal
arithmetic adjectives, second, third, etc., that correspond to each house.
The procedure is similar to methods presented by al-Khwārizmī,15 ʿAlī Ibn
ʿIsā16 and al-Ṣūfī17 in their treatises on the astrolabe.18

Figures 13–14: Domification.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P11 corresponds to Q55. The method in both treatises is the same,
but there are some differences in the wording:
1. In the title of P11 the term ‫‘( بيــوت‬houses’) is used, while in the title of
Q55 the term ‫‘( �أوتــاد‬centres’) is used in most of the examined manu-
scripts. The term ‫‘( مراكــز‬centres’) appears in manuscripts F, Z and O,
whereas the term ‫ بيــوت‬is found only in manuscript N.

15
In Chapter 31 of the treatise on the astrolabe by al-Khwārizmī, see: al-Khwārizmī, ‘Die
Verwendung des Astrolabs’ (transl. Frank). It can also be found in Chapter 23 (pp. 120–21, 146–
47, 171) in Charette and Schmidl, ‘Al-Khwārizmī and Practical Astronomy’.
16
See ʿAlī ibn ʿĪsā, ‘L’astrolabe et la manière de s’en servir’, pp. 39–40; also ʿAlī ibn ʿĪsā, ‘Das Astro-
lab und sein Gebrauch’, pp. 247–48.
17
See Vafea, Les traités d’al-Ṣūfī, pp. 166, 239–41.
18
For the different methods of casting the houses see North, Horoscopes and History.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 113

2. At the beginning of Chapter Q55, Qusṭā mentions that we must know

the ascendant and the degrees of an unequal hour; this phrase does not
exist in P11.
3. The direction of the rotation of the globe in the determination of
the ninth and eighth houses is described as ‘in the order of the signs’
(‫ ))على توالي‬in P11, while in Q55 the instruction is to ‘rotate the ascend�
ant downwards’ (‫ ) ُُر ّّد الطالــع �إلــى �أســفل‬in the determination of the ninth
house, whilst the direction of rotation is not mentioned at all for the
eighth house.
4. The direction of rotation of the globe to determine the eleventh house
is described as ‘in the opposite order of the signs’ (‫ )علــى خــلاف التوالــي‬in
P11, while in Q55 the same rotation is described as to ‘draw the degree
of the descendant downwards’ (‫ـط جــزء الغــارب �إلــى �أســفل‬ ّ ‫ )حـ‬in the context
of defining the eleventh house.
5. In P11, the third, second, fifth and sixth houses are determined as
the diametrical opposites of the ninth, eighth, eleventh and twelfth
houses respectively in the text of the determination of the latter,
while in Q55, it is the ninth, eighth, eleventh and twelfth houses
that are first determined, and their diametrical opposites then list-
ed, with the addition of the pairs of the first and seventh houses
(ascendant / descendant) and the tenth and fourth houses (midheav-
en / centre of the earth).

Chapter P12: To find the degree of any of the stars that are on the globe,
to know its ‘latitude’, its declination from the equator, its deviation from
the zenith and its maximum altitude; to know the declination of a degree
of the zodiac from the equator
At the beginning a star or a degree of the ecliptic is placed on the meridian, at
the position of its upper culmination.19 In this position, the following informa-
tion is extracted for the star or the degree.
The degree of mediation of a star, that is the degree of the ecliptic that
culminates simultaneously with the star, is determined as ‘degree of the star’
(‫)جــزء الكوكــب‬. The difference of declination between the star and its degree is
then determined as ‘latitude’ (‫))عــرض‬. This is a common practice that some as�
trolabists followed, preferring the system ‘mediation and difference of declina-
tion’ to the system of coordinates ‘ecliptic longitude and latitude’. The author
mentions, however, that the latitude found in this way is not correct, and that

19
The position of upper culmination on the meridian is described as ‘the star and a degree of the
ecliptic reach the face of the meridian ring from the easterly direction’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
114 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

the latitude must be measured on the circle of latitude, although he does not
explain how to do this using a celestial globe.20
The declination δ (‫ )ميل عن معدّل‬of a star or a degree of the ecliptic is deter-
mined by measuring the degrees of the meridian ring between the star, or the
degree of the ecliptic, and the equator.
It is stated that, for a given star, the ‘degree of the star’ and its ‘latitude’ do
not change with the latitude of the locality, while the declination of the star
or the degree of the ecliptic does not change at all. The latter claim shows that
the precession of the equinoxes has not been taken in consideration.
The minimum distance of a star from the zenith is taken as its ze-
nithal distance, or – in literal translation – ‘its deviation from the zenith’
(‫)ميــل عــن ســمت ر�أس‬. The complement of this angle is the maximum altitude
(‫ )غايــة ارتفــاع‬of the star. Both of these angles depend on the latitude φ of the
locality, since the maximum altitude is given by the formulas hmax=90°−φ+δ
for culmination to the south of the zenith and hmax=90°+φ−δ for culmination
to the north of the zenith, where φ is the latitude of the locality and δ the
declination of the star. All the above angles are measured in degrees of the
meridian ring.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P12 includes Q20–24 and Q30. Since the method in all of these chap-
ters is to rotate the globe in order to bring the star or the degree of the ecliptic
on the meridian at its upper culmination and conduct the measurements on
the meridian, the author of treatise P avoids the repetition of the same method
and condenses the six chapters in one. In each of the above chapters of treatise
Q, it is mentioned whether the measured magnitude depends on the latitude
of the locality, similar to treatise P.
In Q20, the degree of a star (‫)جــزء الكوكــب‬, which corresponds to its media-
tion, is determined with the globe, by placing the star on the meridian and ob-
serving which degree of the ecliptic comes simultaneously on the meridian; the
same procedure is presented at the beginning of P12 with minor differences.
In Q21, the ‘latitude’ (‫ )عــرض‬of the star is determined, making a distinc-
tion between the north and the south latitudes: when the star is closer to
the north pole the latitude is north, and when it is closer to the south pole,
the latitude is south. It is not specified whether the pole of the equator or of

20
This could, in fact, be achieved by placing the north pole of the globe in the altitude of 90−ε
degrees, that is to adjust the globe for the latitude of the arctic circle (φ=90−ε), and then rotating the
globe so that the north pole of the ecliptic reaches the zenith. In this position, the ecliptic coincides
with the horizon, and thus the altitude of the star equates to its ecliptic latitude. The altitude can be
measured with the quadrant scale depicted in Figure 9. The point where the quadrant intersects the
ecliptic provides the ecliptic longitude of the star.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 115

the ecliptic is meant, but the latter is the correct one.21 The same procedure
is presented in P12, but without the distinction between north and south
latitudes. Furthermore, the author of treatise P criticizes the method as in-
correct.
In Q22, the declination (‫خــط معــدّل النهــار‬ ّ ‫ )ميــل عــن‬of the star is determined,
making a distinction between the north and the south declinations, on the basis
similarly of proximity to the north or south pole. The same procedure, without
the distinction between north and south declinations, is presented in P12.
In Q23, the zenithal distance of a star for any desired locality (‫ميــل عــن ســمت‬
‫ )ر�أس �أهــل �أ ّي بلــد شــئت‬is determined, making a distinction between zenithal dis-
tance to the north and to the south of the zenith: when the star is inclined
towards the north pole the zenithal distance is to the north, and when it is
inclined towards the south pole, then the zenithal distance is to the south. In
the beginning, there is an explanation of how to find the zenith on the me-
ridian, but since the meridian ring is always graduated, this procedure is not
necessary. It should be mentioned that the star is placed at the position of its
upper culmination on the meridian; this is mentioned in Chapter Q20 but not
in Q23. The same procedure, without the determination of the zenith on the
meridian and the distinction between the zenithal distances to the north and
to the south of the zenith, is presented in P12.
In Q24, the maximum altitude of any star on the globe for any locali-
ty we want (‫ّي بلــد شــئت‬ ّ ‫ �أتــ ّّم ارتفــاع فــي �أ‬/‫ ))�أعظــم‬is determined in two equiva�
lent ways: (i) by subtracting the zenithal distance of the star from 90°, and
(ii) by repeating the method described in the previous chapters and then
counting the degrees of the meridian between the horizon and the star. In
P12 only the subtraction is mentioned, while the second method is included
in Chapter P21 in a more elaborate form. In Chapter Q24, it should have
been mentioned that the star is placed at the position of its upper culmina-
tion on the meridian; in P12 this is mentioned at the beginning covering all
cases. The subject presented in Q24 is repeated in Chapter Q43. The trans-
mission of Chapter Q24 into treatise P is shown in the following diagram.

Q24i P12
Q24 (2 methods)
Q24ii Q43 P21
In Q30, the declination of any degree of the ecliptic (‫ّي جــزء مــن �أجــزاء‬
ّ ‫ميــل �أ‬
‫ )دائــرة البــروج‬is determined. Furthermore, it is mentioned that the equinoctial
points have no declination, that the declination of the tropical points is 23;33º,
and that the declination of the remaining degrees of the ecliptic is less than

21
For example, if the degree of mediation of a star A is among the southern zodiacal signs, and the
star is situated on the meridian between the ecliptic and the equator, its ‘latitude’ will be to the nor-
th, although PA>P'A, where P, P' are the north and south celestial poles respectively.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
116 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

23;33º. The method of P12 is the same, presented in a concise way, without
mentioning the values of the declination. It is worth noting here the value
23;33º for the obliquity of the ecliptic, which is given as the declination of the
tropical points. The same value is used by al-Farghānī (ninth century) in his
treatise al-Kāmil on the astrolabe.22

Chapter P13: To know the ortive amplitude of every star among the drawn
stars, or a degree among the degrees of the zodiac; to know the distance
between the risings of two stars and to know the distance between these
two stars
To determine the ortive / eastern amplitude of a star or degree of the ecliptic,
the star or degree is placed at the east horizon, by rotating the globe. The dis-
tance of the star or degree from the East point of the horizon, measured in
degrees of the horizon, is its ortive amplitude and this is equal to its occidu-
ous / western amplitude. This varies with latitude.23
The distance of the two stars is measured on the horizon or the meridian
as the difference between the ortive amplitudes or between the declinations of
two stars, respectively.
By placing the two stars successively on the horizon and putting marks at
the positions of their risings on the horizon, the distance between their rising
points can be measured in degrees of the horizon. This depends on the latitude
of observation, so the pole has to be placed at the elevation corresponding to
the preferred latitude.
By placing the two stars successively on the meridian and putting marks at
the positions of the transits of these stars (‫ )ممــ ّري الكوكبيــن‬on the meridian, the
distance between the points, where these stars culminate, can be measured in
degrees of the meridian ring. This difference does not vary with the latitude,
because it is equal to the difference of their declinations.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P13 includes Q25, 26, 27 and 31.
In Q25 the ortive amplitude of a star is determined: the globe is turned so
that the star comes to the east horizon and a mark is put at the corresponding
degree of the horizon. The globe is then turned again, so that either equinoctial
point comes to the east horizon and another mark is put there. The degrees be-
tween the two marks provide the ortive amplitude of the star; the direction of

22
See al-Farghānī, On the Astrolabe (ed. transl. Lorch), pp. 70–71.
23
The text of Chapter P13 seems to have an omission here: The phrase ‘This changes as latitude
varies. For this reason it is necessary to place the pole at the latitude of the city’ should refer both to
the determination of ortive amplitude and of the distance between the risings of two stars, but this
is not clear enough in the way it is preserved in treatise P.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 117

this amplitude can be to the north or to the south, depending on the position of
the rising of the star on the horizon in relation to the East Point.
In Q31 the ortive amplitude of a degree of the ecliptic is determined; the
procedure is similar to that of Q25, without mentioning a second turn of the
globe; the East Point on the horizon is specified as the ʽdegree of the rising of
the beginning of Ariesʼ (‫)جــزء طلــوع �أول الحمــل‬. The direction of the ortive ampli-
tude to the north or south is also examined, as in Q25.
In P13 the ortive amplitude of both a star and a degree of the ecliptic are
studied simultaneously, avoiding the repetition of the method. The second
turn of the globe mentioned in Q25 is omitted in P13, since the equinoctial
points rise from the East Point (‫ )نقطــة المشــرق‬of the horizon, and this point
already exists on the horizon. The direction of amplitude is not examined in
P13, but the additional information that the occiduous amplitude is equal to
the ortive is presented.
In Q26 the distance between two stars is measured by placing them succes-
sively on the meridian and counting the degrees of the meridian between their
points of culmination. The same procedure is presented at the end of P13,
where the term ʽthe transits of the two starsʼ (‫ )مم ـ ّري الكوكبيــن‬is used; this term
does not appear in Q26.
In Q27 the distance between the ortive amplitude of two stars is measured
by placing them successively on the east horizon and counting the degrees of
the horizon between their points of rising. The same procedure is presented in
P13; the term ʽthe transits of the two starsʼ is also used here in P13, but not
in Q27.
Both treatises clarify that the measurement of the ortive amplitude on
the horizon depends on the latitude of the locality, so the north pole of the
globe must be adjusted according to that latitude, while the measurement of
the distance on the meridian does not depend on the latitude, so the globe
can be adjusted to any latitude.

Chapter P14: To know the stars that rise simultaneously, culminate

simultaneously and set simultaneously
For an observer situated at the terrestrial equator (latitude φ=0°), two stars
rising simultaneously have the same right ascension; that is, they belong to
the same great semicircle passing through the two celestial poles (Figure 15).
Since the celestial poles are situated on the horizon at this locality, the
rotation of the celestial sphere keeps the two stars on the same semicircle,
thus they culminate simultaneously and set simultaneously. This situation
can be simulated with the celestial globe, when the celestial poles are likewise
placed on the horizon.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
118 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Figure 15: At the terrestrial equator, stars Figure 16: At any latitude φ≠0°, the
A and B rise simultaneously at points EA stars A and B rise at points EA and EB,
and EB, culminate simultaneously at points culminate at points CA and CB, and set
CA and CB, and set simultaneously at points at points WA and WB, respectively.
WA and WB, respectively.

Although, at any place on Earth, stars with the same right ascension – that
is, belonging to the same great semicircle passing through the two celestial
poles – will culminate simultaneously, for an observer situated at any locality
except for the terrestrial equator (latitude φ≠0°), these stars neither rise nor
set simultaneously. This happens because, during the rotation of the celestial
sphere, this great semicircle never coincides with a part of the horizon, since
two points of it – the two celestial poles – do not belong to the plane of the
horizon. For the same reason, two stars that rise simultaneously can never cul-
minate simultaneously at any latitude φ≠0°.
Let two stars A and B rise simultaneously, at a locality of latitude φ≠0°,
crossing simultaneously the east horizon at points EA and EB respectively (Fig-
ure 16). These stars transit the meridian at points CA and CB and set at the
points WA and WB of the west horizon respectively. If star A is closer to the
north pole than star B, then the arc EACA corresponds to a greater angle than
the arc EBCB, and the arc CAWA corresponds to a greater angle than the arc
CBWB. The apparent motion of these two stars on the celestial sphere is a cir-
cular motion with the same angular velocity, thus star B will arrive at the me-
ridian before star A, and similarly star B will set before star A.
The above phenomena are concisely presented at the beginning of the chap-
ter; then a verification with the celestial globe follows:
In the first case the poles of the globe are placed on the horizon (Figure 15);
a rotation of the globe demonstrates that if two stars rise simultaneously, then
they culminate simultaneously and set simultaneously.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 119

The second case is presented as follows: ʽThen elevate the pole any num-
ber (of degrees you want) and rotate the globe until one of them falls at the
middle of the sky or the west horizon, and you will find the other star passing
beyond it or not (yet) arriving at it.ʼ
There is a problem here: if the two previous stars were used, they would
culminate simultaneously, since they have the same right ascension. It is ob-
vious that there is an omission in the procedure here: after the north pole is
elevated, there must be ‘two stars rising simultaneously on the east horizon’;
then the globe must be rotated so that one of these stars arrives at the meridi-
an or the west horizon. At that moment, the other star has not yet arrived or
has already surpassed the meridian or the west horizon.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P14 corresponds to Q28. Both texts are similar; there are only some
differences in wording, while the author of treatise P tried to present the con-
tents of Chapter Q28 in condensed form.
The most remarkable point is that the omission of the phrase ‘two stars ris-
ing simultaneously on the east horizon’ in P14 occurs also in Q28, in all three
Cairo manuscripts (A, B and L) and manuscripts N24 and R (from Istanbul
and Paris respectively) of the treatise by Qusṭā, while the text is complete in
manuscripts C, D and E (London), H, I and O (Istanbul), K (Damascus), M
(Princeton), T (Tirana), U (Hydarabad), Z (Meshhed) and the Latin transla-
tion of the same treatise.25 In manuscript F from Cairo, now in the Manuscript
24
The manuscript was copied in 661 h / ad 1263, while Constantinople was the capital of the
Byzantine Empire, thus it does not originate from Istanbul.
25
See the second paragraph of chapter Q28 in Appendix 3. The omitted passage is
‘‫ ثـ ّّم �أدر الكــرة ح�تـّى يصيــر‬.‫ الكوكبــان علــى حلقــة ال�أفــق‬and it is written in italic font in the English and
Latin translations below.
Translation of the second paragraph of Chapter Q28: ‘If you want to know that with the globe,
place the north pole on the horizon and rotate the globe, then you see that the stars that come to
the east horizon simultaneously, come also to the line of the middle of the sky (meridian) simul-
taneously, and come to the west horizon simultaneously. Then elevate the north pole from the
horizon as many degrees as you want, and rotate the globe until the two stars come on the horizon
ring. Then rotate the globe until one of the two stars comes to the ring of the meridian line, then
you see the that other star has already surpassed it or has not yet arrived at it; similarly it will be
obvious / visible to you, if you rotate the globe until one of the stars comes to the west horizon.
Note: the two stars that rise simultaneously after the north pole has been elevated cannot be the
same two stars that rise, culminate and set simultaneously when the poles of the globe are on the
horizon.
The Latin translation of the above extract, as edited by Lorch and Martínez Gázquez, ʽQusta ben
Lucaʼ, p. 42, l. 541–49, is the following: ‘Et cum uolueris hoc scire in spera pone polum septem-
trionalem in orizonte et uolue speram. Tunc uidebis quod stelle que sunt in orizonte simul, erunt
eciam in ipsa reuolucione spere sub linea meridiei simul. Et erunt eciam super orizonta occidental-
em simul. Post hec eleua polum septemtrionalem super orizonta quotcumque gradibus uolueris.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
120 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Library of the University of Pennsylvania, the folio that should contain Chap-
ters 22–29 is missing.
The omission of the phrase in treatise P could thus be related to its omis-
sion in certain manuscripts of treatise Q. If the omission in both instances
is not coincidental, one might suppose that the author of treatise P used an
ancestor manuscript of the Cairo manuscripts, or a related one to manuscript
N, having the same omission and did not realize that there was an error, so he
summarized the method without correcting the mistake.

Chapter P15: To know the degree of rising of any star, among the stars
drawn on the globe, the degree of its meridian transit and the degree of its
setting at the various latitudes
The degrees of the ecliptic that rise, culminate and set simultaneously with a
star drawn on the globe are determined by rotating the globe so that the cho-
sen star arrives at the east horizon, the meridian ring and the west horizon
respectively, and observing which degree of the ecliptic arrives simultaneously
with the star at that circle. The degree that culminates simultaneously with the
star (the degree of mediation) does not depend on the latitude of the locality,
while the other two degrees do. For this reason the globe should be adjusted
to the preferred latitude.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P15 is almost identical to Q29, with minor differences in wording.
The author of treatise P clarifies in the title that the method concerns only the
stars drawn on the globe, which is not mentioned in the title of Q29.

Chapter P16: To know the ascensions (rising times) of the zodiacal signs
and the ascension of a degree in the right and oblique spheres (right and
oblique ascension)
The ascension (rising times) of any zodiacal sign in the right and oblique
spheres is measured using the globe by placing successively the first and last
point of the sign on the east horizon, marking the degrees of the equator that
arrive simultaneously with these two points on the horizon and counting the
number of degrees of the equator between the two marks. When the pole of
the globe is on the horizon, a position that corresponds to latitude φ=0°, the

Et uolue speram donec fuerint ambe stelle super circulum orizontis simul. Post hec uolue speram
donec sit una 2 stellarum sub circulo meridiano. Tunc uidebis alteram stellam ultra processisse
uel citra remansisse. Et idem aparebit tibi cum conuerteris speram donec sit una 2 stellarum super
orizonta occidentis’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 121

result is the right ascension; when the pole is elevated φ degrees, then the re-
sult corresponds to the oblique ascension for a latitude φ. It is also noted that
the right ascension can be measured on the meridian ring instead of the east
horizon, regardless of the elevation of the pole.
With the same procedure, the ascension of any degree of the ecliptic can be
measured, starting from the beginning of Aries, that is the point of the spring
equinox, and ending at that degree of the ecliptic.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P16 includes the procedures of Chapters Q32 and Q33, with addi-
tional instructions on how to determine the ascension of any degree of the
ecliptic. The procedure is described only once in P16, while in Q32 and Q33
it is repeated with all its details three times.
In Q32, the north pole is placed on the horizon and the sign of Aries is used
to determine the right ascension on the east horizon. After that, it is stated
that the same method can be applied for all other signs. It is then mentioned
that the meridian ring can be used for the same purpose and the procedure
repeated for any zodiacal sign, replacing the ‘east horizon’ with the ‘meridian
ring’. In the latter case, the pole of the globe may have any elevation.
In Q33 the oblique ascension of any sign is measured, using again the same pro-
cedure; the only difference is that now the globe is adjusted to a given latitude φ.
The author of treatise P presents all of the above in a concise and smart
way, avoiding the repetitions and adding the determination of the ascension
for any degree of the ecliptic.

Chapter P17: To know the stars of perpetual apparition, perpetual

occultation, and those that rise and set, among the stars drawn on the globe
The poles are placed on the horizon and the globe is rotated so that a star
comes to the upper meridian (Figure 17). The distances p, p′ of the star from
the north and south celestial poles, respectively, are counted on the meridian
ring. For a city having (north) latitude φ, the polar distances are then com-
pared to the latitude:
• If p≤φ, which means the star is within arc AN, then the star is of per-
petual apparition (always visible) at this latitude.
• If p′=φ, which means the star coincides with point C, then the star
touches the horizon and the rest of the time is below the horizon.
• If p′<φ, which means the star is within arc SC, then the star is of per-
petual occultation (always invisible) at this latitude.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
122 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

• If p′>φ (it should be ‘p′>φ and p>φ’, but only the former condition is
mentioned), which means the star is within arc CA, then the star rises
and sets.
• For the stars for which p>p′, which means the stars are within arc ZN,
their stay above the horizon is longer than below it.
• For the stars for which p′>p, which means the stars are within arc SZ,
their stay above the horizon is shorter than below it.
The whole study concerns only northern latitudes.

Figure 17: Rising and setting of the stars according to P17.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P17 includes the subjects of Q34 and Q35, but the method presented
in P17 is not the same as the methods of Q34 and Q35.
The title of Chapter Q34 announces that it concerns stars of perpetual ap-
parition, but in fact rising and setting stars are also examined in the chapter.
For this reason, the north pole of the globe is elevated according to the lat-
itude φ of the locality and the globe is turned a whole rotation (Figure 18).
The following possibilities are examined:
1. The stars that reach the meridian between the north pole P and
the horizon (circle ENWS) never set, but make circles above the
horizon.
2. The stars that arrive at the meridian between the north pole and the
equator (circle EBW) rise and set; those closer to the north pole spend

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 123

longer time above earth and those closer to the south pole spend longer
time below earth.
The proposition ʽthe stars that arrive at the meridian between the north pole
and the equator rise and setʼ means that the stars that culminate between
points P and B rise and set (where B is the culminating point of the equator);
this is not correct, because the stars that culminate between points P and A
(where A is the point of the meridian having an elevation of 2φ degrees above
the north horizon) do not rise and set, but are always above the horizon. The
correct statement is that the stars that culminate between points A and S rise
and set.26

Figure 18: The method of Q34. Figure 19: The method of Q35.

The title of Chapter Q35 announces that it concerns stars of perpetual

occultation, but again the rising and setting stars are also examined. For this
reason, the south pole of the globe is placed on the horizon (Figure 19) and a
mark is put on the meridian ring at point C that has an elevation of φ degrees
from the south horizon, where φ is the latitude of the city. Rotating the globe,
the following possibilities are examined:
1. The stars that reach the meridian between the south pole S and point
C never appear in that city.
2. The stars that reach the meridian between point C and the equator
(circle EZW) towards the other pole (i.e. within the arc CZN) are vis-
ible in this city.
It is also noted that where the latitude is very small, there are few stars of
perpetual occultation, and where the latitude is large, there are many of these.
The author of treatise P corrected the error that appears in Q34, and ex-
tended the method that appears in Q35 in order to cover all relevant cases.
26
The Latin translation of treatise Q has also been checked and contains the same information.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
124 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Chapter P18: To know the stars that set after the Sun and rise before it
in one night, and to know the stars that are above the horizon during the
whole night
The polar distance ps of the star and that of the degree of the Sun pd must be
first determined. If ps<pd and the star is close to the west horizon (at point S1)
at sunset, when the Sun is at point Dw (Figure 20), then the star sets (at point
Sw) after the Sun and rises before it (the star rises at Se, and the Sun rises at De
when the star is at point S2). The term ‘close’ is not, however, adequate; the star
could be close but below the horizon, implying it has set before the Sun. The
term ‘approaching’ describes the situation better.
If ps<pd and the star is close27 to the east horizon (at point S1) at sunset,
when the Sun is at point Dw (Figure 21), then the star will be above the hori-
zon during the whole night. This does not necessarily mean that the star does
not rise and set, but that it may rise close to sunset (at point S1) and set close
to sunrise (at point S2), when the Sun is at point De.
As the latitude increases, the extent to which the rising and setting of the
star is either advanced or delayed, in comparison to that of the Sun, will also
increase.

Figure 20 Figure 21
Figures 20–21: Blue circle SWNE: horizon, green circle: equator, yellow circle S1S2: the
diurnal circle of the star, red circle DeDw: the diurnal circle of the degree of the Sun,
PP′: the celestial axis.

27
In this case, the star can be above, on or in a short distance below the horizon. Since stars are
not visible at sunset and for some time thereafter, the star will have risen above the horizon at dusk,
which can be considered as the beginning of night.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 125

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P18 includes the subjects of Q36 and Q37; the method presented in
P18 is more general and mathematically expressed.
Q36 presents a study for the stars that can be seen twice in one night: after
sunset on the west side and before sunrise on the east side (Figure 20). In the
title, it is explained that this is possible for stars near the north pole, when the
Sun is among the southern zodiacal signs.
The north pole is elevated according to the latitude of the locality, and the
globe is rotated until the degree of the Sun arrives at the west horizon (at
point Dw). The stars that are above the horizon (a star among them is at point
S1), approaching the west horizon, will be visible after sunset that night. Then
the globe is rotated and these stars set (the same star sets at point Sw) after
the degree of the Sun. By the time the degree of the Sun arrives at the east
horizon (at point De), the same stars have already risen (the star rises at point
Se) before sunrise (at sunrise the star is at point S2 above the horizon). Having
set after sunset and risen before sunrise, these stars are thus visible twice in the
same night.
In Q37 there is a study for the stars that are visible above the horizon
during the entire night, on a given day and locality (Figure 21).
The north pole is first elevated according to the latitude of the given locality,
and the globe is rotated until the degree of the Sun arrives at the west horizon
(at point Dw), observing those stars that reach the east horizon (a star among
them is at point S1). Then the globe is rotated until the degree of the Sun arrives
at the east horizon (at point De); the stars, among those previously observed,
that approach the west horizon (the star is now at point S2) do not set at this
locality at that night and are visible above the horizon the whole night.
The author of treatise P changed the descriptive methods of Qusṭā’s treatise,
introducing a mathematical expression: the polar distance of the star and that of
the degree of the Sun are determined, and the comparison between their values,
in addition to the position of the star at sunset, leads to the conclusions.
The author of treatise P also changed the wording, making it more rigor-
ous: In the three first cases of Table 7, references to the visibility of the star
are replaced by more accurate references to the setting and rising of the star.28
In the fourth case, the problem is approached in a more general way, with the
range of positions of the stars and the degrees of the ecliptic widened.

28
Determining the visibility of a star is more complicated than ascertaining its position in relation
to the horizon. Its visibility depends on various factors, such as its magnitude, altitude at the mo-
ment of sunrise or sunset, weather conditions, and so on. These factors are not taken into consider-
ation in treatises P and Q, and thus it is more accurate to state that the star rises before the sun and
sets after it, than that the star is visible before sunrise and after sunset.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
126 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

P18 Q36-37
the stars that set after the Sun and rise the stars that can be seen … after sunset in
before it the west and … before sunrise in the east
1
‫الكواكب التي تغيب بعد الشمس وتطلع قبله‬ ‫ بعد غروب الشمس في‬... ‫الكواكب التي ُتُرى‬
‫ وقبل طلوع الشمس في المشرق‬... ‫المغرب‬
the stars set after the Sun the stars are visible at the west after sunset
2 ‫الكواكب تكون ظاهرة في المغرب بعد غروب‬
‫الكواكب تغيب بعد الشمس‬ ‫الشمس‬
the stars will be … above the horizon (lit. the stars … are visible above the horizon
3 earth) during the entire night the entire night
‫ في الليل كله فوق ال�أرض‬...‫الكواكب‬ ‫ تكون ظاهرة فوق �أفق الليل كّلّه‬... ‫الكواكب‬
The stars … whose distance (from the
this is possible for the stars near the
north pole) is less than the distance of the
north pole, when the Sun is among the
degree of the Sun (from the north pole) in
southern zodiacal signs
4 a significant decrease
)‫التي �أبعادها (عن القطب الشمالي‬... ‫الكواكب‬ ‫هذا يتهّيّ�أ في الكواكب القريبة من القطب‬
‫قليلة من بعد جزء الشمس (عن القطب‬
‫الشمالي) قّلّة معتد بها‬ ‫ �إذا كانت الشمس في البروج الجنوبية‬،‫الشمالي‬
Table 7: Comparison between the terminology in P18 and the corresponding Chapters Q36-37

A subject similar to Chapter Q36 and the first part of P18 is discussed in
Chapters 14 and 15 of the second book of the treatise On Risings and Settings
(Περὶ ἐπιτολῶν καὶ δύσεων – De ortibus et occasibus) by Autolycus (360‒290
bc).29 In these chapters, he states that for the stars situated to the north of the
zodiac circle, if the distance between the degrees of the zodiac that set and rise
simultaneously with them is equal to (Chapter 14) or greater than (Chapter 15)
one zodiacal sign, then these stars will be seen setting after sunset and rising
before sunrise in the same night.30 The text of Autolycus is as follows:
Greek text English translation
Τοῖς ἀπολαμβανομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ For the stars that are intercepted by the
ζῳδιακοῦ κατὰ τὰς δύσεις ἐπὶ τὰ zodiac on the western side towards the
πρὸς ἄρκτους, ἐὰν τὰ συνδύνοντα ἀπὸ north, if the distance between the degrees
τῶν συνανατελλόντων ἀπέχῃ ζῳδίου of the zodiac which set and rise simulta-
II. 14

περιφέρειαν, ἐκεῖνα κρύψιν οὐκ ἄξει ἀλλὰ neously with them is equal to an arc of
τῆς αὐτῆς νυκτὸς ἑῷά τε ἐπιτέλλοντα one zodiac sign, they will not disappear;
καὶ ἑσπέρια δύνoντα φανήσεται. the same night they will be seen to rise
before the sun and to set after the sun.

29
Autolycos de Pitane, La sphère en mouvement. Levers et couchers héliaques (ed. transl. Aujac);
Mogenet, Autolycus de Pitane; and Autolyci, De sphaera quae movetur liber. De ortibus et occasibus
(ed. Hultsch).
30
Autolycos de Pitane, La sphère en mouvement (ed. transl. Aujac), pp. 126–29; Mogenet, Autoly-
cus de Pitane, pp. 253–54, and Autolyci, De sphaera quae movetur (ed. Hultsch), pp. 146–51. The
French translation of the titles of Chapters 14 and 15 by Aujac is on pp. 126 and 128.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 127

Ὅσα τῶν ἄστρων ἀπολαμβάνεται For the stars that are intercepted by the
ὑπὸ τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ κατὰ τὰς δύσεις zodiac on the western side towards the
ἐπὶ τὰ πρὸς ἄρκτους, τούτοις ἐὰν τὰ north, if the distance between the degrees
συνδύνοντα ἀπὸ τῶν συνανατελλόντων of the zodiac which set and rise simulta-
II. 15

ἀπέχῃ πλέον ζῳδίου περιφερείας, ἐκεῖνα neously with them is greater than an arc
οὐκ ἄξει κρύψιν, ἀλλὰ τῆς αὐτῆς νυκτὸς equal to one zodiac sign, they will not
ἑῷα ἐπιτέλλει καὶ ἑσπέρια δύνει ἀπὸ disappear; the same night they rise before
τῆς ἑῴας ἐπιτολῆς μέχρι τῆς ἑσπερίας the sun and set after the sun, from their
δύσεως. heliacal rising until their heliacal setting.
In Chapters 17 and 18 of the second book of the same treatise, Autolycus dis-
cusses the case of stars situated to the south of the zodiac circle. For these stars,
he states that if the distance between the degrees of the zodiac which set and
rise simultaneously with them is equal to (Chapter 17) or greater than (Chap-
ter 18) one zodiacal sign, then these stars could be seen rising after sunset and
setting before sunrise in the same night.31 These chapters do not describe ex-
actly the same situation as Chapter Q37: Autolycus examines the rising and
setting of a southern star in the same night, while Qusṭā examines the stars
that remain above the horizon the entire night.
It is probable that Qusṭā was influenced by the treatise On Risings and
Settings by Autolycus, since there is some evidence that he was the translator
of this treatise from Greek into Arabic.32 Further evidence for Autolycus’ in-
fluence is the use of the terms ‫‘( ظاهــر‬visible’) and ‫‘( الكواكــب التــي �تـُرى‬the stars
that are seen’) by Qusṭā; similar terms are used by Autolycus, e.g.: τῆς αὐτῆς
νυκτὸς ἑῷά τε ἐπιτέλλοντα καὶ ἑσπέρια δύνoντα φανήσεται33 (‘they will be
seen rising in the morning and setting in the evening of the same night’) and
τὸ ἄστρον ἀνατέλλον ὁρᾶται34 (‘the star is seen rising’).

31
Autolycos de Pitane, La sphère en mouvement (ed. transl. Aujac), pp. 131–34; Mogenet, Au-
tolycus de Pitane, pp. 256–58, and Autolyci, De sphaera quae movetur (ed. Hultsch), pp. 154–59.
The French translation of the titles of Chapters 17 and 18 by Aujac is on pp. 131–33. An English
translation of these titles is as follows:
II. 17: ʽFor the stars intercepted by the zodiac on the western side towards the south, if the distance
between the degrees of the zodiac which set and rise simultaneously with them is equal to an arc of
one zodiac sign, on the same night they will be seen to rise immediately after the sun has set and
to set immediately before the sun rises. They will disappear for a longer time than the stars on the
zodiac.ʼ
II.18: ʽFor the stars intercepted by the zodiac on the western side towards the south, if the distance
between the degrees of the zodiac which set and rise simultaneously with them is greater than an arc
of one zodiac sign, they will go from their rising in the dawn to their setting in the dawn, after that to
their rising in the evening, then to their setting in the evening. On the same night they will be seen
to rise and set from their earlier setting in the dawn until their later rising in the evening. They will
disappear for a longer time than the stars on the zodiac.ʼ
32
According to the manuscript Leiden, Universiteitsbibliotheek, Or. 1031,1 (ff. 1–21), the treatise
of Autolycus was translated into Arabic by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā, see Sezgin, GAS, vol. VI, p. 73.
33
From the above-mentioned title of Chapter 14.
34
Autolycos de Pitane, La sphère en mouvement (ed. transl. Aujac), p. 255, l. 9–10.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
128 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Chapter P19: To know at what time the stars drawn on the globe rise and set
The pole is first placed according to the latitude of the locality and the globe is
rotated so that the degree of the Sun arrives at the west horizon; at this position,
a mark is put on the rising degree d1 of the equator. The globe is then rotated
so that the selected star arrives at the east or the west horizon; at each of these
positions a mark is put on the rising degree d2 of the equator. The difference

is the arc of revolution between sunset and the rising or setting of the star,
while r/15 provides the time of the star’s rising or setting in equal hours after
sunset and r/n provides the corresponding time in seasonal nighttime hours
after sunset, where n is the number of degrees of one seasonal nighttime hour
of this night.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P19 includes Chapters Q38 and Q39.
Q38 estimates the time of rising of a star, and Q39 the time of its setting;
the procedure in both chapters is similar to that presented in P19. The only
remarkable difference is in Chapter Q39, where the hours of setting of the star
after sunset are also mentioned as ‘the duration of this star’s staying above the
earth’ ‫وهــي ســاعات مقــام ذلــك الكوكــب فــوق الاأرض‬, i.e. the time between the sunset
and the setting of this star.

Chapter P20: To know the time of rising of the Moon and the planets and
the time of their setting
The pole is placed according to the latitude of the locality and the position of
the Moon or planet is found using a zīj or another way.
The position of the Moon or the planet is described by its ʽdegreeʼ, its ʽlat-
itudeʼ and the direction of the latitude. According to the method described,
the ʽdegreeʼ corresponds to the mediation, namely the degree of the ecliptic
that culminates simultaneously with the Moon or planet on this day, while the
‘latitude’ is the difference of declination between the Moon or planet and its
degree of mediation. The direction of latitude is to the north, when the Moon
or planet is located north of the ecliptic, or to the south in the opposite case.
The position of the Moon or planet is marked on the globe with the following
procedure: the user must rotate the globe so that its ʽdegreeʼ comes to the me-
ridian and then count as many degrees of the meridian as the ‘latitude’ in the
direction of the latitude towards the north or south. After this, the procedure
is similar to that described in the previous chapter: the mark corresponding to
the position of the Moon or planet is used instead of the star drawn on the
globe.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 129

The arc of revolution between sunset and the rising or setting of the Moon
or planet is determined and then divided by the degrees of an equal or seasonal
nighttime hour; in this way the time of rising or setting is determined in either
equal hours after sunset or seasonal nighttime hours after sunset.
There is an important phrase omitted in the text of all twenty-two manu-
scripts of treatise P examined (P20 is not included in manuscript N), but pres-
ent in the treatise of Qusṭā:35 ‘Then you rotate the globe so that the mark of
the Moon or planet arrives at the west or east horizon, and you put a mark on
the degree of the equator that has reached the east horizon with it’. Without
this phrase the procedure is not complete.
The method described corresponds to the rising of the Moon or a plan-
et during nighttime. This method can be adapted to determine the respective
time during daytime by placing the degree of the Sun at the east horizon.
At the end of Chapter P20, the author adds the following comment: ‘This
rule is not in accordance with reality and its origin does not take into con-
sideration the difference between the degree of the planet and the degree of
its transit’. The author probably implies that if the degree and latitude of the
Moon or planet were taken as the ecliptic longitude and latitude respectively,
then the procedure could not give correct results; but, in fact, the method for
determining the position of the Moon or planet on the celestial globe is cor-
rect, when the coordinates mediation and difference of declination are used.
Since the criticism of the rule seems to be for the coordinates and not for
procedure, we may presume that the omission of approximately two lines did
not occur in the original text of P20; it might have been an omission in an
early copy on which all twenty-three manuscripts depend.36

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P20 includes Chapters Q40 and Q41. Q40 estimates the time of ris-
ing of the Moon or a planet during the night, whereas Q41 the time of their
setting during the night; the procedure in both chapters is similar to that pre-
sented in P20. In Q41 it is noted that the position of the Moon or the planet
can be found through a calendar or zīj (‫ ;)بتقويــم �أو بزيــج‬in the same chapter, the
hours of setting of the Moon or planet after sunset are also mentioned as ʽthe
period of its stay above the earth’ ،‫فهــو ســاعات زمانيــة لمقــام ذلــك الكوكــب فــوق ال�أرض‬
‫ووقــت غروبه‬.
35
The corresponding passage exists in all seventeen manuscripts of the treatise Q that were
examined and contain Chapters Q40–Q41, and in the glosses written in the lower and left margin
of manuscript D of treatise P, where the whole Chapter Q40 is repeated.
36
The omission could be caused by saut du même au même, since the missing passage starts with the
word ‫‘( ثــم‬then’), as the phrase after the omission, and ends with : ‫وتضــع العلامــة علــى الجــزء الــذي وافــى‬
‫‘( معه ال�أفق الشــرقي من المعّدّل‬and you put a mark on the degree of the equator that has reached the east
horizon with it’), as the phrase that precedes the omission.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
130 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Chapter P21: To know the midday altitude of the Sun on every day and
the maximum altitude of any of the stars drawn on the globe
The north pole of the globe is placed according to the latitude of the locality
and the globe is rotated so that the degree of the Sun or star arrives at the me-
ridian. It must be examined whether the degree of the Sun or star is closer to
the north or the south point of the horizon, that is whether the degree of the
Sun or star culminates to the north or south of the zenith. Then the degrees of
the meridian between the degree of the Sun or star and the horizon are count-
ed, at their closest distance; this means that the counting starts from the south
point S of the horizon to the Sun or the star (namely angle in Figure 22),
if the culmination is to the south of the zenith, or from the north point N of
the horizon to the Sun or star (angle in Figure 22), if the culmination is
to the north of the zenith.
The number of degrees thus counted on the meridian provides the midday
altitude of the Sun on that day, or the maximum altitude of the star. This
altitude depends on the latitude φ of the locality, since the maximum altitude
is given by the formulas hmax=90°−φ+δ for culmination to the south of the
zenith and hmax=90°+φ−δ for culmination to the north of the zenith, where δ
is the declination of the Sun or the star.

Figure 22: The star A culminates to the south of the zenith Z

and the star B culminates to the north of the zenith.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P21 includes Chapters Q42 and Q43. Q42 is concerned with the
midday altitude of the Sun, whereas Q43 with the maximum altitude of a star
drawn on the globe. The procedure described in both chapters is the same as
that in P21.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 131

The method in Q43 is a more elaborate version of the second method pre-
sented in Chapter Q24, which also studies the maximum altitude of a fixed
star drawn on the globe. The author of treatise P had included only the first
method of Q24 in the corresponding Chapter P12, while the second method
of Q24 is presented in P21 in a more elaborate way.

Chapter P22: To know the difference between the greatest altitude of the
Sun on the same day in two cities with different latitudes
The maximum altitude of the degree of the Sun is measured on the merid-
ian ring, when the pole of the globe is placed according to the latitude of
each city, as described in the previous chapter. The difference of these two
altitudes is the difference between the greatest altitude of the Sun in these
two cities.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P22 corresponds to Chapter Q44. The procedure is the same in both
treatises, but in Q44 the method presented in Q42 is repeated, while in P22 it
is mentioned that the measurement of the altitude is conducted according to
the aforementioned way.

Chapter P23: To know the place in which the year is one day and where
no star rises from the horizon and no star ever sets with the motion of the
celestial sphere
One of the poles is placed at the zenith. If the north pole is at the zenith,
the northern zodiacal signs will be above the horizon and the southern ones
below it. If the south pole comes to the zenith, the southern zodiacal signs will
be above the horizon and the northern ones below it. Thus, while the Sun is
among the six signs above the horizon, there will be six months of daytime,
and while it is among the six signs below the horizon, there will be six months
of nighttime.
At this position, any point of the globe rotates on a circle parallel to the
horizon and ‘its motion will be rotary like the motion of a millstone’, as
described in Chapter P1.37 Thus the stars do not rise or set. Although the
title of P23 clarifies that no stars rise or set there, the text at the end of
the chapter states that ʽsome of the fixed stars are in perpetual apparition
and some of the fixed stars are in perpetual occultationʼ; this wording does
not exclude the case that some stars rise and set. The correct expression
37
The simile with the motion of a millstone is not repeated in Chapter P23, although it was
mentioned in the corresponding Chapter Q46.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
132 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

could be ‘the fixed stars are either in perpetual apparition or in perpetual

occultation’.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P23 includes Chapters Q45 and Q46.
Q45 deals with the place where the whole year is one day: 6 months of day-
time and 6 months of nighttime. This place corresponds to a latitude of 90º,
but only the case in which the north pole is at the zenith is described.
Q46 refers to the place that the stars do not rise and set, but rotate in a
motion like the motion of a millstone, above or below the horizon. Thus the
stars are either in perpetual apparition or occultation. Again, only the case in
which the north pole is at the zenith is mentioned.
Chapter Q46 and, in part, Q45 apply the first proposition of the treatise De
habitationibus of Theodosius (c. 100 bc)38 to the celestial globe. The likelihood
that Theodosius’ treatise directly influenced treatise Q is further substantiated
by the fact that the translation of the Greek text of De habitationibus into Ar-
abic is ascribed to Qusṭā ibn Lūqā.39 Chapter Q45 is related to Section 6.15 of
Geminusʼ Introduction to the Phaenomena.40 Both Chapters Q45 and Q46 are
also related to Section II.6.39 of Ptolemy’s Almagest.41
Although only the case of the north pole is mentioned in all of the related trea-
tises (De habitationibus, Introduction to the Phaenomena, Almagest, treatise Q), the
author of treatise P included the case where the south celestial pole is situated at
the zenith, a position that corresponds to the locality of the south pole on earth.

Chapter P24: To know the place where the daylight is 24 equal hours
The altitude of a point of the celestial sphere in its upper culmination to the
south of the zenith is hmax=90°−φ+δ, while the altitude in its lower culmination is
hmin=φ−90°+δ, where φ is the latitude of the place and δ the declination of this point.

38
The Greek text of the treatise De habitationibus of Theodosius is included in Fecht, Theodosii de
habitationibus liber. The Arabic and the Medieval Latin translations of the same treatise are edited
by Kunitzsch and Lorch, Theodosius, De habitationibus. An English translation and comments by
the authors are also included.
39
See Kunitzsch and Lorch, Theodosius, De habitationibus, pp. 9, 16.
40
The corresponding Greek text, as quoted in Manitius, Gemini Elementa astronomiae, p. 74, is
the following: 6.15: Πέρας δὲ ἐστὶ τις χώρα ἐσχάτη πρὸς ἄρκτον κειμένη, ἐν ᾗ ὁ μὲν πόλος κατὰ
κορυφὴν γίνεται, τοῦ δὲ ζῳδιακοῦ κύκλου ἓξ ζῴδια ὑπὲρ τὸν ὁρίζοντα ἀπολαμβάνεται, ἓξ δὲ ὑπὸ
τὸν ὁρίζοντα ἀποτέμνεται· ἡ μεγίστη δὲ ἡμέρα παρ’ αὐτοῖς ἑξαμηνιαία γίνεται, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἡ νύξ.
The English translation coming from Evans and Berggren, Geminosʼs Introduction to the Phenom-
ena, Section 6.15, p. 164, is the following: ‘The limit is a certain land lying in the extreme north,
where the pole is at the zenith, and where 6 signs of the zodiac circle are cut off above the horizon
and 6 are cut off below the horizon: there the longest day is six months long, and similarly the night’.
41
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, pp. 116–17, and Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest, p. 90.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 133

A point of the celestial sphere touches the horizon but does not set when
hmin=0°. In general, in treatises P and Q, the declination of the first point of
Cancer is taken as δ=24°;42 thus this point touches the horizon but does not
set when hmin=0° ⇒φ−90°+δ=0° ⇒ φ−90°+24°=0° ⇒ φ=90°−24° ⇒ φ=66°.43
A point of the celestial sphere touches the horizon but does not rise when
hmax=0°. The declination of the first point of Capricorn is taken as δ=−24°;
thus this point touches the horizon but does not rise when hmax=0° ⇒
90°−φ+δ=0° ⇒ 90°−φ−24°=0° ⇒ φ=90°−24° ⇒ φ=66°.
Thus, at the latitude φ=66°, the first point of Cancer does not set; this
means that when the Sun is at this degree, that is the summer solstice, the
length of daylight will be 24 hours. Similarly, at the same latitude, the first
point of Capricorn does not rise; this means that when the Sun is at this de-
gree, that is the winter solstice, the nighttime will be 24 hours.
The above results can be produced with the celestial globe, when the (north)
pole is placed according to a latitude of 66°. At this position, a complete ro-
tation of the globe shows that the first point of Cancer does not set, thus it
produces 24 hours of daylight, and the first point of Capricorn does not rise,
and thus produces 24 hours of nighttime.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P24 corresponds to Chapter Q47. In Q47, the cases of the
first point of Cancer and that of Capricorn are successively exam-
ined. The north pole of the globe is elevated 66° from the horizon. At
this position, a complete rotation of the globe shows that the first point
of Cancer does not set. When the Sun is at this degree, it will be day-
light for the time of a day ( ‫ )النهــار‬and a night ( ‫)الليــل‬44 and so the du-
ration of daylight will be 24 equal hours. When the Sun is at the first
point of Capricorn, it does not rise; thus, the night will be 24 equal
hours when the Sun enters Capricorn, and ʽthere will be no daylight at
allʼ. The daylight increases and decreases the whole year ʽfrom 1 hourʼ
( ‫ )من ســاعة‬to 24 hours. The above occur at the latitude of 66°.

42
The declination of the first point of Cancer is equal to the obliquity of the ecliptic ε. The value of
ε in Chapters P24, P26 and P27 and the corresponding Chapters Q47 and Q49–52 is rounded off
as ε=24°, while in Chapter Q30 it is taken as ε=23;33°.
43
In manuscript K of treatise P, the value of the terrestrial latitude has been corrected in the margin
to 66;25 for both Chapters P24 and P25; this corresponds to ε=23;35°, and reflects an attempt to
‘update’ the value of the obliquity of the ecliptic.
44
In the examined manuscripts, the variants ‫�أزمــان النهــار والليــل‬/‫ زمان‬or ‫ زمــان الليــل والنهــار‬are used; this
is the same as the term ‫( زمــان الليــل والنهــار‬νυχθήμερον / ‘the time of a night and a day’) used by Qusṭā
in the Arabic translation of Proposition 12 of Theodosius (see Kunitzsch and Lorch, Theodosius, De
habitationibus, pp. 64, 66, 68).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
134 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

This chapter is related to Section II.6.33 of Ptolemy’s Almagest.45 The same

problem is discussed by Theodosius in Proposition 12 of De habitationibus –
Περί οἰκήσεων,46 showing again that Qusṭā was probably influenced by this
work as he translated it from Greek into Arabic.
There is a contradiction at the end of Chapter Q47, however. Although the
text mentions that at the latitude of 66°, when the Sun is at the first point of
Capricorn, ʽthere will be no daylight at allʼ, then it is written that ‘the daylight
increases and decreases the whole year from 1 hour to 24 hours’.47 The daylight
of 1 hour could reflect influence from Theodosius, who states in Proposition
12: [at these places] ‘the Sun at the summer solstice remains above their hori-
zon for the time of a night and a day (nahār) and their day (nahār) at that
time is 30 days (yawm)’ (see note 46). In the proof, Theodosius explains that
the light of the Sun is visible to them when the Sun traverses an arc of half
a sign before the summer solstice and half a sign after it. Since the total arc
is one sign, the Sun traverses it in 30 days (yawm), so the day (nahār) at the
entrance of the summer solstice is 30 days (yawm).48
It is obvious that Theodosius implies here that for 30 days there will be no
darkness at all in these localities, although the Sun comes below the horizon,
because of the twilight. Similarly, when the Sun is at the winter solstice, al-

45
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, pp. 114–15:
33: ʽThe parallel where the longest day is 24 equinoctial hours is 66;8,40° from the equator. This is
the first of the (parallels) where the shadow goes full circle. For on that parallel, at the summer sol-
stice (and then only), the Sun does not set, so the shadow of the gnomon points towards every part
of the horizon [in turn]. There the parallel of the summer solstice is ever-visible, and the parallel of
the winter solstice is ever-invisible, since both are tangent to the horizon, on opposite sides. And the
ecliptic coincides with the horizon when the spring equinoctial point on it is rising.ʼ (The transla-
tion into English comes from Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest, p. 89).
46
Kunitzsch and Lorch, Theodosius, De habitationibus, pp. 64–71, 89–91. The translation of Pro-
position 12 into English, as presented in the above edition, is the following: ‘For those whose zenith
is equally distant from the visible pole as the tropic is from the equator, the Sun at the summer sol-
stice remains above their horizon for the time of a night and a day [nahār] and their day [nahār] at
that time is 30 days [yawm]; at the winter solstice it remains for the time of a night and a day below
the horizon, and the remaining days are to the remaining nights in proportion’.
47
The phrase ‘from 1 hour̓ (‫ )مــن ســاعة‬appears in twelve of the eighteen examined manuscripts;
in manuscript D (f. 153v) this phrase is omitted, in manuscript L almost half of the text of Chapter
Q47, including this phrase, is omitted, while in manuscripts C, S, T, U the passage from ‘and there
will be no daylight at all’ until the end of the chapter has been replaced by the text: ‘And (the length)
of night and day increases according to the position of the Sun among the southern and the north-
ern zodiacal signs in that latitude’. In the Latin translation of the treatise by Qusṭā, a corresponding
phrase appears: ‘Et ideo curn sol intrauerit primum gradum Capricorni erit nox 24 horarum equa-
lium sine die. Et augebitur et diminuetur dies in aliis diebus anni ab hora una usque 24 horas’ (see
Lorch and Martínez Gázquez, ʽQusta ben Lucaʼ, p. 52, l. 808–10).
48
Kunitzsch and Lorch, Theodosius, De habitationibus, p. 91.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 135

though the Sun does not rise above the horizon, the twilight gives a feeling of
daylight, the duration of which is estimated as 1 hour by Qusṭā.
The author of treatise P unifies the study of the two solstitial points and
omits the last proposition of Q47 referring to the 1 hour of daylight in the
winter solstice at latitude φ=66°.

Chapter P25: To know the place where some of the zodiacal signs rise in
the inverted order and set regularly and some of them the other way around
In this chapter, the order in which the zodiacal signs rise and set at a terrestrial
latitude φ greater than 66° is examined.49 Of the zodiacal signs that do rise and
set at that latitude, those situated from the winter solstice to the summer sol-
stice rise in the opposite order of the signs and set in their regular order, while
those situated from the summer solstice to the winter solstice rise in their reg-
ular order, and set in the opposite order.

latitude φ latitude φ
1st point of
longitude λ declination δ of perpetual of perpetual
sign
apparition occultation
Aries 0 0 ±90 ±90
Taurus 30 11;40 +78;20 −78;20
Gemini 60 20;30 +69;30 −69;30
Cancer 90 23;51 +66;09 −66;09
Leo 120 20;30 +69;30 −69;30
Virgo 150 11;40 +78;20 −78;20
Libra 180 0 ±90 ±90
Scorpio 210 −11;40 −78;20 +78;20
Sagittarius 240 −20;30 −69;30 +69;30
Capricorn 270 −23;51 −66;09 +66;09
Aquarius 300 −20;30 −69;30 +69;30
Pisces 330 −11;40 −78;20 +78;20
Table 8: Perpetual apparition and occultation of the zodiacal signs
depending on the latitude of the locality.

In northern or southern latitudes greater than 90°−ε,50 there are some zodiacal
signs that do not rise or set; these signs are either always visible or always invis-
ible. The boundary latitude, where the first point of each zodiacal sign becomes
always visible or always invisible, is presented in Table 8.51 In this table, the dec-

49
In manuscript K, this value has been corrected in the margin as 66;25 for both Chapters P24 and P25.
50
In Chapter P25, 90°−ε is taken as 66°.
51
At a northern latitude φ, any point of the celestial globe whose distance from the north celestial

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
136 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

linations of the first points of the signs are taken according to Ptolemy’s Almag-
est,52 rounded off to the nearest minute. For the latitude of a terrestrial pole, the
two equinoctial points rotate on the horizon, without rising or setting.
For northern latitudes greater than 90−ε (Figure 23), the degrees of the
ecliptic having declination δ>90°−φ are always above the horizon (the arc be-
tween light grey arrows), while those with declination δ<φ−90° are always be-
low the horizon (the arc between black arrows). The two degrees having decli-
nation δ=90°−φ (light grey arrows) touch the north point of the horizon but
do not set, while the two degrees having declination δ=φ−90° (black arrows)
touch the south point of the horizon and do not rise.

Figure 23: For latitude φ=69;30 N, the arc of the ecliptic between the light grey
arrows does not set, that between the black arrows does not rise,
and the two arcs between the dark grey arrows rise and set.

The degrees of the ecliptic with declinations that permit them to rise and
set have the following particularity:
On the east side, those having ecliptic longitude λ, such that 90°<λ<270°
(that is from the summer solstice to winter solstice) rise in the regular order.

pole is p≤φ is always visible and does not rise or set; this is equivalent to 90°−δ≤φ, where δ is the
declination of this point. Similarly, any point of the celestial globe whose distance from the south
celestial pole is p′≤φ is always invisible and does not rise or set; this is equivalent to 90°+δ≤φ, where
δ is again the declination of this point. The opposite happens at southern latitudes.
52
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, Chapter I.15, pp. 80–81, and Toomer, Pto-
lemy’s Almagest, p. 72.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 137

On the west side, the rest of the degrees, from winter to summer solstice, set
in the regular order of the signs (Figure 24).

Figure 24: The degrees having ecliptic longitude λ such that 90°<λ<270°
rise in the regular order, while those for which 270°<λ<360° or
0°<λ<90°set in the regular order.

On the east side, the degrees having ecliptic longitude such that 270°<λ<360°
or 0°≤λ<90° (that is from winter solstice to summer solstice) rise in inverted
order, while, on the west side, the rest of the degrees, from summer solstice to
winter solstice set in the inverted order of the signs (Figure 25).

Figure 25: The degrees having ecliptic longitude λ such that 90°<λ<270° set in the
inverted order of the signs, while those for which 270°<λ<360° or 0°≤λ<90° rise in
the inverted order. (Figures 23–25 have been created using the software Voyager 4.5.)

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
138 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

This happens because, at these latitudes, the north pole Π of the eclip-
tic, which culminates simultaneously with the degree of the ecliptic cor-
responding to the winter solstice σ´, comes to the south of the zenith,
while moving from east to west (Figure 26). In this case, on the eastern
hemisphere, the distance of the more northerly degrees of the ecliptic from
the zenith is less than the distance of the more southerly degrees of the
ecliptic from the zenith. This results in the more northerly degrees of the
ecliptic rising first, with the more southerly ones following, and in turn
causes the signs from the winter solstice to summer solstice (270°<λ<360°
or 0°≤λ<90°) to rise in their inverted order. At the same time, on the west-
ern hemisphere, the more southerly degrees of the ecliptic set first, and the
more northerly ones follow; resulting in signs from the summer solstice
to winter solstice (90°<λ<270°) to set in inverted order. While the north
pole Π of the ecliptic moves from west to east (Figure 27), it remains to
the north of the zenith, thus the zodiacal signs from the summer solstice
to winter solstice (90°<λ<270°) rise in their regular order and the signs
from the winter to summer solstice (270°<λ<360° or 0°≤λ<90°) set in their
regular order. The opposite occurs in the southern hemisphere of the earth,
but this is not mentioned.

Figure 26: Rising and setting of the Figure 27: Rising and setting of the
signs in the inverted order. signs in the regular order.

Chapter P25 is related to Proposition 4 of the treatise De habitationibus of

Theodosius,53 where the simultaneous rising and simultaneous setting of six
53
Kunitzsch and Lorch, Theodosius, De habitationibus, pp. 26–31, 78–79. The title of Proposition
4 in English translation, as presented in the above edition, is the following: ‘For those whose zenith
is as distant from the visible pole as one of the two tropics is from the orb of the equator, six [zodia-
cal] signs rise and set together’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 139

zodiacal signs is proved for a terrestrial latitude equal to 90°−ε, where ε is the
obliquity of the ecliptic. As already mentioned in the commentary of Chapters
P23 and P24, this treatise of Theodosius had been translated into Arabic by
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā.
Ibn al-Haytham (born c. 965, Basra, Iraq, died c. 1040, Cairo, Egypt),54
in his treatise On the Configuration of the World ‫هيئــة العالــم‬,55 describes the
case of latitude 90°−ε, where once a day the ecliptic coincides with the
horizon; at that moment, six zodiacal signs rise simultaneously and six zo-
diacal signs set simultaneously. He then refers to the latitude of 90°, where
half the zodiac circle never rises and the other half never sets. Between
these two latitudes, a certain part of the ecliptic ( ‫ )بعــض دائــرة البــروج‬is always
visible and its diametrically opposite is always invisible. The two arcs be-
tween these two parts rise and set; the arc ( ‫ )القــوس‬that has the point of
vernal equinox as midpoint rises inverted ( ‫منكوًســا‬
ً ) and sets regularly ( ‫)مســتو ًًيا‬
in this horizon, while the arc that has the point of autumnal equinox as
midpoint rises regularly and sets inverted.56
Another Latin translation of the treatise of Ibn al-Haytham is preserved in
the work of Stephen of Antioch Liber Mamonis, accompanied by his commen-
tary.57 Stephen not only presents the results of Ibn al-Haytham, but he also
explains why the inverted risings and settings occur.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P25 is a generalized version of Chapter Q48, the title of which is
‘To know the place where Taurus rises before Aries’. Chapter Q48 states the
following: At the latitude φ=78° North, the sign of Taurus precedes Aries in
the rotation of the globe (‫))الثــور يتقــدم الحمــل فــي دوران الكــرة‬, Aries has set but Tau�
rus has not set (‫)الحمــل قــد غــاب والثــور لــم يغيــب‬, and Aries rises after Taurus (‫الحمــل‬

54
The dates and locations are mentioned in Lorch, ʽIbn al-Haythamʼ.
55
The Arabic text of the treatise is included on ff. 101r–116v of a Compendium of Texts on
Mathematics and Optics mostly by Alhazen (‫)ابــن الهيثــم‬, British Library: Oriental Manuscripts,
IO Islamic 1270, in the Qatar Digital Library, see https://www.qdl.qa/en/archive/81055/
vdc_100023619742.0x000001. A Latin translation of this treatise, known as Liber Aboali, was
edited in Millás Vallicrosa, Las traducciones orientales, pp. 285–312. There is also another Latin
translation of this treatise, with the title Liber de celo et mundo, edited by Mancha, ‘La versión
alfonsí’, pp. 133–97. I am thankful to Prof. Dag Nikolaus Hasse who advised me of the existence of
this Latin translation.
56
The corresponding Arabic text of the treatise by Ibn al-Haytham is located on f. 107v of the
manuscript London, British Library, IO Islamic 1270, while the same text in Latin translation is in
Millás Vallicrosa, Las traducciones orientales, p. 297.
57
Grupe, The Latin Reception of Arabic Astronomy and Cosmology in Mid-Twelfth-Century An-
tioch, pp. 211–12. I am thankful to Dirk Grupe who acquainted me with this work of Stephen of
Antioch and Ibn al-Haytham.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
140 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

‫)يطلــع تاليــا للثــور‬. All of these take place because Taurus does not set, but Aries
sets at this latitude.
The author of treatise P is not restricted to the content of Q48, but rather
refers to a general ascertainment concerning the order of rising and setting of
the zodiacal signs at any latitude greater than 66° (North); nonetheless he does
not allude to the reason why the signs rise or set in inverted order.

Chapter P26: To know the cities where the Sun reaches the zenith once or
twice a year
A demonstration of the Sun culminating at the zenith using the globe is pre-
sented in this chapter. It is mentioned that there is no shadow at the moment
that the Sun reaches the zenith. The following cases are discussed in the text:
1. When the Sun is at the first point of Cancer, it reaches the zenith of
the cities that have latitude φ=24° (north). This happens once a year.
2. For the cities with latitude 0°<φ<24° the Sun reaches their zenith twice
a year.
3. For the cities on the terrestrial equator (φ=0°), the Sun arrives at their ze-
nith twice a year, when it is at the first point of Aries and at the first point
of Libra; these two positions are not mentioned explicitly in the text.
To find when this happens, the degree of the meridian that corresponds to the
altitude of 90 degrees, that is the zenith, must first be determined and marked.
Then the poles of the globe are adjusted to the position corresponding to the
given latitude φ, and the globe is rotated so that a degree of the ecliptic tra-
versing under the zenith mark is determined. When the Sun is in that degree,
then it culminates at the zenith of the locality having latitude φ.
Since the maximum altitude of the Sun for culmination to the south of the
zenith is hmax=90−φ+δ, the Sun arrives at the zenith when hmax=90°, namely
when δ=φ. So, if the latitude of a locality is known, the declination of the
Sun that produces its culmination at the zenith of this locality can be directly
determined.
In Chapter II.6, Sections 1–7 of the Almagest, Ptolemy examines the lati-
tudes where the Sun culminates at the zenith, being those from the terrestrial
equator to the seventh parallel through Syene.58

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P26 includes Q49, Q50 and Q52.
Chapter Q49 examines the general case that the Sun transits across the ze-
nith of a locality with latitude less than 24°, as outlined in the following pro-

58
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, pp. 102–08, and Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almag-
est, pp. 82–85.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 141

cedure. The pole of the globe is first placed at a latitude less than 24° and the
position of the zenith on the meridian is marked, after measuring 90° on the
meridian starting from the horizon. When the globe is rotated, a degree of
the ecliptic will traverse under this mark. The Sun transits across the zenith,
when it is on this degree. The chapter ends with the note that this happens for
latitudes between 1 (sic) and 24°. There is no discussion of whether the Sun
arrives at the zenith once or twice a year.
Chapter Q50 examines in which cities there is no shadow at some mo-
ment within the year, and determines the day and time that this occurs. It
starts by explaining that there is no shadow when the Sun arrives at the ze-
nith, and that this can happen only on the meridian. The procedure of Q49
is then repeated and the degree of the ecliptic that culminates at the zenith
is determined. At noon on the day that corresponds to this degree of the
ecliptic there is no shadow in this city, the latitude of which is less than 24°.
There is no mention that there are two degrees of the ecliptic that reach the
zenith for a latitude φ<24°.
Chapter Q52 examines in which cities the Sun reaches the zenith once or
twice a year and when this occurs. When the latitude is 24°, the Sun reaches
the zenith once: when it enters the first point of Cancer for northern latitude,
and when it enters the first point of Capricorn for southern latitude. When
the latitude is less than 24°, the Sun reaches the zenith twice: when it is on
a degree of the ecliptic or on its ‘counterpart in declination’ (‫)نظيــره فــي الميــل‬.59
Then a verification using the globe follows, the procedure being the same as the
one of Chapters Q49 and Q50.
The author of treatise P brought together the above three chapters, present-
ing the common procedure just once, in the last paragraph of P26. The cul-
mination of the Sun at the zenith and the absence of shadow are studied to-
gether, thus avoiding repetition. The case in which the Sun reaches the zenith,
when it is at the first point of Capricorn, for a southern latitude of 24° is not
mentioned in P26, although it is included in Q52.

Chapter P27: To know the cities where the shadows are in one direction
and those where they are in both directions
For a locality of latitude φ, if φ<24° then the shadows (at noon) can be in two
directions; otherwise (if φ≥24°), the shadows (at noon) are in one direction.
Both cases can be verified with the globe.

59
The term ‫( فــي الميــل‬in declination) has been encountered in only three (O, F and Z) of the
seventeen Arabic manuscripts of Q that were examined and include this phrase; in manuscript N, the
phrase ‘when it is on a degree of the ecliptic or on its counterpart’ has been omitted (f. 113r). When
this term is not present, the meaning of the counterpart is not clear. The Latin translation clearly
states that it is the degree equidistant from the beginning of Cancer or that of Capricorn: ʽcum sol
fuerit in uno duorum graduum zodiaci equidistancium principio Cancri uel principio Capricornioʼ
(Lorch and Martínez Gázquez, ʽQusta ben Lucaʼ, p. 54, l. 865–66).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
142 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

In the first case, the pole is placed according to a latitude φ<24°. While ro-
tating the globe, some degrees of the ecliptic traverse to the south of the zenith,
and others to the north of it. For the former degrees, the corresponding shadows
point towards the north and for the latter, the shadows point towards the south.
In the second case, the pole is placed according to a latitude φ≥24. While
rotating the globe, there is no degree of the ecliptic that traverses to the north
of the zenith, and thus the shadow points always towards the north.
In Chapter II.6 of the Almagest, Ptolemy examines the latitudes where the
shadow is in both directions,60 or in one direction,61 and also when the shadow
turns in a full circle.62

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P27 corresponds to Chapter Q51. In Chapter Q51 the cases where
the latitude is either less or more than 24° are independently described, but the
wording does not include the latitude φ=24°, as in P27. In the case that the
latitude is greater than 24°, the Latin translation includes both cases of northern
and southern latitude. The Arabic manuscripts present different variants at this
point; some of them mention that the shadows will be to the north, and others
to the south. Perhaps this is an indication that both cases of north and south
latitudes had been included in the initial text, but I have not found both cases in
any of the examined manuscripts.63 Then it is explained that when the Sun is at
the zenith there is no shadow; when it is to the north of the zenith, the shadows
will be to the south; when the Sun is to the south of the zenith, the shadows
will be to the north. At the end, there is a verification using the globe of the
case when the latitude is less than 24°, similar to the first case presented in P27.

60
From the equator to the 6th parallel. Ptolemy uses the term ἀμφίσκιος for the parallel where
the noon shadow can be in both directions (Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I,
pp. 102–07, and Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest, pp. 82–85).
61
From the 7th to 32nd parallels. Ptolemy uses the term ἑτερόσκιος for the ‘one-way-shadow’ parallel
(Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, pp. 107–14, and Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest,
pp. 85–89).
62
From the 33rd parallel to the north pole. For the parallel where the shadow goes full circle, Ptole-
my uses the term περίσκιος (Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, pp, 114–17, and
Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest, pp. 89–90).
63
In manuscripts A, C, D, N, R, S, T and U, it is mentioned that ‘When the north pole is elevated
more than 24°, the shadows are to the north’; in manuscripts B, E, H, I, L and M, ‘When the north
pole is elevated more than 24°, the shadows are to the south’; in manuscripts F, Z and O ‘When the
pole is elevated less than 24°, the shadows are to the south’. Only the statement of the first group of
manuscripts is correct. The erroneous statements of the other two groups could be caused either
because of copying errors (to the south instead of to the north, and less instead of more), or by saut du
même au même. In the latter case the text should be: ‘When the north pole is elevated more than 24°,
the shadows are to the north. When the south pole is elevated more than 24°, the shadows are to the
south’. I have included this version in the Arabic text of Chapter Q51 in Appendix 3.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 143

The author of treatise P has added a second case in the part on verification
with the globe, to show that for a latitude φ≥24° the shadow will be always to
the north.

Chapter P28: Determination of the meridian line and the qibla

In the procedure for measuring the Sun’s altitude (Chapter P9), the needle
casts no shadow when the globe is completely aligned to the celestial sphere;
the meridian ring of the globe will then be aligned to the local meridian. Thus
the meridian line can be determined according to the direction of the merid-
ian ring, by drawing on the ground a straight line parallel to the horizontal
diameter of the meridian ring.
The determination of the azimuth of the qibla (Figure 28) is conducted us-
ing the local meridian SN found above and the arc SQ, including its direction
towards the east E or the west W; this arc is described as ʽdifference in longi-
tude between the city and Mecca’ (‫)قــدر الاختــلاف بيــن المدينــة ومكــة فــي الطــول‬. On
the horizon ring, one must count as many degrees as this difference shows,
starting from the meridian towards the given direction, and put a mark at the
end. The line drawn on the ground from the centre O of the lower circular
base of the globe to the direction of this mark Q provides the direction of the
qibla in that city.

O N
S

Figure 28: Determination of the azimuth of the qibla. The background is

an extract from the Risāla dar samt-i qibla (anonymous and undated),
MS Paris, BnF, pers. 169,6, f. 42r.64

64
The directions East (‫ )مشــرق‬and West (‫ )مغــرب‬are depicted inverted in the diagram of the manuscript.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
144 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

The procedure described is explained in Figure 29. On the celestial globe

adjusted to the latitude φ of the locality in question, let the circle CDEW be
the equator, P and P´ the celestial poles, SENW the horizon circle, Z the ze-
nith of the locality, M the zenith of Mecca, the circle PZSP´N through the
poles and the zenith be the local meridian, and the circle PMDP´ be the me-
ridian corresponding to the zenith of Mecca.
The difference that needs to be known, according to the method pre-
sented, is the arc SQ (or NQ), where S is the south point of the horizon
and Q the intersection of the great circle through the zeniths of the two
cities and the horizon. This difference is known as ʽdifference in inclina-
tionʼ and corresponds to the angle between the great circle arc joining the
locality with Mecca and the local meridian; this angle is the same as that
between the great celestial circle ZMQ through the zeniths of the city and
Mecca, and the local meridian PZSP´N; the Arabic term for this angle
is inḥirāf al-qibla ‫انحــراف القبلــة‬. 65 The term ʽdifference in longitudeʼ al-
īkhtilāf fī al-ṭūl ( ‫ )الاخــتلاف فــي الطــول‬between the city and Mecca, which
is used here, is not correct, because the difference in terrestrial longitude
between the two cities corresponds to the arc CD of the equator, and it is
not measured on the horizon.

Figure 29: Determination of the qibla.

65
See King, ‘Ḳibla’. The transfer of the problem from the terrestrial to the celestial sphere is
mentioned on pp. 83–84, while the term inḥirāf al-ḳibla (‫ )انحــراف القبلــة‬is mentioned on p. 83.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 145

At the end of Chapter P28, the author of treatise P has added a comment,
mentioning that this method is false and of limited use, and it is better to
use another method to find the qibla. He avoided correcting the method, and
referred to the treatise of the quadrant that he was going to write. He could
simply have replaced the word ʽlongitudeʼ with ʽinclination / azimuthʼ and then
the method would be correct.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P28 includes the methods of Q56 and Q57. In Q56 the meridian line
is determined after measuring the altitude of the Sun with the globe. The pro-
cedure is the same as in the first part of P28, with some differences in word-
ing. In Q57 the direction of the qibla is determined. The procedure is the
same as that in the second part of P28, with few differences in wording.

Chapter P29: To know the ‘longitude’ of the Moon and of any planet or
fixed star you want, at its greatest altitude
Although the term ‘longitude’ is mentioned in the title, this chapter deals,
in fact, with the determination of the mediation of a celestial body, such as the
Moon, any planet or any fixed star not drawn on the globe; all of these cas-
es are studied together. Since the degree of mediation of a celestial body is the
degree of the ecliptic that reaches the meridian simultaneously with it, the ce-
lestial body is observed when it reaches its highest altitude, in order that the
moment of its upper culmination can be determined. Furthermore, observing
the Moon and planets on the meridian minimizes the parallax in longitude in
most cases.66 At the moment when the celestial body C reaches the meridian
PZSP′N (Figure 30), the altitude of a star F, chosen among those drawn on
the celestial globe, is measured; this altitude will be used for positioning the
globe in accordance to the celestial sphere at that moment. For positioning the
globe, the north pole of the globe must first be elevated according to the lati-
tude of the locality, but this is not mentioned in the text. Then a mark corre-
sponding to the altitude of star F is put on a quadrant scale,67 graduated from
0° to 90°. This quadrant is placed on the celestial globe in such a way that the
endpoint corresponding to the graduation of 90° is on the zenith Z and the
other endpoint is on the horizon ring SENW. Then the globe must be rotat-
ed and the lower endpoint B of the quadrant placed at the appropriate posi-
tion, so that the star F comes under the mark of the quadrant. The quadrant
must be placed either on the east or the west hemisphere of the globe, depend-
ing on whether the star is before or after its upper culmination, otherwise the

66
The longitude component of the parallax is maximum at the horizon and zero at the highest
point of the ecliptic, see Kennedy, ‘Parallax Theory in Islamic Astronomy’.
67
The quadrant scale has been described in Chapter P9 and is depicted in Figure 9.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
146 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

Figure 30: Determining the degree of the ecliptic Md

that culminates simultaneously with the Moon or a planet.

globe will not be positioned correctly; the differentiation is not mentioned

in the text of P29. At this position, while the globe represents the celestial sphere
at the moment of culmination of the celestial body C, the degree Md of the
ecliptic that reaches the meridian ring is determined; this degree is mentioned as
the ‘longitude’ of the celestial body, but actually it is the degree of its mediation.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P29 unifies Chapters Q58 and Q62. Chapter Q58 concerns the ‘lon-
gitude’ (mediation) of the Moon and planets, and Q62 the ‘longitude’ (medi-
ation) of the fixed stars not drawn on the globe.
The wording of Chapter P29 is almost identical to Q58, but the title of the
latter mentions that the ‘longitude’ could be determined in a night during which
it is possible to measure the maximum altitude of the Moon or planet. In Chap-
ter Q62, the same procedure as in Q58 is described for the fixed stars that are
not drawn on the globe. In both chapters, as in P29, there is no mention that the
globe must be placed according to the latitude of the locality and that the quadrant
should be on the east or west hemisphere, depending on the position of the star.

Chapter P30: To know the ‘latitude’ of the Moon, of a planet and of a fixed
star among those not drawn on the globe, in a night during which it is

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 147

possible to measure its maximum altitude, and to know also its declination
from the equator and its zenithal distance.
The cases of the Moon, a planet and a fixed star not drawn on the globe are
described in the same procedure: The degree of ‘longitude’ of the celestial body
is determined (according to Chapter P29) and a mark Md is put at its position
on the ecliptic on the globe (Figure 31). The maximum altitude of the celestial
body and its direction to the north or south of the zenith is determined; then
this altitude is taken on the meridian ring and a corresponding mark Ma is put
on the meridian. Then the globe is rotated, so that mark Md arrives at the me-
ridian. If Md is located exactly under Ma, then the degree of the ecliptic has the
same maximum altitude as the celestial body, thus the celestial body is located
on the ecliptic. If Ma is to the north or south of Md, then the celestial body
has a ‘latitude’ MdMa in that direction; the ‘latitude’ is equal to the number of
degrees of the meridian between the two marks.
At the same position of the globe, the degrees of the meridian ring between
Ma and the equator (circle EDW) correspond to the declination (arc DMa),
and the degrees between Ma and the zenith (arc ZMa) to the minimum zenith-
al distance of the celestial body.

Z P
Ma
C
Md

D W
φ
S N

P'
Chapter 30
Figure 31: Determining the difference of declination between the Moon or
a planet and the degree of the ecliptic Md that culminates simultaneously with it.

The author of the treatise mentions that ‘there is a dispute over the claim
that there is no difference between the degree of transit of a star and its degree
(of longitude)’. It is clear that according to the procedure of P30 the difference

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
148 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

between the declination of the degree of transit (mediation) and that of the
celestial body in question is determined, not the ecliptic latitude of it. The
methods of this treatise are in accordance with the specific system of coordi-
nates ‘mediation and difference of declination’.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P30 unifies Chapters Q59, Q63, Q64 and Q65.
In Chapter Q59 the ‘latitude’ of the Moon or a planet is determined, during
a night in which its maximum altitude can be measured. The degree of ‘longi-
tude’ of the Moon or planet is determined as in Chapter Q58, and indicated
by a mark on the ecliptic. The maximum altitude of the Moon or planet and
its direction (to the north or south of the zenith) are found and a mark is put
on the meridian ring corresponding to the position of its maximum altitude,
retaining the direction of the altitude. Then the globe is rotated so that the de-
gree of ‘longitude’ comes to the meridian. If the degree falls under the mark of
maximum altitude on the meridian, then the Moon or planet has no latitude,
and it is located on the ecliptic. If the degree falls on any side of the mark, its
direction is observed and the degrees of the meridian between the degree and
the mark are counted. These degrees correspond to the ‘latitude’ of the Moon
or planet in that night, in the direction found with respect to the ecliptic.
In Chapter Q63 the ‘latitude’ of a star among the fixed stars not drawn
on the globe is determined with the globe; the procedure of Chapter Q59 is
repeated for a fixed star.
In Chapter Q64 the distance (declination) of a fixed star, among those not
drawn on the globe, from the celestial equator is determined using the globe.
The procedure described in Q59 is followed until the celestial globe is rotated so
that the degree of the star comes to the meridian. The degrees of the meridian
between the mark on the meridian and the celestial equator correspond to the
distance of the star from the equator. In both Chapters P30 and Q64, there is
no discussion about the direction of the declination to the north or south.
In Chapter Q65 the zenithal distance of a fixed star, among those not drawn on
the globe, is determined with the globe for any locality. The zenith and the posi-
tion of the maximum altitude of the star are marked on the meridian; the degrees
between these two marks provide the zenithal distance of the star in that locality.
The author of treatise P avoided repeating the procedure and managed to
obtain the ‘latitude’, declination and zenithal distance of the celestial body by
applying the procedure only once.

Chapter P31: To know if the lunar eclipse and the solar eclipse occur in
the current month
To predict a lunar eclipse, the latitude b of the Moon must be known at its
maximum altitude in the night of the 13th day of the lunar month. This could be

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 149

found as described in Chapter P30, but this is not written in the text of Chapter
P31. If |b|<1;04°,68 then there will be a lunar eclipse, if |b|>1;04°, then there will
be no lunar eclipse. There is a special mention of the case where b=0; in this
case there will be a lunar eclipse. The case where |b|=1;04° is not discussed.
To predict a solar eclipse, the latitude b of the Moon must be known at
its maximum altitude on the 27th day (‫ )يــوم‬of the lunar month. If b>1;37° or
b<−0;01° (b<−0;47° according to manuscript K), then there will be no solar
eclipse, if 0°≤b≤1;37° or −0;01°≤b≤0° (−0;47°≤b≤0° according to manuscript
K), then there will be a solar eclipse.69
In the treatise of Qusṭā the limit of the south latitude of the Moon for a solar
eclipse is 47 minutes, but in 20 of the 22 studied manuscripts that include Chap-
ter P31, it is reduced to (one) minute. It is possible that the number 47 was once
written in P31, but omitted later by a copying error. In manuscript K, there is a
marginal note that restores the omitted ‘47’ in words.70 The original text could
have been ‫�أو عرضــه الجنوبــي �أكثــر مــن مــز دقيقــة‬. Since the number 47 written as ‫ مــز‬is
similar to the previous word ‫‘ من‬from / than’, it might have been deleted acciden�
tally. A trace of such a symbol for the number ‘47’ can be seen in manuscript O,
where a symbol like ‘‫ ’مــر‬is found in the position of ‘‫ ’مــز‬described above.
The prediction of eclipses is treated at an elementary level, without taking
into consideration important parameters, such as the lunar parallax and the
distance between the earth and Moon.
The author of treatise P criticizes Qusṭā’s reference to measuring the lati-
tude of the Moon on the 27th day of the lunar month in the way described in
Chapters P30 and Q59. This measurement should be conducted at the mo-
ment of upper culmination of the Moon, but on the 27th day this occurs in
daylight, while the Moon is invisible because of its proximity to the Sun. The
latitude of the Moon on this day could be calculated or taken from tables, but
not directly measured at its culmination.

Comparison with treatise Q

Chapter P31 unifies Chapters Q60 and Q61.
In Chapter Q60 the prediction of a lunar eclipse is discussed, when the lat-
itude of the Moon is known.
In Chapter Q61 the prediction of a solar eclipse is discussed, knowing
the Moon’s latitude b and its direction to the north or south. If b>1;37° or
b<−0;47°, then there will be no solar eclipse; if −0;47°<b<1;37°, then there
68
The latitude b is considered b>0 when it is northern, or b<0 when it is southern.
69
The case where b=0 is implied in the statement ‘if the north / south latitude of the Moon … is
greater than … the Sun will not be eclipsed; otherwise it will be eclipsed’.
70
The number 47 (‫ )ســبعة و�أربعيــن‬is written in the hand of the copyist in the right margin of f. 137v.
This number could have been added after comparison with the corresponding Chapter 61 from the
treatise of Qusṭā ibn Lūqā.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
150 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

will be a solar eclipse. The wording here does not include the cases where the
latitude of the Moon is b=1;37° or b=−0;47°. There is a special mention of
the case where b=0; then a solar eclipse will always occur.
The author of treatise P follows the same procedures as Qusṭā, using almost
the same wording in many phrases. Qusṭā noted in both Chapters Q60 and
Q61 that the latitude of the Moon could be found as previously described (in
Chapter Q59); this implies that the difference of declination, as in Chapters
P30 and Q59, is meant by the term latitude here. There is one remarkable
difference concerning the limit of the south latitude of the Moon that allows a
solar eclipse, but this is probably a copying error in the transmission of treatise P.

Chapter P32: To know the difference of daylight length on the same day
in two different latitudes, while the Sun is on the same degree
The title of this chapter is equivalent to the title of Chapter P6. Although the
title mentions the ʽdifference of daylightʼ, the procedure actually determines
half of the difference of daylight.
The procedure described in P32 is the following: The pole of the globe is
adjusted to one of these latitudes φ1 and the globe rotated so that the given
degree of the Sun reaches the east horizon; the rising degree of the equator is
marked (this degree provides the oblique ascension r1 at latitude φ1). Then the
same procedure is repeated for the other latitude φ2 and the other rising degree
of the equator is also marked (this degree provides the oblique ascension r2 of
the degree of the Sun at latitude φ2). The number of the degrees of the equator
between the two marks is stated to be the difference of daylight length. This
number could be expressed as r2–r1.
Justification of the procedure: When the given degree of the Sun comes to
the meridian, the degree α of the equator that culminates simultaneously will
be the same for all latitudes, because it corresponds to the right ascension of
the degree of the Sun. Then the rising degree of the equator will be α+90°, if
α<270° (or α+90°−360°=α−270°, if α>270°), because the meridian and horizon
divide the equator into four equal parts in all of the latitudes. Thus, half the
daylight of the given degree at latitude φ1 in degrees of the
equator will be .71 Similarly, half the daylight of the same
degree at latitude φ2 will be . The difference
provides the difference of half daylight
at these two latitudes.
There is no corresponding chapter in treatise Q, since the method of Q11 is
the same as that of P6. The only exception is manuscript M, which contains at
Formula for footnote 71 of Chapter 3, currently on p. 160:

At the size of the main text:

71
The condition α + 90◦ − r1 ≥ 0◦ ⇔ r1 − α ≤ 90◦ is always valid for any degree of the ecliptic in
the northern hemisphere that rises and sets.

In an actual footnote (see at the bottom of the page): 1

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 151

the end (f. 12) three unnumbered chapters, among them a chapter corresponding
to P32 in a modified form.

Chapter P33: To know the latitude of the city from the highest altitude
of a star, among the stars of the globe, and from its longest daytime (‫)نهــار‬
1. Determination of the latitude of a city from the highest altitude of a star
When the maximum altitude of a star drawn on the globe is known, the globe
must be positioned in such a way that the star reaches this maximum altitude
counted on the meridian ring of the globe. It is important to place the star to
the south or north of the zenith on the globe, according to its real position,
but this is not mentioned explicitly in the text. There is also no mention of
how the latitude of the city is obtained: the elevation of the north pole, count-
ed on the meridian ring, can directly provide the latitude sought.

Figure 32 Figure 33
Figures 32–33: Determination of the latitude of the city from the highest altitude
of a star, when the star culminates to the south of the zenith (Figure 32)
or to the north of the zenith (Figure 33).

The terrestrial latitude, where a certain star reaches a given maximum alti-
tude, is unique when it is known that its culmination is either to the south or
north of the zenith. For culmination to the south of the zenith, the maximum
altitude is h=90°−φ+δ (Figure 32). Knowing the declination δ of the star, we
may find the latitude as φ=90°−h+δ. For culmination to the north of the ze-
nith the maximum altitude is h=90°+φ−δ (Figure 33). Knowing δ, we may
find the latitude as φ=h+δ−90°.

2. Determination of the latitude of the city from its longest (or shortest) daylight
There are two methods presented here. The first uses the point σ of summer
solstice, the first point of Cancer. The poles are placed on the horizon, thus

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 152 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

the globe represents the situation on the terrestrial equator (Figure 34). The
point σ is put on the east horizon; the point of the equator that rises at this
moment has right ascension α=90°. Daylight on the terrestrial equator is 12
hours for all degrees of the ecliptic and this corresponds to a daytime arc of
180°. Page
The 160,longestlinedaylight
6 from inthea bottom:
locality in the northern hemisphere (φ>0°)
160, line 6 from occurs at the summer solstice and this◦ corresponds to a daytime arc dφ>180°.
the bottom:
The difference between thedφdaytime
first formula: − 180 arcs at latitude φ and the equator is
first formula: , whileformula:
dφ − 180◦second its half is k = (dφ − 180◦ )/2 . A mark is put at the point
cond formula: ofk the dequator
= (Page 180◦with
φ − 162, )/ 2 right
line 5:
ascension◦ α=90°−k;
k = (180 − dφ ′ )/2
this point rises simultaneously
with the summer solstice σ at this latitude φ. Then the north pole of the
162, line 5: k globe
= (180is◦ elevated,
Page 2 so that
dφ ′ )/line
− 162, 8: thisk =point
(180◦and
− dφpoint
′
)/2 σ are located on the east hori-
zon (Figure 35); at this position of the globe, the degrees of the elevation of
162, line 8: k the
= (180 dφ ′ )/2 on the meridian ring provide the latitude of the city.
pole −counted
◦

Figure 34 Figure 35
Figures 34–35: Determination of the latitude of the city from its longest daylight.

In the second method, the latitude is determined by knowing the short-

est daylight; for this reason the point σ′ of the winter solstice, the first
point of Capricorn, is used. The poles are placed on the horizon, thus the
globe simulates the situation on the terrestrial equator (Figure 36). The
point σ′ is then put on the east horizon; the point of the equator that rises
at this moment has right ascension α=270° and a mark must be put on this
point.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 153

Figure 36 Figure 37
Figures 36–37: Determination of the latitude of the city from its shortest daylight.
e 160, line 6 from the bottom:
DaylightPage
on the terrestrial equator is 12 hours, which corresponds to a day-
◦160, line 6 from the bottom:
first formula:timedarc
φ − of
180180°. The shortest daylight in a locality in the northern hemi-
second formula: spherek =
(φ>0°) corresponds
(dφ −first )/2 to adφdaytime
180formula:
◦
− 180◦ arc dφ′<180°. The difference between
the daytime arcs at the latitude φ and the equator is 180°−dφ′, while its half
e 162, line 5: is k = (180◦second
− dφ ′ )/ formula:
2 . k = (dφ − 180◦ )/2
The north pole of the globe must ◦then be elevated, so that σ′ remains on
Page◦ −
e 162, line 8: thek horizon,
= (180 162,
d ′ line 5:
)/ 2 k = (180 − dφ ′ )/2
whilst the point of the equator with right ascension α=270°
φ

has covered a distance

Page 162, line 8: of k = (180◦ − dφ ′ )/2 degrees above the horizon
(Figure 37). This procedure is equivalent to what would be expected if the
procedure described in the first method had been applied, namely putting a
mark at the point of the equator with right ascension α=270°+k and then
raising the north pole, so that this mark and σ′ are placed on the east hori-
zon. The point with right ascension α=270°+k rises simultaneously with
the winter solstice σ′ at this latitude φ. The latitude of the city is obtained
by counting the degrees of elevation of the pole on the meridian ring.
The text mentions that this method can be applied for any other degree
of the ecliptic.
There is no corresponding chapter to P33 in treatise Q, except for
manuscript M, which contains at the end (f. 12) three unnumbered chapters,
among them two chapters corresponding to P33.2 and P33.1 in a modified
form. Most probably, these chapters are a later addition.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
154 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ

The above methods for determining the latitude of the locality are present-
ed in Chapters II.6 and II.2–3 of the treatise of al-Ṣūfī on the celestial globe.72
In al-Ṣūfī’s Chapter II.6 the latitude is determined by means of the highest
altitude of a star drawn on the globe. The position of the star at its upper cul-
mination is marked on the meridian ring. The maximum altitude of the star
is measured by an astrolabe or other means, then the pole of the equator is
slowly raised, until the mark reaches the measured altitude in the direction the
star was observed, to the north or south of the zenith (Figures 32–33). The
elevation of the north pole of the globe provides the latitude of the locality.
In Chapter II.2 the latitude is determined by means of the hours of the lon-
gest day. Twelve hours are subtracted from the number of the hours (h) and
minutes (m) of the longest day. The result will be h−12 hours and m minutes.
For each of the remaining hours we take 7.5 degrees, and for every 8 minutes
we take 1 degree; the sum of these degrees corresponds to the number k. The
poles of the equator are placed on the horizon, and a mark is put at the degree
of the equator that comes to the east horizon simultaneously with the first
point of Cancer (Figure 34). A second mark is put on the degree of the equa-
tor that has a distance equal to k degrees from the first mark, in the direction
opposite to the order of the zodiacal signs. Then the north pole is raised above
the horizon and the globe is rotated so that the second mark comes to the east
horizon together with the first point of Cancer (Figure 35). The elevation of
the north pole will be the latitude of the locality. The same method can be
used for any degree of the ecliptic with daytime longer than 12 hours.
Both the author of treatise P and al-Ṣūfī use the same number k in the
method using the longest day. The following proof shows the equivalence:
Since 1 equal hour or 60 minutes correspond to a rotation of 15°, 60/15=4
minutes correspond to a rotation of 1°. The longest daytime of h hours and m
minutes corresponds to a daytime arc

and subtracting 90° we obtain

which shows the equality of the number k in the first method of Chapter P33.2
and Chapter II.2 by al-Ṣūfī.
In Chapter II.3 the latitude is determined by means of the hours of the
shortest day. The number of hours (h) and minutes (m) of the shortest day is
subtracted from 12 hours. Then the method is similar to that of Chapter II.2,
with the following differences:
72
Al-Ṣūfī, On the Use of the Celestial Globe, in MS Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III 3505,1,
ff. 21r–22r; also Kennedy, ‘Al-Ṣūfī on the Celestial Globe’, pp. 66–67.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 COMMENTARY ON THE TREATISE DHĀT AL-KURSĪ 155

1. The first point of Capricorn is used instead of the first point of Cancer,
2. The second mark is put counting k degrees from the first mark follow-
ing the order of the zodiacal signs.
The number k in the second method of Chapter P33.2 is equal to the number
k used in Chapter II.3 by al-Ṣūfī. The proof is analogous to that presented for
the longest day. Although the methods presented in the above chapters by al-
Ṣūfī and those in Chapter P33 are equivalent, they are only explained in detail
in the former.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 4. Conclusions

4.1 Comparison between the treatises P and Q

The author of the Arabic treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy (here
referred to as treatise P) explains in the preface that he had as his source ‘the
treatise of Qusṭā’. He declares that he is going to make the treatise more con-
cise, but also outline additional ways in which the globe can be used. Detailed
comparison between treatise P and the Treatise on the Celestial Globe by Qusṭā
ibn Luqā (here referred to as Q) reveals that the former indeed follows the
latter closely and is based on it. All chapters of treatise Q have been used in
treatise P, with Chapters P32–33 as new additions.1 The author of treatise P
tried to make the text concise, avoiding repetitions, and improving some of
the methods and the terminology. Some of his criticisms of coordinates and
methods, however, are unjustified.
The conclusions of the comparison are presented below.
1. The author of treatise P avoided the tiring repetitions of treatise Q by
collecting chapters on similar subjects that use the same procedures,
and unifying them. He also condensed the detailed descriptions of the
source treatise (eg. P3/Q8, P6/Q11, P8/Q15–16, P16/Q32–33 and
P22/Q44). Thus, the length of treatise P became almost half the length
of the treatise by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā.
In few cases, there are important omissions in treatise P. For example:
• In Chapters P4 and P7 there is no mention that the north pole of
the globe must be elevated according to the local latitude, although
this is stated in the corresponding Chapters Q9 and Q13 of trea-
tise Q.
• In P11, which deals with domification, it is not mentioned that the
ascendant and the degrees of an unequal hour should be known,
although this was stated at the beginning of the corresponding
Chapter Q55.
• In P26, there is no mention of the case of latitude of 24° South
where the sun reaches the zenith when it is at the first point of
Capricorn, although this was included in the corresponding Chap-
ter Q52.
1
The correspondence between the chapters of the two treatises is presented in Appendix 2.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
158 CONCLUSIONS

2. The author of treatise P also tried to ameliorate the methods of the

source treatise, to include more general cases, to correct errors and to
introduce mathematical expressions. For example:
• In P17, he transformed the method of Q35 and extended it in or-
der to cover all cases concerning the stars with mathematical rea-
soning, and corrected the error that appears in Q34.
• In P18, he presented a more general and rigorous method. A com-
parison between the polar distances of the star and of the degree of
the Sun, when the position of the star at sunset is known, replaces
the descriptive methods of Q36 and Q37.
• In P23, he studies the cases in which either the north or the south
celestial pole is at the zenith, while in Q45–46 only the former
case had been examined.
• In P25, he presents the general case of rising and setting of the
zodiacal signs at a latitude greater than 66°, while in Q48 only the
specific case for latitude φ=78° North was presented.
• In P27, the wording includes the latitude φ=24° in the case that
the shadows are in one direction, while the wording of the corre-
sponding Chapter Q51 does not include this latitude. The author
of treatise P added a second case in the section concerning verifica-
tion with the globe, to show that for a latitude φ≥24° the shadow
will always be to the north.

3. He not only included all subjects from treatise Q but also enriched his
treatise by adding new topics:
• In P16, the study of the ascension of any degree of the ecliptic is
introduced, which was not included in the corresponding Chapters
Q32–33.
• In P32, half the difference of daylight on the same day is deter-
mined for two different latitudes. The method is different from
that of the related Chapters P6/Q11, where the difference of day-
light is studied under the same conditions.
• In P33, the latitude of a city is determined from the highest alti-
tude of a star or the longest / shortest daylight; there is no corre-
sponding chapter in treatise Q.

4. In some cases, the author of treatise P used more elaborate and accurate
terminology and better wording compared to treatise Q. For example:
• In the description of domification in Chapter P11, he uses the term
‘houses’ (‫ )بيــوت‬instead of the term ‘centres’ (‫ )�أوتــاد‬used in Q55. He

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 4.1 COMPARISON BETWEEN THE TREATISES P AND Q 159

also replaces the phrases ‘rotate the ascendant downwards’ and

‘draw the descendant downwards’ with the more elegant ‘rotate the
globe following the order of the signs’ and ‘rotate the globe follow-
ing the opposite order of the signs’ respectively.
• In determining the distance between two stars in P13, he uses the
term ‘the transits of the two stars’ (‫ )ممــ ّري الكوكبيــن‬for the points
where the two stars cross the horizon or the meridian; this term
does not appear in the corresponding Chapter Q26.
• In Q4, diurnal motion at a latitude φ=90° is compared to the
motion of a millstone (‫)رحــى‬. The author of treatise P repeats
this simile in Chapter P1 and extends the comparison: The di-
urnal motion at a latitude φ=0° is compared to the motion of a
wheel (‫)دولاب‬, whilst the motion in the intervening latitudes is
compared to a baldric (‫ حمائــل‬:‫ جمــع‬/ ‫)حمالة‬, a diagonal belt for
carrying a sword.
• In the title of Chapter P15, there is clarification that the method
concerns only the fixed stars drawn on the globe; this was not
included in the title of the corresponding Chapter Q29.
• The author of treatise P uses both terms ‘unequal’ (‫ )معوجــة‬in P7–8
and ‘seasonal’ (‫ )زمانيــة‬in P5 and P19–20 for the hours, while Qusṭā
uses the term ‘seasonal’ (‫ )زمانيــة‬exclusively throughout his treatise;
the latter is the translation of the Greek term ‘καιρικαὶ (ὧραι)’
into Arabic.

5. The author of treatise P criticizes the use of the coordinates ‘mediation

and difference of declination’, but he does not provide an alternative
solution:
• In P12, he follows the method of Q21 for determining the ‘lati-
tude’ of a star, but then mentions that the latitude found in this
way is not correct, and that ‘the latitude is solely taken on the cir-
cle of the latitude’. The method of P12 and Q21 provides the dif-
ference of declination between the star and its degree of mediation,
concisely described here as ‘latitude’.
• In P20, he follows the method of Q40–41 for determin-
ing the time of rising or setting of the Moon or a planet, but
then mentions that the method does not consider the differ-
ence between the degree of the planet and the degree of its
transit. Similarly, in P30, he follows the method of Q58–59
and Q62–63 for determining the ‘latitude’ of the Moon, a
planet or a fixed star not drawn on the globe, and then men-

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
160 CONCLUSIONS

tions that ‘there is a dispute over the claim that there is no

difference between the degree of transit of a star and its de-
gree (of longitude)’. In both cases, the degree of mediation
is used, called ‘the degree of transit’ by the author of treatise
P, and concisely described as ‘longitude’ in the commentary of
Chapters 29-30. The methods of P20 and P30 are correct when
the coordinates ‘mediation and difference of declination’ are
used instead of the ecliptic longitude and latitude.

6. Although the author of treatise P criticizes some methods of treatise Q,

he does not propose alternatives in these cases:
• In P28, he follows the method of Q57 for determining the azi-
muth of the qibla, using the term ‘difference in longitude’ as in
Chapter Q57, but then mentions that this method is false and
that it is better to use another method to find the qibla. He
avoids correcting the method, although he could simply have re-
placed the word ‘longitude’ with ‘inclination’ or ‘azimuth’ to do
so.
• In P31, he follows the method of Q61 for finding whether a so-
lar eclipse will occur. In Q61, it is noted that the necessary ‘lati-
tude’ of the Moon can be determined as described previously, al-
luding to Q59, where the maximum altitude of the Moon should
be measured. The author of treatise P uses the ‘latitude’ of the
Moon without explaining how to find it, and at the end he won-
ders how the maximum altitude of the Moon could be measured
on the 27th day of the lunar month. Again, though, he does not
present any solution, e.g. finding the ‘latitude’ using a zīj or cal-
culating it.

7. There are two cases where the commentaries of the author of treatise P
on methods presented in treatise Q are not, in fact, correct:
• At the end of Chapter P9, following the method of Q53 for mea-
suring the Sun’s altitude, when the altitude of the Sun is to the
West (i.e. after midday), he suggests using another quadrant scale
or altering the two poles and installing the gnomon at the diamet-
rical opposite of the degree of the Sun. This is not correct, howev-
er, because this method gives results in both cases, when the Sun is
either before or after its meridian transit.
• At the end of Chapter P20, on determining the time of rising
or setting of the Moon or a planet following the method of
Q40–41, he mentions that ‘This rule is not in accordance with

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 4.2 POSSIBLE SOURCES 161

reality and its origin does not take into consideration the dif-
ference between the degree of the planet and the degree of its
transit’. The method of Q40–41 using the coordinates ‘media-
tion and difference of declination’, however, does give correct
results.
The commentaries discussed in points 5, 6 and 7, above, written at the end
of each chapter (in P9, P20, P28 and P31) or at the end of the certain pro-
cedure (in P12 and P30), show an inconsistency with the method that has
just been presented by the author. This fact points to the possibility that
these comments were later additions by a commentator that have been in-
corporated into the text. As it is mentioned in Section 4.3 below, sever-
al omissions and copying errors common to all manuscripts show that all
studied manuscripts come from the same exemplar which was not the auto-
graph, thus these commentaries might have been incorporated at the stage
of copying this common exemplar. However, the reference to the treatise of
the quadrant that is included in the commentary at the end of chapter P28
reduces this possibility, at least for this comment, since it is formulated as a
statement by the author.

4.2 Possible sources

According to the evidence presented in the commentary and the comparison
between treatises P and Q, the possible sources of these treatises are shown in
Table 9. The treatise On the Configuration of the World by Ibn al-Haytham
(ad 965–1040) may have influenced the author of treatise P to write Chapter
P25, since he dramatically changed the corresponding Chapter Q48, adding
descriptions that appear in Ibn al-Haytham’s treatise. Chapters II.2–3, 6 of
the Treatise on the Celestial Globe by al-Ṣūfī were also a probable source for
Chapter P33, which was not included in treatise Q. Qusṭā ibn Lūqā was un-
doubtedly influenced by those works of Theodosius and Autolycus that he
had himself translated from Greek into Arabic, and was definitely acquainted
with Ptolemy’s Almagest. He probably also used the work Introduction to the
Phaenomena by Geminus, because in Chapter 5 of this work, there is a detailed
description of a celestial globe with stand, similar to that described by Qusṭā.2

2
This work of Geminus was attributed to Ptolemy in an Arabic translation of it, considered
as lost nowadays. This is evident from two Latin translations by Gerardus Cremonensis and by
Abrahamus de Balmes with titles such as Sperica Ptolomei and Ptholomei Liber introductorius in
Almagesti, etc. These translations come from Arabic manuscripts (that of Abrahamus de Balmes
via a Hebrew intermediary translation), where the arrangement of the chapters and some of the
contents are different from those in the Greek text and the Latin translations based on it; see
Todd, ‘Geminus and the Ps.-Proclan Sphaera’, pp. 16–21. However, this fact is not related to the
attribution of treatise P to Ptolemy; the author clearly mentions Qusṭā as his source in the in-

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
162 CONCLUSIONS

Treatise P Treatise Q Possible sources of treatise Q Possible additional sources

of treatise P
Introduction Q1 Geminus, Phaenomena 5
Geminus, Phaenomena 6.23 /
P2 Q5
Ptolemy, Almagest II.6.1
Theodosius, De diebus et noctibus,
P3 Q6
I.4
Autolycus, De ortibus et occasibus,
P18 Q36
14, 15
[Autolycus, De ortibus et occasibus,
P18 Q37
17, 18]
Theodosius, De habitationibus 1 /
P23 Q45–46 Geminus, Phaenomena 6.15 /
Ptolemy, Almagest II.6.39
Theodosius, De habitationibus 12 /
P24 Q47
Ptolemy, Almagest II.6.33
Ibn al-Haytham,
P25 Q48 Theodosius, De habitationibus 4 Configuration of the World
P26 Q49–50,52 Ptolemy, Almagest II.6.1–7
P27 Q51 Ptolemy, Almagest II.6.1–32
Al-Ṣūfī, Celestial Globe,
P33 -
II.2–3,6

Table 9. Possible sources of the treatises P and Q.

4.3 Possible date and place of compilation

There are some important omissions and copying errors, common to all 23
studied manuscripts of treatise P.3 This is evidence that all of these manu-
scripts stem from the same exemplar, which was a descendant of the original.
In determining the compilation date of treatise P, we must take into con-
sideration the following: The earliest dated extant manuscript was copied in
ad 1558, while the earliest reference to the treatise is that in Kashf al-ẓunūn
by Ḥājjī Khalīfa (d. ad 1657). Concerning the sources of treatise P: Qusṭā ibn

troduction. On the other hand, Qusṭā had access to Greek manuscript sources, as his extensive
translation work attests, so he could not depend on Arabic translations that attribute Geminus’
work to Ptolemy.
3
For example: P4: ‘the degree’ instead of ‘the two degrees’; P11: omission of the phrase ‘following
the opposite order of the zodiacal signs’ in the determination of the cusp of the eleventh house; P14:
omission of a phrase that leaves the procedure after the elevation of the north pole incorrect; P18:
omission of the phrase ‘above the horizon’; P20: omission of approximately two lines that obscures
the procedure; P31: omission of the word ‘latitude’ in the first line of the procedure and of the num-
ber ‘47’ for the minutes of south latitude that permit a solar eclipse (the latter is only included as a
marginal note in manuscript K and as a symbol like ‘‫ ’مــر‬in manuscript O); P32: ‘the difference of
daylight’ instead of ‘half the difference of daylight’; and P33: ‘ninety’ instead of ‘one hundred eighty’.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 4.3 POSSIBLE DATE AND PLACE OF COMPILATION 163

Lūqā died c. ad 912, al-Ṣūfī wrote his treatise on the celestial globe between
983 and 986 ad, while Ibn al-Haytham died in ad 1040. Thus, treatise P must
have been compiled between the eleventh and the first half of the sixteenth
century ad.
The quadrant, mentioned by the author in Chapter P28, was already known
since the ninth century, since Abū Jaʿfar Muḥammad ibn Mūsa al-Khwārizmī
wrote some treatises on its construction and use, but the instrument became
more popular starting from the twelfth century, in particular in Egypt and Syr-
ia, and became one of the most popular portable instruments of the Muslim
astronomers in the fifteenth century. This period of time is consistent with the
above-mentioned time range.4
There is a strong possibility that the treatise P was compiled in Egypt, based
on the following evidence:
1. There are seven manuscripts of treatise P in the Dār al-kutub in Cai-
ro, while the manuscript from the Library of the University of Riyadh
(MS Ḥ), is said to originate from the Egyptian Dār al-kutub.5 This
manuscript and the manuscript from the National Library of Albania
(MS Ṭ) are very similar to the manuscript Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt
Ṭalʿat 202,2 (MS U). Also the manuscript from Rabat (MS Kh) stems
from the same exemplar as MS D from Cairo, and MS F, now in the
Princeton University Library, is closely related to MS D.
2. There are eight manuscripts in the Süleymaniye Library and one in the
Beyazit State Library in Istanbul, which was the capital of the Ottoman
Empire at the time all of these manuscripts were copied. The similarity
between manuscripts K, L and M from the Süleymaniye Library with
D, J, and A, respectively, from the Dār al-kutub could provide evidence
that these manuscripts were copied in Cairo and then transferred to
the capital.
3. The fact that there is a common omission of a line in Chapter P14 in
all of the twenty-two examined manuscripts of treatise P that contain
P14,6 and in Chapter Q28 in all three Cairo manuscripts (A, B and
L) of treatise Q, points to the probability that the author of treatise P
used an ancestor manuscript of the Cairo manuscripts of Q that had
the same omission and summarized the method without being aware of
this. The same passage has been omitted in the manuscript Paris, BnF,
arabe 7244,1 (MS R) copied in 1188 h / ad 1774, which is of western

4
See King, al-Khwārizmī and New Trends, in particular p. 29; King, ‘A Vetustissimus Arabic Trea-
tise’; Charette, Mathematical Instrumentation, in particular Sections 1.2 and 1.3; and Charette and
Schmidl, ‘al-Khwārizmī and Practical Astronomy’, pp. 128–29, 131–32, 154–55 and 157–58.
5
Note on the information sheet of the manuscript in the Library of the University of Riyadh.
6
Chapter P14 is not included in manuscript N.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
164 CONCLUSIONS

Arabic origin, and the manuscript Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III
3505,5 of treatise Q (MS N), copied in 661 h / ad 1263.7 At that time,
Constantinople was the capital of the Byzantine Empire, and this fact
eliminates the possibility that the manuscript originated from this city.
It arrived at Istanbul later and was included in the library of Sultan
Bāyazīt II and later in the library of Sultan Ahmet III.8 The prove-
nance of this manuscript is unknown.9 The text of Chapter Q28 is
complete in manuscripts C, D, E (London); Z (Meshhed); H, I and
O (Istanbul); K (Damascus), M (Princeton), U (Hydarabad), T (Ti-
rana) and the Latin translation of the same treatise. In manuscript F,
originating from Cairo but now stored in the Manuscript Library of
the University of Pennsylvania, the folio that should contain Chapters
Q22–29 is lost.
However, if the author of the treatise was Akhawayn (see below), the treatise
could have been compiled elsewhere. Akhawayn’s wanderings are not known,
we only know that he taught in Istanbul and Bursa.

4.4 The attribution of the treatise to Akhawayn

In three manuscripts (R, S and T) the treatise is attributed to Akhawayn, who
died between 899 and 904 h (ad 1493–1498). Manuscript R (Princeton) was
copied in 965 h / ad 1558 and is the oldest extant manuscript, thus this ear-
ly attribution should be taken into consideration seriously. The date of Akha-
wayn is consistent with that of the above manuscript and the time range for
the compilation of the treatise discussed in the previous section.
As discussed in Section 1.5 above, bio-bibliographical sources of the six-
teenth and seventeenth centuries attest that Akhawayn wrote some works re-
lated to Islamic theology and a Treatise explaining the Sine Quadrant based
on the work of ʿAṭāʾ Allāh al-ʿAjamī. Since the beginning of the twentieth

7
None of the three Cairo manuscripts (A, B, L) could be descendants of manuscript N of treatise
Q, since they contain some passages omitted in manuscript N.
8
See note 79 in Section 1.2 above.
9
At the time the manuscript was copied (661 h / ad 1263), the Mongols had conquered a great
part of the territories where Arab civilization had flourished, devastating the land, slaughtering the
inhabitants and destroying libraries. This fact can exclude some important cities as possible origin of
this manuscript: Baghdad and the territory around it were conquered by Hulegu and the Mongols
in 1258 and massive massacres and destructions followed. Also, the territory of Sham, including
Damascus, was under the threat of the Mongols, even after the battle of ʿAīn Jālūt in 1260, and
Damascus suffered from hunger during the years 1261–1262. On the other hand, Cairo cannot
be excluded, since 1263 was within a period of prosperity under the reign of the Mamluk sultan al-
Ẓāhir Rukn al-Dīn Baybars, who, later in 1277, established the Ẓāhirīya Library in Damascus. Also,
Maragha cannot be excluded, since the famous observatory was established there by al-Ṭūsī in 1259.
See al-Maqrīzī, Histoire des Sultans Mamlouks (transl. Quatremère), vol. I.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 4.5 POSSIBLE RELATION TO PTOLEMY 165

century, further astronomical treatises have been attributed to him, because he

appears as the author in some manuscripts. His name is written in the title or
the colophon of some transcriptions of the treatises Dhāt al-kursī and al-Rubʿ
al-jāmiʿa, in the dedication or statement of ownership in the manuscript of
the Notes on the Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ by Qāḍī Zāde, whereas it is
included in the main text solely in the Problems in the Science of Astronomy
(MS Vienna Cod. A. F. 418).
The existence of a treatise on the quadrant by Akhawayn supports the possi-
bility that he could be the author of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī, since the author
of treatise P mentions in Chapter P28 that he was going to write such a trea-
tise. The comparison of the style of writing in the Problems on the Science of
Astronomy, in the Cairo manuscript of Akhawayn’s Note on the Sharḥ al-tajrīd 10
and in the prefaces of the notes on the Mulakhkhaṣ and the treatises al-Rubʿ
al-jāmiʿa and Dhāt al-kursī show that all of them contain parts written in a
form of rhymed prose, known in Arabic as sajʿ. However, this was a common
style of writing in many works in the Arabic literature between the eighth and
the end of the nineteenth century, thus this fact cannot be used as evidence for
the authorship by Akhawayn.11
The doubts about the authorship of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī remain, since
it is not cited among Akhawayn’s works in the early bio-bibliographical sourc-
es, and the attribution to Akhawayn appears in only three of the twenty-three
studied manuscripts of the treatise. Moreover, as discussed in Section 1.5, his
name has been deliberately removed from some manuscripts, or added to oth-
ers. The existence of the name of the author, in particular out of the main
text of the work, cannot itself prove the authorship if not supported by other
evidence. Since he was professor at the Ṣaḥn-i Thamān in Constantinople / Is-
tanbul and other madrasas, he should have used some course books either writ-
ten by him or other scholars; it is possible that some of his students wrote his
name at the beginning or the end of the manuscripts they used, even not of
his works, and then it was transmitted to subsequent manuscripts.

4.5 Possible relation to Ptolemy

There are some elements in the Treatise on the Celestial Globe that may relate
it to Ptolemy.
The celestial globe and its use were certainly known in Ptolemy’s time. A de-
tailed description of the celestial globe with stand is preserved, for example, in
Chapter 5 of Geminus’ Introduction to the Phenomena,12 written approximately
10
Akhawayn, Note on the Sharḥ al-tajrīd, in Cairo, al-Azhar Library, Tawḥīd 321,2.
11
Personal communication from Saeed al-Wakeel, Professor of Arabic Literature and Criticism at
the Faculty of Arts, Ain Shams University, Cairo.
12
Evans and Berggren, Geminosʼs Introduction to the Phenomena, pp. 149–59.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
166 CONCLUSIONS

two centuries before Ptolemy. Ptolemy, aiming for a type of globe that could
be used eternally without becoming out of date due to the precession of the
equinoxes,13 had himself developed an improved celestial globe, the so called
precession globe, but this is a different type from that described in treatise P
(see Section 1.3).
In Chapters 2, 23, 24, 26 and 27 of treatise P, there are some traces of Ptol-
emaic influence, pertaining especially to the characteristics of the various ter-
restrial latitudes presented in Almagest II.6. These are discussed above, in the
corresponding sections of the commentary.
Both treatises P and Q include some non-Ptolemaic elements, such as: the
determination of the qibla, the domification (12 astrological houses), the divi-
sion of the horizon into 360°, which corresponds to the notion of the azimuth,
and the use of the coordinates ‘mediationʼ and ʽdifference of declination’ for
the stars.
It is clear that the treatise Dhāt al-kursī (treatise P) should be considered
among the pseudepigrapha and not as a genuine work of Ptolemy for the fol-
lowing reasons:
1. Treatise P has as its source the Treatise on the Celestial Globe by Qusṭā
ibn Lūqā, as is evident from the overlap in content between the two trea-
tises, outlined in the detailed comparison above, and the explicit mention
of the name Qusṭā as well.14 The possible sources of treatise Q and the
additional ones of treatise P are presented in Table 9 on p. 170.
2. The treatise Dhāt al-kursī is not mentioned among the works of Ptole-
my until the mid-seventeenth century ad, with Ḥājjī Khalīfa being the
first to mention it as such in his work Kashf al-ẓunūn, written between
1648 and 1657.15
3. The treatise contains non-Ptolemaic elements, listed above in Sec-
tion 4.5.
4. The globe described is neither the precession globe, nor the armillary
sphere ‘astrolabe’ invented by Ptolemy,16 for which we would expect
13
This globe is described in Chapter VIII.3 of the Almagest, see Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed.
Heiberg), part II, pp. 179–85, and Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest, pp. 404–07. Since the relative po-
sitions of the fixed stars change due to their proper motion, which was unknown in Ptolemy’s time,
the globe cannot actually be used eternally.
14
The complete name appears only in manuscript A, while in the rest of the manuscripts it is
written as ‘Qusṭ’.
15
Kātip Çelebi, Keşf-el-zunun (eds Yaltkaya and Bilge), vol. I, col. 865; Kātip Çelebi, Kashf al-
ẓunūn (ed. Flügel), vol. III, p. 399. For the date of compilation see Gökyay, ‘Kātib Čelebi’. For fur-
ther discussion see the Introduction (Section 1.1).
16
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica (ed. Heiberg), part I, Chapter V.1, pp. 350–54 and vol. II, Chap-
ter VIII.3, pp. 179–85, and Toomer, Ptolemy’s Almagest, pp. 217–19 and 404–07.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 4.5 POSSIBLE RELATION TO PTOLEMY 167

him to have developed an accompanying manual. This fact affirms that

the presence of Ptolemy’s name in the title refers to the treatise itself
and not the instrument described in it.
5. The attribution of the treatise to Ptolemy was made according to the
titles of manuscripts A, B and M, but his name is not mentioned at all
throughout the texts of treatises P and Q. The reference to Ptolemy
in the title could thus have been added erroneously by someone who
found the traces of Ptolemy’s work (Almagest II.6); who thought that
Qusṭā’s treatise was perhaps a translation of a work by Ptolemy; who
attempted to lend more value to this treatise; or who simply wanted
to emphasize the astronomical content of the treatise, or to denote the
Greek origin of the celestial globe with stand.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Appendix 1
Treatise on the Use of the Celestial Globe with Stand by
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā: Table of contents in English translation

The titles of the 65 chapters in English translation

1. To know the drawings (which are on) the globe and their names
2. On the installation of the globe
3. To know the shape of the sky, its configuration (‫ )هيئتها‬and its motion
4. To know the difference in the motion of the sky at any locality
5. To know the cause (‫ )علّــة‬of the equality of night and day on the (ter-
restrial) equator line
6. To know the difference between night- and day-time length in every
region
7. To know the equality of night- and day-time lengths when the sun
enters the first point of Aries and the first point of Libra in all regions
8. To know the longest and shortest daytime in all regions
9. To know the difference between the (lengths of ) daylight of any two
days at any locality you want
10. To know the number of daytime hours at any locality on any day you
want
11. To know the difference between the daylight lengths on a given day at
two given localities with different latitudes
12. To know the time-degrees of the seasonal hours at any locality and on
any day you want
13. To know the time that has elapsed since sunrise in equal hours, if the
ascendant is known
14. To know the time that has elapsed since sunrise in seasonal hours, if
the ascendant is known
15. To know how to find the ascendant, if the elapsed time since sunrise
in equal hours is known
16. To find the ascendant, if the elapsed time since sunrise in seasonal
hours is known
17. To know the midheaven, if the ascendant is known
18. To know the descendant and the centre of the earth, if the ascendant
or the midheaven is known
19. To know the daytime arc of any star you want among the stars drawn
on the globe
20. To find the (corresponding) degree of the ecliptic for each one of the
stars that are on the globe

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
170 APPENDIX 1

21. To know the ‘latitude’ of any star you want, among the fixed stars that
are drawn on the globe
22. To find the declination from the equator for any star you want, among
the fixed stars that are on the globe
23. To find the deviation from the zenith of any locality you want for any
star you want, among the fixed stars that are drawn on the globe
24. To know the maximum altitude of each one among the fixed stars that
are on the globe at any locality you want
25. To find the ortive amplitude of any star you want, among the stars that
are on the globe at any locality you want
26. To find the distance between any two stars you want among the stars
that are on the globe
27. To find the distance between the risings of any two stars you want
among the stars that are on the globe at any locality you want
28. To know the stars that rise simultaneously from the horizon, those that
set simultaneously, and those that culminate simultaneously, at all of
the latitudes
29. To know the degree of rising of each one of the fixed stars, that of its
setting and that of its meridian transit at all of the latitudes
30. To find the declination of any degree of the zodiac you want
31. To know the ortive amplitude of any degree you desire among the de-
grees of the zodiac, at any locality you want
32. To find the ascension (rising times) of the zodiacal signs in the right
sphere
33. To find the ascension (rising times) of any zodiacal sign you want at
any latitude you want
34. To know the stars that do not set at any locality you want, among the
stars drawn on the globe
35. To know the stars that are never visible at any locality you want, among
the stars of the globe
36. To know the stars that are seen twice in one night: early at night after
sunset on the west side and early morning before sunrise on the east
side. This is possible for stars near the north pole, when the sun is
among the southern zodiacal signs
37. To know the stars, among the stars drawn on the globe, that are visible
above the earth during the entire night, at a given night and locality
38. To find at what time any star you want, among the stars drawn on the
globe, rises at any night and any locality you want
39. To find at what time any given star, among the stars drawn on the
globe, sets at any night and any locality you want
40. To know the time of rising of the moon or any planet you want, at any
night and any locality you want

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 APPENDIX 1 171

41. To find the time of setting of the moon or any given planet, at any
night and any locality you want
42. To know the midday altitude 〈of the sun〉 at any locality and on any
day you want
43. To know the maximum altitude of each one of the stars drawn on the
globe at any locality you want
44. To know the difference between the greatest altitude of the sun on the
same day in two localities with different latitudes
45. To know the place in which the entire year is one day, six months long
daytime without night, and six months long night-time without day-
light
46. To know the locality where no star ever rises and no star ever sets,
but the visible stars are always visible there, and the invisible stars are
always invisible
47. To know the place where the daylight is 24 equal hours
48. To know the place where Taurus rises before Aries
49. To know the place where the sun reaches the zenith
50. To know the localities in which there is no shadow at all at some mo-
ment within the year, and at which day and time this occurs
51. To know the localities where the shadows are in one direction and those
where the shadows are in two directions, and the time when the shadows
will be to the south and the time when they will be to the north
52. To know the localities where the sun reaches the zenith once a year
and those where it reaches the zenith twice, and at what time during
the year this occurs
53. On obtaining the altitude of the sun with the globe at any time you
want
54. To know the four centres using the globe
55. To find the rest of the centres
56. To find the meridian line at any locality and any time you want
57. To know the azimuth of the qibla at any locality and any time you
want
58. To find the ‘longitude’ of the moon and any planet you want, in a
night during which it its possible to measure its maximum altitude
59. To find the ‘latitude’ of the moon or any planet you want, in a night
during which it its possible to measure its maximum altitude
60. To know if a lunar eclipse occurs in the current month
61. To know if a solar eclipse occurs in the current month
62. To know the ‘longitude’, in degrees of the ecliptic, of any star you want
among the fixed stars that are not drawn on the globe
63. To find the ‘latitude’ of any star you want among the fixed stars that
are not drawn on the globe

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
172 APPENDIX 1

64. To know the distance from the equator (declination) of any star you
want among the fixed stars that are not drawn on the globe
65. To know the distance between any star you want, among the fixed stars
that are not drawn on the globe, and the zenith at any locality you
want

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Appendix 2
Correspondence between the chapters of
the Arabic manuscripts of treatise Q,
its Latin translation* and treatise P
Q QA QB QC/H/K/L/M/N/O/R/U/Z QD QE QF QS QT1 Latin P
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Introd
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 - 4 4 1
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 - 5 5 2
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 3 6 6 3-
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 4 7 7 3-
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 - 8 8 3
9 9 9 9 92 9 9 - 9 9 4
10 10 10 10 9 10 10 5 10 10 5
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 - no number 11 6
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 11 12 5
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 - 12 13 7
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 - 13 14 7
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7 14 15 8
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 15 16 8
17 17 17 17 17 17 173 9 16 17 10
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 10 17 18 10
19 19 19 19 184 19 19 - 18 19 5
20 20 20 20 19 20 20 - 20 20 12
21 21 21 21 20 21 21 - 21 21 12
22 22 22 22 21 22 225 - 22 22 12
23 23 23 23 22 23 - - 23 23 12
24 24 24 24 23 24 - - 24 24 12
25 25 25 25 24 25 - - 25 25 13
26 26 26 26 25 26 - - 26 26 13

* As edited by Lorch and Martínez Gázquez

1
In MS T, the numbers of the chapters are written in Arabic numerals in red colour at the beginning
of the chapters. However, in some chapters the numbers have been omitted, thus there is a difference
in chapter enumeration.
2
The title is that of Chapter Q9, but the explanation corresponds to Chapter Q10. Both the
explanation of Chapter Q9 and the title of Chapter Q10 are omitted.
3
Written as ‘seventh’.
4
Only the number of the chapter is repeated as 18; the title and the explanation correspond to
Chapter Q19.
5
Only the first half of the text of this chapter is preserved, because a folio is missing.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
174 APPENDIX 2

Q QA QB QC/H/K/L/M/N/O/R/U/Z QD QE QF QS QT Latin P
27 27 27 27 26 27 - - 27 27 13
28 28 28 28 27 28 - - 28 28 14
29 29 29 29 28 29 - 11 29 29 15
30 30 30 30 29 30 30 12 30 30 12
31 31 31 31 30 316 31 13 31 31 13
32 32 32 32 31 31 32 14 32 32 16
33 33 33 33 32 32 33 15 33 33 16
34 34 34 34 33 33 34 - 34 34 17
35 35 35 35 34 34 35 - 35 35 17
36 36 36 36 35 35 36 - 36 36 18
37 37 37 37 36 367 37 - 37 37 18
38 38 38 38 37 37 38 - 38 38 19
39 39 39 39 38 38 39 - 39 39 19
40 40 40 40 39 39 40 - 40 40 20
41 41 41 41 40 40 41 - 41 41 20
42 41a 42 42 41 418 42 16 42 42 21
43 42 42a 43 42 42 43 - 43 43 21
44 43 43 44 43 43 44 - 44 44 22
45 44 44 45 44 44 45 17 45 45 23
46 45 45 46 45 45 46 - no number 46 23
47 46 46 47 46 46 47 18 46 47 24
48 47 47 48 47 47 48 19 no number 48 25
49 48 48 49 48 48 49 20 47 49 26
50 49 49 509 49 4910 50 23 48 50 26
51 50 51 51 50 50 51 24 49 51 27
52 51 52 52 51 51 52 25 50 52 26
53 52 53 53 52 52 53 - 51 53 9
54 53 54 54 53 53 54 - 54 54 10
55 54 55 55 54 54 55 - 55 55 11
56 55 56 56 55 5511 56 21 56 56 28
57 56 58 57 56 5612 57 22 57 57 28
58 57 59 58 57 57 58 - 58 58 29
59 58 60 59 58 58 59 - 59 59 30
60 59 61 60 59 59 60 - 60 60 31

6
The last eight words of Chapter 31 and the title with the first six words of the explanation of
Chapter 32 are both omitted. Thus, Chapter 31 contains both Chapters Q31 and Q32 except for
the omission mentioned above.
7
Written as Chapter 33 in the title.
8
Written as ‫الباب الخادي عشر وال�أربعين‬.
9
The whole Chapter 50 is written twice on f. 10r of manuscript M.
10
Written as Chapter 59 in the title.
11
Written as Chapter 15 in the title.
12
Written as Chapter 16 in the title.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 APPENDIX 2 175

Q QA QB QC/H/K/L/M/N/O/R/U/Z QD QE QF QS QT Latin P
61 6013
62 61 14
60 60 61 - 61 61 31
62 62 63 62 61 61 62 - 62 62 29
63 63 63 63 63 62 63 - 63 63 30
64 64 64 64 64 63 64 - 64 64 30
65 65 65 6515 65 64 65 - 65 65 30
66 6616 - - - - - - - -
67 67 - - - - - - - - 5

13
Written as ‫الباب الوني والستون‬.
14
Written as Chapter 60 in MS N.
15
In manuscript M, there are three additional unnumbered chapters after Chapter 65. These
chapters are different from those in manuscript A and correspond to Chapters P32, P33.2 and P33.1
of the treatise P.
16
In the manuscript A of treatise Q there are two additional chapters numbered as 66 and 67.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Appendix 3
Treatise on the Use of the Celestial Globe with Stand
by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā: Arabic text
Since the treatise Dhāt al-kursī attributed to Ptolemy is based on the Treatise
on the Use of the Celestial Globe with Stand by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā, as it is shown
in Chapter 3 above, it is necessary for the reader to have access to the whole
text of this treatise in order to compare these two works in every detail. Since
only the Latin translation of this treatise has been published,17 I present here a
transcription of the Arabic text.
The manuscripts examined present many variants; in some of them the
second-person singular is used for the description of the procedures, in others
the first-person plural; also special expressions are consistently used in certain
groups of manuscripts. There are manuscripts where the introduction or the
list of chapters has been omitted. Also, the introduction appears in various pat-
terns. The chapter numbering presents many differences, which are presented
in Appendix 2. The above problems would complicate a critical edition of this
text, which is not the principal treatise of this book. For this reason, I decided
to present a transcription based on a few manuscripts.
I have used the manuscript O /‫( و‬Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III,
3475,1) as the main source for the transcription. This is a complete and care-
fully copied manuscript, with few omissions and grammatical errors. I have
replaced only the problematic points of manuscript O with the correspond-
ing points from manuscript Z /‫( ز‬Meshhed, Holy Shrine, 5595,1), which is
strongly related to manuscript O but less carefully copied, or from manuscript
N /‫( ن‬Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III 3505,5). The latter appears to be the
oldest of the examined manuscripts, but it contains several grammatical errors
and there is quite a number of omissions. In very few cases I have used the
manuscripts:
A / ‫ا‬: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ḥalīm ʿarabī 7;
B / ‫ب‬: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, K ʿarabī 3824,13;
C / ‫ج‬: London, British Library, Stowe Orient 10,6;
F / ‫ف‬: Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania, LJS 412,1 and
L / ‫ل‬: Cairo, Central Library of Islamic Manuscripts, 3071,7.
The introduction presented in the transcription is that of manuscripts O and
Z. In the apparatus, only the variants replacing those of manuscript O are
mentioned, not all the variants from the other manuscripts.

17
Lorch and Martínez Gázquez, ‘Qusta ben Luca. De sphera uolubili’, in Suhayl 5 (2005).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
178 APPENDIX 3

List of abbreviations in the transcription

Meaning Symbol
addition +
omitted –
written twice 2×
the word ‫ هذا‬is struck through ‫هذا‬
a word or a phrase not included in the text 〈…〉
change of folio in MS ‫و‬ /‫و‬/
f. 3r 3‫ا‬
f. 3v 3‫ب‬

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬ ‫‪179‬‬

‫اليوناني‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الفلكية ٔالفه قسطا بن لوقا‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن‪ /‬كتاب العمل بالكرة‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪95‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪/‬و ز ن‪ /‬بسم اللّٰه الرحمن الرحيم وبه نستعين‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪95‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪1‬ب‪/‬‬
‫البعلبكي الٔبي الصقر ا ٕسماعيل بن ُب ُ‬
‫لبل‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫كتاب العمل بالكرة لقسطا بن لوقا‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪1‬ب‪/‬‬

‫عزك اللّٰه‪ ،‬الكرة الفلكيّة والعمل بها‪ ،‬وما رأيت من ظهور اختالف مطالع‬
‫ذكرت‪ ،‬أ ّ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫الشمس ومغاربها فيها‪ ،‬وطول النهار وقصره‪ ،‬واختالفه في المدن باختالف مواضع‬
‫بينا‪ ،‬وأ ُ ِم ُ‬
‫رت ‪/‬و‪ /‬بتأليف كتاب‬ ‫المدن من االٔرض‪ ،‬وغير ذلك مما يظهر فيها ظهورا ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪2‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ل االٔعمال والحركات التي في الكرة‪ ،‬و إيضاح ذلك بأوجز ما‬ ‫في ذلك َيظهر به ك ّ‬
‫يكون من اللفظ وأجمعه للمعاني‪ ،‬فسارعت إلى أمرك جعلني اللّٰه‪ ،‬فداك حبا مني‬
‫علي‪ ،‬والحق‬‫ّ‬ ‫الٕ شارتك والتماسا لمحبتك ا ٕذ كنت أرى طاعتك كالفرض الالزم‬
‫ل ما ذكرته فيه من االٔعمال بأعداد ‪10‬‬
‫علي‪ .‬وق ّدمت في أ ّول الكتاب أبواب ك ّ‬ ‫الواجب‬
‫ّ‬
‫ي باب شئت منها ويقرب مأخذه‪ ،‬وعلى‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬صيرتها عليها ليسهل عليك استخراج أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪2‬ب‪/‬‬

‫اللّٰه توكّلى وهو ثقتي ورجائي وبه أستعين‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ن‪ /‬الباب اال ٔ ّول‪ :‬في معرفة رسوم الكرة وأسمائها‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪96‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الباب الثاني‪ :‬في نصب الكرة‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫الباب الثالث‪ :‬في شكل السماء وهيئتها وحركتها‪.‬‬
‫ل واحد من البلدان‪.‬‬
‫الباب الرابع‪ :‬في معرفة اختالف حركة السماء على ك ّ‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪.‬‬ ‫الباب الخامس‪/ :‬و‪ /‬في معرفة علّة استواء الليل والنهار في‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪3‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ل واحد من المساكن‪.‬‬ ‫الباب السادس‪ :‬في معرفة اختالف الليل والنهار في ك ّ‬

‫الباب السابع‪ :‬في معرفة استواء الليل والنهار عند دخول الشمس أ ّول الحمل وأ ّول‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫الميزان في جميع المساكن‪.‬‬
‫الباب الثامن‪ :‬في معرفة أطول النهار وأقصره في جميع المساكن‪.‬‬
‫ي يومين ‪/‬و‪ /‬شئنا وفي أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد شئنا‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪3‬ب‪ /‬الباب التاسع‪ :‬في معرفة االختالف بين نهار أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد شئت‪.‬‬ ‫ي يوم شئت وفي أ ّ‬‫‪/‬ن ‪96‬ب‪ /‬الباب العاشر‪ :‬في معرفة ‪/‬ن‪ /‬ساعات النهار في أ ّ‬

‫ا ٕسماعيل[‬ ‫البعلبكي[ ن‪ :‬اليوياني‬

‫ّ‬ ‫و ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬لوقا[ و‪ + :‬قا‬ ‫‪ 2‬ن‪ :‬وبه نستعين[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 10‬في أ ّول[ و‪ :‬لي أول‪،‬‬ ‫علي[ و ز‪ :‬لي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫لبل[ و ز‪ :‬بليل‬
‫ن‪ُ :‬ب ُ‬ ‫ن‪ :‬ا ٕسمعيل‪ ،‬و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ز‪ :‬الٔول‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪180‬‬
‫‪188‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫الباب ‪ :۱۱‬في معرفة االختالف بين نهار يوم واحد مفروض في بلدين مفروضين‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫مختلفي العرض‪.‬‬
‫ي يوم شئت‪.‬‬ ‫ي بلد شئت وأ ّ‬
‫الزمانية في أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۱۲‬في معرفة أزمان الساعات‬
‫الباب ‪ :۱۳‬في معرفة ما مضى من النهار من الساعات المستوية ‪/‬و‪ /‬ا ٕذا كان‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪4‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الطالع معلوما‪.‬‬
‫الزمانية ا ٕذا كان الطالع‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۱۴‬في معرفة ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫معلوما‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۱۵‬في استخراج الطالع‪ ،‬إذا كان ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬
‫المستوية معلوما‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۱۶‬في استخراج الطالع‪ ،‬ا ٕذا كان ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬
‫الزمانية معلوما‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۱۷‬في معرفة جزء وسط السماء‪ ،‬إذا كان الطالع معلوما‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۱۸‬في معرفة جزء الغارب ‪/‬و‪ /‬ووتد االٔرض‪ ،‬ا ٕذا كان الطالع أو جزء وسط‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪4‬ب‪/‬‬

‫السماء معلوما‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۱۹‬في معرفة قوس نهار أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب المرسومة على‬
‫الكرة‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬ ‫ل واحد من الكواكب التي في الكرة من فلك‬
‫الباب ‪ :۲۰‬في استخراج جزء ك ّ‬
‫البروج‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۲۱‬في معرفة عرض أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب الثابتة المرسومة على‬
‫الكرة‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۲۲‬في استخراج ميل أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب التي على الكرة عن‬
‫‪45‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط مع ّدل النهار‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬الباب ‪ :۲۳‬في استخراج ميل أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب المرسومة على‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪5‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ي بلد شئت‪.‬‬‫الكرة عن سمت رءوس أهل أ ّ‬

‫‪ 42‬ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 36‬ن‪ :‬جزء‪ 37… 2‬السماء[ و ز‪ :‬العشر‬ ‫‪ 35‬ن‪ :‬السماء[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 44‬ن‪ :‬من…‪ 45‬النهار[ و ز‪ :‬عن مع ّدل النهار من الكواكب المرسومة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬من مع ّدل النهار الكواكب‬
‫ن‪ :‬على…‪ 47‬الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 46‬ز ن‪ :‬الكواكب المرسومة[ و‪ :‬هذه الكواكب‬ ‫المرسومة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪181‬‬
‫‪189‬‬

‫الباب ‪ :۲۴‬في معرفة أعظم ارتفاع ك ّ‬

‫ل واحد من الكواكب الثابتة التي على الكرة‬
‫ي ‪/‬ن‪ /‬بلد شئت‪.‬‬ ‫في أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪97‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫ي كوكب شئت من كواكب الكرة في أ ّ‬

‫ي‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۲۵‬في استخراج سعة مشرق أ ّ‬
‫بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫ي كوكبين شئت من كواكب الكرة في أ ّ‬
‫ي‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۲۶‬في استخراج البعد بين أ ّ‬
‫بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫ي كوكبين شئت من كواكب‬ ‫الباب ‪/ :۲۷‬و‪ /‬في استخراج البعد بين مشارق أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪5‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪55‬‬ ‫ي بلد شئت‪.‬‬‫الكرة في أ ّ‬

‫معا‪،‬‬ ‫الباب ‪/ :۲۸‬ز‪ /‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تطلع من االٔفق ً‬
‫معا‪ ،‬والتي تغرب ً‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪2‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ل واحد من االٔقاليم‪.‬‬
‫معا في ك ّ‬
‫تتوسط السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫والتي‬
‫وتوسط‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ل واحد من الكواكب الثابتة وغروبه‬
‫الباب ‪ :۲۹‬في معرفة جزء طلوع ك ّ‬
‫ل واحد من االٔقاليم‪.‬‬
‫سمائه في ك ّ‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫ي جزء شئت من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪.‬‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۳۰‬في استخراج ميل أ ّ‬
‫ي جزء شئت من أجزاء دائرة البروج في‬ ‫‪/‬و‪ /‬الباب ‪ :۳۱‬في معرفة سعة مشرق أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪6‬ا‪/‬‬

‫أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۳۲‬في استخراج مطالع البروج في الفلك المستقيم‪.‬‬
‫ي إقليم شئت‪.‬‬ ‫ي برج شئت في أ ّ‬
‫الباب ‪ :۳۳‬في استخراج مطالع أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد أردت معرفة ذلك فيه ‪65‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۳۴‬في معرفة الكواكب التي ال تغيب عن أ ّ‬
‫من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۳۵‬في معرفة الكواكب التي ال تظهر بتّ�ة ‪/‬و‪ /‬في أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد شئت من‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪6‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬

‫بالعشي بعد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۳۶‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تُرى في الليلة الواحدة مرتين‬
‫‪70‬‬ ‫غروب الشمس في المغرب وبالغداة قبل طلوع ‪/‬ن‪ /‬الشمس في المشرق‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪97‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪ 56‬ن‪ :‬والتي تغرب[ و ز‪ :‬وتغرب‬ ‫ي‪ [1‬و‪2× :‬‬ ‫‪ 52‬أ ّ‬ ‫‪ 48‬ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬
‫ٔ‬
‫‪ 59‬ن‪ :‬واحد…االقاليم[‬ ‫‪ 58‬ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬ ‫وتتوسط‬
‫ّ‬ ‫تتوسط[ و ز‪:‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 57‬ن‪ :‬والتي‬
‫‪ 69‬ن‪ :‬الليلة الواحدة[‬ ‫‪ 68‬ن‪ :‬على الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 60‬ز‪ :‬شئت[ و ن‪ :‬شئنا‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬ا ٕقليم‬
‫ن‪ :‬طلوع…‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬مغربا و‬ ‫في‪… 1‬وبالغداة[‬ ‫‪ 70‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫بالعشي[ و‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ز ن‪:‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬ليلة واحدة‬
‫المشرق[ و ز‪ :‬طلوعها مشرقا‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪182‬‬
‫‪190‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫الباب ‪ :۳۷‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تُرى في الليلة المفروضة الليل كلّه فوق‬
‫االٔرض من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة في البلد المفروض‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۳۸‬في استخراج الساعة التي يطلع فيها أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب‬
‫المرسومة على الكرة في أ ّ‬
‫ي ليلة وبلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫‪75‬‬ ‫ي كوكب شئت من‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۳۹‬في استخراج ‪/‬و‪ /‬الساعة التي يغرب فيها أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪7‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ي ليلة وبلد شئت‪.‬‬‫الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة في أ ّ‬

‫المتحيرة‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۴۰‬في معرفة ساعة طلوع القمر وأ ّ‬
‫ي ليلة شئت‪.‬‬ ‫أين شئت وأ ّ‬
‫الباب ‪ :۴۱‬في استخراج ساعة غروب القمر وأ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب فرض لنا من الكواكب‬
‫‪80‬‬ ‫المتحيرة في أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد وليلة شئت‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الباب ‪ :۴۲‬في معرفة ارتفاع نصف النهار في أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد ويوم شئت‪.‬‬
‫ل واحد من الكواكب المرسومة في الكرة‬ ‫‪/‬و‪ /‬الباب ‪ :۴۳‬في معرفة أعظم ارتفاع ك ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪7‬ب‪/‬‬

‫ي بلد شئت‪.‬‬‫في أ ّ‬
‫الباب ‪ :۴۴‬في معرفة االختالف بين أعظم ارتفاع الشمس في اليوم الواحد من‬
‫‪85‬‬ ‫بلدين مختلفي العرض‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۴۵‬في معرفة الموضع الذي تكون فيه السنة كلّها يوما واحدا‪ ،‬ستة أشهر‬
‫نهارا ال ليل فيه‪ ،‬وستة أشهر ليال ال نهار فيه‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۴۶‬في معرفة البلد الذي ال يطلع عليه كوكب ‪/‬و‪ /‬بتّ�ة وال يغرب عنه‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪8‬ا‪/‬‬

‫كوكب بتّ�ة‪ ،‬لكن الكواكب التي هي ظاهرة فيه تكون أ ً‬

‫بدا ظاهرة‪ ،‬والكواكب‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫خفية‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫خفية عنه تكون ‪/‬ن‪ /‬أ ً‬
‫بدا‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫التي هي‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪98‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الباب ‪ :۴۷‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يكون النهار فيه أربعا وعشرين ساعة مستويّ�ة‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۴۸‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يطلع فيه الثور قبل الحمل‪.‬‬

‫‪ 74‬ن‪ :‬على الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 73‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 72‬ن‪ :‬من…الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 75‬يغرب…‪ 76‬الكواكب[ و‪ :‬تغرب فيها ذلك الكواكب‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬تغرب فيها ذلك الكوكب‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىغرب فيها‬
‫‪ 79‬ن‪ :‬وأ ّ‬
‫ي …الكواكب[‬ ‫‪ 76‬ن‪ :‬المرسومة…الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب فرض لنا من الكواكب‬
‫فيه‪[2‬‬ ‫‪ 87‬ز ن‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 84‬ز ن‪ :‬بين[ و‪ :‬نير‬ ‫‪ 82‬ن‪ :‬في الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬أو غيره من‬
‫و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫خفية‪[2‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 89‬ن‪ :‬لكن…‪90‬‬ ‫و‪ :‬فيها‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬ ‫‪191‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪183‬‬

‫الباب ‪ :۴۹‬في معرفة الموضع الذي تجوز فيه الشمس على سمت الرأس‪.‬‬
‫ل أصال في وقت ما من‬‫الباب ‪ :۵۰‬في معرفة البلدان التي ال يكون لشيء فيها ظ ّ‬
‫‪95‬‬ ‫ي وقت ويوم يكون ذلك‪.‬‬ ‫السنة ‪/‬و‪ /‬وفي أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪8‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الباب ‪ :۵۱‬في معرفة البلدان التي تكون االٔظالل فيها في جهة واحدة والتي تكون‬
‫ي وقت تكون االٔظالل جنوبيّة وفي أ ّ‬
‫ي وقت‬ ‫جميعا‪ ،‬وفي أ ّ‬
‫ً‬ ‫فيها في الجهتين‬
‫تكون شماليّة‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۵۲‬في معرفة البلدان التي تصير الشمس فيها على سمت الرأس مرة واحدة‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫في السنة‪ ،‬والتي تصير فيها على سمت الرأس مرتين وفي أ ّ‬
‫ي ‪/‬و‪ /‬وقت يكون‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪9‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ذلك‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۵۳‬في معرفة أخذ ارتفاع الشمس بالكرة في أ ّ‬
‫ي وقت شئت‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۵۴‬في معرفة االٔوتاد االٔربع بالكرة‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۵۵‬في استخراج االٔوتاد الباقية‪.‬‬
‫‪105‬‬ ‫ي بلد شئت وأ ّ‬
‫ي وقت‪.‬‬ ‫خط نصف النهار في أ ّ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۵۶‬في استخراج‬
‫ي وقت شئت‪.‬‬ ‫ي بلد شئت وأ ّ‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۵۷‬في معرفة سمت القبلة في أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪9‬ب‪ /‬الباب ‪ :۵۸‬في استخراج موضع ‪/‬و‪ /‬القمر وأ ّ‬
‫المتحيرة في الليلة التي يمكنك أن تأخذ فيها أعظم ارتفاعه‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب ‪/‬ن‪ /‬المتحيّرة‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪98‬ب‪ /‬الباب ‪ :۵۹‬في استخراج عرض القمر أو أ ّ‬
‫‪110‬‬ ‫في الليلة التي يمكنك أن تأخذ فيها أت ّم ارتفاعه‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۶۰‬في معرفة خسوف القمر ا ٕن كان يقع في الشهر الذي أنت فيه‪.‬‬
‫الباب ‪ :۶۱‬في معرفة كسوف الشمس إن كان يقع في الشهر الذي أنت فيه‪.‬‬

‫‪ 96‬تكون‪ [1‬و ز ن‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫‪ 94‬التي[ و ز ن‪ :‬الذي‬ ‫‪ 93‬تجوز[ و‪ :‬يجوز‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ىجوز‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬
‫ن‪ :‬وفي‪ [2‬و ز‪ :‬و‬ ‫‪ 97‬تكون[ و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫تكون‪ [2‬و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬
‫‪ 100‬تصير[ و ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 99‬ز‪ :‬تصير[ و‪ :‬يصير‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىصير‬ ‫‪ 98‬تكون[ و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬
‫‪ 104‬ب‪ :‬االٔوتاد الباقية[ و‪ :‬باقي‬ ‫‪ 102‬وقت[ و‪ + :‬من أ ّ‬
‫ي يوم‪ ،‬ز‪ + :‬وأ ّ‬
‫ي يوم‬ ‫يصير‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىصير‬
‫‪ 108‬ن‪ :‬الليلة‬ ‫‪ 107‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫المراكز‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬بيوت باقي المراكز‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬البيوت الباقية‬
‫‪ 110‬ن‪ :‬الليلة… أن[ و ز‪ :‬ليلة‬ ‫‪ 109‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫التي[ و ز‪ :‬ليلة‬
‫‪ 112‬ن‪ :‬يقع[ و ز‪ :‬وقوعة‬ ‫‪ 111‬ن‪ :‬كان يقع[ و‪ :‬وقع‪ ،‬ز‪– :‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪184‬‬
‫‪192‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ي ‪/‬و‪ /‬كوكب شئت من الكواكب الثابتة الغير‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۶۲‬في معرفة موضع أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪10‬ا‪/‬‬

‫مرسومة على الكرة من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪.‬‬

‫‪115‬‬ ‫ي كوكب أردت من الكواكب الثابتة الغير مرسومة‬
‫الباب ‪ :۶۳‬في استخراج عرض أ ّ‬
‫على الكرة‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬ز‪ /‬الباب ‪ :۶۴‬في معرفة بعد أ ّ‬
‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب الغير مرسومة في‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪2‬ب‪/‬‬

‫الكرة عن فلك مع ّدل النهار‪.‬‬

‫المرسومة‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ي كوكب شئت من الكواكب الغير‬ ‫الباب ‪ :۶۵‬في معرفة البعد بين أ ّ‬
‫‪120‬‬ ‫على الكرة وبين نقطة سمت الرأس‪ ،‬في أ ّ‬
‫ي بلد شئت‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪10‬ب‪ /‬الباب اال ٔ ّول‪/ :‬و‪ /‬في معرفة رسوم الكرة وأسمائها‪.‬‬

‫الكرة آلة مؤلفة من نفس الكرة والحلقة الثابتة عليها والكرسي الحامل لها‪ .‬فأ ّما الرسوم‬
‫التي فيها‪ ،‬فهي‪ :‬فلك وسط البروج‪ ،‬وفلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬واثنا عشر فلكا تفصل بين‬
‫االثنى عشر برجا‪ ،‬وفلك نصف النهار‪ ،‬وفلك االٔفق‪ ،‬وقطبا فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وقطبا‬
‫‪125‬‬ ‫نيرة من الكواكب ‪/‬و‪ /‬الثابتة‪.‬‬
‫فلك وسط البروج‪ ،‬وكواكب منازل القمر‪ ،‬وكواكب آخر ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪11‬ا‪/‬‬

‫أ ّما فلك وسط البروج في الكرة‪ ،‬فهو الدائرة المقسومة بثالثمائة وستين قسما‬
‫متساوية الموقّع عليها أسماء البروج االثنى عشر‪ ،‬وموقّع على ك ّ‬
‫ل برج منها عدد‬
‫درجة الثالثين‪.‬‬
‫وأ ّما فلك مع ّدل النهار فهو الدائرة المقاطعة لهذه الدائرة على أ ّول الحمل وأ ّول‬
‫يضا مقسومة بثالثمائة وستين جزءا متساوية موقّع عليها أعداد ‪130‬‬ ‫الميزان‪ ،‬وهي ‪/‬ن‪ /‬أ ً‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪99‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪11‬ب‪ /‬تبتدئ ‪/‬و‪ /‬من واحد وتنتهي ا ٕلى ثالثمائة وستين‪.‬‬
‫ل واحد منها من الذي‬‫وأ ّما االثنا عشر فلكا التي تفصل بين االثنى عشر برجا ك ّ‬
‫ل واحد منها على أ ّول برج من البروج االثنى‬
‫يليه‪ ،‬فهي اثنتا عشرة دائرة‪ ،‬يجوز ك ّ‬

‫‪ 115‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬ ‫‪ 113‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫‪ 118‬ن‪ :‬فلك[ و ز‪:‬‬ ‫الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫في‪118… 2‬‬ ‫‪ 117‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬
‫‪ 122‬ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬ ‫‪ 120‬ن‪ :‬على الكرة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 119‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 133‬اثنتا عشرة[ و ز‪ :‬اثنى عشر‪،‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬دائرة‬ ‫الدائرة‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 129‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 125‬ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬
‫ن‪ :‬اثنا عشر‬

‫‪ 113‬الغير…‪ 114‬مرسومة[ الصورة الصحيحة ‪ :‬غير المرسومة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪185‬‬
‫‪193‬‬

‫عشر وعلى نظير ذلك البرج‪ ،‬وتتقاطع كلّها على نقطتين على جنبتي فلك وسط‬
‫‪135‬‬ ‫البروج‪.‬‬
‫وأ ّما فلك نصف النهار فهو الحلقة الثابتة على الكرة‪ ،‬والكرة تتحرك في داخلها‪،‬‬
‫يضا تتحرك على الكرة‪ ،‬وهي مقسومة أ ً‬
‫يضا ثالثمائة وستين جزءا متساوية‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و‪ /‬وهي أ ً‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪12‬ا‪/‬‬

‫وأ ّما فلك االٔفق فهو حلقة الكرسي التي تنصب عليها الكرة‪ ،‬وهي أ ً‬
‫يضا مقسومة‬
‫بثالثمائة وستين جزءا متساوية‪ ،‬موقّع عليها أعداد مشارق الشتاء ومشارق الصيف‬
‫‪140‬‬ ‫ومغارب الشتاء ومغارب الصيف‪ ،‬والشمال والجنوب‪.‬‬
‫وأ ّما قطبا فلك مع ّدل النهار فهما الثقبان اللذان ‪/‬و‪ /‬فيهما المسماران اللذان بهما‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪12‬ب‪/‬‬

‫تثبت الحلقة على الكرة‪ ،‬وبهما تدور الحلقة على الكرة‪ ،‬والكرة في الحلقة؛ وهما‬
‫الجنوبي‪ .‬وبعدهما‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي وعلى االٓخر القطب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ثابتان موقّع على أحدهما القطب‬
‫عن فلك مع ّدل النهار من أجزائه كلّها ُبعد متساو‪.‬‬
‫‪145‬‬ ‫وأ ّما قطبا فلك وسط البروج فهما النقطتان اللتان تتقاطع عليهما االثنتا عشرة دائرة‬
‫الفاصلة البروج وبعدهما ‪/‬و‪ /‬عن فلك وسط البروج من أجزائه كلّها ُبعد متساو‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪13‬ا‪/‬‬

‫وأ ّما منازل القمر‪ ،‬فهي الدارات الصغار المختلفة في العظم الموقّع عليها أسماء‬
‫الثماني والعشرين منزلة على فلك البروج وعن جنبتيه‪.‬‬
‫وأ ّما الكواكب الثابتة فهي الدارات الصغار المتساوية في العظم الموقّع عليها أسماء‬
‫‪150‬‬ ‫الكواكب المرسومة في االٔسطرالب‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ن ‪99‬ب‪/ /‬ن‪ /‬الباب الثاني‪ :‬في نصب الكرة‪.‬‬

‫وتصير مشارق الصيف‬‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪13‬ب‪ /‬وأ ّما نصب الكرة‪ ،‬فهو أن تضع الكرسي ‪/‬و‪ /‬بين يديك‬
‫الشمالي على العرض الموقّع عليه الشمال‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ومشارق الشتاء فيما يليك‪ ،‬وتضع القطب‬
‫الجنوبي على العرض الموقّع عليه الجنوب؛ وتركب الحلقة أ ً‬
‫يضا في العرض‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫والقطب‬
‫الذي في العارضة التي في أسفل الكرسي‪ ،‬وترفع القطب الشمالي عن االٔفق من ‪155‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار بقدر عرض البلد الذي أنت فيه‪ .‬ف ٕانك ا ٕذا فعلت ذلك كنت‬

‫‪ 145‬االثنتا عشرة[ ز ن‪ :‬االثنى عشر‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 136‬ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و ز‪ :‬الثانية‬ ‫‪ 134‬ن‪ :‬على‪ [2‬و ز‪ :‬عن‬
‫‪ 149‬ز ن‪ :‬الثابتة[ و‪ :‬الثانية‬ ‫‪ 148‬الثماني[ و ز‪ :‬الثمان‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬الثمانية‬ ‫و‪ :‬االثنا عشر‬
‫العرض‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 154‬ز ن‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 153‬ز ن‪ :‬العرض[ و‪ :‬الغرض‬ ‫‪ 150‬ن‪ :‬المرسومة[ و‪ :‬التي‪ ،‬ز‪–:‬‬
‫ز ن‪ :‬العرض‪ [2‬و‪ :‬الغرض‬ ‫و‪ :‬الغرض‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪186‬‬
‫‪194‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫حق نصبها وصارت رسوم حلقة نصف النهار فيما يليك‪ ،‬وصار‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫قد نصبت ‪/‬و‪ /‬الكرة‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪14‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ربع الكرة الذي من حلقة نصف النهار إلى حلقة االٔفق ظاهرا لك كلّه‪ ،‬وأمكنك أن‬
‫تعمل بها ما تريد من االٔعمال‪.‬‬

‫‪160‬‬ ‫الباب الثالث‪ :‬في معرفة شكل السماء وهيئتها وحركتها‪.‬‬

‫بدا فوق االٔرض ونصفها أ ً‬

‫بدا‬ ‫أ ّما شكل السماء‪ ،‬فهو مستدير كاستدارة الكرة‪ ،‬ونصفها أ ً‬
‫بدا فوق حلقة الكرسي التي تقوم مقام االٔفق‬‫‪/‬و ‪14‬ب‪ /‬تحت االٔرض‪ ،‬كما ‪/‬و‪ /‬أن نصف الكرة أ ً‬
‫بدا تحتها‪ .‬وأ ّما حركة السماء‪ ،‬فهي كحركة الكرة ا ٕذا أدرتها من المشرق‬
‫ونصفها أ ً‬
‫ذاهبا إلى المغرب‪ ،‬ف ٕانها تدور دورة واحدة وجزءا من ثالثمائة وستين جزءا من دورة‬
‫‪165‬‬ ‫جزءا ما من أجزاء‬
‫ً‬ ‫بالتقريب في أربع وعشرين ساعة مستوية‪ .‬وذلك أنك إذا جعلت‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬ث ّم أدرت الكرة ا ٕلى أن يصير نصف ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الجزء‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪15‬ا‪ /‬دائرة البروج على االٔفق‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬كان ذلك مثل دوران السماء في اليوم الذي تكون فيه الشمس‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‬
‫في ذلك الجزء من طلوع الشمس إلى غروبها‪ .‬و إذا أدرت الكرة حتّى يغيب ذلك‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬ف ٕان‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الغربي ويبلغ أ ّول الجزء الذي يليه من االٔفق ‪/‬ز‪/ /‬ن‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجزء من االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪3‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪/ 100‬‬
‫ا‬
‫ذلك مثل دوران السماء في الليلة التي تكون فيها الشمس في ذلك الجزء‪ ،‬فتدور ‪170‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪15‬ب‪ /‬الشمس في اليوم والليلة دورة واحدة ‪/‬و‪ /‬وجزءا من ثالثمائة وستين من تلك الدورة‬
‫بالتقريب‪ ،‬وهي الدقائق التي سارتها الشمس في فلك البروج في ذلك اليوم‪ ،‬وهذا‬
‫الدوران على قطبي فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬ال على قطبي فلك البروج‪.‬‬

‫ل واحد من البلدان‪.‬‬
‫الباب الرابع‪ :‬في معرفة اختالف حركة السماء على ك ّ‬
‫‪175‬‬ ‫السماء و إن كانت حركتها مستديرة متشابهة من الجهات كلّها‪ ،‬ف ٕانها تختلف على‬
‫المدن من االٔرض‪ ،‬وذلك أن االٔرض ل ّما كانت كريّ�ة‬
‫ُ‬ ‫المدن الختالف ‪/‬و‪ /‬مواضع‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪16‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ل فلك‬‫ل نقطة منها تسامت نقطة من السماء‪ ،‬وك ّ‬

‫وكانت في وسط السماء صارت ك ّ‬
‫من االٔفالك التي في السماء يسامت موضعا منها‪ ،‬فالموضع من االٔرض الذي‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪ ،‬وهو الموضع الذي يكون‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط مع ّدل النهار من السماء يسمى‬ ‫يسامت‬

‫‪ 167‬تكون[ و ز‪ :‬يكون‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 161‬ن‪ :‬شكل السماء[ و ز‪ :‬شكلها‬ ‫‪ 157‬حلقة[ ز و‪ + :‬فلك‬

‫‪ 175‬ن‪ :‬تختلف[ و‪ :‬مختلف‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬مختلفة‬ ‫‪ 170‬ز ن‪ :‬تكون[ و‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫ن‪ :‬ىكون‬
‫‪ 177‬ن‪ :‬صارت[ و ز‪ :‬صارق‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪187‬‬
‫‪195‬‬

‫‪180‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط ا ٕلى‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪16‬ب‪ /‬فيه القطبان جميعا في االٔفق؛ وكلّما تق ّدمت المساكن عن ذلك ‪/‬و‪/‬‬
‫الجنوبي؛ وبقدر ارتفاع‬ ‫وانحط عنها القطب‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي عليها‬ ‫الشمال‪ ،‬ارتفع القطب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪،‬‬ ‫الجنوبية عن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجنوبي‪ .‬وأ ّما الناحية‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ينحط القطب‬ ‫الشمالي‪،‬‬ ‫القطب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫جدا‪ ،‬والذين يسكنونه حبشان وزنج في جزائر في البحر‪،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ف ٕان المسكون منها يسير‬
‫الشمالية‪ ،‬فهي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وأمم شبيهة بالبهائم‪ ،‬ال بناء لها‪ ،‬وال صناعة‪ ،‬وال علم‪ .‬وأ ّما الناحية‬
‫المعمورة من االٔرض التي فيها ‪/‬و‪ /‬مدن الروم‪ ،‬والعرب‪ ،‬والفرس‪ ،‬وسائر االٔمم‪ .‬فكلّما ‪185‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪17‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشمالي عن االٔفق‪ ،‬صار دوران الكرة مائال منحرفا‪ ،‬وذلك الميالن‬‫ّ‬ ‫ارتفع القطب‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪100‬ب‪ /‬واالنحراف يختلف في الزيادة والنقصان ‪/‬ن‪ /‬على قدر اختالف ميل ذلك البلد عن‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء بعدا كثيرا‪،‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء في الكثرة والقلّة‪ ،‬ف ٕان البلد الذي ُبعده عن‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء يكون‬ ‫يكون انحرف دوران السماء عليه انحرافا كثيرا‪ ،‬والبلد القريب من‬
‫‪190‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪17‬ب‪/ /‬و‪ /‬هذا االنحراف عليه يسيرا‪.‬‬
‫جميعا في حلقة االٔفق وأ ِد ْر‬
‫ً‬ ‫فصير القطبين‬
‫ِّ‬ ‫ف ٕاذا أردت أن ترى ذلك في الكرة‪،‬‬
‫الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕانك ترى دورانها دورانا مستويا ال ميل فيه وال انحراف‪ ،‬وعلى مثل ذلك‬
‫الشمالي أجزاء ما عن االٔفق‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪ .‬ث ّم ارفع القطب‬ ‫الدوران تدور السماء على‬
‫ّ‬
‫وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕانك ترى دورانها مائال ميال ما؛ وكلّما زدت القطب ارتفاعا‪ ،‬ازداد دوران‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬الكرة ميال‪ ،‬حتّى يصير دورانها كدوران الرحى على موازاة االٔفق‪ ،‬وذلك يكون إذا ‪195‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪18‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشمالي عن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫صيرت أحد القطبين على نقطة سمت الرأس‪ ،‬وهو إذا رفعت القطب‬‫ّ‬
‫االٔفق بتسعين جزءا‪ .‬وبهذا العمل يظهر اختالف دوران السماء على المساكن‬
‫كاختالف مواضع المساكن من االٔرض‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء‪.‬‬ ‫الباب الخامس‪ :‬في معرفة علّة استواء الليل والنهار في‬

‫‪200‬‬ ‫الشمالي على االٔفق من جهة الشمال‪ ،‬ف ٕان القطب‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪18‬ب‪ /‬إذا أردت ‪/‬و‪ /‬ذلك فضع القطب‬
‫ي جزء شئت من أجزاء‬ ‫الجنوبي ال محالة يصير على االٔفق من جهة الجنوب‪ .‬وضع أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬

‫ل ما‬‫ز ن‪ :‬وكلّما[ و‪ :‬وك ّ‬ ‫ن‪ :‬االٔفق[ ز و‪ :‬االٔرض‬ ‫‪ 180‬ن‪ :‬القطبان[ و ز‪ :‬النقطتان‬

‫‪ 188‬ن‪ :‬بعدا كثيرا[ و ز‪ :‬بعد‬ ‫الشمالي[ ن و‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 186‬ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 181‬ز ن‪ :‬القطب‪ [2‬و‪ :‬لقطب‬
‫‪ 195‬ز ن‪ :‬كدوران‬ ‫‪ 194‬ز ن‪ :‬وكلّما[ و‪ :‬وك ّ‬
‫ل ما‬ ‫‪ 192‬ز ن‪ :‬دورانا[ و‪ :‬دوران‬ ‫كثير‬
‫الشمالي[‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 200‬ن‪ :‬القطب‬ ‫‪ 197‬ز‪ :‬بتسعين[ و‪ :‬تستعين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬تسعون‬ ‫الرحى[ و‪ :‬دوران الرخا‬
‫و ز‪ :‬قطب الشمال‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪188‬‬
‫‪196‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ي جزء من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار يصير مع‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬

‫ّ‬ ‫دائرة البروج على االٔفق‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة إلى أن‬
‫ذلك الجزء على االٔفق من جهة المشرق‪ ،‬فتعلّم عليه بمداد‪ّ .‬‬
‫يصير ذلك الجزء من أجزاء دائرة البروج على االٔفق من جهة المغرب‪ ،‬ف ٕانك‬
‫‪205‬‬ ‫يضا الجزء الذي علّمت عليه من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار قد وافى معه‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬ستجد أ ً‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪19‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ثم ع ّد من ذلك الجزء راجعا ا ٕلى المشرق من أجزاء ‪/‬ن‪ /‬فلك مع ّدل النهار‪،‬‬‫‪/‬ن ‪101‬ا‪ /‬المغرب‪ّ .‬‬
‫بدا مائة وثمانين‪ ،‬التي هي نصف الثالثمائة والستين‪ ،‬وهي االٔجزاء‬‫ف ٕانك ستجد بها أ ً‬
‫غربت ذلك الجزء وأ َ‬
‫درت الكرة حتّى يدور الجزء‬ ‫َ‬ ‫التي طلعت في ذلك اليوم‪ .‬و إذا‬
‫‪/‬و ‪19‬ب‪ /‬ونصف الكرة التي تحت االٔرض ويرجع إلى أفق المشرق‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬ث ّم عددت االٔجزاء‬
‫‪210‬‬ ‫التي دارت من الكرة من المشرق ا ٕلى المغرب في تلك الليلة‪ ،‬وجدتها أ ً‬
‫يضا مائة‬
‫وثمانين جزءا متساوية الٔجزاء مسيرة الفلك في النهار‪ ،‬فيكون مسير الفلك في الليل‬
‫بدا‪ ،‬وكذلك إن فعلت هذا في جزء آخر من أجزاء فلك‬
‫والنهار مسيرا متساويا أ ً‬
‫ي جزء كان‪ ،‬وجدت ذلك كالذي وصفنا؛ فيظهر لك بهذا العمل أن مسير‬ ‫البروج‪ ،‬أ ّ‬
‫بدا مستو‪ ،‬ال اختالف فيه وال تغيير‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط ‪/‬و‪ /‬االستواء في الليل والنهار أ ً‬ ‫الفلك على‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪20‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪215‬‬ ‫البتّ�ة‪.‬‬

‫ل واحد من المساكن‪.‬‬
‫الباب السادس‪ :‬في معرفة اختالف الليل والنهار في ك ّ‬
‫أ ِد ْر‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق كم شئت من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬ث ّم‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫من‬ ‫ي جزء شئت من أجزاء ‪/‬ز‪ /‬فلك البروج على االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم‬
‫الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪3‬ب‪/‬‬

‫أ ِد ْر‬
‫‪/‬و ‪20‬ب‪ /‬أجزاء دائرة مع ّدل النهار على الجزء الذي وافى االٔفق ‪/‬و‪ /‬مع ذلك الجزء‪ .‬ث ّم‬
‫الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك الجزء من أجزاء دائرة البروج على أفق المغرب‪ ،‬وانظر الجزء ‪220‬‬

‫الغربي‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الذي كنت علّمت عليه من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار أين صار من االٔفق‬
‫الشمالية‪ ،‬غائبا تحت االٔرض‪ ،‬و إن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ف ٕانك تجده‪ ،‬إن كان جزء الشمس من البروج‬
‫بعد لم يغب‪ ،‬فيظهر لك‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫الجنوبية‪ ،‬طالعا فوق االٔرض‬
‫ّ‬ ‫كان جزء الشمس من البروج‬
‫من ذلك أن جزء مع ّدل ‪/‬و‪ /‬النهار الذي طلع مع الشمس قد غاب قبل أن تغيب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪21‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ز‪ :‬الجزء[ و‪ :‬الجزوء‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 204‬ز‪ :‬يصير[ و‪ :‬تصير‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 203‬ن‪ :‬من…المشرق[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 210‬ز ن‪ :‬وجدتها[‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬أجزاء[ و‪ :‬أجز‬ ‫‪ 205‬ز‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬عملت‬ ‫ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 223‬ن‪ :‬جزء الشمس[ و‪ :‬جزءىها‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬جزءها‬ ‫‪ 221‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‬ ‫و‪ :‬وحدتها‬
‫بعد …يغب[ ز‪ :‬لم يغيب بعد‬
‫ن‪ُ :‬‬ ‫طالعا[ و‪ + :‬بعد‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪197‬‬
‫‪189‬‬

‫‪225‬‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪101‬ب‪ /‬الشمس‪ ،‬وأن أزمان النهار ‪/‬ن‪ /‬في ذلك اليوم أكثر من أزمان نهار االستواء الذي هو‬
‫الشمالية‪ .‬وأ ّما إن كانت في البروج‬
‫ّ‬ ‫اثنتا عشرة ساعة‪ ،‬إن كانت الشمس في البروج‬
‫ان جزء الشمس يغرب قبل جزء مع ّدل النهار‬ ‫الجنوبية‪ ،‬كان عكس ذلك‪ ،‬أعني ّ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪/‬و ‪21‬ب‪ /‬الذي وافى معه المشرق‪ ،‬فيظهر من ذلك أن النهار في ذلك اليوم أقصر ‪/‬و‪ /‬من نهار‬
‫االستواء‪ ،‬وكذلك يظهر في الليل؛ وذلك أن العمل في الليل والنهار عمل واحد‪ .‬و ا ٕن‬
‫‪230‬‬ ‫رفعت القطب أكثر من ذلك االرتفاع أو حططته عن ذلك االرتفاع‪ ،‬بعد أن ال يكون‬
‫يضا‪ ،‬ا ٕ ّال أن ّه يختلف في‬
‫على االٔفق نفسه‪ ،‬خرج لك اختالف الليل والنهار بينا أ ً‬
‫الكثرة والقلّة‪ ،‬وذلك أن كلّما كان القطب أكثر ارتفاعا‪ ،‬كان االختالف بين الليل‬
‫والنهار ‪/‬و‪ /‬أكثر‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪22‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الباب السابع‪ :‬في معرفة استواء الليل والنهار عند دخول الشمس ا ّٔول الحمل وا ّٔول‬
‫‪235‬‬ ‫الميزان في جميع المساكن‪.‬‬

‫وصير أ ّول الحمل على‬

‫ِّ‬ ‫ي ارتفاع شئت‪،‬‬ ‫الشمالي أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك فارفع القطب‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي على االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ّ .‬‬
‫ثم‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬
‫أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول الحمل على أفق المغرب؛ ف ٕانك ترى الجزء الذي عل ّمت‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬وقد دارت الكرة من‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪22‬ب‪ /‬عليه من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار ‪/‬و‪ /‬قد وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫أجزاء االستواء مائة وثمانين جزءا‪ .‬وكذلك ا ٕذا دارت الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس ‪240‬‬

‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وافى معه الجزء‪ ،‬الذي علّمت عليه من أجزاء‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫الغربي إلي االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫من االٔفق‬
‫الشرقي‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الغربي واالٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬فيتوافيان جميعا على االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬االٔفق‬
‫فيكون زمان النهار مساويا لزمان الليل‪ .‬وكذلك ا ٕن رفعت القطب عن االٔفق أكثر من‬
‫ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الرفع أو حططته‪ ،‬وجدت العمل واحدا؛ فيظهر من ذلك أن الليل والنهار‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪23‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪245‬‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪102‬ا‪/ /‬ن‪ /‬يتساويان في دخول الشمس أ ّول الحمل ودخولها أ ّول الميزان في جميع‬
‫المساكن‪.‬‬

‫‪ 232‬ن‪ :‬كلّما[ و ز‪ :‬ك ّ‬

‫ل‬ ‫‪ 226‬اثنتا عشرة[ و ز ن‪ :‬اثنا عشر‬ ‫‪ 225‬ز ن‪ :‬االستواء[ و‪ :‬االستراء‬
‫ز ن‪ :‬يصير[ و‪ :‬يسير‬ ‫‪ 240‬ن‪ :‬دارت[ و ز‪ :‬ادرت‬ ‫‪ 237‬ز‪ :‬وتعلّم[ و‪ :‬يعلم‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىعلم‬ ‫ما‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪190‬‬
‫‪198‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫الباب الثامن‪ :‬في معرفة أطول النهار وأقصره في جميع المساكن‪.‬‬

‫ثم أ ِد ْر‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق كم شئت من االٔجزاء‪ّ ،‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول السرطان على االٔفق‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء أ ّول السرطان ‪250‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪23‬ب‪/ /‬و‪ /‬االٔفق من أجزاء دائرة مع ّدل النهار‪ّ .‬‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى المشرق عند موافاة أ ّول السرطان‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‬
‫المغرب‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين وأثبته ناحية؛ وافعل مثل ذلك بأ ّول الجدي‪ ،‬و َت َّ‬
‫عرف ما‬
‫ي جزء شئت من أجزاء فلك‬ ‫يخرج لك من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬وتثبته ناحية‪ .‬افعل مثل ذلك بأ ّ‬
‫البروج؛ ف ٕانك تجد أكثر النهار أزمانا نهار أ ّول السرطان‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬وأقلّها أزمانا نهار أ ّول‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪24‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الجدي؛ وتجد أزمان نهار أ ّول الحمل وأ ّول الميزان متساوية الٔزمان ليلهما‪ .‬وتجد ما ‪255‬‬

‫كان من أجزاء فلك البروج بين أ ّول الحمل وأ ّول السرطان أزمان نهارها أكثر من أزمان‬
‫ليلها‪ ،‬وتجد ما كان من أجزاء فلك البروج من أ ّول الجدي ا ٕلى أ ّول الحمل أزمان‬
‫الشمالي أكثر ‪/‬و‪ /‬من ذلك‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ل من أزمان لياليها‪ .‬وكذلك ا ٕن رفعت القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪24‬ب‪ /‬نهارها أق ّ‬
‫االرتفاع‪ ،‬أو حططته عنه‪ ،‬بعد أن ال يكون القطب على االٔفق‪ ،‬يظهر لك أن أكثر‬
‫‪260‬‬ ‫النهار أزمانا إذا كانت الشمس في أ ّول السرطان‪ ،‬وأقلّها أزمانا إذا كانت الشمس في‬
‫أ ّول الجدي؛ فيظهر من هذا أن أطول النهار في جميع المساكن نهار أ ّول السرطان‪،‬‬
‫وأقصرها نهار أ ّول الجدي‪.‬‬

‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬

‫ٔي يومين شئت من ا ّ‬
‫الباب التاسع‪ :‬في معرفة االختالف بين نهار ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن ‪/‬و‪ /‬االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪102‬ب‪ /‬ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع ‪/‬ن‪ /‬القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪25‬ا‪/‬‬
‫وتعرف موضع الشمس في اليومين اللذين تريد معرفة ‪265‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪.‬‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء من‬
‫ّ‬ ‫اختالف النهار بينهما‪ ،‬وضع أحد الجزئين على االٔفق‬
‫الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس‬ ‫أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار الذي وافى معه االٔفق‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى المشرق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‬
‫‪/‬و ‪25‬ب‪ /‬النهار‪ ،‬ث ّم ع ّد ما بين العالمتين ‪/‬و‪ /‬من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬وأثبتها ناحية‪ .‬ث ّم ضع الجزء االٓخر‬

‫‪ 257‬ن‪ :‬ليلها[ و ز‪:‬لياليها‬ ‫السرطان[ و ز ن‪ :‬الحمل‬ ‫‪ 256‬الحمل[ و ز ن‪ :‬السرطان‬

‫‪ 258‬ن‪ :‬القطب[ و ز‪ :‬بالقطب‬ ‫ن‪ :‬من‪… 2‬الحمل[ و ز‪ :‬بين أول الحمل وأول الجدي‬
‫ز‪ :‬شئت‪ [2‬و ن‪ :‬شئنا‬ ‫‪ 263‬ز‪ :‬شئت‪ [1‬و‪ :‬شئنا‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬فرض لنا‬ ‫‪ 260‬ن‪ :‬الشمس‪ [2‬و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 268‬ز‪ :‬وتعلّم[ و‪ :‬ويعلم‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬وىعلم‬ ‫‪ 266‬بينهما[ و ز‪ + :‬فيه‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪191‬‬
‫‪199‬‬

‫‪270‬‬ ‫وتعرف أزمانه من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الشرقي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫من أجزاء دائرة البروج ‪/‬ز‪ /‬على االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪4‬ا‪/‬‬

‫النهار بمثل ما عرفتها في الجزء االٓخر‪ ،‬وأثبتها ناحية تحت الذي أثبت أ ّوال‪ ،‬وانقص‬
‫ل منها من االٔكثر‪ ،‬فما بقي فهو زيادة أحد النهارين على االٓخر‪ .‬فاقسمها على‬
‫االٔق ّ‬
‫خمسة عشر‪ ،‬فما خرج لك من القسم فهو زيادة نهار أحد اليومين على االٓخر من‬
‫ساعة‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬أو جزء من ساعة‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪26‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪275‬‬ ‫ٔي بلد شئت ال ٔ ّ‬

‫ي يوم شئت‪.‬‬ ‫الباب العاشر‪ :‬في معرفة ساعات النهار في ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫ذلك فيه‪ ،‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس الذي تريد أن تعرف ساعات نهاره‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل‬
‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪26‬ب‪ /‬النهار‪/ .‬و‪ /‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس على االٔفق‬
‫د ما بين ‪280‬‬‫الشرقي من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وع ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فاقسمها على خمسة عشر‪ ،‬وخذ لك ّ‬
‫ل خمسة عشر جزء‬
‫يتم خمسة عشر فجزء من ساعة مستوية‪.‬‬
‫ساعة مستوية‪ ،‬وما لم ّ‬

‫‪/‬ن ‪103‬ا‪ /‬الباب الحادي عشر‪ :‬في معرفة االختالف ‪/‬ن‪ /‬بين نهار يوم واحد مفروض في‬
‫بلدين مفروضين مختلفي العرض‪.‬‬

‫‪285‬‬ ‫الشمالي عن‬

‫ّ‬ ‫فتع ّرف ‪/‬و‪ /‬جزء الشمس في ذلك اليوم‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪َ ،‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪27‬ا‪/‬‬

‫االٔفق بقدر عرض أحد البلدين المفروضين‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس على‬
‫االٔفق من جهة المشرق‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك‬
‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على‬
‫ّ‬ ‫مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس على االٔفق‬
‫جزء مع ّدل النهار الذي وافى المشرق مع غروب جزء الشمس‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين‬
‫ثم ارفع القطب الشمالي أو حطّه حتّى ‪290‬‬‫‪/‬و ‪27‬ب‪/ /‬و‪ /‬العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬وأث ِب ْتها ناحية‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫يصير بقدر عرض البلد االٓخر‪ ،‬وتعرف أزمان نهار ذلك الجزء كما عرفت أزمان نهار‬
‫الجزء اال ٔ ّول‪ ،‬فما خرج لك من االٔجزاء أث ِب ْته تحت ما كنت أ َثب َّ‬
‫ت أ ّوال‪ ،‬وانقص‬

‫‪ 281‬ز‪ :‬جزء[‬ ‫‪ 271‬ن‪ :‬عرفتها[ و‪ :‬ىعرفها‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬نعرفها‬ ‫وتعرف[ و‪ :‬ويعرف‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 270‬ز‪:‬‬
‫و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ذلك‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 285‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫و‪ :‬ساعة‪ ،‬ز‪– :‬‬ ‫من…مستوية‪[2‬‬ ‫‪ 282‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫و‪ ،– :‬ن‪ :‬منه‬
‫‪ 291‬ن‪ :‬الجزء[ و ز‪– :‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪200‬‬
‫‪192‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ل من االٔكثر‪ ،‬فما بقي فهو االختالف ما بين نهار ذينك اليومين في ذينك‬ ‫االٔق ّ‬
‫البلدين‪ ،‬وأكثرهما أزمانا هو أطولهما نهارا‪.‬‬

‫‪295‬‬ ‫ٔي يوم‬

‫ٔي بلد وا ّ‬
‫الزمانية في ا ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و‪ /‬الباب الثاني عشر‪ :‬في معرفة أزمان الساعات‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪28‬ا‪/‬‬

‫شئت‪.‬‬

‫الشمالي عن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاعرف جزء الشمس في ذلك اليوم‪ ،‬وارفع القطب‬
‫ثم ضع جزء الشمس على‬ ‫االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه؛ ّ‬
‫ي جزء وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬
‫‪/‬و ‪28‬ب‪ /‬حتّى يصير جزء الشمس على االٔفق ‪/‬و‪ /‬الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه ‪300‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬واقسمها على اثنى عشر‪ ،‬فما خرج‬
‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬
‫الزمانية في ذلك اليوم والبلد‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫من القسم فهو أجزاء الساعات‬

‫الباب الثالث عشر‪ :‬في معرفة ما مضى من النهار من الساعات المستو يّ�ة‪ٕ ،‬اذا‬
‫كان الطالع معلوما‪.‬‬

‫‪305‬‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر عرض ‪/‬و‪ /‬البلد الذي تريد‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪29‬ا‪ /‬إذا أردت ذلك فارفع القطب‬
‫ثم ضع جزء الطالع على االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪103‬ب‪ /‬معرفة ذلك ‪/‬ن‪ /‬فيه‪ّ .‬‬
‫معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة ا ٕلى المشرق حتّى يصير جزء‬
‫الشمس على االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل‬
‫ل خمسة‬ ‫النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬واقسمها على خمسة عشر‪ ،‬فك ّ‬
‫‪310‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪29‬ب‪ /‬عشر منه ساعة مستوية مضت من النهار‪ ،‬وما لم يت ّم خمسة عشر ‪/‬و‪ /‬فجزء من‬
‫ساعة مضت‪.‬‬

‫الزمانية‪ ،‬إذا كان‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الباب الرابع عشر‪ :‬في معرفة ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬
‫الطالع معلوما‪.‬‬

‫ثم ضع‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاستخرج أزمان ساعات ذلك اليوم كما فعلت فيما تق ّدم‪ّ .‬‬
‫جزء الطالع على االٔفق الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء ‪315‬‬
‫ّ‬

‫‪ 308‬ز‪ :‬وتعلّم[ و ن‪ :‬ويعلّم‬ ‫‪ 301‬ز ن‪ :‬واقسمها[ و‪ :‬او اقسمها‬ ‫‪ 297‬ز ن‪ :‬فاعرف[ و‪ :‬فاعر‬
‫‪ 314‬ن‪ :‬ذلك‪ … 1‬أزمان[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 310‬ن‪ :‬منه…مستوية[ و ز‪ :‬ساعة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪201‬‬
‫‪193‬‬

‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة راجعا ا ٕلى المشرق حتّى يصير جزء الشمس على‬
‫فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ّ .‬‬
‫االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى ‪/‬و‪ /‬معه االٔفق من فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪30‬ا‪/‬‬

‫بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬واقسمها على ما خرج لك من أجزاء ساعات ذلك اليوم‪،‬‬
‫فما خرج لك من القسم من ساعة أو جزء من ساعة‪ ،‬فهو ما مضى من نهار ذلك‬
‫‪320‬‬ ‫الزمانية‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫اليوم من الساعات‬

‫الباب الخامس عشر‪ :‬في معرفة استخراج الطالع‪ ،‬إذا كان ما مضى من النهار من‬
‫الساعات المستوية معلوما‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪30‬ب‪ /‬إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فضع جزء الشمس ‪/‬و‪ /‬على االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى‬
‫معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬ث ّم اضرب ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬
‫‪325‬‬ ‫المستوية وكسورها في خمسة عشر‪ ،‬واطلع جزء الشمس‪ ،‬وع ّد من الجزء الذي‬
‫علّمت عليه نازال ا ٕلى ما يلي المشرق في أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار حتّى يستوي‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪104‬ا‪/ /‬ن‪ /‬في أجزاء الساعات التي خرجت من ضربها في خمسة عشر‪ ،‬وتعلّم على‬
‫الموضع الذي انتهى إليه العدد ‪/‬و‪ /‬واطلع الجزء الذي انتهى إليه العدد حتّى يصير‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪31‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ي جزء وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء فلك البروج‪ ،‬فذلك الجزء هو‬ ‫على االٔفق‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫‪330‬‬ ‫الطالع في ذلك الوقت‪.‬‬

‫الباب السادس عشر‪ :‬في استخراج الطالع‪ٕ ،‬اذا كان ما مضى من النهار من‬
‫الزمانية معلوما‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الساعات‬

‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاستخرج أزمان الساعات لذلك الجزء على ما علمت فيما تق ّدم‪.‬‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪31‬ب‪ /‬ث ّم ضع جزء الشمس على االٔفق ‪/‬و‪/‬‬
‫الزمانية ‪335‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬واضرب ما مضى من النهار من الساعات‬
‫وكسورها في أزمان ساعات ذلك اليوم‪ ،‬فما خرج من الضرب فع ّد مثله من الجزء‬
‫الذي علّمت عليه نازال في جهة المشرق‪ ،‬فحيث انتهى العدد تعلّم عليه عالمة‪.‬‬

‫‪ 326‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‬ ‫‪ 321‬ن‪ :‬من النهار[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 319‬ن‪ :‬من‪ [3‬و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 337‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[‬ ‫الزمانية[ و ز‪ :‬ساعة‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 335‬ن‪ :‬الساعات‬ ‫ن‪ :‬يستوي[ و ز‪ :‬يستو‬
‫و‪ :‬اعلمت‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪194‬‬
‫‪202‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ي جزء وافى أفق‬ ‫وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى تصير تلك العالمة على أفق المشرق‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫المشرق من أجزاء ‪/‬و‪ /‬دائرة البروج‪ ،‬فذلك الجزء هو الطالع في ذلك الوقت‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪32‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪340‬‬ ‫الباب السابع عشر‪ :‬في معرفة جزء وسط السماء‪/ ،‬ز‪ٕ /‬اذا كان الطالع معلوما‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪4‬ب‪/‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فضع جزء الطالع على االٔفق‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ي جزء وافى معه حلقة‬
‫نصف النهار من أجزاء فلك البروج‪ ،‬فذلك الجزء هو جزء وسط السماء في ذلك‬
‫الوقت وذلك البلد‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪32‬ب‪ /‬الباب ‪/‬و‪ /‬الثامن عشر‪ :‬في معرفة جزء الغارب ووتد االٔرض‪ٕ ،‬اذا كان الطالع أو‬
‫‪345‬‬ ‫جزء وسط السماء معلوما‪.‬‬

‫حببت‪ ،‬من دائرة فلك‬

‫َ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فضع جزء الطالع أو جزء وسط السماء‪ ،‬أيما أ‬
‫ي جزء وافى أفق المغرب من فلك البروج‪ ،‬فهو الغارب؛‬ ‫البروج في موضعه‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار تحت االٔرض من دائرة ‪/‬و‪ /‬فلك البروج‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪104‬ب‪ /‬والجزء الذي يوافي ‪/‬ن‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪33‬ا‪/‬‬
‫فهو وتد االٔرض في ذلك الوقت‪.‬‬

‫‪350‬‬ ‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب المرسومة‬

‫الباب التاسع عشر‪ :‬في معرفة قوس نهار ا ّ‬
‫على الكرة‪.‬‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار بقدر‬‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي تريد‬
‫ي جزء ‪/‬و‪ /‬يوافي معه االٔفق من أجزاء‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪33‬ب‪ /‬معرفة قوس نهاره على االٔفق‬
‫م أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك ‪355‬‬
‫االستواء‪ ،‬وهي أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬فتعلّم عليه‪ .‬ث ّ‬
‫ي جزء وافى أفق المشرق من أجزاء االستواء عند‬ ‫الكوكب على أفق المغرب‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫مصير الكوكب على أفق المغرب‪ ،‬فتعلّم عليه‪ .‬وتع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪،‬‬

‫‪ 349‬في…الوقت[ ن‪ :‬في ذلك‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 345‬ن‪ :‬معلوما[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 344‬ن‪ :‬الطالع[ و ز‪ + :‬معلوما‬
‫‪ 352‬فارفع[ و‪2× :‬‬ ‫‪ 350‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب…‪ 351‬على[ و ز‪ :‬كواكب‬ ‫و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 355‬ز ن‪ :‬أجزاء[ و‪ :‬أجز‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬يوافي[ و‪ :‬توافي‬ ‫‪ 354‬ن‪ :‬معرفة[ و ز‪ :‬معرفته‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪203‬‬
‫‪195‬‬

‫فما خرج لك فهو قوس نهار ذلك الكوكب في ذلك البلد‪ ،‬وما بقي ا ٕلى تمام‬
‫ثالثمائة وستين فهو قوس ليلته‪.‬‬

‫‪360‬‬ ‫ل واحد من الكواكب التي في الكرة من‬

‫الباب ‪/‬و‪ /‬العشرون‪ :‬في استخراج جزء ك ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪34‬ا‪/‬‬

‫فلك البروج‪.‬‬

‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة جزئه من فلك‬
‫ي جزء وافى معه‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار الذي يلي المشرق‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬ ‫البروج مع وجه حلقة‬
‫تحت وجه حلقة نصف النهار من أجزاء فلك البروج‪ ،‬فذلك الجزء من ذلك البرج‬
‫‪365‬‬ ‫بتغير العروض‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫يتغير ‪/‬و‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪34‬ب‪ /‬هو جزء ذلك الكوكب‪ ،‬وهو له في االٔقاليم كلّها‪ ،‬وليس‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت‪ ،‬من الكواكب الثابتة‬

‫الباب الحادي والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة عرض ا ّ‬
‫المرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬

‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة عرضه مع وجه‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وانظر الجزء من دائرة البروج الذي وافى معه تحت وجه‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫حلقة‬
‫‪370‬‬ ‫هذه الحلقة‪ ،‬فع ّد ما بين الكوكب وجزء فلك البروج من أجزاء الحلقة‪ ،‬فما خرج فهو‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط وسط البروج‪ .‬ف ٕان كان‬ ‫عرض ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الكوكب في الجهة ‪/‬ن‪ /‬التي هو فيها عن‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪35‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪105‬ا‪/‬‬‫‪/‬ن‬
‫الشمالي‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫جنوبي؛ و ا ٕن كان أقرب ا ٕلى القطب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجنوبي‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن عرضه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫أقرب ا ٕلى القطب‬
‫متغير في االٔقاليم كلّها‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫شماليا؛ وذلك العرض ثابت أ ً‬
‫بدا‪ ،‬غير‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫كان عرضه‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب التي في‬

‫الباب الثاني والعشرون‪ :‬في استخراج ميل ا ّ‬
‫‪375‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط مع ّدل النهار‪.‬‬ ‫الكرة عن‬

‫‪/‬و ‪35‬ب‪ /‬إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى ‪/‬و‪ /‬يصير الكوكب مع وجه حلقة نصف النهار‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ثم‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬فتعلّم عليه‪.‬‬ ‫ي جزء من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار يوافي معه‬
‫انظر أ ّ‬
‫وع ّد ما بين ذلك الجزء وبين الكوكب من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما خرج لك‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط مع ّدل النهار في الجهة التي الكوكب فيها؛ ف ٕان كان‬ ‫فهو ميل ذلك الكوكب عن‬

‫‪ 362‬ن‪ :‬جزئه[ و ز‪ :‬جزء‬ ‫‪ 358‬ن‪ :‬تمام…‪ 359‬ثالثمائة[ و‪ :‬تىم المائة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ثنمة المائة‬
‫ز ن‪ :‬عرض[ و‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 366‬ز ن‪ :‬والعشرون[ و‪ :‬والعشرين‬ ‫‪ 365‬ن‪ :‬هو[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ن‪ :‬الكواكب…في‪ [2‬و ز‪ :‬كواكب‬ ‫‪ 374‬ز ن‪ :‬والعشرون[ و‪ :‬والعشرين‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪196‬‬
‫‪204‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫‪380‬‬ ‫شماليا؛ و ا ٕن كان أقرب ‪/‬و‪ /‬ا ٕلى‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي‪ ،‬كان ميله‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الكوكب أقرب ا ٕلى القطب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪36‬ا‪/‬‬

‫متغير في المواضع‬
‫ّ‬ ‫يضا ثابت‪ ،‬غير‬ ‫جنوبيا‪ .‬وهذا الميل أ ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجنوبي‪ ،‬كان ميله‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫كلّها‪.‬‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب‬

‫الباب الثالث والعشرون‪ :‬في استخراج ميل ا ّ‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫المرسومة على الكرة عن سمت رءوس أهل ا ّ‬
‫‪385‬‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫خط نصف ‪/‬و‪ /‬النهار من الموضع الذي القى‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪36‬ب‪ /‬ذلك فيه‪ .‬ث ّم ع ّد من أجزاء حلقة‬
‫االٔفق منها إلى فوق تسعين جزءا‪ ،‬فحيث انتهى العدد فعلِّم هناك عالمة‪ ،‬فتلك‬
‫العالمة هي سمت رءوس أهل ذلك البلد‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بينه وبين العالمة‬ ‫تريد معرفة ميله عن سمت الرأس على‬
‫التي كنت علّمت عليها من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما خرج فهو ميله عن سمت ‪390‬‬

‫رأس أهل ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬البلد في الجهة التي الميل فيها؛ ف ٕان كان مائال إلى ناحية‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪37‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الجنوبي‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫شمالي؛ و إن كان مائال إلى ناحية القطب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي‪/ ،‬ن‪ /‬ف ٕا ّن ميله‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪105‬ب‪ /‬القطب‬
‫يتغير على قدر اختالف المساكن‪ ،‬ولذلك احتجت أن‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫جنوبيا‪ .‬وهذا الميل‬
‫ّ‬ ‫كان ميله‬
‫ُيرفع له القطب على قدر عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪.‬‬

‫‪395‬‬ ‫ل واحد من الكواكب ‪/‬و‪ /‬الثابتة‬

‫‪/‬و ‪37‬ب‪ /‬الباب الرابع والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة أعظم ارتفاع ك ّ‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫التي على الكرة في ا ّ‬
‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاستخرج ميل الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة أعظم ارتفاعه عن سمت‬
‫الرأس‪ ،‬كما علمت في الباب الذي قبل هذا‪ ،‬وانقصه من تسعين‪ ،‬فما بقي فهو أت ّم‬
‫الشمالي بقدر عرض ذلك‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ارتفاعا ذلك الكوكب‪ .‬و ا ٕن أردت بوجه آخر‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬

‫‪ 387‬ن‪ :‬تسعين[‬ ‫‪ 384‬ن‪ :‬المرسومة…الكرة[ و ز‪ :‬المذكورة‬ ‫‪ 380‬ن‪ :‬الكوكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬

‫‪ 390‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬فعلِّم[ و‪ :‬فاعلم‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬فحيث[ و‪ :‬ىحيث‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬سبعين‬
‫ن‪ :‬احتجت أن[‬ ‫‪ 393‬ل‪ :‬ولذلك[ و ز ن‪ :‬كذلك‬ ‫‪ 392‬ن‪ :‬مائال[ و ز‪ :‬ميله‬ ‫و‪ :‬اعلمت‬
‫‪ 398‬ل‪ :‬في…هذا[ و ز‪ :‬في‬ ‫‪ 394‬ل‪ُ :‬يرفع[ و‪ :‬يرفع له‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ىرفع له‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىرفع‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬احتجتان‬
‫ن‪ :‬فارفع[‬ ‫‪ 399‬ن‪ :‬و ا ٕن…بوجه[ و‪ :‬وتوجه‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬وبوجه‬ ‫الباب الذي قبله‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬فيما تقدم‬
‫و ز‪ :‬وارفع‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪197‬‬
‫‪205‬‬

‫‪400‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين االٔفق‬ ‫البلد وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب على‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫والجزء الذي ‪/‬و‪ /‬وقع عليه الكوكب من أجزاء‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪38‬ا‪/‬‬

‫يضا يختلف على قدر اختالف االٔقاليم‪.‬‬

‫أعظم ارتفاع ذلك الكوكب؛ وهذا االرتفاع أ ً‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من‬

‫الباب الخامس والعشرون‪ :‬في استخراج سعة مشرق ا ّ‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫الكواكب التي على الكرة في ا ّ‬
‫‪405‬‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض ذلك البلد‪ّ .‬‬
‫ثم‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪38‬ب‪ /‬أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة ‪/‬و‪ /‬سعة مشرقه على االٔفق ⟩الشرقي⟨‪،‬‬
‫وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وقع عليه من أجزاء االٔفق‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول‬
‫الحمل أو أ ّول الميزان على االٔفق ⟩الشرقي⟨‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وقع عليه من‬
‫أجزاء االٔفق‪ .‬ث ّم ع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو سعة مشرق‬
‫‪410‬‬ ‫ذلك الكوكب في الجهة التي تلك االٔجزاء فيها عن مطالع رأس الحمل ‪/‬ز‪ /‬والميزان؛‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪5‬ا‪/‬‬

‫شماليا‪ ،‬و إن كانت في الجنوب‪ ،‬كان‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ف ٕان ّها‪ ،‬إن كانت في الشمال‪ ،‬كان مشرقه‬
‫يضا يختلف على قدر اختالف االٔقاليم‪.‬‬
‫جنوبيا‪ .‬وهذا ‪/‬و‪ /‬أ ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫مشرقه‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪39‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ٔي كوكبين شئت من‬

‫‪/‬ن ‪106‬ا‪ /‬الباب ‪/‬ن‪ /‬السادس والعشرون‪ :‬في استخراج البعد بين ا ّ‬
‫الكواكب التي على الكرة‪.‬‬

‫‪415‬‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أحد الكوكبين اللذين تريد معرفة البعد بينهما‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي يقع عليه من أجزاء حلقة‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫على‬
‫خط نصف ‪/‬و‪ /‬النهار‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪39‬ب‪ /‬نصف النهار‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب االٓخر على‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين‬‫ّ‬ ‫يضا‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وقع تحته من أجزاء‬ ‫أ ً‬
‫العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو البعد بين الكوكبين في الجهة التي االٔجزاء‬
‫‪420‬‬ ‫بدا غير مختلف في شيء من المساكن‪ ،‬وكذلك يمكنك أن‬‫فيها‪ .‬وهذا البعد ثابت أ ً‬
‫الشمالي‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ي ارتفاع شئت‪ ،‬من ارتفاعات القطب‬ ‫تعرفه في أ ّ‬

‫‪ 410‬ا‪ :‬الكوكب[ و ز ن‪ :‬الجزء‬ ‫ن‪ :‬معرفة[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 406‬ن‪ :‬الذي[ و ز‪ :‬التي‬
‫‪ 414‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب…على[ و ز‪ :‬كواكب‬ ‫‪ 412‬ز ن‪ :‬وهذا[ و‪ :‬وهذه‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪206‬‬
‫‪198‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ٔي كوكبين شئت من‬

‫الباب السابع والعشرون‪ :‬في استخراج البعد بين مشارق ‪/‬و‪ /‬ا ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪40‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬

‫الكواكب التي على الكرة في ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع‬
‫الكرة حتّى يصير أحد الكوكبين اللذين تريد معرفة البعد بين ‪425‬‬ ‫معرفة ذلك فيه‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر‬
‫⟩الشرقي⟨‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وقع عليه من أجزاء فلك‬
‫ّ‬ ‫مشرقيهما على االٔفق‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب االٓخر أ ً‬
‫يضا على االٔفق‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء‬ ‫االٔفق‪ّ .‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪40‬ب‪ /‬الذي وقع ‪/‬و‪ /‬عليه من أجزاء االٔفق‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج‬
‫العدد فهو البعد ما بين مشرقي ذينك الكوكبين‪ .‬وهذا البعد يختلف باختالف‬
‫‪430‬‬ ‫المساكن‪.‬‬

‫الباب الثامن والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تطلع من االٔفق ً‬

‫معا‪ ،‬والتي‬
‫ل واحد من االٔقاليم‪.‬‬
‫معا في ك ّ‬
‫تتوسط السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا‪ ،‬والتي‬
‫تغرب ً‬
‫معا‪ ،‬وال‬
‫معا‪ ،‬وال تغرب ‪/‬ن‪ً /‬‬ ‫تتوسط السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا ال‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪106‬ب‪ /‬اعلم أن الكواكب التي تطلع ً‬
‫معا‪ ،‬وال الكواكب التي تغرب‬
‫معا وتطلع ً‬ ‫معا تغرب ً‬ ‫تتوسط السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪41‬ا‪ /‬الكواكب ‪/‬و‪ /‬التي‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء ‪435‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط االستواء فقط‪ .‬ف ٕان في‬ ‫معا‪ ،‬ا ّٕال في‬
‫معا وتطلع ً‬
‫تتوسط السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا‬
‫ً‬
‫معا‪.‬‬‫معا ويكون دورانها كلّه ً‬ ‫وتتوسط السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا‬
‫معا تغرب ً‬
‫الكواكب التي تطلع ً‬
‫الشمالي في االٔفق وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ف ٕاذا أردت أن تعرف ذلك بالكرة‪ ،‬فضع القطب‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫يضا على‬ ‫معا‪ ،‬تصير أ ً‬
‫الشرقي ً‬ ‫ف ٕانك ترى الكواكب التي تصير على االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا‪ .‬ث ّم ارفع القطب‬
‫الغربي ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا‪ ،‬وتصير على االٔفق‬
‫‪/‬و ‪41‬ب‪/ /‬و‪ /‬وسط السماء ً‬
‫االٔفق كم شئت من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكبان على حلقة االٔفق‪ّ .‬‬
‫ثم ‪440‬‬

‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬ف ٕانك ترى‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أحد الكوكبين على حلقة‬
‫الكوكب االٓخر ا ٕ ّما أن يكون قد جازها أو قد قصر عنها‪ ،‬وكذلك يظهر لك ا ٕذا أدرت‬
‫الكرة حتّى يصير أحد الكوكبين على أفق المغرب‪.‬‬

‫و‪ :‬الذين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬الذي‬ ‫‪ 425‬ز‪ :‬اللذين[‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬كواكب‬ ‫‪ 423‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب…على[‬

‫‪ 437‬ن‪ :‬القطب[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 436‬ا‪ً :‬‬
‫و ز ن‪– :‬‬ ‫معا‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 435‬ن‪ :‬السماء[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 441‬ز ن‪ :‬ترى[ و‪ :‬يرى‬ ‫‪ 440‬ج‪ :‬الكوكبان[ و ز‪ :‬الكوكبين‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬

‫‪ 440‬الكوكبان…‪ 441‬يصير[ ا‪ ،‬ب‪ ،‬ل‪ ،‬ن‪–:‬؛ انظر مناقشة الفصل ‪ Q28‬في التعليقات على الفصل ‪.P14‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪199‬‬
‫‪207‬‬

‫تتوسط‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معا‪ ،‬والتي‬
‫معا‪ ،‬والتي تغرب ً‬‫‪/‬و‪ /‬ف ٕاذا أردت أن تعرف الكواكب التي تطلع ً‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪42‬ا‪/‬‬

‫معا‪ ،‬فارفع القطب الشمالي بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك ‪445‬‬ ‫السماء ً‬
‫ّ‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة وتفق َّْد حلقة االٔفق وحلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬وانظر ما يوافي عليها من‬
‫فيه‪ّ ،‬‬
‫خط نصف النهار‬‫ّ‬ ‫معا؛ وما وافى‬ ‫معا‪ ،‬فما وافى أفق المشرق ً‬
‫معا فطلوعه ً‬ ‫الكواكب ً‬
‫معا‪ .‬وذلك أ ً‬
‫يضا‬ ‫معا؛ وما وافى ‪/‬و‪ /‬أفق المغرب ً‬
‫معا فغروبه ً‬ ‫فتوسطه السماء ً‬
‫ُّ‬ ‫معا‬
‫ً‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪42‬ب‪/‬‬

‫يختلف على قدر اختالف االٔقاليم‪.‬‬

‫‪450‬‬ ‫ل واحد من الكواكب الثابتة‪،‬‬

‫الباب التاسع والعشرون‪ :‬في معرفة جزء طلوع ك ّ‬
‫ل واحد من االٔقاليم‪.‬‬
‫وتوسطه السماء في ك ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وغروبه‪،‬‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪107‬ا‪ /‬معرفة ذلك فيه‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي تريد ‪/‬ن‪ /‬أن تعرف ‪/‬و‪ /‬درجة‬
‫‪/‬و ‪43‬ا‪/‬‬
‫ي جزء من أجزاء دائرة البروج وافى معه االٔفق‪،‬‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫طلوعه على االٔفق‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك الكوكب ‪455‬‬‫فذلك الجزء هو جزء طلوعه في ذلك البلد‪ّ .‬‬
‫الغربي من أجزاء فلك البروج‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ي جزء وافى معه االٔفق‬ ‫الغربي‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫يضا حتّى يصير ذلك الكوكب على‬ ‫فذلك الجزء هو جزء غروبه‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة أ ّ‬
‫توسط معه السماء من دائرة فلك البروج‪ ،‬فذلك‬
‫‪/‬و ‪ / 43‬نصف النهار‪ ،‬وانظر الجزء الذي ‪/‬و‪ّ /‬‬
‫ب‬

‫الحقيقي من فلك البروج‪ .‬واعلم أن جزء‬

‫ّ‬ ‫توسطه السماء‪ ،‬وهو جزؤه‬
‫الجزء هو جزء ّ‬
‫‪460‬‬ ‫الطلوع والغروب يختلف الختالف المساكن؛ وأ ّما أجزاء ّ‬
‫توسط السماء ف ٕان ّها ثابتة في‬
‫ل االٔقاليم‪ ،‬غير مختلف في شيء منها‪.‬‬
‫ك ّ‬

‫ٔي جزء شئنا من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪.‬‬

‫الباب الثالثون‪ :‬في استخراج ميل ا ّ‬
‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ‪/‬و‪ /‬الجزء الذي تريد معرفة ميله مع حافّة‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪44‬ا‪/‬‬

‫يضا على‬‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وعلّم على الجزء الذي وقع عليه منها‪ ،‬وتعلّم أ ً‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫حلقة‬

‫‪ 456‬جزء[ و ز‪ + :‬فلك البروج الغربي‬ ‫‪ 453‬ن‪ :‬أن[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 446‬ن‪ :‬وانظر[ و ز‪ :‬فتنظر‬
‫الحقيقي[ و ن‪ :‬الحقي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 459‬ن‪ :‬هو[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 457‬ن‪ :‬أ ّ‬
‫يضا[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ 464‬ن‪ :‬وعلم…الجزء[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 461‬ن‪ :‬في[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 460‬ن‪ :‬المساكن[ و ز‪– :‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪208‬‬
‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫‪465‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫الجزء الذي وقع على جزء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من أجزاء‬
‫نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو ميل ذلك الجزء‪.‬‬
‫واعلم أن أ ّول الحمل وأ ّول الميزان ال تجد لهما ميال بتّ�ة‪ ،‬الٔنهما يقاطعان فلك‬
‫جميعا جزء واحد من أجزاء فلك نصف النهار‪ .‬وأ ّما أ ّول‬
‫ً‬ ‫مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬ويقع عليهما‬
‫‪/‬و ‪44‬ب‪ /‬الجدي وأ ّول ‪/‬و‪ /‬السرطان‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّك تجد ميلهما ثالثة وعشريـن جزءا وثالثا وثالثيـن‬
‫دقيقة‪ ،‬وسائر االٔجزاء تجد ميلها داخال في هذه الثالثة والعشرين جزءا والثالث ‪470‬‬

‫والثالثين دقيقة؛ وهذا الميل هو على حالة واحدة في االٔقاليم كلّها‪ ،‬ولذلك يمكنك‬
‫الشمالي على االٔفق أو لم ترفعه‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪107‬ب‪ /‬أن تعرفه إذا رفعت القطب ‪/‬ن‪/‬‬

‫ٔحببت من أجزاء‬
‫َ‬ ‫ٔي جزء ا‬
‫الباب الحادي والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة سعة مشرق ا ّ‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬دائرة البروج في ا ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪45‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪475‬‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك الجزء على االٔفق‬‫معرفة سعة مشرق ذلك الجزء فيه‪ّ .‬‬
‫ي جزء طلع من أجزاء دائرة االٔفق فتعلّم عليه‪ ،‬وتع ّد ما بين تلك‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وانظر على أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬
‫العالمة وجزء طلوع أ ّول الحمل‪ ،‬فما اجتمع لك من أجزاء فهو سعة مشرق ذلك‬
‫‪/‬و ‪45‬ب‪ /‬الجزء في الجهة التي ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الجزء فيها عن مع ّدل ‪/‬ز‪ /‬النهار‪ .‬ف ٕان كان ذلك الجزء‬
‫‪/‬ز ‪5‬ب‪/‬‬
‫‪480‬‬ ‫الجنوبية‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫شمالية؛ و ا ٕن كان من البروج‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالية‪ ،‬كانت أجزاء سعة مشرقه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫من البروج‬
‫جنوبية‪ .‬وسعة المشارق تختلف الختالف المدن‪ ،‬ولذلك‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫كانت أجزاء سعة مشرقه‬
‫الشمالي بقدر عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫احتجت أن ترفع القطب‬

‫الباب الثاني والثالثون‪ :‬في استخراج مطالع البروج في ‪/‬و‪ /‬الفلك المستقيم‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪46‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشمالي على االٔفق‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فضع القطب‬
‫دل النهار ‪485‬‬ ‫ي جزء من أجزاء فلك مع ّ‬ ‫الحمل على االٔفق من جهة المشرق‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول الثور على االٔفق‬‫وافى معه أفق المشرق‪ ،‬فتعلّم عليه‪ّ .‬‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق من أجزاء دائرة مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬وع ّد ما‬
‫ّ‬

‫و‪ + :‬من أجزاء‪ ،‬ز‪ + :‬من االٔجزاء‬ ‫‪ 466‬لك[‬ ‫و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 465‬ن‪ :‬من…‪ 466‬النهار[‬
‫و ز‪ :‬يرفعه‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىرفعه‬ ‫‪ 472‬ترفعه[‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬وثلثين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬والثلثون‬ ‫‪ 471‬والثالثين[‬
‫‪ 481‬ز ن‪ :‬مشرقه[ و‪ :‬مشرقية‬ ‫‪ 478‬ن‪ :‬أ ّول[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫الشمالي[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 475‬ن‪:‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪201‬‬
‫‪209‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪46‬ب‪ /‬بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬فما خرج فهو أجزاء مطالع الحمل في الفلك‬
‫المستقيم‪ .‬وكذلك فافعل بالثور والجوزاء‪ ،‬وباقي البروج‪ ،‬لتستخرج مطالعها في الفلك‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط ‪490‬‬ ‫المستقيم‪ .‬واعلم أن مطالع الفلك المستقيم هي مثل أجزاء مجاز البروج على‬
‫ّ‬
‫بخط نصف النهار‪ ،‬فارفع‬ ‫ي بلد شئت‪ .‬ف ٕان أردت أن تعرفها‬
‫نصف النهار في أ ّ‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول البرج ‪/‬ن‪ /‬الذي تريد‬
‫ي رفع شئت‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫الشمالي أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪108‬ا‪ /‬القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪47‬ا‪ /‬معرفة مطالعه ‪/‬و‪ /‬تحت وجه حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه‬
‫خط نصف النهار من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة إلى ما يلي المغرب‬‫ّ‬
‫‪495‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬ويصير أ ّول البرج الذي يليه على‬‫ّ‬ ‫حتّى يجوز البرج كلّه‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار مع أ ّول البرج الذي‬ ‫نصف النهار‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى‬
‫يلي ذلك البرج‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو أجزاء مطالع‬
‫‪/‬و ‪47‬ب‪ /‬الفلك المستقيم‪ .‬و إن امتحنت ‪/‬و‪ /‬العملين جميعا‪ ،‬أصبتهما متفقين‪ ،‬ال اختالف‬
‫فيهما بتّ�ة‪.‬‬

‫‪500‬‬ ‫ٔي إقليم شئت‪.‬‬

‫ٔي برج شئت في ا ّ‬
‫الباب الثالث والثالثون‪ :‬في استخراج مطالع ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بمقدار أجزاء عرض البلد الذي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير أ ّول جزء من البرج الذي تريد أن‬
‫الشرقي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫تستخرج مطالعه على االٔفق‬
‫من أجزاء فلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة إلى ما يلي المغرب حتّى يطلع ذلك‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪48‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪505‬‬ ‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي‬

‫ّ‬ ‫البرج كلّه‪ ،‬ويصير أ ّول البرج الذي يليه على االٔفق‬
‫الشرقي من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو أجزاء مطالع ذلك البرج في ذلك االٕ قليم‪.‬‬

‫ن‪ :‬على[‬ ‫‪ 490‬مجاز[ و ن‪ :‬مجار‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬مجاري‬ ‫‪ 489‬ل‪ :‬في الفلك[ و ز‪ :‬بالفلك‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬
‫الشرقي[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 505‬ن‪ :‬وتعلّم…‪506‬‬ ‫‪ 494‬ن‪ :‬ا ٕلى[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬عن‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪202‬‬
‫‪210‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ٔي بلد أردت من‬

‫الباب الرابع والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي ال تغيب عن ا ّ‬
‫الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬

‫‪510‬‬ ‫الشمالي ‪/‬و‪ /‬عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي‬‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪48‬ب‪ /‬ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫ممره‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة ‪/‬ن‪ /‬دورة واحدة‪ ،‬فما كان من الكواكب‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪108‬ب‪ /‬تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪ّ .‬‬
‫الشمالي واالٔفق‪ ،‬ف ٕان ّه ال يغيب البتّ�ة عن ذلك‬ ‫خط نصف النهار بين القطب‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫تحت‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار بين‬‫ّ‬ ‫ممره تحت‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫البلد‪ ،‬ويدور دائرة تا ّمة فوق االٔرض‪ .‬وما كان‬
‫الشمالي وفلك مع ّدل النهار ف ٕان ّه يطلع ويغرب‪ ،‬ويغيب ويظهر؛ فما كان منها‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫أقرب ‪/‬و‪ /‬ا ٕلى القطب الشمالي كان زمانه فوق االٔرض أكثر‪ ،‬وما كان منها أقرب ا ٕلي ‪515‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪49‬ا‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫الجنوبي ف ٕا ّن زمانه تحت االٔرض أكثر‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬

‫ٔي بلد شئت‬

‫الباب الخامس والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي ال تظهر بتّ�ة في ا ّ‬
‫من كواكب الكرة‪.‬‬

‫الجنوبي‪ ،‬وع ّد منه في أجزاء حلقة‬

‫ّ‬ ‫الجنوبي على االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فضع القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪49‬ب‪ /‬نصف النهار بقدر عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪ ،‬وتعلّم ‪/‬و‪ /‬على حيث ‪520‬‬

‫ممره من الكواكب‬
‫ّ‬ ‫انتهى العدد بمداد أو بشمع‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة دورة واحدة‪ ،‬فما كان‬
‫الجنوبي وبين العالمة التي علّمت‪ ،‬ال يظهر في‬ ‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬بين القطب‬‫ّ‬ ‫على‬
‫ّ‬
‫ممره من الكواكب بين تلك العالمة ودائرة مع ّدل النهار‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ذلك البلد أصال‪ .‬وما كان‬
‫يضا مختلف على قدر‬ ‫ذاهبا ا ٕلى القطب االٓخر‪ ،‬فهو يظهر في ذلك البلد‪ .‬وهذا أ ً‬
‫جدا‪ ،‬تكون الكواكب التي ال ‪525‬‬‫ً‬ ‫اختالف البلدان‪ِ ،‬ال ٔ ّن البلدان ‪/‬و‪ /‬التي عروضها قليلة‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪50‬ا‪/‬‬

‫جدا؛ والبلدان التي عروضها كثيرة‪ ،‬تكون الكواكب التي ال ترى فيها‬
‫ً‬ ‫ترى فيها قليلة‬
‫كثيرة‪.‬‬

‫‪ 513‬ويدور دائرة[‬ ‫‪ 512‬ف ٕان ّه[ و ز ن‪ :‬ف ٕان ّها‬ ‫‪ 509‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب…على[ و ز‪ :‬كواكب‬
‫‪ 522‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[‬ ‫‪ 520‬ز‪ :‬وتعلّم[ و‪ :‬ويعلّم‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬وىعلّم‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬وتدور دوائر‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬وتدور دائرة‬
‫‪ 526‬ز‪ :‬تكون[ و‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫‪ 525‬ز‪ :‬تكون[ و ن‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫و‪ :‬اعلمت‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪203‬‬
‫‪211‬‬

‫الباب السادس والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تُرى في الليلة الواحدة مرتين‪،‬‬
‫بالعشي بعد غروب الشمس في المغرب‪ ،‬وبالغداة قبل طلوع الشمس في المشرق‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫يتهي ٔا في الكواكب القريبة من القطب الشمالي‪ ،‬إذا ‪/‬و‪ /‬كانت الشمس في ‪530‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪50‬ب‪ /‬هذا‬
‫ّ‬
‫الجنوبية‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪109‬ا‪ /‬البروج ‪/‬ن‪/‬‬

‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ف ٕاذا أردت أن َترى ذلك في الكرة‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس من‬
‫عرض البلد الذي تريد أن َترى ذلك فيه‪ّ .‬‬
‫ي الكواكب تغرب منه من الكواكب التي‬‫الغربي‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الجنوبية على االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫البروج‬
‫ن تلك الكواكب في تلك الليلة تكون ظاهرة في المغرب بعد غروب ‪535‬‬ ‫فوق االٔرض؛ ف ٕا ّ‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يغيب جزء الشمس وتـغيب تلك الكواكب ويصير‬ ‫‪/‬و‪ /‬الشمس‪ّ .‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪51‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الشرقي‪ ،‬ف ٕانك َترى تلك الكواكب قد طلعت من االٔفق قبل‬

‫ّ‬ ‫جزء الشمس على االٔفق‬
‫طلوع الشمس‪ .‬فتكون قد غابت بعد مغيب الشمس وطلعت قبل طلوع الشمس‪،‬‬
‫بالعشي بعد غروب الشمس‪ ،‬وبالغداة قبل طلوع‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ور َئيت في الليلة الواحدة مرتين‪:‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪540‬‬ ‫الشمس‪ ،‬كما سبق ذكره‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ز‪ /‬الباب السابع والثالثون‪ :‬في معرفة الكواكب التي تُرى في ‪/‬و‪ /‬الليلة المفروضة‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪6‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪51‬ب‪/‬‬
‫جميع الليل فوق االٔرض من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة في البلد المفروض‪.‬‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫وتعرف الجزء الذي الشمس فيه من أجزاء دائرة البروج في الليلة التي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫معرفة ذلك فيه‪،‬‬
‫م أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الجزء الذي فيه الشمس من ‪545‬‬ ‫تريد معرفة ذلك فيها أ ً‬
‫يضا‪ .‬ث ّ‬
‫الشرقي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ي كوكب يكون على االٔفق‬
‫الغربي‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫أجزاء دائرة البروج على االٔفق‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪52‬ا‪/‬‬

‫من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة إلى أن يصير في أفق المشرق جزء‬
‫الشمس‪ ،‬فما كان من تلك الكواكب ظاهرا في الغرب وقريبا من االٔفق‪ ،‬فتلك‬
‫الكواكب في تلك الليلة ال تغيب عن ذلك البلد‪ ،‬بل تكون ظاهرة فوق أفق الليل‬
‫‪550‬‬ ‫كلّه‪.‬‬

‫بالعشي …‪540‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 539‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 535‬ز‪ :‬تكون[ و ن‪ :‬يكون‬ ‫‪ 530‬ا‪ :‬يتهيّأ[ و‪ :‬ىتها ز‪:‬ىىهما‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬بين‬
‫‪ 548‬وقريبا[ و ز‪ :‬أو قريبا منه‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 547‬ب‪ :‬وأ ِد ْر …‪ 548‬الغرب[ و ز ن‪– :‬‬ ‫الشمس[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ن‪ :‬أو قريب‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪204‬‬
‫‪212‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من‬

‫الباب الثامن والثالثون‪ :‬في استخراج الساعة التي يطلع فيها ا ّ‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫ٔي ليلة‪ ،‬وا ّ‬
‫الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة في ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪52‬ب‪ /‬ا ٕذا ‪/‬و‪ /‬أردت ذلك‪/ ،‬ن‪ /‬فارفع القطب‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪109‬ب‪/‬‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر‬
‫وتعرف الجزء الذي الشمس فيه في تلك الليلة‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪،‬‬
‫‪555‬‬ ‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك الجزء على االٔفق‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي‬ ‫الشرقي من أجزاء دائرة مع ّدل النهار‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫االٔفق‬
‫الشرقي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه‬‫ّ‬ ‫تريد معرفة ساعة طلوعه على االٔفق ‪/‬و‪/‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪53‬ا‪/‬‬

‫االٔفق من أجزاء دائرة مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬ث ّم ع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬واقسمها‬
‫على خمسة عشر‪ ،‬فما خرج لك من القسمة فهو الساعة من الليل التي يطلع فيها‬
‫‪560‬‬ ‫الزمانية‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ذلك الكوكب‪ ،‬وهذه الساعات مستوية‪ .‬ف ٕان أردت معرفة ذلك بالساعات‬
‫فاقسم االٔجزاء التي خرجت لك من فضل ما بين العالمتين على أجزاء ساعات تلك‬
‫‪/‬و ‪53‬ب‪ /‬الليلة‪ ،‬فما خرج ‪/‬و‪ /‬من القسمة فهو الساعة التي يطلع فيها ذلك الكوكب في تلك‬
‫الزمانية‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الليلة في ذلك البلد بالساعات‬

‫ٔي كوكب فُرض لنا‬

‫الباب التاسع والثالثون‪ :‬في استخراج الساعة التي يغرب فيها ا ّ‬
‫‪565‬‬ ‫ٔي بلد شئنا‪.‬‬
‫ٔي ليلة شئنا وا ّ‬
‫من الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة في ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض ذلك البلد‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫وتعرف جزء الشمس في تلك الليلة‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الجزء على أفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪54‬ا‪/‬‬

‫المغرب‪ ،‬فال محالة أن الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة ساعة غروبه يكون ظاهرا في الكرة‬
‫الشرقي من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل‬
‫ّ‬ ‫على االٔفق‪ ،‬فتعلّم على الجزء الذي وقع على االٔفق‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ‪570‬‬‫الغربي‪ّ .‬‬ ‫النهار‪ ،‬لما وضعت جزء الشمس على االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬
‫الشرقي من أجزاء‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الكوكب على االٔفق‬
‫ثم ع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء واقسمها على خمسة‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪110‬ا‪ /‬دائرة مع ّدل ‪/‬ن‪ /‬النهار‪ّ .‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪54‬ب‪ /‬عشر‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬فما خرج لك من القسمة فهو عدد الساعات التي غرب فيها ذلك‬

‫‪ 560‬ن‪ :‬مستوية[ و‪ :‬بالساعات المستوية‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬بالسات‬ ‫‪ 556‬ز ن‪ :‬الكوكب[ و‪ :‬الكواكب‬

‫‪ 562‬ز ن‪ :‬فهو الساعة[ و‪ :‬فهي الساعات‬ ‫‪ 561‬ن‪ :‬من…العالمتين[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫المستوية‬
‫ن‪ :‬أ ّ‬
‫ي …‪565‬‬ ‫‪ 564‬ز ن‪ :‬التي[ و‪ :‬الذي‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬الكوكب[ و‪ :‬الكواكب‬ ‫ن‪ :‬يطلع[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 573‬ن‪ :‬القسمة[ و ز‪ :‬القسم‬ ‫شئنا‪ [2‬و ز‪ :‬ذلك الكوكب المذكور طلوعه‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬ ‫‪213‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪205‬‬

‫الكوكب في تلك الليلة عن ذلك البلد‪ ،‬وهي ساعات مقام ذلك الكوكب فوق االٔرض‬
‫‪575‬‬ ‫في تلك الليلة بالساعات المستوية‪ .‬ف ٕان أردت ذلك بالساعات الزمانيّة‪ ،‬فاقسم ما‬
‫خرج لك من أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار على أزمان ساعات تلك الليلة‪ ،‬فما خرج لك‬
‫فهي ساعات زمانيّة لوقت غروب ذلك الكوكب عن ذلك البلد ومقدار ‪/‬و‪ /‬ساعات‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪55‬ا‪/‬‬

‫مقامه عليه‪.‬‬

‫الباب االٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة ساعة طلوع القمر أو ا ّ‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب‬
‫‪580‬‬ ‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫ٔي ليلة وا ّ‬
‫المتحيّرة في ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫تعرف جزء القمر أو الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة ساعة طلوعه من‬ ‫معرفة ذلك فيه‪ .‬ث ّم ّ‬
‫‪/‬و ‪55‬ب‪ /‬أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬وعرضه‪ ،‬وجهة عرضه‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الجزء من‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ .‬ث ّم ع ّد من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار من‬‫ّ‬ ‫أجزاء دائرة البروج تحت‬
‫‪585‬‬ ‫موضع ذلك الجزء بقدر عرض القمر أو الكوكب المتحيّر في جهة عرضه‪ ،‬وتعلّم على‬
‫الكرة في الموضع الذي يالصق منها ذلك الجزء‪ ،‬فتلك العالمة هي موضع القمر أو‬
‫الكوكب المتحيّر في تلك الليلة‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الجزء الذي فيه الشمس‬
‫الشرقي من أجزاء‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الغربي‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي وافق معه ‪/‬و‪ /‬االٔفق‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪56‬ا‪ /‬على االٔفق‬
‫فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى تطلع العالمة التي علّمت لموضع الكوكب‪،‬‬
‫الشرقي من أجزاء دائرة فلك مع ّ‬
‫دل النهار‪590 ،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وتعلّم على الموضع الذي وافى معه االٔفق‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪110‬ب‪ /‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج ‪/‬ن‪ /‬لك فاقسمه على خمسة عشر‪ ،‬إن‬
‫كنت تريد معرفة ساعة طلوعه بالساعات المستوية‪ ،‬أو على أجزاء ساعات تلك الليلة‪،‬‬
‫ا ٕن كنت تريد معرفة ساعات طلوعه بالساعات الزمانيّة‪ ،‬فما خرج لك من القسمة فهو‬
‫‪/‬و ‪56‬ب‪ /‬الساعة التي يطلع فيها القمر أو الكوكب المتحيّر في تلك الليلة ‪/‬و‪ /‬في ذلك البلد‪.‬‬

‫‪ 592‬ن‪ :‬المستوية…‪ 593‬بالساعات[‬ ‫‪ 580‬ن‪ :‬أ ّ‬

‫ي[ و ز‪ :‬أية‬ ‫‪ 579‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 594‬ز‪ :‬يطلع[‬ ‫ن‪ :‬لك…القسمة[ و ز‪ :‬القسم‬ ‫‪ 593‬ا‪ :‬ا ٕن[ ن‪ :‬اليوم‪ ،‬و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫و ز‪– :‬‬
‫و‪ :‬تطلع‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىطلع‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪206‬‬
‫‪214‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬

‫‪595‬‬ ‫الباب الحادي واالٔربعون‪ :‬في استخراج ساعة غروب القمر وا ّ‬

‫ٔي كوكب فرض لنا‬
‫ٔي بلد شئنا‪.‬‬
‫ٔي ليلة وا ّ‬
‫المتحيرة في ا ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫من الكواكب‬

‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء ‪/‬ز‪ /‬عرض البلد الذي‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪6‬ب‪/‬‬

‫المتحير يكون ظاهرا فوق‬

‫ّ‬ ‫تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪ ،‬فال محالة أن القمر أو الكوكب‬
‫فتعرف جزءه من فلك البروج‪ ،‬وعرضه‪ ،‬وجهة عرضه بتقويم ‪/‬و‪ /‬أو بزيج‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫االٔرض‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪57‬ا‪/‬‬

‫د من أجزاء حلقة نصف ‪600‬‬ ‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وع ّ‬‫ّ‬ ‫وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزؤه تحت‬
‫النهار بقدر عرض الكوكب أو القمر في جهة عرضه‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الكرة في الموضع‬
‫الذي انتهى العدد ا ٕليه عالمة بمداد‪ ،‬فتلك العالمة هي موضع القمر أو الكوكب‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس على أفق المغرب‪ ،‬وتعلّم‬ ‫المتحير من الكرة‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪/‬و ‪57‬ب‪ /‬على الجزء الذي وافى معه أفق المشرق من ‪/‬و‪ /‬أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة‬
‫‪605‬‬ ‫حتّى تصير تلك العالمة التي علّمت على أفق المغرب‪ ،‬وتعل ّم على الجزء الذي وافى‬
‫معها أفق المشرق من أجزاء مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمتين من االٔجزاء وأقسمها‬
‫على خمسة عشر‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو ساعات مستوية لغروب القمر أو الكوكب‬
‫الزمانية‪ ،‬فاقسم االٔجزاء التي‬
‫ّ‬ ‫المتحير ومقامه فوق االٔرض‪ .‬و إن أردت ذلك بالساعات‬
‫ّ‬
‫خرجت لك على ‪/‬و‪ /‬أجزاء ساعات تلك الليلة‪ ،‬فما خرج من القسمة فهو ساعات‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪58‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪610‬‬ ‫زمانية لمقام ذلك الكوكب فوق االٔرض‪ ،‬ووقت غروبه‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪111‬ا‪/ /‬ن‪/‬‬

‫الباب الثاني واالٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة ارتفاع نصف النهار في ا ّ‬

‫ٔي بلد ويوم شئت‪.‬‬

‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪58‬ب‪ /‬معرفة ذلك فيه‪ ،‬وتعلّم على الجزء الذي تكون فيه الشمس ‪/‬و‪ /‬في ذلك اليوم من‬
‫أجزاء فلك البروج‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الجزء الذي علّمت عليه تحت حلقة‬
‫‪615‬‬ ‫ي ناحية هو أقرب من االٔفق‪ ،‬ا ٕلى الشمال أو ا ٕلى الجنوب‪،‬‬
‫نصف النهار‪ ،‬وانظر ا ٕلى أ ّ‬
‫فالناحية التي هو إليها أقرب ع ّد منها ما بينه وبين االٔفق من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فتلك أجزاء‬

‫‪ 598‬ن‪ :‬أو الكوكب[‬ ‫‪ 595‬ن‪ :‬وأ ّ‬

‫ي …‪ 596‬شئنا[ و ز‪ :‬أو أحد المتحيرة حسب ما ذكر في طلوعه‬
‫‪ 602‬ا‪ :‬بمداد[ و‪ :‬ىهاد‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬النهار‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 601‬ن‪ :‬أو القمر[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬والكوكب‬
‫‪ 605‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‬ ‫‪ 604‬ن‪ :‬أفق[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ثم[ و‪2× :‬‬‫‪ّ 603‬‬
‫‪ 614‬ن‪ :‬تحت حلقة[‬ ‫‪ 613‬ا تكون[ و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫‪ 609‬ن‪ :‬القسمة[ و ز‪ :‬القسم‬
‫‪ 615‬ن‪ :‬أ ّ‬
‫ي[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬بحلقة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪207‬‬
‫‪215‬‬

‫ارتفاع نصف النهار‪ ،‬اليوم الذي تكون فيه الشمس في ذلك الجزء في ذلك البلد‪.‬‬
‫يضا يختلف باختالف المساكن‪ ،‬ولذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬احتجت أن ترفع القطب‬
‫وهذا الباب أ ً‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪59‬ا‪/‬‬

‫فيه بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪.‬‬

‫‪620‬‬ ‫الباب الثالث واالٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة أعظم ارتفاع ك ّ‬

‫ل واحد من الكواكب المرسومة‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫في الكرة في ا ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد الذي تريد‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫معرفة ذلك فيه‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة أعظم ارتفاعه‬
‫ي جهة هو أميل‪ ،‬فع ّد االٔجزاء في‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وانظر إلى أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪59‬ب‪ /‬تحت ‪/‬و‪ /‬حلقة‬
‫‪625‬‬ ‫تلك الجهة من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار التي بين الجزء الذي وقع علي الكوكب‬
‫وبين االٔفق‪ ،‬فما خرج فهو أجزاء االرتفاع لذلك الكوكب في ذلك البلد‪ .‬وهذا‬
‫االرتفاع يختلف في البلدان‪ ،‬ولذلك احتجت أن ترفع القطب فيه بقدر أجزاء عرض‬
‫البلد الذي تريد معرفة ذلك فيه‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ن ‪111‬ب‪ /‬الباب الرابع واالٔربعون‪/ :‬ن‪ /‬في معرفة االختالف ‪/‬و‪ /‬بين أعظم ارتفاع الشمس في‬
‫‪/‬و ‪60‬ا‪/‬‬
‫‪630‬‬ ‫اليوم الواحد بين بلدين مختلفي العرض‪.‬‬

‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر أجزاء عرض أحد البلدين‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫الذين تريد معرفة ذلك فيهما‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزء الشمس في فلك البروج‬
‫وتعرف أعظم ارتفاع الشمس في ذلك اليوم‪ .‬ث ّم ارفع‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫تحت حلقة نصف النهار‪،‬‬
‫حطّه بقدر أجزاء عرض البلد االٓخر‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير‬
‫الشمالي أو ُ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫يضا أعظم ارتفاعه‪ ،‬فما ‪635‬‬ ‫وتعرف أ ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫خط نصف النهار‪،‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪60‬ب‪/ /‬و‪ /‬ذلك الجزء تحت حلقة‬
‫وجدت من االختالف بين العددين‪ ،‬فهو االختالف بين أعظم ارتفاع الشمس في‬
‫ذينك البلدين‪.‬‬

‫‪ 620‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب…‪ 621‬في‪[1‬‬ ‫ا‪ :‬تكون[ و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫‪ 617‬ز ن‪ :‬النهار[ و‪ :‬نهار‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ 624‬ن‪ :‬خط[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 622‬ن‪ :‬البلد…‪ 623‬فيه[ و ز‪ :‬ذلك البلد‬ ‫و‪ :‬كواكب‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬كوكب‬
‫‪ 632‬ن‪ :‬فلك[ و ز‪ :‬ذلك‪ ،‬ا‪ :‬ذلك‬ ‫‪ 630‬ن‪ :‬بين[ و ز‪ :‬من‬ ‫‪ 629‬ن‪ :‬ارتفاع[ و ز‪ :‬اختالف‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫‪ 635‬حلقة خط[ و ز‪ :‬خط‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬حلقة‬ ‫اليوم في تلك‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪208‬‬
‫‪216‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫الباب الخامس واالٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يكون فيه السنة كلّها يوما‬
‫واحدا‪ :‬ستة أشهر كلّها نهارا ال ليل فيها‪ ،‬وستة أشهر كلّها ليال ال نهار فيها‪.‬‬

‫‪640‬‬ ‫الشمالي ‪/‬و‪ /‬عن االٔفق تسعين جزءا‪ ،‬ف ٕانه يكون عند‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪61‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ذلك القطب في سمت الرأس‪ ،‬ويكون فلك مع ّدل النهار محاذيا لال ٔفق‪ ،‬وتدور‬
‫الشمالية التي من أ ّول الحمل إلى‬
‫ّ‬ ‫السماء هناك كـدوران الرحى‪ ،‬وتكون الستة البروج‬
‫الجنوبية التي من أ ّول الميزان إلى أ ّول‬
‫ّ‬ ‫أ ّول الميزان فوق االٔرض أ ً‬
‫بدا‪ ،‬والستة البروج‬
‫الشمالية‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫بدا‪ .‬فتكون الشمس‪ ،‬ا ٕذا كانت في الستة البروج‬ ‫الحمل تحت االٔفق أ ً‬
‫‪645‬‬ ‫بدا‪ ،‬فيكون ‪/‬و‪ /‬ستة أشهر نهارا ال‬
‫الجنوبية غائبة أ ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪61‬ب‪ /‬طالعة أ ً‬
‫بدا؛ و ا ٕذا كانت في البروج‬
‫ليل فيه‪ ،‬وستة أشهر ليال‪ ،‬ال نهار فيه‪ ،‬وتكون السنة كلّها يوما واحدا‪ ،‬نصفها نهارا‬
‫كلّه‪ ،‬ونصفها ليال كلّه‪ ،‬في عرض تسعين جزءا‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬ن ‪112‬ا‪ /‬الباب السادس واالٔربعون‪/ :‬ن‪ /‬في معرفة البلد الذي ال يطلع عليه كوكب بتّ�ة‪ ،‬وال‬
‫ٔبدا ظاهرة‪،‬‬
‫يغرب عنه كوكب بتّ�ة‪ ،‬بل الكواكب التي هي ظاهرة فيه تكون ا ً‬
‫‪650‬‬ ‫خفية‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ٔبدا‬
‫الخفية عنه تكون ا ً‬
‫ّ‬ ‫والكواكب‬

‫الشمالي ‪/‬و‪ /‬عن االٔفق تسعين جزءا؛ وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪،‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪62‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ف ٕانك َترى الكواكب التي فوق االٔرض كلّها تدور دورا رحويّا فوق االٔرض‪ ،‬وال تغيب‬
‫يضا دورا رحويّا تحت االٔرض‪ ،‬وال‬ ‫بتّ�ة‪ ،‬و َترى الكواكب التي تحت االٔفق تدور ‪/‬ز‪ /‬أ ً‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪7‬ا‪/‬‬

‫تطلع بتّ�ة‪ ،‬وذلك أ ً‬

‫يضا في عرض تسعين جزءا‪.‬‬

‫ن‪ :‬كلّها‪ [2‬و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 639‬ن‪ :‬واحدا[ و ز‪ :‬واحد‬ ‫‪ 638‬ن‪ :‬الموضع الذي[ و ز‪ :‬المواضع التي‬
‫ز‪ :‬وتدور[ و‪ :‬ويدور‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 641‬محاذيا[ و‪ :‬محاذًا‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬محاذ‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬ليال[ و ن‪ :‬ليل‬
‫و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 643‬ن‪ّ :‬‬
‫أول‪[2‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬وتكون[ و ن‪ :‬ويكون‬ ‫‪ 642‬السماء[ و ن‪ + :‬محاذًا‬
‫ن‪ :‬الشماليّة…‬ ‫الشماليّة[ ن‪ + :‬يكون‬ ‫ز‪ :‬فتكون[ و‪ :‬فيكون‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 644‬ن‪ :‬أ ً‬
‫بدا[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 647‬ز ن‪ :‬ليال[‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬نهارا[ و‪ :‬نهار‬ ‫‪ 646‬ز‪ :‬وتكون[ و ن‪ :‬ويكون‬ ‫‪ 645‬البروج[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 650‬تكون[ و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫‪ 649‬ز‪ :‬تكون[ و‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫و‪ :‬ليل‬
‫تدور…رحويّا[ و‪ :‬تدور دورا رحويا‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬تدورو دورانا قويا‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 652‬ز ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و‪ :‬الكوكب‬
‫ن‪ :‬تدور دورانا رجاويا‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪209217‬‬

‫‪655‬‬ ‫الباب السابع واالٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يكون النهار فيه أربعا وعشرين‬
‫ساعة مستوية‪.‬‬

‫ثم أ ِد ْر‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر ستة وستين جزءا‪ّ .‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪62‬ب‪ /‬ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع ‪/‬و‪ /‬القطب‬
‫الكرة وتف ّق ْد أ ّول جزء من السرطان‪ ،‬ف ٕانك تجده ال يغيب بتّ�ة‪ .‬ف ٕاذا صارت الشمس‬
‫فيه‪ ،‬صار زمان النهار والليل كلّه نهارا‪ ،‬فيصير النهار أربعا وعشرين ساعة مستوية في‬
‫‪660‬‬ ‫ذلك اليوم في ذلك العرض‪ .‬و إذا صارت الشمس في أ ّول الجدي‪ ،‬لم تطلع بتّ�ة‪،‬‬
‫فتصير ليلة دخول الشمس أ ّول الجدي أربعا وعشرين ساعة مستوية‪ ،‬وال يكون لها‬
‫نهارا ‪/‬و‪ /‬أصال‪ ،‬ويزيد النهار وينقص في سائر السنة‪ ،‬من ساعة ا ٕلى أربع وعشرين‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪63‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ساعة‪ ،‬وذلك في عرض ستة وستين جزءا‪.‬‬

‫الباب الثامن واالٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي يطلع فيه الثور قبل الحمل‪.‬‬
‫‪665‬‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر ثمانية وسبعين جزءا‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕانك َترى الثور يتق ّدم الحمل في دوران الكرة‪ ،‬و َترى الحمل قد غاب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪63‬ب‪/ /‬و‪ /‬والثور ‪/‬ن‪ /‬لم ِ‬
‫يغب‪ ،‬و َترى الحمل يطلع تاليا للثور‪ ،‬وذلك أ ّن الثور ال يغيب في‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪112‬ب‪/‬‬
‫هذا العرض والحمل يغيب؛ فيظهر ذلك لهذا السبب‪.‬‬

‫الباب التاسع واالٔربعون‪ :‬في معرفة الموضع الذي تجوز فيه الشمس على سمت‬
‫‪670‬‬ ‫الرءوس‪.‬‬
‫ل‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق أ ّ‬
‫ي رفع شئت بعد أن يكون أق ّ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارفع القطب‬
‫خط نصف النهار ‪/‬و‪ /‬تسعين جزءا‪،‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫من أربعة وعشرين جزءا‪ ،‬وع ّد من االٔفق على‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪64‬ا‪/‬‬

‫وتعلّم على الجزء الذي انتهى ا ٕليه عددك‪ ،‬فتلك العالمة هي سمت الرأس في ذلك‬

‫‪ 662‬ن‪ :‬نهارا[‬ ‫‪ 661‬ن‪ :‬أ ّول الجدي[ و‪ :‬الجدي‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬للجد‬ ‫‪ 659‬ز ن‪ :‬والليل[ و‪ :‬ولليل‬
‫‪ 667‬ز ن‪ِ :‬‬
‫يغب[ و‪ :‬يغنٮ‬ ‫‪ 663‬ل‪ :‬وستين[ و ز‪ :‬وسبعين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬وستون‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬نهار‬
‫‪ 673‬ن‪ :‬هي[ و ز‪– :‬‬

‫الجنوبية‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 662‬ويزيد…‪ 663‬جزءا[ ج‪ :‬ويزيد الليل والنهار في ذلك‪ ،‬على قدر حلول الشمس في البروج‬
‫من ساعة[‬ ‫والشمالية في ذلك العرض؛ انظر الحاشية السفلية ‪ 46‬في التعليقات على الفصل ‪.P24‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫يوجد في ‪ 12‬من ‪ 18‬مخطوطة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪210‬‬
‫‪218‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕانك َترى جزءا ما من أجزاء دائرة البروج يجوز تحت تلك‬
‫البلد‪ّ .‬‬
‫النقطة‪ ،‬فتكون الشمس إذا صارت في ذلك الجزء تجوز على سمت رءوس أهل ‪675‬‬

‫ذلك البلد؛ وهذه البلدان هي التي عرضها من جزء ا ٕلى أربعة وعشرين جزءا‪.‬‬

‫ل في وقت ما‬
‫‪/‬و ‪64‬ب‪ /‬الباب الخمسون‪ :‬في معرفة البلدان التي ال يكون لشيء ‪/‬و‪ /‬فيها ظ ّ‬
‫من السنة‪ ،‬وفي أي وقت ويوم يكون ذلك‪.‬‬

‫اعلم أن الشمس‪ ،‬ا ٕذا صارت على سمت الرأس في بلد من البلدان‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن ذلك البلد‬
‫‪680‬‬ ‫في وقت مسامتة الشمس الرأس فيه ال يكون لشيء فيه ظ ّ‬
‫ل بتّ�ة؛ ومسامتة الشمس‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ .‬ف ٕاذا أردت أن تعرف البلد الذي ال‬ ‫الرأس فيه ال يكون ا ٕ ّال على‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق أ ّ‬
‫ي رفع شئت بعد‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ل أصال‪ ،‬فارفع القطب ‪/‬و‪/‬‬ ‫يكون لشيء فيه ظ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪65‬ا‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف‬ ‫ل من أربعة وعشرين جزءا‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة‪ ،‬وع ّد من االٔفق على‬
‫أن يكون أق ّ‬
‫النهار تسعين جزءا‪ ،‬وتعلّم حيث انتهى العدد عالمة‪ .‬ث ّم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يقع تحت‬
‫تلك العالمة جزء من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ .‬في اليوم الذي يكون فيه الشمس في ذلك ‪685‬‬

‫الجزء ال يكون في نصف نهاره لشيء من االٔجرام ظ ّ‬

‫ل بتّ�ة‪.‬‬

‫‪/‬و ‪65‬ب‪ /‬الباب الحادي والخمسون‪/ :‬و‪ /‬في معرفة البلدان التي تكون االٔظالل فيها في‬
‫جهة واحدة‪ ،‬والتي تكون االٔظالل فيها في الجهتين جميعا‪ ،‬وفي ا ّ‬
‫ٔي وقت تكون‬
‫شمالية‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ٔي وقت تكون ‪/‬ن‪/‬‬‫جنوبية وفي ا ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪113‬ا‪ /‬االٔظالل‬

‫‪690‬‬ ‫ل من أربعة وعشرين جزءا‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن االٔظالل تكون فيه‬

‫ل بلد يكون عرضه أق ّ‬
‫اعلم أن ك ّ‬
‫في الجهتين جميعا‪ ،‬أعني في الشمال والجنوب؛ والبلدان التي يرتفع القطب‬
‫شمالية كلّها‪ ،‬والبلدان‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق أكثر من أربعة وعشرين جزءا تكون أظاللها‬
‫ّ‬
‫⟩الجنوبي⟨ عليها أكثر من أربعة وعشرين ‪/‬و‪ /‬جزءا تكون أظاللها‬
‫ّ‬ ‫التي يرتفع القطب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪66‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ن‪ :‬تلك[‬ ‫ز‪ :‬يجوز[ و‪ :‬تجوز‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىجوز‬ ‫‪ 674‬ما… أجزاء[ و ز‪ :‬ما من آخر‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬من أجزاء‬
‫‪ 685‬ن‪ :‬تلك[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ا‪ :‬تعرف[ و ز‪ :‬ترفع‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 681‬ال يكون‪ [1‬و‪2× :‬‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬فلك‬
‫‪ 689‬تكون[ و‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ز ن‪ :‬ىكون‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬يكون‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬ ‫تكون‪[2‬‬ ‫‪688‬‬ ‫ز‪ :‬في اليوم[ و ن‪ :‬فاليوم‬
‫و ز‪ :‬والبلدان…‪ 694‬كلّها[‬ ‫‪ 692‬وعشرين[ ن‪ :‬وعشرون‬ ‫‪ 691‬ن‪ :‬والبلدان…‪ 692‬كلّها[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫أكثر[ و ز‪ :‬أق ّ‬
‫ل‬ ‫‪ 693‬يرتفع[ و‪ :‬ىرفع‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ترفع‬ ‫ن‪– :‬‬

‫‪ 691‬والبلدان…‪ 694‬كلّها[ انظر التعليقات على الفصل ‪.P27‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪219‬‬
‫‪211‬‬

‫جنوبية كلّها‪ .‬وذلك أن الشمس‪ ،‬ا ٕذا كانت على سمت الرأس‪ ،‬لم يكن لشيء ظ ّ‬
‫ل‬ ‫ّ‬
‫جنوبيا؛ و إذا كانت في ‪695‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫بتّ�ة؛ و إذا كانت في الشمال عن سمت الرأس‪ ،‬كان الظ ّ‬
‫ل‬
‫شماليا‪ .‬ف ٕاذا أردت معرفة ذلك بالكرة‪ ،‬فارفع‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ل‬‫الجنوب عن سمت الرأس‪ ،‬كان الظ ّ‬
‫ل من أربعة وعشرين‬ ‫ي رفع شئت‪ ،‬بعد أن يكون أق ّ‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق أ ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫القطب‬
‫‪/‬و ‪66‬ب‪ /‬جزءا‪ ،‬واستخرج نقطة ‪/‬و‪ /‬سمت الرأس‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪ ،‬ف ٕانك َترى بعض أجزاء دائرة‬
‫البروج تجوز في الجنوب عن نقطة سمت الرأس‪ ،‬وبعضها في الشمال‪ .‬فاالٔجزاء التي‬
‫‪700‬‬ ‫شماليا‪ ،‬واالٔجزاء‬
‫ّ‬ ‫تكون فيها الشمس في الجنوب عن سمت الرأس‪ ،‬يكون الظ ّ‬
‫ل فيها‬
‫جنوبيا‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ل فيها‬‫التي تكون فيها الشمس في الشمال عن سمت الرأس‪ ،‬يكون الظ ّ‬

‫الباب الثاني والخمسون‪ :‬في معرفة البلدان التي تصير الشمس فيها على سمت‬
‫الرأس مرة واحدة في ‪/‬و‪ /‬السنة‪ ،‬والتي تصير فيها على سمت الرأس مرتين‪ ،‬وفي‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪67‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ٔي وقت يكون ذلك من السنة‪.‬‬

‫ا ّ‬
‫‪705‬‬ ‫ل بلد الذي عرضه أربعة وعشرون جزءا تصير الشمس فيه على سمت‬ ‫اعلم أن ك ّ‬
‫شماليا؛ و إن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫الرأس مرة واحدة‪ ،‬وهو في دخولها أ ّول السرطان‪ ،‬إن كان عرض البلد‬
‫جنوبيا‪ ،‬كان ذلك في دخولها أ ّول الجدي‪ .‬وأ ّما البلدان التي عرضها‬
‫ّ‬ ‫كان عرض البلد‬
‫ل من أربعة وعشرين جزءا‪ ،‬ف ٕان ذلك يكون فيها مرتين‪ ،‬مرة ‪/‬و‪ /‬في جزء ما‪ ،‬ومرة‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪67‬ب‪ /‬أق ّ‬
‫في نظيره في الميل من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ .‬ف ٕاذا أردت أن َترى ذلك في الكرة‪ ،‬فارفع‬
‫‪710‬‬ ‫ل من‬ ‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر عرض البلد ‪/‬ن‪ /‬الذي تريد‪ ،‬بعد أن يكون أق ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪113‬ب‪ /‬القطب‬
‫أربعة وعشرين‪ ،‬واستخرج نقطة سمت الرأس على حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة‬
‫‪/‬ز‪ /‬دورة واحدة‪ ،‬ف ٕانك ستجد جزئين من أجزاء دائرة البروج ّ‬
‫يمران تحت نقطة سمت‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪7‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪ 700‬ب‪ :‬فيها‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 699‬ن‪ :‬فاالٔجزاء[ و‪ :‬واالخر‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬واالٔجزاء‬ ‫‪ 697‬ن‪ :‬أق ّ‬

‫ل من[ و ز‪ :‬العرض‬
‫‪ 704‬ا‪ :‬من‬ ‫‪ 701‬ن‪ :‬عن…الرأس[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ٔ‬
‫ن‪ :‬واالجزاء[ و ز‪ :‬واالخر‬ ‫ن‪ :‬فيه‪ ،‬و ز‪– :‬‬
‫ن‪ :‬وعشرون[ و ز‪ :‬وعشرين‬ ‫‪ 705‬ن‪ :‬اعلم…بلد[ و ز‪ :‬البلد‬ ‫السنة[ و ز ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 710‬ن‪ :‬عرض البلد[‬ ‫‪ 707‬ن‪ :‬عرض البلد[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 706‬ن‪ :‬عرض البلد[ و ز‪ :‬العرض‬
‫‪ 712‬ز‪ :‬واحدة[‬ ‫‪ 711‬ا‪ :‬نصف النهار[ و ز ن‪ :‬الكرة‬ ‫ز ن‪ :‬أق ّ‬
‫ل[ و‪ :‬اول‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬العرض‬
‫يمران[ و‪ :‬ىحران )يخران؟(‪ ،‬ز‪ ،– :‬ب‪ :‬يجوزان‬
‫ن‪ّ :‬‬ ‫و ن‪– :‬‬

‫‪ 708‬مرة…‪ 709‬البروج[ ن‪–:‬؛ انظر الحاشية السفلية ‪ 58‬في التعليقات على الفصل ‪.P26‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪212‬‬
‫‪220‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬

‫الرأس‪ :‬جزءا ونظيره في الميل‪ .‬فأ ّما ‪/‬و‪ /‬ا ٕذا جاز على سمت الرأس أ ّول السرطان أو‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪68‬ا‪/‬‬

‫أ ّول الجدي‪ ،‬ف ٕانه إنما يجوز ذلك الجزء وحده ال غير‪.‬‬

‫‪715‬‬ ‫ٔي وقت شئت‪.‬‬

‫الباب الثالث والخمسون‪ :‬في أخذ ارتفاع الشمس بالكرة في ا ّ‬
‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فات ّخذ ربع دائرة من ُ‬
‫ص ْفر مساوية لربع حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬واقسمها‬
‫على تسعين جزءا متساوية‪ ،‬واكتب عليها االٔعداد على ما تراها مكتوبة في حلقة‬
‫‪/‬و ‪68‬ب‪ /‬نصف النهار‪ .‬وعلق شاقو‪/‬و‪/‬ال على الثقبتين اللتين في الكرسي‪ ،‬وانصب الكرة على‬
‫أرض مستوية تكون الشمس ظاهرة عليها نصبا مستويا معدال بالشاقول‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة‬
‫‪720‬‬ ‫حتّى يصير جزء الشمس فوق االٔفق‪ ،‬والصق على جزء الشمس من فلك البروج‬
‫ي جسم شئت‪ ،‬إلصاقا وثيقا بشمع أو غيره‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة‪،‬‬
‫ي قدر شئت‪ ،‬ومن أ ّ‬
‫مقياسا أ ّ‬
‫الشمالي عن االٔفق بقدر عرض البلد الذي أنت فيه‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة تارة‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وارفع القطب‬
‫ل على الكرة بتّ�ة‪ .‬ث ّم‬
‫والكرسي تارة حتّى يظلل المقياس ‪/‬و‪ /‬نفسه‪ ،‬وال يقع له ظ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪69‬ا‪/‬‬

‫أثبت وضع الكرة على هيئتها واقلع المقياس‪ ،‬وعلّم على جزء الشمس‪ ،‬وضع ربع‬
‫‪725‬‬ ‫الحلقة‪ ،‬الذي كنت اتخذته‪ ،‬على الكرة وضعا صحيحا يقع أحد طرفيه‪ ،‬وهو الذي‬
‫ويمر بجزء الشمس‪ ،‬وينتهي ا ٕلى نقطة سمت الرأس‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ابتدأ منه العدد‪ ،‬على االٔفق‪،‬‬
‫ي عدد موقَّع عليه‪ ،‬فذلك‬‫ي جزء وقع من أجزاء الربع على جزء الشمس؛ وأ ّ‬‫وانظر أ ّ‬
‫‪/‬و ‪69‬ب‪ /‬العدد هو أجزاء االرتفاع في ذلك ‪/‬و‪ /‬الوقت وفي ذلك البلد‪.‬‬

‫الباب الرابع والخمسون‪ :‬في معرفة االٔوتاد االٔربعة بالكرة‪.‬‬

‫‪730‬‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاستخرج االرتفاع على ما ذكرت في الباب الذي قبل هذا‪ .‬ث ّم انظر‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪114‬ا‪ /‬ما وقع على أفق المشرق من ‪/‬ن‪ /‬أجزاء دائرة البروج فهو الطالع‪ ،‬وما وقع تحت حلقة‬
‫نصف النهار من أجزاء دائرة البروج فهو وسط السماء‪ ،‬وما وقع تحت أفق المغرب‬

‫ا‪ :‬لربع[ و ز‪ :‬أربع‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 716‬ن‪ :‬مساوية[ و ز‪ :‬متساوية‬ ‫‪ 713‬ف‪ :‬في الميل[ و ز‪ :‬والميل‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 718‬ب‪ :‬الثقبتين اللتين[‬ ‫‪ 717‬ف‪ :‬على تسعين[ و ز‪ :‬على سبعين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬بتسعين‬ ‫ن‪ :‬لنصف‬
‫مضيا‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬نصبا )في غير مكانه(‬
‫ً‬ ‫نصيا‪ ،‬ز‪:‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫‪ 719‬ب‪ :‬نصبا[ و‪:‬‬ ‫و‪ :‬اللىىىين‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬اللبنين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ثقبتين‬
‫ز ن‪ :‬وعلّم[ و‪ :‬واعلّم‬ ‫‪ 724‬ن‪ :‬واقلع[ و ز‪ :‬واقع‬ ‫‪ 721‬ن‪ :‬أو غيره[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 731‬ن‪ :‬فهو…‪ 732‬البروج[ و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫‪ 726‬إلى[ و‪2×:‬‬ ‫‪ 725‬ا‪ :‬صحيحا[ و ز ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 732‬ن‪ :‬المغرب[ و ز‪ :‬المغارب‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط‪ ،‬و ز‪– :‬‬ ‫ب‪ :‬حلقة[ ن‪:‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪213‬‬
‫‪221‬‬

‫فهو الغارب‪ ،‬وما وقع تحت حلقة نصف النهار من أجزاء دائرة البروج تحت االٔرض‬
‫فهو وتد االٔرض‪.‬‬

‫‪735‬‬ ‫الباب ‪/‬و‪ /‬الخامس والخمسون‪ :‬في استخراج االٔوتاد الباقية‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪70‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الزمانية في ذلك‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاستخرج الطالع واعرفه‪ ،‬واعرف أجزاء الساعات‬
‫الزمانية من أجزاء فلك‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ور ّد الطالع ا ٕلى أسفل بقدر أجزاء ساعتين من الساعات‬
‫اليوم‪ُ .‬‬
‫مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وانظر الجزء الذي وقع تحت حلقة نصف النهار من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪،‬‬
‫فهو التاسع‪ .‬ث ّم ُر ّد الجزء الذي على أفق المشرق بقدر أجزاء ساعتين أخريين‪ ،‬وانظر‬
‫ور ّد الطالع إلى أفق ‪740‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪70‬ب‪ /‬للجزء ‪/‬و‪ /‬الذي وقع تحت حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬فهو الثامن‪ُ .‬‬
‫الزمانية من‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وحط جزء الغارب إلى أسفل بقدر أجزاء ساعتين من الساعات‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫المشرق‬
‫أجزاء فلك مع ّدل النهار‪ ،‬وانظر ا ٕلى الجزء الذي وقع تحت حلقة نصف النهار من‬
‫يضا‬ ‫ّ‬
‫حط الجزء الذي على أفق المغرب أ ً‬ ‫أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬فهو الحادي عشر‪ .‬ث ّم‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬فهو‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫بقدر أجزاء ساعتين زمانيتين أخريين‪ ،‬وانظر ما وقع تحت‬
‫‪745‬‬ ‫الثاني عشر‪ .‬فيخرج لك باقي البيوت‪ ،‬الٔن الطالع نظير ‪/‬و‪ /‬السابع‪ ،‬والثاني نظير‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪71‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الثامن‪ ،‬والثالث نظير التاسع‪ ،‬والرابع نظير العاشر‪ ،‬والخامس نظير الحادي عشر‪،‬‬
‫والسادس نظير الثاني عشر‪.‬‬

‫ٔي‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت وا ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار في ا ّ‬ ‫الباب السادس والخمسون‪ :‬في استخراج‬
‫وقت أردت‪.‬‬

‫‪750‬‬ ‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فخذ ارتفاع الشمس على ما سبق‪ ،‬واعرف الطالع‪ .‬ف ٕاذا فعلت ذلك‪،‬‬
‫ل ما فيها من الرسوم ‪/‬و‪ /‬مسامتا لنظيره‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪114‬ب‪ /‬فقد وضعت الكرة ‪/‬ن‪ /‬وضع الفلك‪ ،‬وصار ك ّ‬
‫‪/‬و ‪71‬ب‪/‬‬

‫‪ 735‬ا ب ل‪ :‬االٔوتاد الباقية[ و ز‪ :‬باقي المراكز‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬البيوت الباقية‬ ‫ّ‬

‫خط‬ ‫‪ 733‬ن‪ :‬حلقة[ و ز‪:‬‬
‫وحط[ و ز‪ :‬وخطّ‬‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 741‬ن‪:‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫‪ 740‬ن‪ :‬حلقة[ و ز‪ :‬خط‬ ‫‪ 737‬ن‪ :‬من‪… 1‬الزمانيّة[ و ز‪ :‬زمانية‬
‫خط‬‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 742‬ن‪ :‬حلقة[ و ز‪:‬‬ ‫ا‪ :‬من‪ 742… 2‬النهار‪ [1‬و ز ن‪– :‬‬ ‫ن‪ :‬من‪… 1‬الزمانيّة[ و ز‪ :‬زمانية‬
‫‪ 744‬ا‪ :‬زمانيتين أخريين[‬ ‫ّ‬
‫وخط‬ ‫ّ‬
‫حط[ و ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 743‬ن‪ّ :‬‬
‫ثم‬ ‫ا‪ :‬من…‪ 743‬البروج[ و ز ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 750‬ب‪ :‬ارتفاع الشمس[ و ز ن‪ :‬االرتفاع‬ ‫فهو[ ن‪ + :‬البيت‬ ‫و ز‪ :‬أخريين زمانية‪ ،‬ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 751‬ن‪ :‬ك ّ‬
‫ل ما[ و ز‪ :‬كلما‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪222‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬
‫‪214‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬

‫مما في السماء‪ .‬ف ٕاذا خططت في االٔرض خطّا على استقامة قطر حلقة نصف النهار‪،‬‬
‫خط نصف النهار في االٔرض في ذلك الموضع‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫كان ذلك‬

‫ٔي بلد ووقت شئت‪.‬‬

‫الباب السابع والخمسون‪ :‬في معرفة سمت القبلة في ا ّ‬
‫‪755‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار على ما عرفت ⟩من⟨ قبل‪ .‬واعرف‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاستخرج‬
‫ي جهة‬ ‫االختالف بين المدينة التي أنت فيها وبين مكة في الطول‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬وانظر في أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪72‬ا‪/‬‬

‫خط نصف النهار في تلك الجهة بقدر تلك االٔجزاء من حلقة االٔفق‪،‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫هو‪ ،‬فع ّد من‬
‫وعلّم على الموضع الذي انتهى ا ٕليه العدد‪ .‬وأخر ِْج في االٔرض خطّا من مركز حلقة‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط القبلة في ذلك البلد‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬
‫الخط هو‬ ‫الكرسي السفالنية مسامتا لتلك العالمة‪ ،‬فذلك‬

‫‪760‬‬ ‫ٔي كوكب شئت من‬ ‫الباب الثامن والخمسون‪ :‬في استخراج موضع القمر وا ّ‬
‫‪/‬و ‪72‬ب‪ /‬الكواكب المتحيّرة في الليلة التي يمكنك أن ت ٔاخذ فيها ‪/‬و‪ /‬أعظم ارتفاعه‪.‬‬

‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارصد القمر أو الكوكب المتحيّر الذي تريد‪ ،‬حتّى تعرف أعظم‬
‫ارتفاعه باالٔسطرالب‪ ،‬أو بربع دائرة‪ ،‬أو بغيرهما‪ .‬ث ّم ّ‬
‫تعرف ارتفاع بعض الكواكب‬
‫المرسومة على الكرة‪ ،‬وتعلّم على عدد ارتفاعه في أجزاء حلقة الربع‪ ،‬وضع طرف‬
‫‪765‬‬ ‫الربع الموقّع عليه "تسعين" على نقطة سمت الرأس‪ ،‬وطرفة الموقّع عليه "واحد" على‬
‫حلقة االٔفق‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة والربع‪ ،‬بعد أن يكون طرفه ‪/‬و‪ /‬على نقطة سمت الرأس‪،‬‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪73‬ا‪/‬‬

‫حتّى يقع الكوكب الذي أخذت ارتفاعه تحت العالمة التي علّمت على الربع‪ .‬ث ّم‬
‫ي جزء وقع تحت حلقة نصف النهار من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬فذلك الجزء هو‬
‫انظر أ ّ‬
‫‪/‬ن ‪115‬ا‪ /‬الذي فيه القمر أو الكوكب ‪/‬ن‪ /‬المتحيّر الذي أخذت ارتفاعه في ذلك الوقت‪.‬‬

‫‪ 759‬ن‪ :‬السفالنية[ و ز‪ :‬السفلي‬ ‫‪ 758‬ز ن‪ :‬وعلّم[ و‪ :‬واعلم‬ ‫‪ 757‬ن‪ :‬من‪ [2‬و ز‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 765‬ن‪ :‬واحد[ و ز‪ :‬واحدا‬ ‫‪ 763‬ن‪ :‬بربع[ و ز‪ :‬يرفع‬ ‫‪ 762‬ن‪ :‬الكوكب[ و ز‪ :‬الكواكب‬
‫‪ 769‬ن‪ :‬أو[ و ز‪ :‬و‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط‬ ‫‪ 768‬ن‪ :‬حلقة[ و ز‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 766‬ز ن‪ :‬والربع[ و‪ :‬والرابع‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 33‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪215‬‬
‫‪223‬‬

‫‪770‬‬ ‫ٔي كوكب شئت من‬ ‫الباب التاسع والخمسون‪ :‬في استخراج عرض القمر أو ا ّ‬
‫المتحيرة في الليلة التي ‪/‬و‪ /‬يمكنك أن ت ٔاخذ فيها أت ّم ارتفاعه‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪73‬ب‪ /‬الكواكب‬

‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاعرف الجزء الذي هو فيه من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬كما علمت في‬
‫الباب الذي قبل هذا‪ ،‬وتعلّم عليه‪ .‬واعرف أعظم ارتفاعه ‪/‬ز‪ /‬وجهته‪ ،‬وع ّد من أجزاء‬ ‫‪/‬ز ‪8‬ا‪/‬‬

‫خط نصف النهار في جهة ارتفاعه بقدر أجزاء ارتفاعه‪ ،‬وتعلّم حيث انتهى‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫حلقة‬
‫ثم أ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير الجزء الذي علّمت عليه من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬وهو ‪775‬‬
‫العدد‪ّ .‬‬
‫ي جزء‬ ‫خط نصف ‪/‬و‪ /‬النهار‪ ،‬وانظر تحت أ ّ‬‫ّ‬ ‫المتحير‪ ،‬تحت‬
‫ّ‬ ‫جزء القمر أو الكوكب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪74‬ا‪/‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار؛ ف ٕان وقع تحت الجزء الذي كنت علّمت عليه‪،‬‬ ‫يقع من أجزاء‬
‫المتحير ال عرض له البتّ�ة‪ ،‬وأن مسيره على وسط فلك‬
‫ّ‬ ‫فاعلم أن القمر أو الكوكب‬
‫ي جهة وقع‪ ،‬وع ّد االٔجزاء التي بين الجزء‬‫البروج‪ .‬و ا ٕن وقع ناحية عنه‪ ،‬فانظر في أ ّ‬
‫الذي وقع تحته وبين العالمة التي كنت علّمت‪ ،‬فتلك االٔجزاء هي عرض القمر أو ‪780‬‬

‫خط فلك‬‫ّ‬ ‫المتحير في تلك الليلة ‪/‬و‪ /‬في الجهة التي وقعت االٔجزاء فيها عن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪74‬ب‪ /‬الكوكب‬
‫البروج‪.‬‬

‫الباب الستون‪ :‬في معرفة خسوف القمر‪ٕ ،‬ان كان يقع في الشهر الذي أنت فيه‪.‬‬

‫إذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاعرف عرض القمر في ليلة الثالث عشر كما عرفت في الباب الذي‬
‫‪785‬‬ ‫قبل هذا‪ .‬ف ٕان كان ال عرض له بتّ�ة‪ ،‬وأت ّم ارتفاعه في تلك الليلة يقع على جزء من‬
‫أجزاء فلك البروج‪ ،‬فاعلم أنه ينخسف في ذلك الشهر؛ و ا ٕن كان له عرض أكثر‬
‫‪/‬و‪ /‬من جزء واحد وأربع دقائق‪ ،‬فاعلم أنه ال ينخسف في ذلك الشهر‪ ،‬ف ٕان كان‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪75‬ا‪/‬‬

‫ل من جزء وأربع دقائق‪ ،‬ف ٕانه ينخسف ال محالة‪.‬‬

‫عرضه أق ّ‬

‫‪ 784‬ن‪ :‬الثالث عشر[ و‪ :‬ثلثة‬ ‫‪ 780‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‬ ‫‪ 771‬ن‪ :‬الكواكب[ و ز‪– :‬‬
‫عشرة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬ثلثة عشر‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪224‬‬
‫‪216‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪/‬ن ‪115‬ب‪ /‬الباب ‪/‬ن‪ /‬الحادي والستون‪ :‬في معرفة كسوف الشمس إن كان يقع في الشهر‬
‫‪790‬‬ ‫الذي أنت فيه‪.‬‬

‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاعرف عرض القمر‪ ،‬كما وصفنا فيما تق ّدم‪ ،‬في يوم سبعة وعشرين‬
‫من الشهر‪ .‬ف ٕان وقع أعظم ارتفاعه على جزء من دائرة البروج‪ ،‬ف ٕان الشمس تنكسف‬
‫‪/‬و ‪75‬ب‪ /‬ال محالة‪ .‬و إن لم يقع ‪/‬و‪ /‬على جزئه وكان له عرض‪ ،‬فاعرف جهة العرض‪ ،‬وانظر‬
‫ل من جزء واحد‬ ‫شمالي؛ ف ٕان كان جهة عرضه شماليّة وكان عرضه أق ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫جنوبي هو أم‬
‫ّ‬
‫وسبع وثالثين دقيقة‪ ،‬فاعلم أن الشمس تنكسف ال محالة في ذلك الشهر‪ .‬و ا ٕن كان ‪795‬‬

‫عرضه أكثر من جزء واحد وسبع وثالثين دقيقة‪ ،‬فاعلم أنها ال تنكسف في ذلك‬
‫ل من سبع وأربعين دقيقة‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن الشمس‬
‫الشهر‪ .‬و إن كان عرضه جنوبيّا وكان أق ّ‬
‫تنكسف‪ ،‬ال محالة‪ .‬و ا ٕن كان ‪/‬و‪ /‬عرض القمر أكثر من سبع وأربعين دقيقة في‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪76‬ا‪/‬‬

‫الجنوب‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن الشمس ال تنكسف في ذلك الشهر‪.‬‬

‫‪800‬‬ ‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب الثابتة التي‬

‫الباب الثاني والستون‪ :‬في معرفة موضع ا ّ‬
‫ليست مرسومة في الكرة من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪.‬‬

‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فارصد الكوكب الذي تريد معرفة جزئه من أجزاء دائرة البروج حتّى‬
‫وتعرف ارتفاع بعض الكواكب المرسومة على الكرة في ذلك‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫يصير في أت ّم ارتفاعه‪،‬‬
‫‪/‬و ‪76‬ب‪ /‬الوقت‪ .‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير ‪/‬و‪ /‬الكوكب على جزء ارتفاعه من أجزاء الربع‪ ،‬كما‬
‫خط نصف ‪805‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫ي جزء يقع من أجزاء دائرة البروج تحت حلقة‬
‫علمت فيما تق ّدم‪ ،‬وانظر أ ّ‬
‫النهار‪ ،‬فذلك الجزء من أجزاء دائرة البروج هو جزء ذلك الكوكب الثابت الذي‬
‫أخذت أ ّ‬
‫تم ارتفاعه‪.‬‬

‫‪ 791‬ز‪ :‬تق ّدم[‬ ‫‪ 789‬ا‪ :‬الشهر…‪ 790‬فيه[ و ز‪ :‬ذلك الشهر‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬الشهر الذي نحن فيه كسوف‬
‫ا‪ :‬يوم…‪ 792‬الشهر[ و ز‪ :‬سبعة وعشرين‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬اليوم التاسع والعشرون‬ ‫و‪ :‬نقدم‪ ،‬ن‪ :‬ىقدم‬
‫‪ 800‬ن‪ :‬التي…‪ 801‬مرسومة[ و ز‪ :‬الغير المرسومة‬ ‫‪ 796‬في[ و‪2× :‬‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪APPENDIX 3 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪217‬‬
‫‪225‬‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب الثابتة‬

‫الباب الثالث والستون‪ :‬في استخراج عرض ا ّ‬
‫التي ليست مرسومة على الكرة‪.‬‬

‫‪810‬‬ ‫تم ارتفاعه وجهته‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬وتعلّم على درجته من أجزاء حلقة‬
‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاعرف أ ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪77‬ا‪/‬‬

‫وتعرف جزءه من أجزاء دائرة البروج‪ ،‬كما فعلت في‬

‫ّ‬ ‫نصف النهار في تلك الجهة‪،‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ .‬ف ٕان وقع‬ ‫الباب الذي قبل هذا‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزؤه على‬
‫خط نصف النهار ‪/‬ن‪ /‬على جزء أعظم ارتفاعه الذي كنت‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬ن ‪116‬ا‪ /‬جزؤه من تحت حلقة‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط وسط البروج؛ و ا ٕن‬ ‫علّمت عليه‪ ،‬ف ٕا ّن ذلك الكوكب ال عرض له‪ ،‬و إن ّه على دائرة‬
‫‪815‬‬ ‫ي ناحية وقع‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمة التي كنت علّمت‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪77‬ب‪ /‬وقع ناحية عنه‪/ ،‬و‪ /‬فانظر في أ ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو عرض ذلك‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫عليها وبين جزئه من أجزاء‬
‫الكوكب في تلك الجهة‪.‬‬

‫ٔي كوكب شئت من الكواكب الثابتة التي‬ ‫الباب الرابع والستون‪ :‬في معرفة بعد ا ّ‬
‫ليست مرسومة في الكرة عن فلك مع ّدل النهار‪.‬‬

‫‪820‬‬ ‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فاعرف أت ّم ارتفاعه في جهته‪ ،‬وع ّد مثله من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار‬
‫في ‪/‬و‪ /‬تلك الجهة‪ ،‬وتعلّم حيث انتهى عددك‪ .‬ث ّم اعرف جزء ذلك الكوكب‪ ،‬كما‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪78‬ا‪/‬‬

‫علمت فيما قبل‪ ،‬وأ ِد ْر الكرة حتّى يصير جزؤه من أجزاء فلك البروج تحت حلقة‬
‫َ‬
‫ّ‬
‫وخط مع ّدل النهار من أجزاء‬ ‫ّ‬
‫خط نصف النهار‪ ،‬وع ّد ما بين العالمة التي علّمت‬
‫ّ‬
‫خط مع ّدل النهار‪.‬‬ ‫حلقة نصف النهار‪ ،‬فما خرج فهو أجزاء بعد ذلك الكوكب عن‬

‫‪ 810‬درجته[ و ز‪ + :‬مثله‬ ‫‪ 809‬ن‪ :‬التي…مرسومة[ و‪ :‬الغير مرسومة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬الغير المرسومة‬

‫‪ 816‬ب‪ :‬عليها وبين[‬ ‫‪ 815‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‬ ‫‪ 814‬ز ن‪ :‬علّمت[ و‪ :‬اعلمت‬
‫‪ 818‬ن‪ :‬التي…‪ 819‬مرسومة[ و‪ :‬الغير‬ ‫ن‪ :‬جزئه… أجزاء[ و ز‪ :‬وجزئه من االٔجزاء في‬ ‫و ز ن‪– :‬‬
‫‪ 823‬ا‪ :‬العالمة[ و ز ن‪ :‬العالمتين‬ ‫ّ‬
‫‪ 819‬عن[ و ز‪ + :‬خطئ‬ ‫مرسومة‪ ،‬ز‪ :‬الغير المرسومة‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 ‫‪226‬‬
‫‪218‬‬ ‫‪APPENDIX 3‬‬
‫‪APPENDIX‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪825‬‬ ‫ٔي كوكب شئت ‪/‬و‪ /‬من الكواكب‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪78‬ب‪ /‬الباب الخامس والستون‪ :‬في معرفة البعد بين ا ّ‬
‫ٔي بلد شئت‪.‬‬
‫التي ليست مرسومة على الكرة وبين نقطة سمت الرأس في ا ّ‬
‫تم ارتفاع الكوكب الذي‬‫ا ٕذا أردت ذلك‪ ،‬فعلّم على نقطة سمت الرأس‪ ،‬واعرف أ ّ‬
‫تريد معرفة ميله عن سمت الرأس‪ .‬وع ّد من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار مثل أعظم‬
‫ارتفاعه‪ ،‬وعلّم حيث انتهى عددك من أجزاء حلقة نصف النهار‪ .‬وع ّد ما بين‬
‫‪830‬‬ ‫العالمتين من االٔجزاء‪ ،‬فما خرج لك فهو أجزاء ميل ذلك الكوكب عن سمت الرأس‬
‫في ذلك البلد‪.‬‬
‫آخر كتاب العمل بالكرة لقسطا بن لوقا‬

‫البغدادي بن كدكك المعىموي واللّٰه أعلم‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪/‬و‪ /‬أتى على آخره سي أيلبك‬ ‫‪/‬و ‪79‬ا‪/‬‬

‫‪ 827‬ز ن‪ :‬فعلّم[‬ ‫‪ 826‬ن‪ :‬التي ليست[ و ز‪ :‬الغير‬ ‫‪ 825‬ز ن‪ :‬والستون[ و‪ :‬والخمسون‬

‫‪ 832‬و‪ :‬آخر…‪ 833‬أعلم[ ن‪ :‬ىحر وبألله التوفيق‬ ‫‪ 829‬ز ن‪ :‬وعلّم[ و‪ :‬واعلم‬ ‫و‪ :‬فاعلم‬
‫‪ 833‬و‪ :‬أتى… أعلم[ ز‪ :‬البي السقر بن بليل البغدادي واللّٰه أعلم‬

‫©‬ ‫‪FHG‬‬
‫‪This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0‬‬
‫‪International License‬‬
 Bibliography

Manuscripts studied
Compendium of texts on mathematics and optics mostly by Alhazen (‫الهيثم‬ ‫)ابن‬
British Library: Oriental Manuscripts, IO Islamic 1270

Qusṭā ibn Lūqā, On the Use of the Celestial Globe

A: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ḥalīm ʿarabī 7
B: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, K ʿarabī 3824,13
C: London, British Library, Stowe Orient 10,6
D: London, British Library, Add. 9598,10
E: London, British Library, Add. 7490,7
F: Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania, LJS 412,1
H: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Esad Efendi 2015,1
I: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Esad Efendi 2015,3
K: Damascus, National Library, Al-Ẓāhirīya 4494
L: Cairo, Central Library of Islamic Manuscripts, 3071,7
M: Princeton, University Library, Garrett 3168Y,1
N: Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III 3505,5
O: Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III, 3475,1
R: Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France, arabe 7244,1
S: Paris, Bibliothèque nationale de France, arabe 2544,11
T: Tirana, National Library of Albania, Dr 6/23E,11
U: Hydarabad, Salar Jung, kalām 136,2
Z: Meshhed, Holy Shrine, 5595,1

al-Ṣūfī, On the Use of the Celestial Globe

Istanbul, Topkapi Saray, Ahmet III 3505,1

Dhāt al-kursī (attributed to Ptolemy)

A: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ṭalʿat ʿarabī 189,1
B: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, K ʿarabī 3844,1
J: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, K ʿarabī 3844,8
D: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt M ʿarabī 101
H: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Riyāḍiyāt Taymūr ʿarabī 106,11
U: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ṭalʿat ʿarabī 202,2
Z: Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt M ʿarabī 106,2
Ḥ: Riyadh, University Library, 1007, Falak 520 RB
Ṭ: Tirana, National Library of Albania, 523.11 Dr 6/23D
I: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Haci Mahmud Efendi 5688,5
K: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Laleli 2135,4

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
220 BIBLIOGRAPHY

L: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Pertevniyal 971 - 980,1

M: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Süleymaniye 1037,1
N: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Ayasofya 2623,1
Sh: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Bağdatlı Vehbi 2063,3
T: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Bağdatlı Vehbi 2124,6
Th: Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Yazma Bağişlar 1353,4
S: Istanbul, Beyazit State Library, Veliyüddin Efendi 3194,9
O: Princeton, University Library, Garrett 3168Y,2
F: Princeton, University Library, Garrett 1066Y,3
R: Princeton, University Library, Islamic Manuscripts New Series 243,13
Ṣ: Berlin, SBPK, Landberg 131
Kh: Rabat, Bibliothèque Nationale du Royaume du Maroc, D 162,4

Treatise on the Globe with Stand in 13 chapters

Cairo, al-Azhar Library, Ḥalīm, Falak wa mīqāt 328

Akhawayn, Problems on the Science of Astronomy

Vienna, Austrian National Library, Cod. A. F. 418 (formerly Arabic 1422)
Kütahya, Vahidpaşa Library 793

Akhawayn, Notes on a Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ

Manisa, Provincial Public Library 1697

Akhawayn, Note on the Sharḥ al-tajrīd

Cairo, al-Azhar Library, Tawḥīd 321,2

Mīrim Chelebī (?) or Akhawayn (?), Risālat al-rubʿ al-jāmiʿa

Manisa, Provincial Public Library 6591,6
Istanbul, Süleymaniye Library, Aşir Efendi 470,9
Istanbul, Millet Library, Feyzullah Efendi 2178,2

Literature
Abū-l-Fidāʾ, Abulfedae Annales muslemici arabice et latine, J. G. C. Adler and
J. J. Reiske (eds), 5 vols, Copenhagen (Hafnia): Thiele, 1789–1794.
Ahlwardt, Wilhelm, Verzeichnis der arabischen Handschriften, vol. V, in Die
Handschriften-Verzeichnisse der Königlichen Bibliothek zu Berlin, Berlin:
Asher, 1893.
ʿAlī ibn ʿĪsā, ‘Das Astrolab und sein Gebrauch’, Carl Schoy (transl.), Isis
9 (1927), pp. 239–54.
ʿAlī ibn ʿĪsā, ‘L’astrolabe et la manière de s’en servir’ – ‘‫’كتــاب العمــل بال�أصطــرلاب‬,
L. Cheikho (ed.), Al-Mashriq 16 (1913), pp. 29–46.
Anagnostakis, Christopher, The Arabic Version of Ptolemyʼs Planisphaerium,
PhD dissertation, Yale University, 1984.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 BIBLIOGRAPHY 221

Autolyci, De sphaera quae movetur liber. De ortibus et occasibus libri duo,

Friedrich Otto Hultsch (ed.), Leipzig: Teubner, 1885.
Autolycos de Pitane, La sphère en mouvement. Levers et couchers héliaques. Tes-
timonia, Germaine Aujac (ed. transl.), Paris: Les Belles Lettres, 1979.
Aujac, Germaine, Géminos. Introduction aux Phénomènes, Paris: Les Belles
Lettres, 1975.
al-Baghdādī, Ismāʿīl Bāshā, Hadiyya al-ʿārifīn asmāʾ al-muʾallifīn wa āthār
al-muṣanifīn (The Gift of Those Who Know the Names of the Authors and
the Works / Remains of the Writers), Beirut: Dar Iḥyaʾ al-turāth al-ʿarabī,
1951, Istanbul: Milli eğitimi Basımevi, 1951.
Bašagić, Safvet B., Popis orijentalnih rukopisa moje biblioteke (List of Oriental
Manuscripts in my Library), Sarajevo: Zemaljska štamparija, 1917.
al-Bīrūnī, The Chronology of Ancient Nations, Edward Sachau (transl.), Lon-
don: Oriental Translation Fund, 1879.
al-Bīrūnī, Chronologie orientalischer Völker von Albêrûnî, Eduard Sachau (ed.),
Leipzig: F. A. Brockhaus / Otto Harrassowitz, 1923.
Blachère, Régis, Ṣāʿid al Andalusī. Kitāb Ṭabaḳāt al-umam (Livre des catégories
des nations), Paris: Larose, 1935.
Brockelmann, Carl, Geschichte der Arabischen Litteratur, vol. II, Berlin: Emil
Felber, 1902.
Brockelmann, Carl, Geschichte der Arabischen Litteratur. Zweiter Supplement
Band, Leiden: Brill, 1938.
Celentano, Giuseppe, L’epistola di al-Kindī sulla sfera armillare, Napoli: Istitu-
to orientale di Napoli, 1982.
Charette, François, Mathematical Instrumentation in Fourteenth-Century Egypt
and Syria: The Illustrated Treatise of Najm al-Dīn al-Miṣrī, Leiden-Boston:
Brill, 2003.
Charette, François, and Petra Schmidl, ‘Al-Khwārizmī and Practical Astronomy
in Ninth-Century Baghdad. The Earliest Extant Corpus of Texts in Ara-
bic on the Astrolabe and Other Portable Instruments’, SCIAMVS 5 (2004),
pp. 101–98.
Cureton, William, and Charles Rieu, Catalogus Codicum Manuscriptorum Ori-
entalium qui in Museo Britannico asservantur, vol. II: Codices Arabicos am-
plectens, London: Impensis Curatorum Musei Britannici, 1852.
Düring, Ingemar, Die Harmonielehre des Klaudios Ptolemaios [Göteborgs Hög-
skolas Årsskrift 36,1], Göteborg: Elanders, 1930.
Edwards, Don Raymond, Ptolemy’s Περὶ ἀναλήμματος – an Annotated Tran-
scription of Moerbeke’s Latin Translation and of the Surviving Greek Frag-
ments, with an English Version and Commentary, PhD dissertation, Brown
University, 1984.
Elsie, Robert, A Biographical Dictionary of Albanian History, London-New York:
I. B. Tauris, 2012 (in association with The Centre of Albanian Studies).

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
222 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Evans, James, and J. Lennart Berggren, Geminosʼs Introduction to the Phenome-

na. A Translation and Study of a Hellenistic Survey of Astronomy, Princeton:
Princeton University Press, 2006.
al-Farghānī, On the Astrolabe, Richard Lorch (ed. transl.), Stuttgart: Franz Stei-
ner Verlag, 2005.
Fecht, Rudolf, Theodosii de habitationibus liber. De diebus et noctibus libri duo
[Abhandlungen der Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen. Phil.-
hist. Klasse. Neue Folge. Bd. 19/4], Berlin: Weidmann, 1927.
Flügel, Die arabischen, persischen und turkischen Handschriften der Kaiserlich-
Königlichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien, vol. II, Vienna: K. K. Hof- und Staats-
druckerei, 1865.
Gökyay, Orhan Şaik, ‘Kātib Čelebi’, in The Encyclopaedia of Islam. New Editi-
on, vol. IV, Leiden: Brill, 1997, pp. 760–62.
Goldstein, Bernard R., The Arabic Version of Ptolemy’s Planetary Hypotheses
[Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, New Series 57,4], Phila-
delphia: American Philosophical Society, 1967.
Grupe, Dirk, The Latin Reception of Arabic Astronomy and Cosmology in
Mid-Twelfth-Century Antioch, PhD Dissertation, University of London,
2013.
Gysembergh, Victor, Alexander Jones, Emanuel Zingg, Pascal Cotte and Sal-
vatore Apicella, ‘Ptolemy’s Treatise on the Meteoroscope Recovered’, in Ar-
chive for the History of Exact Sciences (2023).
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00407-022-00302-w
al-Ḥalwajī, ʿAbd al-Sattār and Ḥabīb Allāh ʿAẓīmī, ‘Catalogue of Islamic Man-
uscripts in the National Library of Albania, Tirana’, in Catalogues of Islamic
Manuscripts Series: III, European Collections – Albania, London: Al-Furqān
Islamic Heritage Foundation, 1997.
Hamm, Elizabeth Anne, Ptolemy’s Planetary Theory: An English Translation of
Book One, Part A of the Planetary Hypotheses with Introduction and Com-
mentary, PhD Dissertation, University of Toronto, 2011.
Heiberg, Johan Ludvig, and Evangelos Stamatis, Archimedis opera omnia cum
commentariis Eutocii, vol. III, Leipzig: Teubner, 1915.
Hephaestion Thebanus, Apotelesmatica, David Pingree (ed.), vol. I: Hephaes-
tionis Thebani apotelesmaticorum libri tres, vol. II: Hephaestionis Thebani
apotelesmaticorum epitomae quattuor, Leipzig: Teubner, 1973–1974.
Hitti, Philip, Nabih Amin Faris and Buṭrus ʿAbd-al-Malik, Descriptive Catalog
of the Garrett Collection of Arabic Manuscripts in the Princeton University
Library, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1938.
Ibn Abī Uṣaybiʿa, ʿUyūn al-anbāʾ fī ṭabaqāt al-aṭibbāʾ, August Müller (ed.),
2 vols, Cairo: al-Maṭbaʿa al-Wahbiyya, 1882. Reprinted Frankfurt am Main:
Institute for the History of Arabic-Islamic Science, 1995.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 BIBLIOGRAPHY 223

Ibn Abī Uṣaybiʿa, History of Physicians, Lothar Kopf (transl.), Jerusa-

lem: Institute of Asian and African Studies, 1971; available online at
http://www.tertullian.org/fathers/index.htm#Ibn_Abi_Usaibia.
Ibn al-ʿImād, Shadharāt al-dhahab fī akhbār man dhahaba (Nuggets of Gold in
the Chronicles of Those Who Have Passed Away), ʿAbd al-Qādir al-Arnāūʾūṭ
and Maḥmūd al-Arnāūʾūṭ (eds), 10 vols, Damascus-Beirut: Dār Ibn Kathīr,
1993.
Ibn Khallikān, Ibn Khallikanʼs Biographical Dictionary, Baron MacGuckin de
Slane (transl.), Paris: Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ire-
land, 1843–1871.
İhsanoğlu, Ekmeleddin (ed.), Osmanlı Astronomi Literatürü Tarihi (History of
Astronomy Literature during the Ottoman Period), vol. I, Istanbul: İslâm
Tarih, Sanat ve Kültür Araştırma Merkezi, 1997.
al-Jabartī, Merveilles biographiques et historiques, ou, Chroniques du cheikh Abd-
el-Rahman el Djabarti, Chefik Mansour, Abdulaziz Kalil, Gabriel Nicolas
Kalil and Iskender Ammoun (transl.), 9 vols, Le Caire: Imprimerie Natio-
nale, 1888–1896.
al-Jabartī,ʿAbd al-Raḥmān al-Jabartī’s History of Egypt: ʿAjāʾib al-āthār fī
ʼl-tarājim wa-l-akhbār, Thomas Philipp and Moshe Perlmann (ed.), D. Cre-
celius, Abd al-Malik, Ch. Wendell and M. Fishbein (transl.), 4 vols, Stutt-
gart: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1994.
von Jan, Karl, Musici scriptores graeci, Leipzig: Teubner, 1895. Reprinted
Hildesheim: Olms, 1962.
Jean Philopon, Traité de l’astrolabe, Claude Jarry (ed.), Paris: Les Belles Lettres,
2015.
Joannes Philoponus, ‘Joannis Alexandrini, cognomine Philoponi, de usu astro-
labii eiusque constructione libellus’, Heinrich Hase (ed.), Rheinisches Muse-
um für Philologie 6 (1839), pp. 127–71.
Jones, Alexander, ‘The Ancient Ptolemy’, in David Juste, Benno van Dalen,
Dag Nikolaus Hasse and Charles Burnett (eds), Ptolemy’s Science of the Stars
in the Middle Ages, Turnhout: Brepols, pp. 13–34.
Jones, Derek (ed.), Censorship: A World Encyclopedia, London-New York:
Routledge, 2015.
Kaḥḥāla, ʿUmar Riḍā, Muʿjam al-muʾallifīn (A Dictionary of Authors), 15 vols,
Beirut: Al-Muthanna Library – Dar ʾIḥyaʾ al-turāth al-ʿarabī, 1957. Online
available at https://archive.org/details/FP156027/mode/1up.
Kātip Çelebi / Ḥājjī Khalīfa, Kashf al-ẓunūn ʿan al-asāmī al-kutub wa’l-funūn.
Lexicon bibliographicum et encyclopaedicum a Mustafa ben Abdallah Katib
Jelebi dicto et nomine Haji Khalifa celebrato compositum, Gustav Flügel (ed.),
7 vols, London: Oriental Translation Fund, 1835–1858.
Kātip Çelebi / Ḥājjī Khalīfa, Keşf-el-zunun an asami ’l-kutub wa-’l-funun li-Mus-
tafa Ibn-Abdallah al-Qustantini ar-Rumi al-Hanafi Mulla Katib al-Galabi

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
224 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Haggi Halifa, Şerefettin Yaltkaya and Kilisli Rifat Bilge (eds), 2 vols, Istan-
bul: Maarif Matbaasi, 1941–1943.
Kātip Çelebi / Ḥājjī Khalīfa, Sullam al-wūṣūl īlā ṭabaqāt al-fuḥūl (The Ladder
of Elevation to the Lives of the Great and Famous by Generation), Ek-
meleddin İhsanoğlu, Maḥmūd ʿAbd al-Qādir al-Arnāūʾūṭ and Ṣāliḥ Saʿdāwī
Ṣāliḥ (eds), 6 vols, Istanbul: I.R.C.I.C.A. - Organization of the Islamic Con-
ference, 2010.
Kennedy, Edward S., ‘Parallax Theory in Islamic Astronomy’, Isis 47 (1956),
pp. 33–53. Reprinted in David A. King and Mary Helen Kennedy (eds),
Studies in the Islamic Exact Sciences by E. S. Kennedy, Colleagues and For-
mer Students, Beirut: American University of Beirut, 1983, pp. 164–84.
Kennedy, Edward S., ‘Al-Ṣūfī on the Celestial Globe’, Zeitschrift für Geschich-
te der Arabisch-Islamischen Wissenschaften 5 (1989), pp. 48–93. Reprinted
in Id., Astronomy and Astrology in the Medieval Islamic World, Aldershot:
Ashgate / Variorum, 1998, ch. III.
al-Khwārizmī, Die Verwendung des Astrolabs nach al Chwârizmî, Josef Frank
(transl.) [Abhandlungen zur Geschichte der Naturwissenschaften und der Me-
dizin 3], Erlangen: Mencke, 1922. Reprinted in Fuat Sezgin (ed.), Islamic
Mathematics and Astronomy, vol. IV, Frankfurt am Main: Institute for the
History of Arabic-Islamic Science, 1997, pp. 245–80.
King, David A., ‘Notes on the Sources for the History of Early Islamic Mathe-
matics’, Journal of the American Oriental Society 99 (1979), pp. 450–59.
King, David A., A Catalogue of the Cairo Scientific Manuscripts = A Catalogue
of the Scientific Manuscripts in the Egyptian National Library, 2 vols, Cairo:
General Egyptian Book Organization, 1981.
King, David A., al-Khwārizmī and New Trends in Mathematical Astronomy
in the Ninth Century, New York: The Hagop Kevorkian Center for Near
Eastern Studies, 1983.
King, David A., ‘Ḳibla, ii. Astronomical Aspects’, in The Encyclopaedia of Is-
lam. New Edition, vol. V, Leiden: Brill, 1986, pp. 83–88.
King, David A., ‘A Vetustissimus Arabic Treatise on the Quadrans Vetus’, Jour-
nal for the History of Astronomy 33 (2002), pp. 237–55.
Klamroth, Martin, ‘Über die Auszüge aus griechischen Schriftstellern bei al-
Ja‘qûbî’, Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 42 (1888),
pp. 1–44. Reprinted in Fuat Sezgin (ed.), Historiography and Classification
of Science in Islam, vol. XIII: The Reception and Assimilation of Greek and
Indian Science in Islam, Frankfurt am Main: Institute for the History of
Arabic-Islamic Science, 2005, pp. 37–182.
Kunitzsch, Paul, Arabische Sternnamen in Europa, Wiesbaden: Otto Harrasso-
witz, 1959.
Kunitzsch, Paul, and Richard Lorch, ʽTheodosius, De diebus et noctibus’, Suhayl
10 (2011), pp. 9–46.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 BIBLIOGRAPHY 225

Kunitzsch, Paul, and Richard Lorch, Theodosius, De habitationibus, Munich:

Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2011.
Lejeune, Albert, L’Optique de Claude Ptolémée dans la version latine d’après
l’arabe de l’émir Eugène de Sicile. Édition critique et exégétique, Louvain: Bi-
bliothèque de l’Université, 1956.
Lévi-Provençal, Evariste, Les manuscrits arabes de Rabat (Bibliotheque géné-
rale du Protectorat français au Maroc, premiere série), 1st ed., Paris: Leroux,
1921.
Lévi-Provençal, Évariste, Fihris al-Makhṭūṭāt al-ʿarabiyya al-maḥfūẓa fī
l-khizāna al-ʿāmma bi-l-Ribāṭ, vol. I, 2nd ed., Rabat: Al-Khizāna al-ʿāmma
li–l-kutub wa-l-wathāʾiq, 1997–1998.
Liddell, Henry George, and Robert Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon. Revised
and Augmented Throughout by Sir Henry Stuart Jones with the Assistance of
Roderick McKenzie, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1940.
Lorch, Richard, ‘Ibn al-Haytham’, in Encyclopædia Britannica. Retrieved from
http://www.britannica.com/biography/Ibn-al-Haytham.
Lorch, Richard, and Paul Kunitzsch: ‘Ḥabash al-Ḥāsib’s Book on the Sphere
and its Use’, Zeitschrift für Geschichte der Arabisch-Islamischen Wissenschaften
2 (1985), pp. 68–98.
Lorch, Richard, and José Martínez Gázquez, ‘Qusta ben Luca. De sphera uolu-
bili’, Suhayl 5 (2005), pp. 9–62.
Maass, Ernst Wilhelm Theodor, Commentariorum in Aratum reliquiae, Berlin:
Weidmann, 1898.
Mach, Rudolf, Catalogue of Arabic Manuscripts (Yahuda Section) in the Garrett
Collection, Princeton University Library, Princeton: Princeton University
Press, 1977.
Mach, Rudolf, and Eric L. Ormsby, Handlist of Arabic Manuscripts (New Se-
ries) in the Princeton University Library, Princeton: Princeton University
Press, 1987.
Mancha, José L., ‘La versión alfonsí del Fī hayʾat al-ʿālam (De configuratione
mundi) de Ibn al-Hayṯam (Oxford, Canon. misc. 45, ff. 1r–56r)’, in Mercé
Comes, Honorino Mielgo and Julio Samsó (eds), ‘Ochava espera’ y ‘Astrofísi-
ca’. Textos y estudios sobre las fuentes árabes de la astronomía de Alfonso X,
Barcelona: Agencia Española de Cooperación Internacional, 1990, pp. 133–
207.
Manitius, Karl, Gemini Elementa Astronomiae, Leipzig: Teubner, 1898.
al-Maqqarī, Analectes sur l’histoire et la littérature des Arabes d’Espagne, 2 vols
in 4 parts, R. Dozy, G. Dugat, L. Krehl and W. Wright (eds), Leiden: Brill,
1855–1859.
al-Maqrīzī, Taqī al-Dīn Aḥmad ibn ʿAlī, Histoire des Sultans Mamlouks de
l’Égypte, M. Quatremère (transl.), 2 vols, Paris: Oriental Translation Fund,
1845.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
226 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Maraş, İbrahim, ʽTokatlı Molla Lütfi: Hayatı, eserleri ve felsefesi’ (His Life,
Works and Philosophical Thoughts), DÎVÂN İlmî Araştırmalar 14 (2003/1),
pp. 119–36.
Martorello, Franco, and Giuseppe Bezza, Aḥmad ibn Yusūf ibn al-Dāya. Com-
mento al Centiloquio tolemaico, Milano-Udine, 2013.
Maçoudi, Le livre de l’avertissement et de la révision, B. Carra de Vaux (transl.),
Paris: Imprimerie nationale, 1896.
al-Masʿūdī, Abū al-Ḥasan ʿAlī ibn al-Ḥusayn, Kitāb al-Tanbīh wa al-ishrāf,
M. J. de Goeje (ed.), Leiden: Brill, 1894.
al-Masʿūdī, Abū al-Ḥasan ʿAlī ibn al-Ḥusayn, Al-Tanbīh wa al-ishrāf, ʿAbd
Allāh Ismāʿīl al-Ṣāūī (ed.), Cairo: Dār al-Ṣāūī, 1938.
Mercier, Raymond, Πτολεμαίου Πρόχειροι κανόνες. Ptolemyʼs Handy Tables,
vol. Ib: Tables A1-A2: Transcription and Commentary, Leuven: Peeters,
2011.
Millás Vallicrosa, José María, Las traducciones orientales en los manuscritos de la
Biblioteca Catedral de Toledo, Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones
Científicas, 1942.
Mogenet, Joseph, Autolycus de Pitane. Histoire du texte suivie de l’édition cri-
tique des traités De la sphère en mouvement et Des levers et couchers, Louvain:
Publications Universitaires de Louvain, 1950.
Mogenet, Joseph, and Anne Tihon, Le Grand Commentaire de Théon d’Alexan-
drie aux Tables Faciles de Ptolémée, 3 vols [Studi e Testi 315, 340 and 390],
Vatican City: Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, 1985/1991/1999.
Morelon, Régis, ‘Fragment arabe du premier livre du Phaseis de Ptolémée’,
Journal for the History of Arabic Science 5 (1981), pp. 3–21.
Morelon, Régis, ‘La version arabe du Livre des Hypothèses de Ptolémée’, Mé-
langes de l’Institut dominicain d’Études orientales du Caire 21 (1993),
pp. 7–85.
al-Mubashshir ibn Fātik, Mukhtār al-ḥikam wa maḥāsin al-kalim (Choice
Maxims and Finest Sayings), ʿAbd al-Raḥman Badawī (ed.), Madrid: al-
Maʿhad al-Miṣrī lil-Dirāsāt al-Islāmiyya, 1955.
al-Nadīm, Kitāb al-Fihrist, Gustav Flügel, Johannes Roediger and August Muel-
ler (eds), 2 vols, Leipzig: Vogel, 1871–1872.
Necipoğlu, Gürlu, Cemal Kafadar and Cornell H. Fleischer (eds), Treasures of
Knowledge. An Inventory of the Ottoman Palace Library (1502/3–1503/4),
2 vols, Leiden-Boston: Brill, 2019.
North, John David, Horoscopes and History, London: The Warburg Institute,
University of London, 1986.
Nünlist, Tobias, Andreas Kaplony and Tobias Heinzelmann, Katalog der
Handschriften der Zentralbibliothek Zürich, vol. IV: Arabische, türkische und
persische Handschriften, Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2008.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 BIBLIOGRAPHY 227

Ocak, Ahmet Yaşar, Osmanlı toplumunda zındıklar ve mülhidler. 15–17. yüz-

yıllar, Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı, 1998.
Öztuna, Yılmaz, Büyük Osmanlı Tarihi: Osmanlı Devleti’nin siyasî, medenî,
kültür, teşkilât ve san’at tarihi, vol. X, Istanbul: Ötüken Neşriyat, 1994.
Paulus Alexandrinus, Pauli Alexandrini Elementa apotelesmatica, Emilie Boer
(ed.), Leipzig: Teubner, 1958.
Pellat, Charles, ‘al-Masʿūdī’, in The Encyclopaedia of Islam. New Edition, vol. VI,
Leiden: Brill, 1991, pp. 784–89.
Porphyrios, Kommentar zur Harmonielehre des Ptolemaios, Ingemar Düring
(ed.), [Göteborgs Högskolas Årsskrift 38,2], Göteborg: Elanders, 1932. Re-
printed Hildesheim: Olms, 1978.
Proclus, Procli Diadochi In primum Euclidis Elementorum librum commentarii,
Gottfried Friedlein (ed.), Leipzig: Teubner, 1873.
Proclus, Procli Diadochi Hypotyposis astronomicarum positionum, Karl Manitius
(ed.), Leipzig: Teubner, 1909. Reprinted Stuttgart: Teubner, 1974.
Pseudo-Ptolemy, Kαρπός [Claudii Ptolemaei Opera quae extant omnia, III,2,
pp. 37–61], Emilie Boer (ed.), Leipzig: Teubner, 1952. Second edition
1961.
Ptolemy, Claudii Ptolemaei Geographia, C. F. A. Nobbe (ed.), 3 vols, Leipzig:
Tauchnitz, 1843–1845. Reprinted Hildesheim: Olms, 1966.
Ptolemy, Claudii Ptolemaei Geographia, Karl Müller (ed.), 1 vol. in 2 parts,
Paris: Firmin-Didot, 1883–1901.
Ptolemy, Syntaxis mathematica [Claudii Ptolemaei opera quae exstant omnia I],
J. L. Heiberg (ed.), in 2 parts, Leipzig: Teubner, 1898–1903.
Ptolemy, Opera astronomica minora [Claudii Ptolemaei opera quae exstant om-
nia II], J. L. Heiberg (ed.), Leipzig: Teubner, 1907.
Ptolemy, Apotelesmatica [Claudii Ptolemaei opera quae exstant omnia III,1],
Franz Boll and Emilie Boer (eds), Leipzig: Teubner, 1940. Reprinted 1954.
Ptolemy, Περὶ κριτηρίου καὶ ἡγεμονικοῦ [Claudii Ptolemaei. Opera quae ex-
stant omnia, III,2, pp. 3–25], Friedrich Lammert (ed.), Leipzig: Teubner,
1952. Second edition 1961.
Ptolemy, Ἀποτελεσματικά [Claudii Ptolemaei opera quae exstant omnia III,1
(post F. Boll et Æ. Boer secundis curis)], Wolfgang Hübner (ed.), Stutt-
gart-Leipzig: Teubner, 1998.
Ptolemy, Klaudios Ptolemaios. Handbuch der Geographie. Griechisch – Deutsch,
Alfred Stückelberger and Gerd Grasshoff (eds), 2 vols, Basel: Schwabe, 2017
(corrected reprint edition of the original edition of 2006).
al-Qifṭī, ʿAlī ibn Yūsuf, Ibn al-Qifṭī’s Taʾrīḫ al-ḥukamāʾ, August Müller and
Julius Lippert (eds), Leipzig: Dieterich, 1903.
Rieu, Charles, Supplement to the Catalogue of the Arabic Manuscripts in the
British Museum, London: British Museum, 1894.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
228 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Rome, Adolphe, Commentaires de Pappus et de Théon d’Alexandrie sur l’Alma-

geste, 3 vols [Studi e Testi 54, 72 and 106], Roma: Biblioteca Apostolica
Vaticana, 1931/1936/1943.
Rosenfeld, Boris A., and Ekmeleddin İhsanoğlu, MAOSIC = Mathematicians,
Astronomers and other Scholars of Islamic Civilisation and their Works (7th–
19th c.), Istanbul: Research Centre for Islamic History, Art, and Culture,
2003.
Ṣāʿid l’Andalous, Abou Qāsim ibn, Kitāb Tabaqāt al-Umam ou Les catégories
des nations, Louis Cheikho (ed.), Beirut: Imprimerie Catholique, 1912.
Saliba, George, ‘Arabic Planetary Theories after the Eleventh Century AD’, in
Roshdi Rashed and Régis Morelon, Encyclopaedia of the History of Arabic
Science, vol. I, London-New York: Routledge, 1996, pp. 58–127.
Saliba, George, Islamic Science and the Making of the European Renaissance,
Cambridge, Mass.: The MIT Press, 2007.
Samsó, Julio, ‘Qustā ibn Lūqā and Alfonso X on the Celestial Globe’, Suhayl
5 (2005), pp. 63–79.
Savage-Smith, Emilie, Islamicate Celestial Globes. Their History, Construction,
and Use, Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution, 1985.
as-Sawwas, Yassin Muhammed, ‘Syria’, in Geoffrey Roper, World Survey of Is-
lamic Manuscripts, vol. III, London: Al-Furqān Islamic Heritage Founda-
tion, 1994, pp. 179–214.
Sezgin, Fuat, GAS = Geschichte des arabischen Schrifttums, vol. V: Mathematik
and vol. VI: Astronomie, Leiden: Brill, 1974/1978.
Sidoli, Nathan, and J. Lennart Berggren, ‘The Arabic Version of Ptolemy’s
Planisphere or Flattening the Surface of the Sphere: Text, Translation, Com-
mentary’, SCIAMVS 8 (2007), pp. 37–139.
Simplicius, Simplicii in Aristotelis De caelo commentaria, J. L. Heiberg (ed.)
[Commentaria in Aristotelem graeca 7], Berlin: Reimer, 1894.
Smith, A. Mark, Ptolemyʼs Theory of Visual Perception. An English Transla-
tion of the Optics. With Introduction and Commentary [Transactions of the
American Philosophical Society 86,2], Philadelphia: The American Philo-
sophical Society, 1996.
Solomon, Jon, Ptolemy Harmonics, Leiden-Boston-Köln: Brill, 2000.
Stahlman, William Duane, The Astronomical Tables of Codex Vaticanus Graecus
1291, PhD Dissertation, Brown University, 1959.
Stavrides, Theoharis, The Sultan of Vezirs. The Life and Times of the Ottoman
Grand Vezir Mahmud Pasha Angelović (1453–1474), Leiden-Boston-Köln:
Brill, 2001.
Suda Lexicon, published as Suidae Lexicon, Ada Adler (ed.), 5 vols, Leipzig:
Teubner, 1928–1938.
Süreyya, Mehmed, Sicill-i Osmanî, Nuri Akbayar and Seyit Ali Kahraman (eds),
6 vols, Beşiktaş, Istanbul: Türkiye Kültür Bakanlığı and Türkiye Ekonomik
ve Toplumsal Tarih Vakfı, 1996.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 BIBLIOGRAPHY 229

Suter, Heinrich, Die Mathematiker und Astronomen der Araber und ihre Wer-
ke [Abhandlungen zur Geschichte der mathematischen Wissenschaften 10],
Leipzig: Teubner, 1900.
Taşköprüzade, al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya fī ʿulamāʾ al-dawla al-ʿUthmāniyya,
Beirut: Dār al-kitāb al-ʿarabī, 1975.
Tihon, Anne, Le ‘Petit Commentaire’ de Théon d’Alexandrie aux Tables Faciles
de Ptolémée, Vatican City: Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana, 1978.
Tihon, Anne, ‘Le Livre V retrouvé du Commentaire à l’Almageste de Théon
d’Alexandrie’, L’Antiquité Classique 56 (1987), pp. 201–18.
Tihon, Anne, Πτολεμαίου Πρόχειροι κανόνες. Les Tables Faciles de Ptolemée,
vol. Ia: Tables A1-A2. Introduction, Edition Critique, Leuven: Peeters, 2011.
Todd, Robert B., ‘Geminus and the Ps.-Proclan Sphaera’, in Virginia Brown
(ed.), Catalogus Translationum et Commentariorum. Mediaeval and Renais-
sance Latin Translations and Commentaries. Annotated Lists and Guides,
vol. VIII, Washington, DC: Catholic University of America Press, 2003,
pp. 7–48.
Toomer, Gerald J., Ptolemy’s Almagest, 2nd ed. with a foreword by Owen Gin-
gerich, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1998.
Uzunçarşılı, İsmail Hakkı. Osmanlı Devletinin İlmiye Teşkilatı, Ankara: TTK
Yayınları, 2014.
Vafea, Flora, Les traités d’al-Ṣūfī sur l’astrolabe, PhD Dissertation, University
Paris 7 – Denis Diderot, 2006.
Vafea, Flora, ‘From the Celestial Globe to the Astrolabe. Transferring the Ce-
lestial Motion onto the Plane of the Astrolabe’, Medieval Encounters 23, 1–5
(2017), pp. 124–48. New edition in Josefina Rodríguez-Arribas, Charles Bur-
nett, Silke Ackermann and Ryan Szpiech (eds), Astrolabes in Medieval Cultures,
Leiden-Boston: Brill, 2019, pp. 125–48.
Vollers, Karl, Muḥammad al-Biblāwī et al., Fihrist al-kutub al-ʿarabiyya al-
maḥfūẓa bi-al-Kutubkhāna al-Khidīwiyya al-Miṣriyya al-kubrā al-kāʾina bi-
Saray Dār al-Jamāmīz bi-Miṣr al-maḥrūsa, 7 vols, Cairo: Maṭbaʿa Uthmān
ʿAbd al-Razzāq, 1301–1308 h (1888–1893).
Worrell, William H., ‘Qusta ibn Luqa on the Use of the Celestial Globe’, Isis
35 (1944), pp. 285–93.
al-Yaʿqūbī, Taʾrīkh al-Yaʿqūbī, 2 vols, Beirut: Dār al-Ṣādr, 1992.
al-Ziriklī, Khayr al-Dīn, al-Aʿlām. Qāmūs tarājim, Beirut: Dār al-ʿalim li-l-
malāyīn, 2002.

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Indexes

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Terms

altitude — 15, 43, 59–65, 77–79, 85–91, centre of the earth — 63, 110, 113, 169
107–10, 113–15, 125, 130–32, 140, 143, imum coeli — 110–11
145–49, 151, 154, 158, 160, 170–71 colure
amplitude — 67, 100, 116–17, 170 equinoctial — 99
antarctic circle — 19 solstitial — 19, 98–99
apparition (perpetual) — 73, 79, 81, coordinates ‘mediation’ and ‘difference of
121–22, 131–32, 135 declination’ — xi, 113, 128–29, 148,
150, 159–61, 166
arctic circle — 19, 114
Aries — 47, 55, 71, 81, 98, 104–05, 117, declination — 43, 65, 67, 89, 113–16,
121, 135, 139–40, 169, 171 128, 130, 132–33, 135–36, 140–41,
armillary sphere — 1, 5, 8, 12, 13 n. 54, 147–48, 150–51, 170, 172
17 n. 79, 166 circle of — 51, 99–100
ascendant — 15, 61–65, 107–8, 110–11, deferent — 8
113, 157, 159, 169 descendant — 63, 110–11, 113, 159, 169
ascension — 71, 102–04, 106–07, 117– dhāt al-ḥalaq — 1
21, 150, 152–53, 158, 170
dhāt al-kursī (instrument) — xi, 1, 18–
oblique — 103–04, 106–07, 120–21,
19, 29, 45, 51, 97
150
right — 102, 117–21, 150, 152–53 Dhāt al-kursī (treatise) — xi–xii, 1–2,
9–11, 14–15, 18–20, 22 n. 99/101, 26,
astrolabe — 1, 5, 12, 18 n. 83, 20, 26, 51,
33–36, 38, 40–41, 43, 97, 157, 165–
87, 95, 98, 110 n. 14, 112, 116, 154,
66, 176
166
diurnal motion — 101–02, 159
azimuth — xi, 100, 143, 145, 160, 166, 171
domification — xi, 15, 27 n. 120, 111–
calendar — 25, 129 12, 157–58, 166
Cancer — 7 n. 31, 51, 55, 79, 81, 91, 97,
eclipse
103, 133, 135, 140–41, 151, 154–55
lunar — 15, 89, 148–49, 171
Capricorn — 7 n. 31, 51, 55, 79, 81, 91, solar — 15, 89, 148–49, 150, 160,
93, 97, 103, 133–35, 141, 152, 155, 157 162, 171
Cassiopeia (constellation) — 18 ecliptic — 15, 19, 43, 47–53, 57 n. 11,
celestial globe — xi, 1, 2, 8, 15–16, 63–65, 71, 75, 87, 91, 97–105, 108,
18–20, 22–23, 27, 29–30, 33, 89 110–17, 120–21, 125, 128, 134 n. 45,
n. 39, 97–101, 109–10, 114, 117–18, 136, 138–42, 145–48, 150, 152–54,
129, 132–33, 135–36 n. 51, 144– 158, 169, 171
45, 148, 154, 157, 161–63, 165–67, obliquity of the — 24 n. 108, 116,
169, 176 133 n. 42–43, 139
(four) centres — 15, 63, 110–12, 158, 171 epicycle — 8

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
234 INDEXES

equator local/terrestrial/of the city — 19–22,

celestial — 19, 43, 47–61, 65–67, 71, 43, 51, 57–61, 65–83, 91, 100–01, 103–
75–77, 87–93, 98–99, 101–08, 08, 114, 116–18, 120–25, 128, 130–36,
113–14, 115 n. 21, 120, 122–24, 138–46, 150–54, 157–59, 166, 169–71
128–29, 134 n. 46, 138 n. 53, 144, Libra — 47, 98, 105, 135, 140, 169
147–48, 150, 152–54, 170, 172 longitude
terrestrial — 53, 69, 81, 91, 93, 102–
04, 117–18, 134 n. 45, 140, 142 ecliptic — 15, 89, 113, 114 n. 20, 129,
n. 60, 152–53, 169 135–37, 145, 147, 160
equinox — 17 n. 30, 19, 43, 104–05, ‘longitude’ — 15, 87, 145–48, 160,
114, 121, 139, 166 171
terrestrial — 85, 143–45, 160
gnomon — 61, 63, 108–110, 134, 160 lunar mansions — 51, 99
lunar month — 89, 148–49, 160
ḥanafī — 37
heliacal rising / setting — 127 mediation — xi, 77, 89, 113–14, 115
horizon — xi, 19, 43, 49–79, 83–87, n. 21, 120, 128–29, 145–46, 148,
91–93, 97, 99–108, 111, 114 n. 20, 159–61, 166
115–36, 139, 141, 143–45, 150–54, meridian — 19, 47–51, 55, 63–77, 83–91,
159, 162 n. 3, 166, 170 97–101, 103, 109–10, 113–23, 128,
east — 53–63, 67–77, 91–93, 102– 130–31, 140–41, 143–48, 150–54,
05, 107–08, 111, 116–21, 124–25, 171
129, 150, 152–54 meridian transit — 69, 71, 120 160, 170
west — 53–59, 63, 69–77, 102–05,
meteoroscopion/ meteoroscopeion/ mete-
118–20, 124–25, 128
oroscope — 5–6, 13
oblique — 55, 71, 103
middle of the sky — 69, 119
hour
midheaven — 63, 110–11, 113, 169
unequal/seasonal — 57–63, 75–77,
106–08, 111, 113, 128–29, 157, moon — 15, 75, 77, 87, 89, 128–29, 145–
159, 169 50, 159–60, 170–71
equal — 57–61, 75–81, 104–08, 128– oblique sphere — 71 n. 22, 120
29, 132–35, 152–54, 169, 171
equinoctial — 134 n. 45 occultation (perpetual) — 73, 79, 81,
121, 123, 131–32, 135
house (astrological) — xi, 63, 65, 111–13,
158, 162 n. 3, 166 orrery — 8

inclination — 144–45, 160 parallax — 145, 149

planet — 15, 75, 77, 87, 106, 128–29,
latitude 145–48, 159–61, 170–71
circle of — 65, 114, 159 point
ecliptic — 15 n. 66, 19, 65, 89, 113, equinoctial — 7 n. 31, 98, 103–05,
114 n. 20, 129, 148–49, 159–60 115–17, 134 n. 45, 136
‘latitude’ — 15, 65, 75, 87, 89, 113–15, solstitial — 7 n. 31, 135
128, 146–50, 159–60, 162 n. 3, 170–71 tropical — 115–16

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 TERMS 235

polar distance — 121, 124–25, 158 zodiacal — 47, 51–55, 63–65, 71,
pole 79–81, 97, 100–01, 103–04, 113*, 115
n. 21, 120–21, 125–27, 131, 132 n. 40,
of the ecliptic — 19, 43, 47, 49, 97–98,
134–36, 137*, 138–40, 154–55, 158,
100, 114–15, 138
159*, 162 n. 3, 170 (*: without explicit
of the equator/celestial/of the globe mention of ‘zodiacal’)
— 19–20, 43, 47–63, 67–83, 91–93,
Sirius — 19
98–109, 114–23, 125–26, 128, 130–
33, 136, 140–42, 144–45, 150–54, solstice — 7, 43, 133–38,151–53
157–58, 170 spherical art/manufacture — 7–8, 11, 13
of the earth/terrestrial — 102, 132, stand — xi, 1–2, 15 n. 68, 18–22, 24–29,
136, 142 n. 62–63 31–35, 45–51, 61, 85, 97, 99–101, 108,
elevation of the — 91, 104–05, 116, 161, 165, 167, 169, 176
121, 151–54, 162 n. 3 star — xi, 4, 5 n. 20, 11, 15, 19 n. 88, 25
visible — 134 n. 46, 138 n. 53 n. 116, 27 n. 120, 45, 51, 57, 65–69,
73–79, 87–91, 98–99, 106, 113–28,
precession
130–32, 145–48, 151, 154, 158–60,
globe — 19, 166 166, 169–72
of the equinoxes — 19, 114, 166 Sun — 7, 15, 49, 57–63, 73–83, 89–91,
pseudepigraphon — xi, 1–2, 14, 166 100, 103–10, 124–31, 133–35, 140–
43, 145, 149–50, 157–58, 160, 169–71
qibla — xi, 85, 143–45, 160, 166, 171
quadrant (instrument) — 18 n. 83, 31, Taurus — 135, 139–40, 171
36–41, 85, 87, 145, 161, 163–65 transit — 67, 69, 71, 77, 89, 116–17, 120,
quadrant (scale) — 61, 63, 87, 107 n. 12, 129, 147–48, 159–61, 170;
108–09, 114 n. 20, 145–46, 160 to transit (verb) — 118, 140–41

right sphere — 71, 120, 170 zenith — 43, 51–53, 63–65, 79–83, 87–
89, 101, 108, 113–15, 130–32, 134
Ṣaḥn-i Thamān madrasa — 36–37, 42, 165 n. 46, 138, 140–42, 144–45, 147–48,
shadow — 15, 61, 81, 83, 108–10, 134 151, 154, 157–58, 170–72
n. 45, 140–43, 158, 171 zenithal distance — 89, 114–15, 147–48
sign zīj — 75, 128–29, 160
order of the signs — 63, 65, 81, 113, zodiac — 61–67, 75, 83, 87, 113, 116,
135–38, 140, 154–55, 159, 162 n. 3 126–27, 132, 139, 170

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Geographical names

‘Aīn Jālūt — 164 n. 9

Albania — 18, 25, 34, 163 Manisa — 38 n. 153, 41
Aleppo — 32 Maragha — 164 n. 9
Alexandria — 17 Mecca — 22 n. 101, 85, 143–44
Medina — 22 n. 101
Baghdad — 22 n. 101, 164 n. 9 Meshhed — 18, 119, 164, 176
Basra — 139
Berlin — 28, 35, 39–41 Paris — 17–18, 119, 143, 163
Bratislava — 23 n. 106 Pennsylvania — 17, 120, 164, 176
Bursa — 37 n. 151, 164 Philadelphia — 17, 176
Princeton — 14 n. 65, 17, 27–28, 30, 35,
Cairo — xii, 1, 14–17, 20–24, 28 n. 122, 39, 119, 163–64
32–34, 119–20, 139, 163–65, 176
Constantinople — 19, 29, 37, 119 n. 24, Rabat — 2, 29, 35, 163
164–65 Rhodes — 19
Damascus — 2, 17, 32, 119, 164 Riyadh — 24, 34, 163
Rūm — 36
Egypt — 6, 32–33, 139, 163
Sham — 164 n. 9
Hydarabad — 18, 119, 164 Shkodra/Scutari — 25
Syene — 140
Istanbul — 1, 6 n. 26, 14 n. 65, 17, 20,
24–26, 28$–29, 31–35, 37, 41, 42 Syria — 32 n. 136, 163
n. 166, 110 n. 13, 119, 154 n. 72, 163–
65, 176 Tirana — 18, 25, 119, 164

Kütahya — 38 n. 153, 42 Vienna — 38, 42, 165

London — 16–17, 19, 139 n. 56, 164, 176 Zürich — 41 n. 164

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Modern persons
The Arabic definite article al- is not considered in the alphabetization.

Ahlwardt, Wilhelm — 28 n. 124, 39–41 Lévi-Provençal, Évariste — 2 n. 5, 29

Lorch, Richard — 2, 16, 20 n. 91, 104 n. 10,
al-Baghdādī, Ismāʿīl Bāshā — 37 n. 151, 39 116 n. 22, 119 n. 25, 132 n. 38–39, 133
Bellver, José — xii, 29 n. 129, 30 n. 131 n. 44, 134 n. 46–48, 138 n. 53, 139
Binebine, Ahmed Chaouqui — xii, 29 n. 54, 141 n. 59, 173, 176 n. 17
n. 129
Brockelmann, Carl — 38 Mach, Rudolf — 17 n. 78, 28 n. 122–23, 30
n. 132, 39
Celentano, Giuseppe — 15 Martínez Gázquez, José — 2, 16, 19 n. 25,
Chiarelli, Leonard — xii, 18 n. 84 34 n. 47, 141 n. 59, 173, 176 n. 17
al-Mrābṭī, Saīd — 29 n. 129
Dalen, Benno van — xii
de Castro León, Víctor — xii, 29 Parra Pérez, María José — xii

Grupe, Dirk — xii, 139 n. 57 Rosenfeld, Boris A. — 23 n. 104, 24 n. 107,

25 n. 115, 28 n. 126, 29 n. 127, 30 n. 132,
Hallum, Benjamin — xii, 16 n. 75 31 n. 134–135, 38, 39 n. 158, 41
Hasse, Dag Nikolaus — xii, 139 n. 55
Saliba, George — 38
Hogendijk, Jan — xii
Samsó, Julio — 16
İhsanoğlu, Ekmeleddin — 23 n. 104, 24
Sezgin, Fuat — 1, 15 n. 68, 16 n. 69, 20, 127
n. 107, 25 n. 115, 28 n. 126, 29 n.127, 30
n. 132, 31 n. 134–135, 37 n. 149, 38–41 n. 32
Stevens, Anna — xii
Jones, Alexander — xii, 3 n. 7, 5 n. 22, Süreyya, Mehmed — 33 n. 138–140, 37
12–13 n. 151, 39
Suter, Heinrich — 38–39
Kaḥḥāla — 37 n. 151, 39
Kennedy, Edward S. — 20 n. 92, 110 n. 13, al-Tādlī, Ṣālaḥ — 29 n. 129
145 n. 66, 154 n. 72 Thomann, Johannes — xii
King, David A. — 1, 2 n. 4, 16 n. 73–74,
20–23, 144 n. 65, 163 n. 4 al-Wakeel, Saeed — xii
Klamroth, Martin — 4 n. 19, 5 Worrell, William H. — 16
Kunitzsch, Paul — xii, 20 n. 91, 98 n. 2, 99
n. 4, 104 n. 10, 132 n. 38–39, 133 n. 44, Yavuz, Ali Fikri — xii, 93 n. 43
134 n. 46/48, 138 n. 53
al-Ziriklī, Khayr al-Dīn — 37 n. 151, 39

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Historical persons and their works
The Arabic definite article al- is not considered in the alphabetisation.

ʿAbd-Allāh ibn Muḥammad — 29 Baybars, al-Ẓāhir Rukn al-Dīn (Mamluk

Abrahamus de Balmes — 161 n. 2 sultan) — 164 n. 9
Abū-l-Fidāʾ — 4 n. 18 al-Bīḍāwī — 36–37
Abulfedae Annales The Lights of Quran and the Secrets of
Aḥmad ibn ῾Alī, called Qabūjī — 93 the Meaning
Aḥmad Sheikh Zade — 27 al-Bīrūnī — 7–8, 99 n. 4
Ahmet III (Sultan) — 6 n. 26, 17, 20 The Chronology of Ancient Nations
n. 92, 33, 110 n. 13, 154 n. 72, 164, 176
Akhawayn, Muḥyī al-Dīn Muḥammad Diophantus — 15
ibn Qāsim (or Ahaveyn, Ahavayn, al-
Akhwīn) — xi, 2, 24 n. 107, 25, 28 Euclid — 8 n. 34, 14 n. 62
n. 126, 29–32, 35–42, 95, 164–65 Elements
Comment on the interpretation of the Qu- Eutocius Ascalonius — 3, 10–12
ran by al-Bīḍāwī, Epistle on the Judgment
Commentary on Archimedes’ works
of the Heretic, Note on Islamic Theology,
Notes on the note of the ‘Sharḥ al-tajrīd’,
Problems in the Science of Astronomy (Ish- al-Farghānī — 116
kalāt), Treatise Dhāt al-kursī?, Treatise Treatise al-Kāmil on the Astrolabe
explaining the Sine Quadrant
Akhawayn, (Yūsuf and Muḥammad?) — 42 Galileo — 33
Notes on the Commentary on the Mu- Geminus — xi, 8, 18–19, 98, 100, 102,
lakhkhaṣ 132, 161–62, 165
ʿAlī Ibn ʿIsā — 112 Introduction to the Phenomena
Treatise on the Astrolabe Gerardus Cremonensis (translator) —
Aristarchus — 15 161 n. 2
Aristotle — 3 Ptholomei Liber introductorius in Al-
De caelo magesti / Sperica Ptolomei
ʿAṭaʾ Allāh al-ʿAjamī — 37–38, 40–41, 164
Ḥabash al-Ḥāsib — 20
Autolycus — 15, 126–27, 161–62
Book on the Sphere and its Use
On Risings and Settings
Ḥājjī Khalīfa: see Kātip Çelebi
Bar-Hebraeus — 5 al-Ḥamīdī, Muhammad ibn ʿAlī (or
Bāyazīt II (Sultan) — 17 n. 79–80, 27, al-Ḥumaīdī) — 23, 30, 95
39–40, 164 On the celestial globe

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 HISTORICAL PERSONS AND THEIR WORKS 239

Ḥasan ibn Muḥammad — 31 Maḥmūd Pasha — 42

Hephaestion Thebanus — 4 al-Maqqarī — 4 n. 18
Apotelesmatica Analectes sur l’histoire et la littérature
Hulegu — 164 n. 9 des Arabes d’Espagne
Hypsicles — 15 al-Masʿūdī, Abū al-Ḥasan ʿAlī ibn al-
Ḥusayn — 6–7, 9–12
Ibn Abī Uṣaybiʿa — 4 n. 18 Kitāb al-Tanbīh wa-l-ishrāf (The Book
History of Physicians of Notification and Verification)
Ibn al-Haytham (Alhazen) — 139, 161–63 Meḥmet II (Sultan) — 36, 38 n. 152, 41,
42 n. 166
On the Configuration of the World
Mīrim Chelebī — 39–41
Ibn al-ʿImād — 37, 39
Treatise on the Almucantar Quadrant
Nuggets of Gold in the Chronicles of Those
(in Persian), Treatise on the Sine Quad-
Who Have Passed Away (Shadharāt
rant (in Persian), Treatise on the Univer-
al-dhahab fī akhbār man dhahaba)
sal Quadrant (Risālat al-rubʿ al-jāmiʿa),
Ibn Khallikān — 4 n. 18 Treatise on the (Universal) Quadrant
Biographical Dictionary al-Shakkāziya (21 chapters), Treatise on
the Work with the (Universal) Quadrant
al-Jaghmīnī — 41, 57 n. 12 al-Shakkāziya (29 chapters)
al-Mulakhkhaṣ fī al-hayʾa al-basīṭa al-Mubashshir ibn Fātik — 4 n. 18
al-Jurjānī, al-Sayyid al-Sharīf ʿAlī ibn Mukhtār al-ḥikam wa maḥāsin al-kalim
Muḥammad — 36 n. 146, 37–38 Mūllā Luṭfī (or Molla Lütfî) — 37, 42
Commentary on Tajrīd al-kalām Mustafa III (Sultan) — 24, 33
Mustafa Pasha Bushatlliu — 25
Kātip Çelebi or Ḥājjī Khalīfa — 9–12, 14,
19, 36–37, 39–41, 42 n. 165, 162, 166
al-Nadīm, Muḥammad bin Isḥāq — 8–9,
Kashf al-ẓunūn ʿan asāmī al-kutub wa- 11 n. 43, 12 n. 45
al-funūn (The Removal of Doubt from
Fihrist
the Names of Books and the Arts), Sul-
lam al-wūṣūl īlā ṭabaqāt al-fuḥūl (The
Pappus — 3, 5
Ladder of Elevation to the Lives of the
Great and Famous by Generation) Commentaries on the Almagest
Kepler — 33 Paulus Alexandrinus — 4
al-Khwārizmī, Abū Jaʿfar Muḥammad Elementa Apotelesmatica
ibn Mūsa — 112, 163 Philoponus, Joannes — 110 n. 14
Treatise on the Astrolabe, Treatise on De usu astrolabii eiusque constructione
the Quadrant libellus
Koca Rāgib Pasha — 33 Porphyrius — 4
Köprülü Abdullah Pasha — 32–33 Commentary on the Harmonics
Proclus — 5, 8
Leontius — 19, 100
Hypotyposis astronomicarum positio-
On the Construction of the Aratean Sphere num, In primum Euclidis Elemento-
Mahmud I (Sultan) — 27 rum librum commentarii

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
240 INDEXES

Pseudo-Ptolemy — xi, 14, 166 Kitāb Ṭabaqāt al-umam (Exposition of

Book of Music, Centiloquium, Treatise the Generations of Nations)
Dhāt al-kursī Sāliha Sultan — 33
Ptolemy, Claudius — xi, 1–10, 12–15, Sharīfī Muṣṭafā Pasha Bushatlliu: see
18–22, 23 n. 105, 24, 26, 29, 31–35, Muṣṭafā Pasha Bushatlliu
43, 45, 97, 100, 102, 110 n. 14, 132,
134, 136, 140, 142, 157, 161–62, 165– Simplicius — 3, 10–12
67, 176 Commentary on Aristotle’s De caelo
Almagest, Analemma, Book on the in- Sinân Kirmâstî — 36 n. 142
troduction to the spherical art/manu-
Sinān Pasha — 38, 42
facture/sphaeropoiia, De judicandi fac-
ultate et animi principatu, Geography, Stephen of Antioch — 139
Handy Tables, Harmonics, Inscriptio Liber Mamonis
Canobi, Mechanics, Meteoroscopeion, al-Ṣūfī, ʿAbd al-Raḥmān ibn ʿUmar —
On Dimension, On Paradoxical Phases
10, 19–20, 110, 112, 154–55, 161–63
of Venus, On the Elements, On Weights,
Optics, Phaseis, Planetary Hypotheses, On the Use of the Celestial Globe, Treatise
Planisphaerium, Tetrabiblos, Treatise on the Astrolabe
on theory of stellar visibility
Ptolemy, Claudius ? Taşköprüzade (or Ṭašköprizādeh) — 36,
Book on the Comets, Book on the In- 37 n. 151, 38–40
strument Having Plates, which is the al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya fī ʿUlamāʾ
Astrolabe al-Dawla al-ʿUthmāniyya (Anemones,
on the Scholars of the Ottoman Era)
Qāḍī Zāde — 38, 40–41, 42 n. 165, 165
Theodosius — 15, 104, 132, 133 n. 44,
Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ 134, 138–39, 161–62
al-Qifṭī, ʿAlī ibn Yūsuf — 9–12
De diebus et noctibus, De habitationibus
Tārīkh al-ḥukamāʾ (The History of
Learned Men) Theon of Alexandria — 3, 5–6, 17 n. 79
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā / Qusṭ — xi, 2, 10, 14– Book of Interpretation of the Armillary
16, 17 n. 79, 18 n. 82–83, 19, 21, 24 Sphere, Commentaries on the Almagest,
n. 108, 27, 30, 45, 69 n. 20, 77 n. 29, Two commentaries on the Handy Tables
89 n. 39, 97, 100, 104, 109, 113, 119, al-Tūṣī, Naṣīr al-Dīn Abū Jaʿfar — 36
125, 127, 129, 132, 133 n. 44, 134–35, n. 146, 164 n. 9
139, 141 n. 59, 149–50, 157, 159, 161–
62, 166–67, 169, 176 Tajrīd al-kalām
Treatise on the Use of the Celestial
Globe with Stand al-Yaʿqūbī, Aḥmad ibn Isḥāq — 4–6,
10–12, 15
Ṣāʿid al-Andalusī — 9–12 Tāʾrīkh al-Yaʿqūbī

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Works of historical persons
The Arabic definite article al- is not considered in the alphabetisation.

Abulfedae Annales (Abū-l-Fidāʾ) — 4 Book of the Nativities (attributed to Ptol-

n. 18 emy) — 8, 11
Almagest / Syntaxis mathematica / The Book of the Opponents, which one will suc-
Great Astronomy / Μαθηματικὴ ceed (attributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 12
Σύνταξις / Μεγάλη Σύνταξις / Book of the Revolution of the World Years
Μέγας ἀστρονόμος (Ptolemy) — 3–5, (attributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 12
7–10, 13, 19, 102 n. 9, 132, 134, 136, Book of the Revolution of the Years of Na-
140, 142, 161–62, 166–67 tivities (attributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 9
Analectes sur l’histoire et la littérature des n. 39, 12
Arabes d’Espagne (al-Maqqarī) — 4 Book of War and Battle (attributed to
n. 18 Ptolemy) — 8, 11
Analemma / Περὶ ἀναλήμματος (Ptole- Book on Capturing Good Luck and its Syn-
my) — 13 thesis (attributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 12
Apotelesmatica (Hephaestion Thebanus) Book on the Captives and Prisoners (at-
—4 tributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 12
Apotelesmatica (Ptolemy): see Tetrabiblos Book on the Comets (lit. those with Co-
mae) (Ptolemy?) — 8, 9 n. 39, 12, 14
Biographical Dictionary (Ibn Khallikān)
— 4 n. 18 Book on the Course of the Seven (attribut-
ed to Ptolemy) — 8, 12
Book for Extracting the Arrows/Lots (at-
tributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 11 Book on the Instrument Having Plates,
which is the Astrolabe (Ptolemy?) — 5,
Book known as the ‘Seventh’ (attributed 12
to Ptolemy) — 8, 9 n. 39, 12
Book on the Introduction to the spherical
Book of Illness and Drinking Medicine Art/ Manufacture/ Sphaeropoiia (Pto-
(attributed to Ptolemy) — 8, 12 lemy) — 7, 11, 13
Book of Interpretation of the Armillary Book on the Sphere and its Use (Ḥabash
Sphere (Ptolemy or Theon of Alexan- al-Ḥāsib) — 20
dria) — 12, 13 n. 54
Book of Interpretation of the Armillary Centiloquium / Fructus / Καρπός (Pseu-
Sphere (Theon of Alexandria) — 5–6, do-Ptolemy) — 8–9, 11, 14
17 n. 79 Comment on the interpretation of the
Book of Music / Musica / Μουσικά (Pseu- Quran by al-Bīḍāwī (Akhawayn) —
do-Ptolemy) — 7, 9, 11, 14 36–39
Book of the Lots, tabulated (attributed to Commentaries on the Almagest / Com-
Ptolemy) — 8, 12 mentaria in Ptolemaei syntaxin mathe-

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
242 INDEXES

maticam i-iv, v (Theon of Alexandria) Handy Tables / Προχείρων κανόνων

— 3, 5 διάταξις καὶ ψηφοφορία / Πρόχειρος
Commentaries on the Almagest / Com- Κανών / Κανόνες (Ptolemy) — 3–5,
mentaria in Ptolemaei syntaxin math- 7, 9, 11, 13
ematicam v-vi (Pappus) — 3, 5 Harmonics / Ἁρμονικὰ (Ptolemy) — 4,
Commentary on Archimedes’ works (Eu- 11, 13
tocius Ascalonius) — 3 History of Physicians / ʿUyūn al-anbāʾ fī
Commentary on Aristotle’s De caelo / ṭabaqāt al-aṭibbāʾ (Ibn Abī Uṣaybiʿa)
Simplicii in Aristotelis De caelo com- — 4 n. 18
mentaria (Simplicius) — 3 Hypotyposis astronomicarum positionum
Commentary on Tajrīd al-kalām (al-Sayy- (Proclus) — 5 n. 25
id al-Sharīf al-Jurjānī) — 36–38, 165
Commentary on the Harmonics / Εἰς τὰ In primum Euclidis Elementorum librum
ἁρμονικὰ Πτολεμαίου ὑπόμνημα commentarii (Proclus) — 8 n. 34
(Porphyrius) — 4 Inscriptio Canobi (Ptolemy) ̶ 13
Commentary on the Mulakhkhaṣ (Qāḍī Interpretation of Dreams (attributed to
Zāde) — 38, 40–41, 42 n. 165, 165 Ptolemy) — 9, 12
Introduction to the Phenomena (Gem-
De caelo (Aristotle) — 3 inus) — xi, 8 n. 33, 18, 19 n. 88, 98
De diebus et noctibus / On Days and n. 3, 102 n. 8, 132 n. 40, 165
Nights (Theodosius) — 104, 162
De habitationibus / Περί οἰκήσεων Kashf al-ẓunūn ʿan asāmī al-kutub wa-
(Theodosius) — 104 n. 10, 132, 133 al-funūn / The Removal of Doubt
n. 44, 134, 138, 162 from the Names of Books and the Arts
De judicandi facultate et animi principatu (Kātip Çelebi / Ḥājjī Khalīfa) — 9, 10
/ Περὶ κριτηρίου καὶ ἡγεμονικοῦ n. 41, 14, 36, 37 n. 147/148/151, 38,
(Ptolemy) — 13 40, 42 n. 165, 162, 166
De ortibus et occasibus (Autolycus): see Kitāb Ṭabaqāt al-umam / Exposition
On Risings and Settings of the Generations of Nations (Ṣāʿid
al-Andalusī) — 9
De usu astrolabii eiusque constructione libel-
lus (Joannes Philoponus) — 110 n. 14 Kitāb al-Tanbīh wa-l-ishrāf (al-Masʿūdī):
see The Book of Notification and Ver-
Elementa Apotelesmatica (Paulus Alexan- ification
drinus) — 4
Elements (Euclid) ̶ 14 n. 62 Le Grand Commentaire de Théon d’Alex-
andrie aux Tables Faciles de Ptolémée
Epistle on the Judgment of the Heretic / (Theon of Alexandria): see Two com-
The Famous Sword on the Heretic and mentaries on the Handy Tables
Curser of the Prophet (Akhawayn) —
36–39, 42 Le Petit Commentaire de Théon d’Alex-
andrie aux Tables Faciles de Ptolémée
Fihrist (al-Nadīm) — 5, 8–12 (Theon of Alexandria): see Two com-
mentaries on the Handy Tables
Geography / Γεωγραφία / Γεωγραφικὴ Liber Mamonis (Stephen of Antioch) —
Ὑφήγησις (Ptolemy) — 3, 5, 7–10, 13 139

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 WORKS OF HISTORICAL PERSONS 243

Libro de la fayçon dell espera (Alfonsine Aboali; Liber de celo et mundo (Alha-
treatise) — 16 zen) — 139, 161–62
On the Construction of the Aratean Sphere
Mechanics / Μηχανικὰ (Ptolemy) — 4, 8, / De sphaerae Arateae constructione /
11, 13 Περὶ κατασκευῆς Ἀρατείας σφαίρας
Meteoroscopeion / Treatise on the Mete- (Leontius) — 19, 100 n. 5
oroscopion / Book on the Instrument On the Elements / Περὶ τῶν στοιχείων
Having Rings / Μετεωροσκόπιον / (Ptolemy) — 3, 11, 13
Μετεωροσκοπεῖον (Ptolemy) — 5–6, On the Use of the Celestial Globe / Risāla
13, 15 Dhāt al-kursī (al-Ṣūfī) — 10, 19–20,
Mukhtār al-ḥikam wa maḥāsin al-kalim 110, 154, 161–63
(al-Mubashshir ibn Fātik) — 4 n. 18 On Weights/ Περὶ ῥοπῶν (Ptolemy) — 3,
al-Mulakhkhaṣ fī al-hayʾa al-basīṭa (al- 11, 13
Jaghmīnī) — 41, 42 n. 165, 57 n. 12 Optics / Ὀπτικά (Ptolemy) — 3, 9, 11, 13
commentaries on this work — 38,
40–42, 165 Phaseis / On the Appearances and Indica-
tions of the Fixed Stars / Περὶ φάσεων
καὶ ἐπισημασιῶν ἀστέρων ἀπλανῶν
Note on Islamic Theology (Akhawayn) —
(Ptolemy) — 4, 7, 9, 11, 13
36, 39, 164
Planetary Hypotheses / Ὑποθέσεις /
Notes on the Commentary on the Mulakh-
Ὑποθέσεις τῶν πλανωμένων (Ptole-
khaṣ (Akhawayn, Yūsuf and Muḥam- my) — 3, 7–8, 11, 13
mad?) — 38, 40–41, 165
Planisphaerium / Unfolding the Surface
Notes on the note of the ‘Sharḥ al-tajrīd’ of a Sphere / Ἅπλωσις ἐπιφανείας
/ Note on the ‘Sharḥ al-tajrīd’ of al- σφαίρας (Ptolemy) — 4, 9, 11, 13
Sharīf al-Jurjānī (Akhawayn) — 36–
Problems (Ishkalāt) in the Science of Astron-
38, 165 omy (Akhawayn) — 38–39, 42, 165
Nuggets of Gold in the Chronicles of Those Ptholomei Liber introductorius in Almag-
Who Have Passed Away / Shadharāt esti / Sperica Ptolomei (Latin translator:
al-dhahab fī akhbār man dhahaba Gerardus Cremonensis) — 161 n. 2
(Ibn al-ʿImād) — 37
Risāla Dhāt al-kursī (Pseudo-Ptolemy /
On Days and Nights (Theodosius): see De Akhawayn / anonymous): see Treatise
diebus et noctibus Dhāt al-kursī
On Dimension / Περὶ διαστάσεως (Ptol-
emy) — 3, 11, 13 Shadharāt al-dhahab fī akhbār man dha-
haba (Ibn al-ʿImād): see Nuggets of
On Paradoxical Phases of Venus (Ptole-
Gold in the Chronicles of Those Who
my) — 13 n. 62
Have Passed Away
On Risings and Settings / De ortibus et
al-Shaqāʾīq al-nuʿmāniyya fī ʿUlamāʾ
occasibus / Περὶ ἐπιτολῶν καὶ δύσεων al-Dawla al-ʿUthmāniyya / Anemones,
(Autolycus) — 126–27, 162 on the Scholars of the Ottoman Era
On the celestial globe (al-Ḥamīdī) — 23, 30 (Taşköprüzade) — 36–37, 40 n. 160
On the Configuration of the World (Ibn Sperica Ptolomei: see Ptholomei Liber
al-Haytham). Latin translations: Liber introductorius in Almagesti

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
244 INDEXES

Suda Lexicon — 4, 10–12 Treatise on the (Universal) Quadrant

Sullam al-wūṣūl īlā ṭabaqāt al-fuḥūl al-Shakkāziya (21 chapters) (Mīrim
(Kātip Çelebi / Ḥājjī Khalīfa): see The Chelebī) — 40, 41 n. 163
Ladder of Elevation to the Lives of the Treatise on the Almucantar Quadrant (in
Great and Famous by Generation Persian) (Mīrim Chelebī) — 40
Syntaxis mathematica: see Almagest Treatise on the Astrolabe (ʿAlī Ibn ʿIsā)
— 112
Tajrīd al-kalām (al-Tūṣī, Naṣīr al-Dīn
Abū Jaʿfar) — 36 n. 146 Treatise on the Astrolabe (al-Khwārizmī)
commentaries on this work — 36–38, — 112
165 Treatise on the Astrolabe (al-Ṣūfī) — 112
Tāʾrīkh al-ḥukamāʾ / The History of Treatise on the Quadrant (al-Khwārizmī)
Learned Men (al-Qifṭī) — 9, 10 n. 42, — 163
11 n. 43, 12 n. 44–46
Treatise on the Sine Quadrant (ʿAṭaʾ
Tāʾrīkh al-Yaʿqūbī / Tāʾrīkh ibn Wāḍiḥ Allāh al-ʿAjamī) — 41
(al-Yaʿqūbī) — 4, 15
commentary on this work — 37–38,
Tetrabiblos / Apotelesmatica /
40, 164
Τετράβιβλος / Αποτελεσματικά (Pto-
lemy) — 4, 7–11, 13–14, 110 n. 14 Treatise on the Sine Quadrant (in Per-
The Book of Notification and Verification sian) (Mīrim Chelebī) — 40
/ Kitāb al-Tanbīh wa-l-ishrāf / Le Treatise on the Universal Quadrant / Ri-
livre de l’avertissement et de la revision sālat al-rubʿ al-jāmiʿa (21 chapters)
(al-Masʿūdī) — 6, 7 n. 31 (Mīrim Chelebī) — 40, 41
The Chronology of Ancient Nations (al- Treatise on the Use of the Celestial Globe
Bīrūnī) — 7, 99 n. 4 with Stand / Risāla Dhāt al-kursī /
The Famous Sword on the Heretic and Treatise on the Celestial Globe (Qusṭā
Curser of the Prophet (Akhawayn): see ibn Lūqā) — xi, 2, 10, 14–16, 17
Epistle on the Judgment of the Heretic n. 79, 18 n. 82–83, 19, 21, 24 n. 108,
The Ladder of Elevation to the Lives of 27, 30, 45, 69 n. 20, 77 n. 29, 89 n. 39,
the Great and Famous by Generation 97, 100, 104, 109, 113, 119, 125, 127,
/ Sullam al-wūṣūl īlā ṭabaqāt al-fuḥūl 129, 132, 133 n. 44, 134–35, 139, 141
(Kātip Çelebi / Ḥājjī Khalīfa) — 37 n. 59, 149–50, 157, 159, 161–62, 166–
The Lights of Quran and the Secrets of the 67, 169, 176
Meaning (al-Bīḍāwī) — 36 n. 145
Treatise on the Work with the (Universal)
Treatise al-Kāmil on the Astrolabe (al-Far- Quadrant al-Shakkāziya (29 chapters)
ghānī) — 116 (Mīrim Chelebī) — 40
Treatise Dhāt al-kursī / Risāla Dhāt al-
Treatise on theory of stellar visibility (Pto-
kursī (Pseudo-Ptolemy / Akhawayn /
anonymous) — xi–xii, 1–2, 9–11, 14– lemy) — 14 n. 62
15, 18–20, 22 n. 99/101, 26, 33–36, Two commentaries on the Handy Tables
38, 40–41, 43, 97, 157, 165–66, 176 [Le Petit Commentaire.../ Le Grand
Treatise explaining the Sine Quadrant Commentaire...] / Ὑπόμνημα εἰς τοὺς
(Akhawayn) — 31, 36–39, 41, 145?, προχείρους Πτολεμαίου κανόνας
164–65 (Theon of Alexandria) — 3

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 Manuscripts mentioned but not studied
This only includes manuscripts that were not used in this study. For a full list of manuscripts
studied, see the bibliography on pp. 219–20; for descriptions of the manuscripts of the
anonymous Risāla Dhāt al-kursī, see pp. 20–35; for descriptions of the manuscripts of
Qusṭā ibn Lūqā’s Treatise on the Use of the Celestial Globe with Stand, see pp. 16–18.

Berlin, SBPK, Or. oct. 34 (Ahlwardt Istanbul, Topkapı Saray, Ahmet III
5855) — 39–41 3505,6 — 6 n. 26
Bombay, Cama Oriental Institute, Mulla
Firuz 86 — 6 n. 26 Leiden, Universiteitsbibliotheek, Or.
1031,1 — 27 n. 32
Bratislava, University Library, Bašagić
collection of Islamic manuscripts 306 Manisa, Provincial Public Library 1698,5
TE 28 — 23 n. 106 — 38 n. 153
Budapest, Library of the Hungarian Milan, Veneranda Biblioteca Ambrosi-
Academy of Sciences, Oriental Collec- ana, L 99 Sup. — 6
tion, Török F. 59 — 17 n. 79
Paris, BnF, pers. 169,6 (f. 42r) — 143
Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mīqāt Ṭalʿat ʿarabī Princeton, University Library, Garrett
164 — 23 n. 106 2006,20 — 39
Cairo, Dār al-kutub, Mujāmīʿa Ṭalʿat Princeton, University Library, Garrett
ʿarabī 925 — 23 n. 106 317Y,4 — 39, 41

Damascus, Assad Library, 14621,8 — 2, Zürich, Zentralbibliothek, Or. 4,5 — 41

32 n. 164

© FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
 © FHG
This is an open access publication distributed under a CC BY-NC-ND 4.0
International License
T his book deals with the Risāla Dhāt al-kursī, a 33-chapter Arabic treatise
on the celestial globe with stand. The treatise is attributed to Ptolemy
PAL
Texts
Ptolemaeus
in some manuscripts, to the Ottoman scholar Akhawayn in others, but is
anonymous in most. The book begins with a survey of references to Ptole-
Arabus et Latinus
maic works in Greek and Arabic sources, presenting various works attrib- 3
uted to Ptolemy either preserved in the original Greek or in translation, or
considered lost, including both authentic works and pseudepigrapha. Next
follows a critical edition of the treatise Dhāt al-kursī, based on eight of
the twenty-three manuscripts studied. The edition is accompanied by an
English translation and an extensive mathematical commentary on each

Flora Vafea
chapter, enriched with explanatory figures. The comparison between this
treatise and the Treatise on the Celestial Globe by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā (d. ca 912
AD), presented in parallel with the commentary, shows that the former is
based on the latter; thus the treatise Dhāt al-kursī should be considered a
Ptolemaic pseudepigraphon. A transcription of the Arabic text of the trea-
tise by Qusṭā ibn Lūqā based on three of the eighteen examined manu- THE RISĀLA DHĀT AL-KURSĪ
scripts is included, so that the reader may compare the two texts. Further-
more, in order to examine Akhawayn’s association with the treatise, a ATTRIBUTED TO PTOLEMY:
bibliographical and historical investigation is conducted, which examines
A TREATISE ON THE CELESTIAL

THE RISĀLA DHĀT AL-KURSĪ ATTRIBUTED TO PTOLEMY:

A TREATISE ON THE CELESTIAL GLOBE WITH STAND
the full range of works attributed to Akhawayn. However, the truth about
the authorship was probably lost, as the result of various rivalries in the
late fifteenth century. GLOBE WITH STAND

Flora Vafea
Flora Vafea is a historian of science and mathematician, and received her PhD
from the University Paris 7-Diderot in 2006. Her research is concerned with
ancient and Islamic astronomy, in particular astronomical instruments, with
several publications and conference presentations in those fields. She is a re-
search associate of the Ptolemaeus Arabus et Latinus project and currently
teaches at al-Azhar University in Cairo and at Cairo University.

PAL Texts 3
978-2-503-60222-6

9 782503 602226